V100 Damping

CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Shock and Vibration Damping Components

www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365
Table of Contents
Catalog V100
PAGE
Introduction ................................................................................................................... ii
Unique Features of This Catalog ................................................................................ iii
Sales Conditions ........................................................................................................... iv
Pictorial Index ............................................................................................................... v
Part Number Index....................................................................................................... x
Listing of Additional Cylindrical Mounts ................................................................ xi
Selection Procedure for Rubber Mounts ................................................................... xii
SECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRODUCTS
PAGE
Stud & Nut Type Mounts ...................................................................... 1-1

Base Plate Fastened Mounts ................................................................. 2-1
Wheels, Leveling & Foot Mounts ......................................................... 3-1
Suspension Mount.................................................................................. 4-1
Spring, Steel Mesh & Cable Mounts .................................................... 5-1
Bumpers, Shock Absorbers & Channel Mounts ................................ 6-1
Bushings & Grommets ........................................................................... 7-1
Pads & Tapes ........................................................................................... 8-1
Couplings ................................................................................................ 9-1
TECHNICAL SECTION
T1
T2
Vibration and Shock Isolation ............................................................. T1-1

Shaft Couplings ..................................................................................... T2-1
Alphabetical Index ....................................................................................................... A-0

Advanced Antivibration Components
2101 Jericho Turnpike, Box 5416, New Hyde Park, NY 11042-5416
Phone: 516-328-3662 FAX: 516-328-3365 www.vibrationmounts.com
NOTE: We reserve the right to make changes and corrections without notice. Every effort has been made to provide accurate technical & product
information. The company disclaims responsibility for any error or omission regarding technical & product information published.
2004 Advanced Antivibration Components / Division of Designatronics, Inc.
All rights reserved herein and no portion of this catalog may be reproduced without the prior consent in writing of the company.
Printed in Canada by Webcom Ltd.
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Introduction
Designatronics, Inc., with its divisions and subsidiaries, has been involved since 1960 in the manufacture and distribution of different mechanical and electronic components.
Advanced Antivibration Components (AAC) is the division of Designatronics devoted to marketing
products exclusively related to elimination of vibration, energy absorption and protection of components
and devices from shock and possible destruction.
This is, today, an extremely important field, since instrumentation and recording devices are playing
more and more important roles in our daily lives. These devices are becoming miniaturized and portable
and, as a result, are becoming exposed to unexpected hazards.
In addition, different rotating machinery, moving vehicles, machine tools, household appliances, etc.
all require vibration control to eliminate undesirable effects that they may cause to their surroundings.
The understanding of the subject of Vibration and Shock requires some amount of theoretical knowledge of the theories which govern its causes and subsequent propagation. For this reason, an extensive Technical Section, which includes solved problems, is included in this publication.
This handbook contains the broadest offering available from a single source related to antivibration
products. In order to facilitate the selection of the proper product, an attempt was made to classify and
present the products in an especially organized sequence.
Furthermore, since our company is continuously providing services to the Design, Engineering and
Manufacturing segments for the last 44 years, we are keenly aware of the fact that immediate availability of components is usually required. Therefore, all items shown in this catalog are available from
stock.
I wish to acknowledge and to congratulate our Engineering staff and our Graphic Communications
Department for organizing and producing this handbook in such an extensive, attractive and explicit
manner.
Martin Hoffman
President
DESIGNATRONICS INC.
ii
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Unique Features of This Catalog

Laboratory at Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan.

1) Our sister division, SDP, started marketing Vibration
He is a Fellow of the American Society of Mechanical
Mounts in its first catalog published in 1971. It contained
Engineers and of the Society of Manufacturing Engineers,
only 24 pages of this type of product. Subsequently, in
and an Active Member of the International Institution for
1978, a special separate volume: Handbook of Vibration
Production Engineering Research (CIRP). He is the
Mounts was published. It contained a brief Technical
holder of 21 US patents and has authored many books
Section, but it reached a 55-product page size. The
and technical articles, some of which are listed below.
importance of this product line kept growing and, as a
result of it, in 1990 the Vibration and Shock Mount
4) Our previous catalogs included only conventionally known
Handbook was published. It contained a 52-page
vibration elimination components. This catalog also
Technical Section and 89 pages of products. More
features shock absorbers and shaft couplings capable of
than 15,000 copies were distributed. Subsequently, the
elimination of shock and vibration from shaft to shaft.
Vibration Mount product line became section 8 in the
joint SDP/SI inch and metric catalogs.
5) There are catalogs of this type of product circulated;
however, the uniqueness of this catalog is its breadth and
2) Feedback from our Engineering, as well as Marketing
versatility. In addition to this, all products featured are
Departments, indicated that for proper marketing of this
available from stock for immediate delivery. This feature
product line an extensive Technical Section is needed,
is extremely important for new designs where prototype
which was not available in the joint SDP/SI Catalogs. In
testing is an imperative.
addition to this, many new product lines related to
vibration elimination became available worldwide. These
facts gave rise to the publishing of this catalog in order to 6) In addition to the listed stock items, tooling is available for
many types and sizes of cylindrical vibration mounts.
provide proper support and marketing capabilities, and
These are available with metric or inch size studs. In spite
ADVANCED ANTIVIBRATION COMPONENTS Company
of the fact that only small prototype quantities may be
was created as a separate Division of Designatronics Inc.
required, specially low setup charges will be made for this
type of order. For quote requests for these "out of stock "
3) In order to provide a revised and broadened Technical
type mounts, please use the numbering system and
Section, we availed ourselves of the services of Eugene
procedure shown on the next page.
Rivin, Professor and Director of the Machine Tool
Title
Publisher
Publication
Pages
ISBN Number
Mechanical Design of Robots
McGraw Hill, August, 1987
325
70529922
Stiffness and Damping in

Mechanical Design
Marcel Dekker, May, 1999
512
824717228
Passive Vibration Isolation
ASME Press, July, 2003
432
079180187X
The Science of Innovation
TRIZ Group, 1997
80
0965835901
iii
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Sales Conditions
Ordering by fax: 516-328-3365
Ordering by phone: 516-328-3662

Please call our sales department Monday to Friday between 9 am and 5 pm Eastern time to place an order.
Our staff will also be able to provide you with price and
stock status for all catalog items. For larger production
quantities, we can fax you a written quote of price and
delivery.
Ordering by e-mail:
aacsupport@vibrationmounts.com
Please specify part numbers, quantities, desired method
of shipment and delivery dates in your request when
using the ordering methods above. Orders are promptly
processed by our Sales Department.
Ordering by mail:
2101 Jericho Turnpike, Box 5416
New Hyde Park, NY 11042-5416
Domestic Sales Conditions
International Sales Conditions
Open Account Orders:

A minimum order is $50 plus shipping charges. Orders
requiring any type of special handling or certification are
subject to additional charge. Terms: Net 30 days,
F.O.B. New Hyde Park
Minimun Order:
$75 with a $10 charge for our standard export handling;
i.e., $85 minimum billing. If the order exceeds $100, there
is no export handling charge made.
Large Quantity Order:
Considerable discounts are made available for large
quantity orders. Please request a quote for price and
delivery.
Credit Card Orders:

For your convenience, we accept VISA, Mastercard,
American Express, Optima, Discover and Diners Club.
You will be billed for merchandise and freight when parts
are shipped, subject to credit card approval. A minimum
order is $50 plus shipping charges.
Open Account Orders:

If you have an open account, we will ship and bill you,
net 30 days, F.O.B. New Hyde Park, NY.
Credit:
New accounts having a satisfactory rating will
receive open credit terms; otherwise, initial orders may
be on a credit card or a C.O.D. basis pending credit approval. C.O.D. orders are subject to an additional handling charge.
Credit Card Orders:

For your convenience, we accept VISA, Mastercard,
American Express, Optima, Discover and Diners Club.
You will be billed for merchandise and freight when parts
are shipped, subject to credit card approval. A minimum
order is $85 plus shipping charges.
Methods of Shipment:
U.P.S., FedEx, DHL, or as specified by customer.
Credit:
Purchase orders accompanied by Bank References will
be shipped on open credit terms. Otherwise, an irrevocable letter of credit or prepayment is requested.
Returns and Exchanges:

All returns and exchanges must have prior written approval. Returns must be made within 15 days after receipt of material. Returned merchandise will be inspected
and a charge will be made for restocking. No credit will
be allowed on used or modified parts, or catalog parts
purchased on a quantity basis. Notification of any shortages must be reported within 10 days after receipt of
goods.
Methods of Shipment:
U.P.S., FedEx, DHL, or as specified by customer.
Returns and Exchanges:
All returns and exchanges must have prior written approval. Returns must be made within 15 days after receipt of material. Returned merchandise will be inspected
and a charge will be made for restocking. No credit will
be allowed on used or modified parts, or catalog parts
purchased on a quantity basis. Notification of any shortages must be reported within 10 days after receipt of
goods.
Note:
Price and specifications are subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to provide accurate technical
and product information. The company disclaims responsibility for any error or omission in the accuracy of the technical
and product information published.
iv
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Pictorial Index
Square
Pages 1-2 thru 1-4
Cylindrical
Pages 1-5 thru 1-32
Silicone Gel
Page 1-36
Ring
Pages 1-37 & 1-38
Base-Flange
Page 2-2
Base-Silicone Gel
Page 2-3
Plate
Page 2-4 thru 2-8
Finger-Flex Assemblies
Page 2-9 & 2-10
Cup
Page 2-11
Base-Cylindrical
Pages 2-12 & 2-13
Base-Dome
Page 2-14
Base-Neoprene
Pages 2-15 & 2-16
M-Style
Page 2-18
V-Style
Pages 2-19 & 2-20
Mounts
v
Rectangular
Pages 2-21 thru 2-23
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Pictorial Index (continued)

Level
Pages 3-2 thru 3-4
Leveling-ISO Pad
Page 3-5
Leveling-Conical
Page 3-6
Leveling-Carry
Pages 3-7 & 3-8
Suspension-Spring
Page 4-2
Suspension-Rubber
Page 4-3
Spring-Elliptic Leaf
Pages 5-3 thru 5-5
Spring-Foam
Pages 5-7 & 5-8
Spring-Damped
Pages 5-9 thru 5-13
Spring-Silicone Gel
Page 5-14
Steel Spring & Mesh

Pages 5-15 & 5-16
Steel Mesh
Spring-Suspension
Page 5-20
Spring-Pedestal
Page 5-21
Spring-Single Hole
Page 5-22
Cable Isolators
Mounts & Isolators

vi
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE

BumpersAxial
Pages 6-5 & 6-7
BumpersRadial
Page 6-6
BumpersConical
Page 6-8
Channel
Page 6-10
BumpersRectangular
Page 6-11
Shock Absorbers
Finger-Flex
Pages 7-3 thru 7-7
BoltSolo
Page 7-8
BoltTandem
Page 7-9
BoltRing & Bushing

Vinyl Elastomer Grommets

Page 7-14
Bolt Washer
Page 7-16
BoltSilicone Gel
Page 7-15
Mounts, Bumpers, & Shock Absorbers

vii
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE

ISO-Pad Sheets
Page 8-3
ISO-Pad
Page 8-4
SquareRubber
Page 8-5
PadsSingle Ribbed
Page 8-6
PadsPaired Ribbed
Page 8-7
PadsSilicone Foam
Page 8-8
PadsSilicone Gel
Page 8-9
Silicone Gel Tape & Chip

Page 8-10
ISO-Pad
Page 8-2
Pads
viii
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE

CouplingsNeo-Flex
Pages 9-2 thru 9-5
CouplingsSpline
Page 9-6
CouplingsSpider
Page 9-8
CouplingsGeargrip
Page 9-10
CouplingsJaw
Page 9-11
Couplings"K" Type
Page 9-12
CouplingsOne-Piece
Page 9-14
CouplingsBantam
Page 9-14
Shaft Couplings
ix
M PONENT
V 5A27-
V 5A27M
V 5D 1-
V 5D 3-
V 5D25-
V 5D28-
V 5D28M
V 5R 1-..
V 5R 3-
V 5R 5-
V 5R25-1
V 5R27-
V 5R27M
V 5R28-..
V 5R28M..
V 5R29-..
V 5R29M..
V 5Z 1-
V 5Z 3-
V 5Z 7-
V 5Z 7M
V 5Z25-
V 5Z27-
V 5Z27M
V 5Z28-
V 5Z28M
V 5Z29-
V 5Z29M
V 9C20-
V10C16-
V10C17-
V10C18-
V10P80-A..
V10P80-AS
V10P81-R..
V10R 4-1500..
V10R 4-1501..
V10R 4-1502..
V10R 4-1503..
V10R 4-1504..
V10R 4-1505..
V10R 4-1506..
V10R 4-1507..
V10R 4-1508..
V10R 4-1509..
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
9-8
9-9
9-11
9-10
9-14
9-6
9-7
9-11
9-10
9-14
9-14
9-8
9-9
9-6
9-7
9-6
9-7
9-11
9-10
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-8
9-9
9-6
9-7
9-6
9-7
7-13
5-20
5-21
5-22
6-5
6-7
6-6
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
Part Number Index

V10R 9-..
V10R10-..
V10R11-
V10R12-
V10R14-
V10R78MD
V10R78MS
V10R79M
V10R82-F
V10R82-M
V10Y15-
V10Y15-M
V10Y15-39210013
V10Z 1-321..
V10Z 1-322..
V10Z 1-323..
V10Z 2-300..
V10Z 2-301..
V10Z 2-302..
V10Z 2-304..
V10Z 2-305..
V10Z 2-306..
V10Z 2-307..
V10Z 2-308..
V10Z 2-310..
V10Z 2-311..
V10Z 2-312..
V10Z 2-314..
V10Z 2-315..
V10Z 2-316..
V10Z 2-317..
V10Z 2-319..
V10Z 2-330..
V10Z 2M300
V10Z 2M302
V10Z 2M305
V10Z 2M308
V10Z 2M310
V10Z 2M311
V10Z 2M312
V10Z 2M314
V10Z 4-1550..
V10Z 4-1552..
V10Z 4-1553..
V10Z 5-110C
8-4
8-2
8-3
3-5
7-14
8-7
8-6
8-5
7-14
7-14
5-3
5-5
5-4
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-9
1-6
1-5
1-24
1-8
1-25
1-7
1-26
1-12
1-11
1-15
1-14
1-13
1-10
1-9
1-28
1-16
1-19
1-17
1-18
1-27
1-21
1-20
1-23
1-22
2-9
2-10
2-10
6-10
V10Z 6-500B
V10Z 6-520B
V10Z 6-530C
V10Z 7-1001
V10Z 7-1011
V10Z 7-1020..
V10Z 7M1020..
V10Z 8-
V10Z12-M
V10Z14-0
V10Z14-1
V10Z19-
V10Z22-
V10Z22M
V10Z25-0
V10Z25-LM..
V10Z27-
V10Z28-
V10Z30-
V10Z31-
V10Z32-
V10Z33-
V10Z34-1139
V10Z40-1210..
V10Z40-1215
V10Z40-1220
V10Z40-1240..
V10Z40-1260
V10Z40-1280..
V10Z42-
V10Z42-A
V10Z43MCM
V10Z44MCM
V10Z45MKC
V10Z46MKD
V10Z47MRM
V10Z52-F
V10Z53-F
V10Z55MT
V10Z59-FB
V10Z59-MB
V10Z59-MF
V10Z59MFB
V10Z59-MM
V10Z59MMB
2-22
2-23
2-21
6-11
6-11
6-8
6-9
1-37
3-2
7-16
7-16
5-15
5-16
5-16
3-3
3-4
5-18
5-17
5-9
5-10
5-12
5-19
5-19
2-4
2-5
2-7
2-11
2-6
2-8
7-8
7-9
3-8
3-7
2-20
2-18
1-38
2-15
2-16
2-13
1-31
1-31
1-31
1-32
1-31
1-32
V10Z59MMF
V10Z59MMM
V10Z60-FB
V10Z60-MB
V10Z60-MF
V10Z60-MM
V10Z61M..
V10Z61MBG..
V10Z61MMN..
V10Z61MSF..
V10Z61MTH..
V10Z62MGC..
V10Z62MGT..
V10Z62MNP
V10Z62MSN..
V10Z70-06
V10Z70-09
V10Z70-12
V10Z70-15
V10Z70-18
V10Z70-25
V10Z70-37
V10Z70-50
V10Z71MTM
V10Z72MTG
V10Z73MAM
V10Z74MMG
V10Z75MBM
V10Z76MSG-..
V10Z77MAGB
V10Z82-R2
V10Z82-R3
V10Z82-R4
V10Z82-R5
V10Z82-R7
V10Z82-RX303
V20S10M
V20S12M
V20S14M
V20S20M
V20S25M
V20S33M
V20S45M150..
V20S45M150L..
V21S01M...10
1-32
1-32
1-29
1-30
1-29
1-30
7-15
5-14
1-36
2-3
1-36
8-10
8-10
8-8
8-9
5-24
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
4-2
4-3
5-7
2-12
2-14
3-6
2-2
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-10
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-14
V21S01M...12
V21S01M...14
V21S01M...20
V21S01M...25
V21S01M...33
V21S01M...45
V21S02M16045
V21S02M18054
V21S02M20063
V21S02M25077
V21S02M33103
V21S02M45130
V21S03MCN10100
V21S03MCN12100
V21S03MCN14
V21S03MCN20150
V21S03MCN25150
V21S03MCN33150
V21S03MCN45150..
V21S04MSS10100
V21S04MSS12100
V21S04MSS14
V21S04MSS20150
V21S04MSS25150
V21S04MSS33150
V21S04MSS45150
V50FLR-
V50FLRM
V50FLS-
V50FLSM
V50FSR-
V50FSRM
V50FSS-
V50FSSM
V50PLR-
V50PLRM
V50PLS-
V50PLSM
V50PSR-
V50PSRM
V50PSS-
V50PSSM
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
9-4
9-5
9-4
9-5
9-2
9-3
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-4
9-5
9-2
9-3
9-2
9-3
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Listing of Additional Cylindrical Mounts

HOW TO CREATE AN INQUIRY
If you don't see the sizes you want in the product section of this catalog, please send us a request for quote using the coding
system shown below to specify the size.
Please Note: 1) If any inquiry is received for a size combination for which exact tooling is not available, the next closest size will
be quoted.
2) D and H dimensions remain metric irrespective of the studs being inch or metric.
3) For metric studs use letter G for thread size and letter L for length whereas for inch size studs, use letter I for
thread size and letter N for length.
TYPE
D
DIAMETER
CODE
H
WIDTH
CODE
Standard Dimensions Available
Description
Type
D
N
or
L
MM
N
or
L
D
I or G
N
or
L
MF
D
I or G
I or G
FF
D
I or G
PM
N
or
L
PF
THREAD
LENGTH
CODE
CODE
G or I
L or N
D
I or G
mm
DIA.
CODE
mm
WIDTH
CODE
6
8
10
10.5
11
13
14.3
15
16
18
19
20
23
25
30
32
35
38
40
45
48
50
60
65
75
80
100
060
080
100
105
110
130
143
150
160
180
190
200
230
250
300
320
350
380
400
450
480
500
600
650
750
800
A00
6
7
7.5
8
8.5
9
9.5
9.6
10
11
12
12.3
12.7
13
15
16
17
18
20
22
25
26
27
29
30
33
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
80
85
90
95
105
060
070
075
080
085
090
095
096
100
110
120
123
127
130
150
160
170
180
200
220
250
260
270
290
300
330
350
380
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
800
850
900
950
A05
xi
mm THREAD
CODE
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
03
04
05
06
08
10
12
16
20
INCH
#4-40
#6-32
#8-32
#10-32
1/4-20
5/16-16
1/2-12
5/8-11
3/4-10
3/8-16
N LENGTH
IN 1/16"
THREAD mm LENGTH INCH LENGTH

CODE
CODE
CODE
03
04
05
06
08
10
11
12
16
20
5
6
10
12
15
16
20
23
28
37
38
47
05
06
10
12
15
16
20
23
28
37
38
47
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
9/16
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
12
16
20
28
32
EXAMPLE DEPICTED
12
33
23
M6
M6
EXAMPLE
M
Selection Procedure for Rubber Mounts

1. Determine the load that each mount will bear when supporting
the equipment weight. Total weight divided by the number of
mounting positions is the load for each mount. This is only true
when having even weight distribution. Otherwise, distribute
weight accordingly.
constraints on allowable deflection, attachment requirements, etc. However, in the absence of any
overriding consideration, usually the mount that
is selected has its curve closest to the point of
intersection (Step 6c); i.e., the mount with the minimum deflection at the applied load.
2. Determine the lowest forcing frequency of the vibration source

to be supported by the mounts. This is usually equal to the operating speed in revolutions per minute.
7. Select the mount that is designed to operate in your temperature range and environment.
3. Choose the percent isolation that will be satisfactory for the

purpose. Except for special cases, 81% isolation is generally
considered satisfactory.
Vibration Frequency vs Static Deflection vs Isolation Efficiency

VIBRATION FREQUENCY (Hz)
10.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
6. a) Having selected the mount series, refer to the in

dividual styles, and note the styles whose maximum loads are greater than the load each mount
is to carry.
11.7
13.3
15
16.7
25
33
50
67
15
5.0
12.7
4.0
10
3.0
7.6
2.0
5.1
3.8
60
90
80
80
70
95
85
85
99
93
93
97
1.0
.9
.8
ISOLATION
ISisIOLATION
EFFICIENCY %
EFFICIENCY
%
2.5
2.3
2.0
.7
1.8
.6
1.5
.5
1.27
.4
1.0
.3
0.76
RESONANCE
RESONANCE
NATURAL
NATURAL
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
.2
0.5
.15
0.38
.10
.09
.08
.07
0.25
0.23
0.2
0.18
.06
0.15
0.13
.05
REGION
REGION
OF
OF
AMPLIFICATION
AMPLIFICATION
.04
0.1
VIBRATION FREQUENCY (CYCLES PER MINUTE)
xii
4000
0.025
3000
.01
2000
0.038
1500
.015
900
1000
0.05
800
.02
700
0.076
600
.03
500
f) More than one style may have load-deflection

curvesthat are suitable. The final selection can
depend on other requirements such as the cost
of the mounts, possible in-creased load requirements in the future, relative advantage of addi
tional isolation, space available for the mounts,
10
6.0
400
e) Mounts with curves below the point of intersection can be used as, at the given load, the deflection will be greater than the minimum required.
Note, however, that if the applied load is above
the line x--x on a curve, the mount is not recommended for this static load.
8.3
7.0
200
d) Mounts with curves above this point of intersection cannot be used, as the load (Step 1) is not
sufficient to produce the required minimum deflection (Step4).
6.7
25
23
20
18
150
c) Moving horizontally to the right on the graph, locate the point of intersection with the minimum
static deflection found in step 4.
5.0
1.5
STATIC DEFLECTION (INCHES)
b) Referring to the load deflection graphs of the styles

likely to be chosen, locate the applied load value
(Step 1, above) on the appropriate graph; i.e.,
compression and/or shear.
3.3
STATIC DEFLECTION (CM)
5. Select the mount series with the physical features

(shape, attachment facilities,fail-safe" safety feature,
load range, etc.) required by the application.
2.5
100
4. Referring to the Basic Vibration Chart below, find the

static deflection for the forcing frequency (Step 2,
above) at the chosen percent isolation (Step 3). Note
that a mount must give at least this minimum static
deflection, with the specific load applied,to provide
the desired isolation.
300
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
SECTION 1
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Square Mounts To 13.8 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 5.1 TO 13.8 POUNDS (2.3 TO 6.3 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 2.6 TO 7.1 POUNDS(1.2 TO 3.2 kgf)
Fasteners Steel, Zinc Plated

Isolator Natural Rubber
3/8
(9.5)
1/2
(12.7)
3/8
(9.5)
3/8
(9.5)
#8-32 NC (TYP)
NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.
12
18
16
10
C
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS

Deflections below the line xx are
considered safe practice for static
loads; data above that line are useful
for calculating deflections under
dynamic loads.
x
12
LOAD (lb.)
NOTE: Maximum unthreaded

portion of stud does not
exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm).
14
10
8
x
6
SHEAR
x
x
2
2
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
DEFLECTION (in.)
Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1100
1750
1500
1250
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600
1.8 (0.8)
Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

V10Z 1-321A
V10Z 1-321B
V10Z 1-321C
V10Z 1-321D
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
5.1 (2.3)
2.6 (1.2)
6.4 (2.9)
3.6 (1.6)
11.1 (5)
5.7 (2.6)
13.8 (6.3)
7.1 (3.2)
2.4 (1.1)
3.4 (1.5)
1.8 (0.8)
2.8 (1.3)
4.9 (2.2)
7.0 (3.18)
1.3 (0.6)
1.9 (0.9)
3.6 (1.6)
5.1 (2.3)
*At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.
1-2
5.1 (2.3) 3.9 (1.8)

.7 (0.3)
.9 (0.4)
5.5 (2.5)
1.4 (0.6) 1.0 (0.5)

11.0 (5)
2.9 (1.3) 2.2 (1)
3.9 (1.8) 3.1 (1.4)
3.1 (1.4)
.6 (0.27)
4.3 (2)
.8 (0.4)
8.7 (3.9)
1.8 (0.8)
12.3 (5.6)
2.6 (1.2)
2.6 (1.2) 2.1 (1)
3.4 (1.5)
.7 (0.3)
7.1 (3.2)
1.5 (0.7)
10.3 (4.7)
2.1 (1)
2.8 (1.3)
.6 (0.27)
6.0 (2.7)
1.3 (0.6)
8.9 (4)
1.8 (0.8)
2.4 (1.1)
1.8 (0.8)
5.1 (2.3)
1.1 (0.5)
7.7 (3.5)
1.6 (0.7)
3.8 (1.7)
.9 (0.4)
5.9 (2.7)
1.2 (0.54)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 6.6 TO 15.4 POUNDS (3 TO 7 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 9.9 POUNDS (2 TO 4.5 kgf)

7/32
(5.6)
5/16
(7.9)
3/8
(9.5)
3/8
(9.5)
#8-32 NC (TYP)
12
18
16

x
x
10
x
x
12
C
x
8
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
14
LOAD (lb.)

dynamic loads.
10
x
8
A
x
SHEAR
x
x
6
x
4
x
A
x
4
2
2
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.02
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600

V10Z 1-322A
V10Z 1-322B
V10Z 1-322C
V10Z 1-322D
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
6.6 (3)
4.4 (2)
8.7 (4)
5.5 (2.5)
12.0 (5.4)
7.8 (3.54)
15.4 (7)
9.9 (4.5)
3.3 (1.5)
4.8 (2.2)
7.7 (3.5)
2.4 (1.1)
3.6 (1.6)
6.0 (2.7)
8.2 (3.7)
1-3
1.9 (0.9)
2.8 (1.3)
4.9 (2.2)
6.7 (3)
1.5 (0.7)
2.2 (1)
4.0 (1.8)
5.6 (2.5)
1.3 (0.6)
1.9 (0.9)
3.5 (1.6)
4.7 (2.1)
5.4 (2.5) 4.5 (2)

1.1 (0.5)
*
8.5 (3.9) 6.9 (3.1)
1.6 (0.8)
*
11.5 (5.2)
3.1 (1.4)
*
4.1 (2.1)
*
3.2 (1.5)
*
4.8 (2.2)
*
8.0 (3.6)
*
11.8 (5.4)
0.12
0.14
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 6.8 TO 14.5 POUNDS (3 TO 6.6 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 2.8 TO 7.3 POUNDS (1.3 TO 3.3 kgf)

9/16
(14.3)
9/16
(14.3)
1/2
(12.7)
3/8
(9.5)
1/2
(12.7)
#8-32 NC (TYP)
10
40
D
30
COMPRESSION
25
20
B
x
15
x
x
SHEAR
x
x
B
x
x
x
x
10
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)

dynamic loads.
35

0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500

V10Z 1-323A
V10Z 1-323B
V10Z 1-323C
V10Z 1-323D
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
6.8 (3.1)
2.8 (1.3)
8.5 (3.9)
3.3 (1.5)
12.0 (5.4)
5.3 (2.4)
14.5 (6.6)
7.3 (3.3)
5.5 (2.5)
2.5 (1.1)
2.8 (1.3)
2.2 (1)
1.6 (0.7)
1.1 (0.5)
.9 (0.4)
8.0 (3.6)
3.5 (1.6)
2.8 (1.3)
2.1 (0.9)
1.6 (0.7)
5.0 (2.3)
4.0 (1.8)
2.9 (1.3)
6.2 (2.8)
4.6 (2.1)
1-4
3.8 (1.7) 3.0 (1.4)

.7 (0.3)
*
6.0 (2.7) 4.5 (2)
.9 (0.4)
1.2 (0.5)
*
10.1 (4.6) 8.5 (3.9)

1.9 (0.9) 1.6 (0.7)
2.3 (1)
14.5 (6.6) 11.5 (5.2)

3.6 (1.6) 2.9 (1.3) 2.5 (1.1)
*
*
6.5 (2.9)
*
9.0 (4.1)
2.2 (1)
0.30
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts To 13.3 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 4.9 TO 13.3 POUNDS (2.2 TO 6 kgf)


3/8
(9.5)
1/2
(12.7)
#8-32 NC (TYP)
7/16
(11.1)
14
7
x
x
xx
10
x
B
LOAD (lb.)

Deflections below the line xx
are considered safe practice for
static loads; data above that line
are useful for calculating
deflections under dynamic loads.
12
LOAD (lb.)
NOTE:
Maximum unthreaded portion of
stud does not exceed 1/16 inch
(1.59 mm).
x
D
8
x
6
x
x
SHEAR
x
B
x
A
x x
1
COMPRESSION
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1000
1250
1750
1500
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600

V10Z 2-302A
V10Z 2-302B
V10Z 2-302C
V10Z 2-302D
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
4.9 (2.2)
2.7 (1.22)
6.4 (2.9)
3.6 (1.6)
10.4 (4.7)
5.6 (2.5)
13.3 (6)
6.4 (2.9)
2.6 (1.2)
1.7 (0.8) 1.2 (0.54) 1.0 (0.5)
2.6 (1.2) 1.9 (0.9) 1.4 (0.6)
4.7 (2.1) 3.2 (1.5)
6.1 (2.8) 4.4 (2)
1-5
3.9 (1.8) 3.0 (1.4)

.7 (0.3)
.5 (0.2)
5.3 (2.4) 4.2 (1.9)
1.1 (0.5)
.8 (0.4)
9.8 (4.4) 7.7 (3.5)
2.5 (1.1) 1.9 (0.9) 1.5 (0.7)
13.1 (5.9) 10.4 (4.7)

3.4 (1.5) 2.7 (1.2) 2.2 (1)
2.4 (1.1) 2.0 (0.9)
3.4 (1.5)
.7 (0.3)
6.3 (2.9)
1.3 (0.6)
8.5 (3.9)
1.8 (0.8)
2.9 (1.3)
.6 (0.27)
5.2 (2.4)
1.1 (0.5)
7.0 (3.2)
1.6 (0.7)
1.8 (0.8) 1.0 (0.5)
2.5 (1.1) 1.5 (0.7)
4.3 (1.9) 2.6 (1.2)

.9 (0.4) .7 (0.3)
5.8 (2.6) 4.2 (1.9)
1.4 (0.6) 1.0 (0.45)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts To 25 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 8 TO 25 POUNDS (3.6 TO 11.3 kgf)
FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 12.5 POUNDS (2 TO 5.7 kgf)
Fasteners Hardened Steel, Zinc Plated

Isolater Natural Rubber
3/8
(9.5)
1/2
(12.7)
#8-32 NC (TYP)
9/16
(14.3)

15
28
x
10
COMPRESSION
x
16
x
12
x
x
x
x
4
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.10
V10Z 2-301B
V10Z 2-301C
V10Z 2-301D
8.0
(3.6)
12.0
(5.4)
16.0
(7.3)
25.0
(11.3)
1000
1250
V10Z 2-301A
V10Z 2-301B
V10Z 2-301C
V10Z 2-301D
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3600
2.7
(1.2)
4.5
(2)
9.6
(4.4)
15.2
(6.9)
2.0
(0.9)
3.2
(1.5)
6.8
(3.1)
10.4
(4.7)
3000
3600
*
*
2750
6.2
(2.8)
10.2
(4.6)
4.8
(2.2)
8.0
(3.6)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1000
1250
4.4
(2)
6.7
(3)
9.0
(4.1)
12.5
(5.7)
4.0
(1.8)
6.5
(2.9)
4.0
(1.8)
6.5
(2.9)
14.0
(6.4)
22.0
(10)
3.2
(1.5)
5.4
(2.4)
11.6
(5.3)
18.2
(8.3)
Shear
Catalog Number
1500
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3.1
(1.4)
5.2
(2.4)
9.0
(4.1)
2.2
(1)
3.7
(1.7)
6.3
(2.9)
11.2
(5.1)
1.7
(0.77)
2.8
(1.27)
4.6
(2.1)
8.2
(3.7)
1.3
(0.6)
2.3
(1.04)
3.6
(1.6)
6.3
(2.9)
1-6
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
V10Z 2-301A
A
x
DEFLECTION (in.)
Catalog Number
B
x
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
SHEAR
C
20
D
x
LOAD (lb.)

24
LOAD (lb.)
NOTE:
(1.59 mm).
1.8
(0.82)
2.9
(1.32)
4.0
(1.8)
2.3
(1.04)
4.0
(1.8)
1.9
(0.9)
3.3
(1.5)
2.8
(1.3)
2.0
(0.9)
0.30
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts To 28.5 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 22 TO 28.5 POUNDS (10 TO 12.9 kgf)


.410
(10.4)
3/8
(9.5)
#1/4-20 NC (TYP)
3/4
(19.1)

16
35
25
12
SHEAR
COMPRESSION
x
20
LOAD (lb.)

B
B
30
LOAD (lb.)
NOTE:
(1.59 mm).
A
x
15
10
5
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.50
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.05
0.10
0.15
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
V10Z 2-307A
V10Z 2-307B
Mode
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1500
22.0 (10)
8.4 (3.8)
28.5 (12.9)
11.9 (5.4)
6.2 (2.8)
4.7 (2.1)
3.7 (1.7)
9.9 (4.5)
7.3 (3.3)
5.6 (2.5)
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3600
1-7
21.5 (9.8) 16.5 (7.5) 10.5 (4.8)

3.0 (1.4) 2.4 (1.09) 2.5 (1.13)
25.5 (11.6) 17.0 (7.7)

4.4 (2)
3.6 (1.6)
*
6.5 (2.9)
*
12.0 (5.4)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 40 TO 75 POUNDS (18.1 TO 34 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 19 TO 42 POUNDS (8.6 TO 19.1 kgf)

1/2
(12.7)
17/32
(13.5)
1/4-20 NC (TYP)
1
(25.4)

200
80
D
180
NOTE:
(1.59 mm).
D
70
C
160
60
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)

LOAD (lb.)
140
120
100
x
80
B
x
60
50
SHEAR
x
x
x
40
30
20
40
x
x
x
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
10
20
0.10
0.12
x
0
0.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.10
x
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
1100
1250
1500
1750
2750
3000
3600
19.5
(8.8)
16.0
(7.3)
13.5
(6.1)
10.0
(4.5)
30.0
(13.6)
24.8
(11.2)
20.5
(9.3)
17.5
(7.9)
12.5
(5.7)
74.0
(33.6)
58.5
(26.5)
47.5
(21.5)
39.5
(17.9)
33.0
(15)
23.5
(10.7)
67.5
(30.6)
55.5
(25.2)
45.5
(20.6)
38.5
(17.5)
27.5
(12.5)
2750
3000
3600
5.0
(2.3)
14.0
(6.4)
11.5
(5.2)
9.5
(4.3)
18.5
(8.4)
15.8
(7.2)
13.0
(5.9)
11.0
(5)
9.5
(4.3)
2000
2250
Catalog Number
Maximum Load
lb. (kgf)
V10Z 2-305A
40
(18.1)
30.5
(13.8)
24.0
(10.9)
V10Z 2-305B
43
(19.5)
38.0
(17.2)
V10Z 2-305C
74
(33.6)
V10Z 2-305D
75
(34)
Catalog Number
Maximum Load
lb. (kgf)
1100
1250
1500
V10Z 2-305A
19
(8.6)
15.7
(7.1)
12.5
(5.7)
8.3
(3.8)
6.3
(2.9)
V10Z 2-305B
21
(9.5)
19.0
(8.6)
15.5
(7)
10.6
(4.8)
8.0
(3.6)
6.3
(2.9)
V10Z 2-305C
37
(16.8)
31.5
(14.3)
22.5
(10.2)
17.0
(7.7)
V10Z 2-305D
42
(19.1)
40.0
(18.1)
29.5
(13.4)
22.0
(10)
2500
Shear
1750
2000
2250
2500
1-8
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 33 TO 79 POUNDS (15 TO 35.8 kgf)

Isolater Natural Rubber
3/4
(19.1)
1
(25.4)
SEE TABLE
NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are in mm.

90

Catalog Number
V10Z 2-300
V10Z 2-317
80
x D
40
x
x
35
70
Thread
Thread
Length
1/420 NC 1/2 (12.7)
5/1618 NC 9/16 (14.3)
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
60
50
B
x
30
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
xx
A
15
5
0.06
10
0.04
SHEAR
25
10
0.02
30
0.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
DEFLECTION (in.)
NOTE: Maximum unthreaded portion of stud does not exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Load Rating A, B, C, or D, see table below.
Compression

850
1100
1250
1500
1750
3000
3600
10.5
(4.8)
7.0
(3.2)
5.0
(2.3)
17.0
(7.7)
14.0
(6.4)
9.5
(4.3)
7.0
(3.2)
37.0
(16.8)
29.5
(13.4)
24.0
(10.9)
17.0
(7.7)
11.5
(5.2)
55.0
(24.9)
43.5
(19.7)
36.0
(16.3)
24.5
(11.1)
17.0
(7.7)
3000
3600
1.8
(0.8)
1.2
(0.5)
3.2
(1.5)
2.6
(1.2)
1.8
(0.8)
9.0
(4.1)
7.5
(3.4)
6.2
(2.8)
4.5
(2)
11.5
(1.6)
12.0
(5.4)
10.0
(4.5)
8.3
(3.8)
6.0
(2.7)
17.0
(2.3)
2000
2250
Load Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
33
(15)
29.0
(13.2)
21.0
(9.5)
16.0
(7.3)
12.5
(5.7)
40
(18.1)
39.5
(18)
28.5
(12.9)
21.5
(9.8)
60
(27.2)
49.0
(22.2)
79
(35.8)
72.5
(32.9)
Load Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
850
1100
1250
18
(8.2)
16.0
(7.3)
9.3
(4.2)
7.2
(3.3)
5.0
(2.3)
3.8
(1.7)
2.8
(1.3)
2.3
(1)
21
(9.5)
13.0
(5.9)
10.2
(4.6)
7.0
(3.2)
5.3
(2.4)
4.0
(1.8)
34
(15.4)
24.5
(11.1)
20.0
(9.1)
14.7
(6.7)
11.2
(5.1)
40
(18.1)
32.0
(14.5)
26.0
(11.8)
19.0
(8.6)
14.8
(6.7)
2500
Shear

1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
1-9
0.30
0.35
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



9/16
(14.3)
1
(25.4)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
1
(25.4)
120
NOTE:
(1.59 mm).
45
100
D
x
x C
35
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
80
40
x
LOAD (lb.)

C
x
60
x
x
B
x
40
SHEAR
30
25
20
x
15
x
10
20
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16 0.18
0.10
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-316A
V10Z 2-316B
V10Z 2-316C
V10Z 2-316D
Maximum Load
lb. (kgf)
37
(16.8)
48
(21.8)
57
(25.9)
86
(39)
700
950
V10Z 2-316A
V10Z 2-316B
V10Z 2-316C
V10Z 2-316D
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
35.0
(15.9)
Maximum Load
lb. (kgf)
700
950
16
(7.3)
21
(9.5)
35
(15.9)
43
(19.5)
16
(7.3)
24.0
(10.9)
34.0
(15.4)
46.0
(20.9)
80.0
(36.3)
18.0
(8.2)
26.0
(11.8)
32.5
(14.8)
59.0
(26.8)
11.0
13.5
(5)
(6.1)
16.0
20.5
(7.3)
(9.3)
20.0
26.5
(9.1)
(12)
38.0
48.0
(21.8) (17.2)
13.0
(5.9)
16.0
(7.3)
30.0
(13.6)
29.0
(9.5)
2500
3000
Shear
Catalog Number
0.20
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
8
(3.6)
12
(5.7)
23.5
(10.7)
32.0
(14.5)
6.5
(2.9)
9.5
(4.3)
18.0
(8.2)
24.5
(11.1)
5.0
(2.3)
7.5
(3.4)
14.0
(6.4)
19.0
(8.6)
0.30
0.40
DEFLECTION (in.)
3.5
(1.6)
5.5
(2.5)
10.0
(4.5)
13.0
(5.9)
1-10
4.0
(1.8)
7.5
(3.4)
9.5
(4.3)
6.0
(2.7)
7.5
(3.4)
0.50
0.60
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



9/16
(14.3)
1
(25.4)
1-3/8
(34.9)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
200
80
D
180
70
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
COMPRESSION
120
x
100
x
x
80
x
x
60
60
140

160
50
SHEAR
B
40
30
A
x
20
40
10
20
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.10
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
700
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
V10Z 2-311A
47
(21.3)
44.5
(20.2)
30.0
(13.6)
22.0
(10)
18.0
(8.2)
13.5
(6.1)
11.0
(5)
V10Z 2-311B
74
(33.6)
72.5
(32.9)
48.5
(22)
35.5
(16.1)
27.0
(12.2)
21.0
(9.5)
17.5
(7.9)
12.5
(5.7)
V10Z 2-311C
96
(43.5)
75.7
(34.3)
55.5
(25.2)
43.0
(19.5)
34.0
(15.4)
28.0
(12.7)
19.5
(8.8)
V10Z 2-311D
105
(47.6)
100.0
(45.4)
73.0
(33.1)
56.5
(25.6)
45.0
(20.4)
38.0
(17.2)
25.5
(11.6)
950
1100
2500
3000
Shear
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
700
V10Z 2-311A
27
(12.2)
27.0
(12.2)
19.5
(8.8)
11.5
(5.2)
9.0
(4.1)
6.0
(2.7)
V10Z 2-311B
41
(18.6)
31.0
(14.1)
19.0
(8.6)
14.5
(6.6)
10.5
(4.8)
8.0
(3.6)
V10Z 2-311C
66
(29.9)
53.5
(24.3)
33.0
(15)
26.5
(12)
19.0
(8.6)
14.0
(6.4)
11.5
(5.2)
9.0
(4.1)
V10Z 2-311D
66
(29.9)
61.0
(27.7)
38.0
(17.2)
30.5
(13.8)
22.0
(10)
19.5
(8.8)
13.0
(5.9)
10.5
(4.8)
8.5
(3.9)
1-11
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



9/16
(14.3)
1-1/4
(31.8)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
1-1/4
(31.8)
80
D
160
D
70
140
LOAD (lb.)
60
120
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)

100
x
80
A
x
60
50
40
x
30
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-310A
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
V10Z 2-310B
V10Z 2-310C
V10Z 2-310D
V10Z 2-310A
V10Z 2-310B
V10Z 2-310C
V10Z 2-310D
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
34.5
(15.6)
27.5
(12.5)
48.0
(21.8)
80.0
(36.3)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
600
850
21
(9.5)
31
(14.1)
48
(21.8)
63
(28.6)
20.0
(9.1)
19.0
(8.6)
32.0
(14.5)
55.0
(24.9)
89.0
(40.4)
14.0
(6.4)
24.0
(10.9)
41.5
(18.8)
70.5
(32)
10.0
(4.5)
17.5
(7.9)
30.0
(13.6)
53.0
(24)
7.0
(3.2)
12.0
(5.4)
20.0
(9.1)
38.5
(17.5)
8.5
(3.9)
14.0
(6.4)
26.5
(12)
2500
3000
Shear
Catalog Number
950
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
11.0
(5)
18.0
(8.2)
31.5
(14.3)
50.0
(22.7)
8.5
(3.9)
14.0
(6.4)
25.0
(11.3)
41.0
(18.6)
6.7
(3)
10.5
(4.8)
19.5
(8.8)
32.6
(14.8)
5.5
(2.5)
8.0
(3.6)
15.5
(7)
27.5
(12.5)
1-12
1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
DEFLECTION (in.)
41
(18.6)
64
(29)
90
(40.8)
120
(54.4)
A
x
DEFLECTION (in.)
850
10
600
20
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
SHEAR
20
40
Compression
5.5
(2.5)
11.0
(5)
20.5
(9.3)
8.5
(3.9)
16.0
(7.3)
14.0
(6.4)
8.0
(3.6)
0.6
0.7
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
See Section 1
Request Quote
Visit Website
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
S E C T I O N 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product


7/8
(22.2)
9/16
(14.3)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
1-1/4
(31.8)
350
D
325
300
80
70
275
COMPRESSION
250

60
SHEAR
50
200
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
225
B
175
150
125
x
x
40
x
x
30
A
100
x
20
75
x
x
50
10
x
25
0
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-315A
V10Z 2-315B
V10Z 2-315C
V10Z 2-315D
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
750
56
(25.4)
82
(37.2)
115
(52.2)
123
(55.8)
850
V10Z 2-315A
V10Z 2-315B
V10Z 2-315C
V10Z 2-315D
1100
1250
1500
1750
2500
3000
13.0
(5.9)
23.0
(10.4)
27.5
(12.5)
43.0
(19.5)
17.0
(7.7)
22.0
(10)
32.0
(14.5)
2500
3000
5.1
(2.3)
10.0
(4.5)
17.0
(7.7)
6.5
(2.9)
11.0
(5)
8.0
(3.6)
2000
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
750
850
32
(14.5)
37
(16.8)
48
(21.8)
63
(28.6)
31.0
(14.1)
40.0
(18.1)
68.5
(31.1)
107.0
(48.5)
28.0
(12.7)
50.0
(22.7)
77.5
(35.2)
92.0
(41.7)
21.0
(9.5)
35.0
(15.9)
57.0
(25.9)
67.5
(30.6)
Shear
Catalog Number
950
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
24.0
(10.9)
32.0
(14.5)
45.0
(20.4)
19.0
(8.6)
26.0
(11.8)
38.0
(17.2)
56.0
(25.4)
14.0
(6.4)
19.0
(8.6)
29.0
(13.2)
45.0
(20.4)
11.0
8.0
(5)
(3.6)
15.0
10.0
(6.8)
(4.5)
24.0
17.0
(10.9)
(7.7)
38.0
27.0
(17.2) (12.2)
1-13
5.6
(2.5)
7.6
(3.4)
13.0
(5.9)
21.0
(9.5)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
DEFLECTION (in.)
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.5
0.6
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 32 TO 64 POUNDS (14.5 TO 29 kgf)

9/16
(14.3)
3/4
(19.1)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
1-1/4
(31.8)
80
x
140
D
70
120
60
100
COMPRESSION
x
x
B
80
x
x
60
LOAD (lb.)

Deflections below the line x-x are
loads; data above that line are
useful for calculating deflections
under dynamic loads.
LOAD (lb.)
SHEAR
50
x
x
xx
x
40
20
20
10
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.10
DEFLECTION (in.)
V10Z 2-314A
V10Z 2-314B
V10Z 2-314C
V10Z 2-314D
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
950
56
(24.4)
73
(33.1)
109
(49.5)
142
(64.4)
1100
V10Z 2-314A
V10Z 2-314B
V10Z 2-314C
V10Z 2-314D
1500
1750
2000
2250
3000
3600
12.5
(5.7)
16.5
(7.5)
28.0
(12.7)
44.0
(20)
12.0
(5.4)
20.0
(9.1)
30.0
(13.6)
3000
3600
2500
50.0
(22.7)
73.0
(33.1)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
950
1100
32
(14.5)
38
(17.2)
51
(23.1)
64
(29)
23.0
(10.4)
32.0
(14.5)
38.0
(17.2)
51.0
(23.1)
85.0
(38.6)
129.0
(58.5)
28.5
(12.9)
39.0
(17.7)
63.5
(28.8)
99.0
(44.9)
18.0
22.5
(8.2)
(10.2)
24.5
30.5
(13.8) (11.1)
41.0
50.0
(22.7) (18.6)
64.0
78.0
(35.4) (29)
Shear
Catalog Number
1250
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
18.0
(8.2)
24.5
(11.1)
44.5
(20.2)
58.0
(26.3)
14.5
(6.6)
19.0
(8.6)
36.0
(16.3)
46.5
(21.1)
10.0
(4.5)
13.0
(5.9)
26.0
(11.8)
34.0
(15.4)
7.5
(3.4)
9.5
(4.3)
19.5
(8.8)
27.0
(12.2)
1-14
0.20
0.30
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
30
Catalog Number
40
7.0
(3.2)
14.0
(6.4)
20.5
(9.3)
12.0
(5.4)
17.0
(7.7)
10.0
(4.5)
14.0
(6.4)
9.5
(4.3)
0.40
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



9/16
(14.3)
5/8
(15.9)
5/16-18 NC (TYP)
1-3/8
(34.9)
200
180
160
100
D
x
x
70
COMPRESSION
120
x
x
100
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
140
80
SHEAR
60
20
10
0 0.02
0.06
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-312A
V10Z 2-312B
V10Z 2-312C
V10Z 2-312D
93
(42.2)
118
(53.5)
158
(71.7)
185
(83.9)
1100
V10Z 2-312A
V10Z 2-312B
V10Z 2-312C
V10Z 2-312D
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
25.0
(11.3)
43.0
(19.5)
65.0
(29.5)
90.0
(40.8)
35.0
(15.9)
54.0
(24.5)
74.0
(33.6)
2750
3000
71.0
(32.2)
106.0
(48.1)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
950
1100
36
(16.3)
46
(20.9)
57
(25.9)
67
(30.4)
34.0
(15.4)
51.0
(23.1)
81.0
(36.7)
121.0
(54.9)
164.0
(74.4)
39.0
(17.7)
64.0
(29)
96.0
(43.5)
131.0
(59.4)
31.0
(14.1)
52.0
(23.6)
79.0
(35.8)
109.0
(49.4)
Shear
Catalog Number
0.10
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
25.0
(11.3)
38.0
(17.2)
19.0
(8.6)
30.0
(13.6)
50.0
(22.7)
66.0
(29.9)
13.5
(6.1)
21.0
(9.5)
35.0
(15.9)
46.0
(20.9)
10.0
(4.5)
16.0
(7.3)
26.0
(11.8)
34.0
(15.4)
1-15
0.14
0.18
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)

950
A
x
20
DEFLECTION (in.)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
B
x x
30
Compression
40
60
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11
xx
50
40
80
B

90
12.0
(5.4)
20.0
(9.1)
26.0
(11.8)
9.5
(4.3)
16.0
(7.3)
21.0
(9.5)
13.0
(5.9)
18.0
(8.2)
14.0
(6.4)
0.24
0.28
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 330 POUNDS (149.7 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 140 POUNDS (63.5 kgf)

X
1/2-20 NF (TYP)
2
(50.8)
X
29/32
(23)
2-3/4 DIA.
(69.9)
1-1/32 (26.2)
SECTION X-X
400
350
COMPRESSION
x
300
COMPRESSION
250
LOAD (lb.)

Deflections below the line x---x are
loads; data above that line are
useful for calculating deflections
200
SHEAR
150
100
SHEAR
50
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
700
850
1100
1250
1500
1750
2250
2500
150 (68)
120 (54.4)
90 (40.8)
2000

V10Z 2-330B
Compression
Shear
330 (149.7)
140 (63.5)
140 (63.5) 105 (47.6)
65 (29.5)
52 (23.6)
1-16
255 (115.7) 190 (86.2)

38 (17.2) 32 (14.5)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts To 6 kgf

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 2 TO 6 kgf (4.9 TO 13.3 lb.)
FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 1 TO 3 kgf (2.7 TO 6.4 lb.)
Fastener Steel, Zinc Plated

New
12.5
(.49)
11
(.43)
M4
NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.
6.4
Metric
3.6
x
D

exceed 1.59 mm (.06 in.).
3.2
5.5
x
x
LOAD (kgf)
LOAD (kgf)

dynamic loads.
xx
2.7
4.5
B
A
3.6
x
2.7
x
x
1.8
SHEAR
2.3
x
B
x
1.8
A
x x
1.4
0.9
0.9
0.5
COMPRESSION
0.51
1.02
1.52
2.03
2.54
3.05
1.27
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
2.2
(4.9)
2.9
(6.4)
4.7
(10.4)
6
(13.3)
V10Z 2M302AM4
V10Z 2M302BM4
V10Z 2M302CM4
V10Z 2M302DM4
3.81

Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
Catalog Number
2.54
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600
0.8
(1.8)
1.1
(2.5)
2
(4.3)
2.6
(5.8)
(1.0)
0.7
(1.5)
1.2
(2.6)
1.9
(4.2)
3000
3600
Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
1000
1250
1.2
(2.7)
1.6
(3.6)
2.5
(5.6)
2.9
(6.4)
1.18
(2.6)
0.77
(1.7)
0.54
(1.2)
0.45
(1.0)
1.18
(2.6)
0.87
(1.9)
0.63
(1.4)
2.14
(4.7)
1.45
(3.2)
1.13
(2.5)
2.76
(6.1)
2
(4.4)
1.54
(3.4)
1.8
(3.9)
2.4
(5.3)
4.5
(9.8)
5.9
(13.1)
1.4
(3.0)
1.9
(4.2)
3.5
(7.7)
4.7
(10.4)
1.1
(2.4)
1.5
(3.4)
2.9
(6.3)
3.9
(8.5)
0.9
(2.0)
1.3
(2.9)
2.4
(5.2)
3.2
(7.0)
0.5
Shear
Catalog Number
V10Z 2M302AM4
V10Z 2M302BM4
V10Z 2M302CM4
V10Z 2M302DM4
1500
1750
5.08
DEFLECTION (mm)
2000
2250
2500
2750

0.32
(.7)
0.5
(1.1)
0.87
(1.9)
1.22
(2.7)
Length, L
07 = 7 mm (.275)
10 = 10mm (.394)
1-17
0.22
(.5)
0.37
(.8)
0.68
(1.5)
1
(2.2)
0.32
(.7)
0.59
(1.3)
0.82
(1.8)
0.28
(.6)
0.5
(1.1)
0.72
(1.6)
2
(.9)
2.6
(1.4)
0.32
(.7)
0.45
(1.0)
6.35
7.62
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 18 TO 34 kgf (40 TO 75 lb.)
FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 9 TO 18 kgf (19 TO 42 lb.)

New
13.5
(.53)
12
(.47)
M6
25
(.98)
Metric
91

36
D
82
D
32
C
73
27
COMPRESSION
LOAD (kgf)

dynamic loads.
LOAD (kgf)
64
54
45
x
36
B
x
27
SHEAR
x
x
x
18
14
18
0.51
1.02
1.52
2.03
2.54
3.05
x
0
1.27
DEFLECTION (mm)
Catalog Number
V10Z 2M305AM06
V10Z 2M305BM06
V10Z 2M305CM06
V10Z 2M305DM06
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
1100
18.2
(40.1)
19.5
(43.0)
33.6
(74.1)
34
(75.0)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
1100
1250
8.6
(19.0)
9.5
(20.9)
16.8
(37.0)
19
(41.9)
7.1
(15.7)
8.6
(19.0)
1250
V10Z 2M305AM06
V10Z 2M305BM06
V10Z 2M305CM06
V10Z 2M305DM06
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600
3.2
(7.1)
4.3
(9.5)
7.7
(17.0)
11.1
(24.5)
2.3
(5.1)
3.2
(7.1)
5.2
(11.5)
7.7
(17.0)
3000
3600

13.8
(30.4)
17.2
(37.9)
33.6
(74.1)
10.9
(24.0)
13.6
(30.0)
26.5
(58.4)
30.6
(67.5)
8.8
(19.4)
11.3
(24.9)
21.6
(47.6)
25.2
(55.6)
4.8
(10.6)
6.4
(14.1)
10.9
(24.0)
16.3
(35.9)
Shear
Catalog Number
1500
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
5.7
(12.6)
7
(15.4)
14.3
(31.5)
18.1
(40.0)
3.8
(8.4)
4.8
(10.6)
10.2
(22.5)
13.3
(29.3)
2.9
(6.4)
3.6
(7.9)
7.7
(17.0)
10
(22.0)
2.9
(6.4)
6.4
(14.1)
8.4
(18.5)
2.3
(5.1)
5.2
(11.5)
7.2
(15.9)
4.3
(9.5)
5.9
(13.0)
1-18
2.54
x
3.81
5.08
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
A
x
23
1
(2.2)
1.2
(2.6)
2.8
(6.2)
3.8
(8.4)
1
(2.2)
1
(2.2)
2
(4.4)
2.7
(6.0)
*
*
1.6
(3.5)
2.3
(5.1)
6.35
7.62
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



12
(.47)
New
19
(.75)
25
(.98)
M6
Metric

41
D
36

x D
18
x
x
32
COMPRESSION
LOAD (kgf)
LOAD (kgf)
16
x
27

dynamic loads.
20
23
B
x
18
x
14
14
1.02
1.52
2.03
2.54
3.05
xx
A
0.51
SHEAR
11
3.56
1.27
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2M300AM406
V10Z 2M300BM406
V10Z 2M300CM406
V10Z 2M300DM406
15
(33)
18.1
(40)
27.2
(60)
35.9
(79)
1000
1250
V10Z 2M300AM406
V10Z 2M300BM406
V10Z 2M300CM406
V10Z 2M300DM406
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3600
4.8
3.2
(10.5)
(7.0)
6.4
4.3
(14.0)
(9.5)
10.9
7.7
(24.0) (17.0)
16.3
11.1
(36)
(24.5)
(5.0)
3.2
(7.0)
5.2
(11.5)
7.7
(17.0)
2750

13.2
(29)
17.9
(39.5)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
1000
1250
8.2
(18)
9.5
(21)
15.4
(34)
18.1
(40)
7.3
(16.0)
4.2
(9.3)
3.3
(7.2)
2.3
(5.0)
5.9
(13.0)
4.6
(10.2)
3.2
(7.0)
11.1
(24.5)
9.1
(20)
6.7
(14.7)
14.5
(32)
11.8
(26)
8.6
(19.0)
9.5
(21)
12.9
(28.5)
22.2
(49)
32.9
(72.5)
7.3
(16)
9.8
(21.5)
16.8
(37)
25
(55)
5.7
(12.5)
7.7
(17.0)
13.4
(29.5)
19.7
(43.5)
2.3
Shear
Catalog Number
2.54
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600

1.7
(3.8)
2.3
(5.3)
5.1
(11.2)
6.7
(14.8)
1-19
1.3
(2.8)
1.8
(4.0)
4.1
(9.0)
5.5
(12.0)
3.81
5.08
6.35
DEFLECTION (mm)

Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
C
x
1
(2.3)
1.4
(3.2)
3.4
(7.5)
4.5
(10.0)
0.8
(1.8)
1.2
(2.6)
2.8
(6.2)
3.8
(8.3)
0.5
(1.2)
0.8
(1.8)
2
(4.5)
2.7
(6.0)
*
*
1.6
(3.5)
2.3
(5.0)
7.62
8.89
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:


13.5
(.53)
New
25
(.98)
M8
35
(1.38)
Metric
91
36
D
82
32
LOAD (kgf)
LOAD (kgf)
COMPRESSION
54
x
45
x
x
36
x
x
27
SHEAR
23
14
x
A
x
9
x
1.27
2.54
3.81
5.08
6.35
7.62
2.54
DEFLECTION (mm)
V10Z 2M311BM08
V10Z 2M311CM08
V10Z 2M311DM08
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
700
21.3
(47)
33.6
(74)
43.5
(96)
47.6
(105)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
700
850
12.3
(27)
18.6
(41)
29.9
(66)
29.9
(66)
12.3
(27)
850
V10Z 2M311AM08
V10Z 2M311BM08
V10Z 2M311CM08
V10Z 2M311DM08
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
5
(11)
7.9
(17.5)
12.7
(28)
17.2
(38)
5.7
(12.5)
8.8
(19.5)
11.6
(25.5)
2500
3000
2250

20.2
(44.5)
32.9
(72.5)
13.6
(30)
22
(48.5)
34.3
(75.7)
45.4
(100)
10
(22)
16.1
(35.5)
25.5
(55.5)
33.1
(73)
8.2
(18)
12.3
(27)
19.5
(43)
25.6
(56.5)
6.1
(13.5)
9.5
(21)
15.4
(34)
20.4
(45)
Shear
Catalog Number
5.08
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
8.8
(19.5)
14.1
(31)
24.3
(53.5)
27.7
(61)
5.2
(11.5)
8.6
(19)
15
(33)
17.2
(38)
4.1
(9)
6.6
(14.5)
12
(26.5)
13.8
(30.5)
2.7
(6)
4.8
(10.5)
8.6
(19)
10
(22)
1-20
7.62
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
V10Z 2M311AM08
18
18
Catalog Number
27
64

dynamic loads.
73
3.6
(8)
6.4
(14)
8.8
(19.5)
5.2
(11.5)
5.9
(13)
4.1
(9)
4.8
(10.5)
3.9
(8.5)
10.16
12.7
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



New
32
(1.26)
13.5
(.53)
32
(1.26)
M8
Metric
36
82
D
73
D
32
x
27
54
COMPRESSION
LOAD (kgf)

dynamic loads.
LOAD (kgf)
64
45
x
36
A
x
27
18
x
14
1.27
2.54
3.81
5.08
6.35
7.62
8.89
2.54
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
600
18.6
(41)
29
(64)
40.8
(90)
54.4
(120)
850
V10Z 2M310AM08
V10Z 2M310BM08
V10Z 2M310CM08
V10Z 2M310DM08
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
3.2
(7)
5.5
(12)
9.1
(20)
17.5
(38.5)
3.9
(8.5)
6.4
(14)
12
(26.5)
2500
3000
15.7
(34.5)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
600
850
9.5
(21)
14.1
(31)
21.8
(48)
28.6
(63)
9.1
(20)
12.5
(27.5)
21.8
(48)
36.3
(80)
8.6
(19)
14.5
(32)
25
(55)
40.4
(89)
6.4
(14)
10.9
(24)
18.8
(41.5)
32
(70.5)
4.5
(10)
7.9
(17.5)
13.6
(30)
24
(53)
Shear
Catalog Number
5.08
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
5
(11)
8.2
(18)
14.3
(31.5)
22.7
(50)
3.9
(8.5)
6.4
(14)
11.3
(25)
18.6
(41)
3
(6.7)
4.8
(10.5)
8.8
(19.5)
14.8
(32.6)
2.5
(5.5)
3.6
(8)
7
(15.5)
12.5
(27.5)
1-21
7.62
10.16
12.7
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
V10Z 2M310DM08
DEFLECTION (mm)
V10Z 2M310CM08
V10Z 2M310BM08
V10Z 2M310AM08
SHEAR
23
x
18
Catalog Number
2.5
(5.5)
5
(11)
9.3
(20.5)
3.9
(8.5)
7.3
(16)
6.4
(14)
3.6
(8)
15.24
17.78
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:


13.5
(.53)
New
19
(.75)
M8
32
(1.26)
Metric
36
73
x
64
D
32
45
27
x
COMPRESSION
x
x
B
36
LOAD (kgf)

dynamic loads.
LOAD (kgf)
54
x
x
27
SHEAR
23
x
x
xx
18
0.51
1.02
1.52
2.03
2.54
3.05
0.25
DEFLECTION (mm)
V10Z 2M314AM08
V10Z 2M314BM08
V10Z 2M314CM08
V10Z 2M314DM08
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
950
25.4
(56)
33.1
(73)
49.5
(109)
64.4
(142)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
950
1100
14.5
(32)
17.2
(38)
23.1
(51)
29
(64)
10.4
(23)
14.5
(32)
1100
V10Z 2M314AM08
V10Z 2M314BM08
V10Z 2M314CM08
V10Z 2M314DM08
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3600

22.7
(50)
33.1
(73)
17.2
(38)
23.1
(51)
38.6
(85)
58.5
(129)
12.9
(28.5)
17.7
(39)
28.8
(63.5)
44.9
(99)
10.2
(22.5)
13.8
(30.5)
22.7
(50)
35.4
(78)
8.2
(18)
11.1
(24.5)
18.6
(41)
29
(64)
5.7
(12.5)
7.5
(16.5)
12.7
(28)
20
(44)
5.5
(12)
9.1
(20)
13.6
(30)
3000
3600
Shear
Catalog Number
0.51
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
8.2
(18)
11.1
(24.5)
20.2
(44.5)
26.3
(58)
6.6
(14.5)
8.6
(19)
16.3
(36)
21.1
(46.5)
4.5
(10)
5.9
(13)
11.8
(26)
15.4
(34)
3.4
(7.5)
4.3
(9.5)
8.8
(19.5)
12.3
(27)
1-22
0.76
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
14
Catalog Number
18
3.2
(7)
6.4
(14)
9.3
(20.5)
5.5
(12)
7.7
(17)
4.5
(10)
6.4
(14)
4.3
(9.5)
1.02
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



13.5
(.53)
New
16
(.63)
M8
35
(1.38)
Metric
91
82
73
45
D
x
x
64
LOAD (kgf)
LOAD (kgf)
32
COMPRESSION
54
x
x
45
36
Catalog Number
V10Z 2M312AM08
V10Z 2M312BM08
V10Z 2M312CM08
V10Z 2M312DM08
42.2
(93)
53.5
(118)
71.7
(158)
83.9
(185)
1100
0 0.51
V10Z 2M312AM08
V10Z 2M312BM08
V10Z 2M312CM08
V10Z 2M312DM08
1.52
2.54
1500
1750
32.2
(71)
48.1
(106)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
950
1100
16.3
(36)
20.9
(46)
25.9
(57)
30.4
(67)
15.4
(34)
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
23.1
(51)
36.7
(81)
54.9
(121)
74.4
(164)
17.7
(39)
29
(64)
43.5
(96)
59.4
(131)
14.1
(31)
23.6
(52)
35.8
(79)
49.5
(109)
11.3
(25)
19.5
(43)
29.5
(65)
40.8
(90)
15.9
(35)
24.5
(54)
33.6
(74)
2750
3000

1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
11.3
(25)
17.2
(38)
8.6
(19)
13.6
(30)
22.7
(50)
29.9
(66)
6.1
(13.5)
9.5
(21)
15.9
(20)
20.9
(26)
4.5
(10)
7.3
(16)
11.8
(26)
15.4
(34)
1-23
3.56
4.57
5.08
DEFLECTION (mm)
Shear
Catalog Number
1250
A
x

950
B
x x
DEFLECTION (mm)
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
18
14
Compression
xx
23
27
0.25 0.51 0.76 1.02 1.27 1.52 1.78 2.03 2.29 2.54 2.79
SHEAR
27
18
36
B

dynamic loads.
41
5.5
(12)
9.1
(20)
11.8
(26)
4.3
(9.5)
7.3
(16)
9.5
(21)
5.9
(13)
8.2
(18)
6.4
(14)
6.10
7.11
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
See Section 1
Request Quote
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Visit Website
NEW SIZES
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Cylindrical Mounts Neoprene To 16 lbs.


FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 9 POUNDS (2 TO 4.1 kgf)
OIL-RESISTANT ELASTOMER
Fasteners Hardened Steel, Zinc Plated

Isolator Neoprene
3/8
(9.5)
1/2
(12.7)
#8-32 NC
9/16
(14.3)
32
15
28
24
C
20
SHEAR
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)

x
16
x
x
12
x
10
x
x
B
x
A
x
x
8
x
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.10
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.20
0.30
DEFLECTION (in.)

Catalog Number
Mode
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3600

V10Z 2-304A
V10Z 2-304B
V10Z 2-304C
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
Compression
Shear
8 (3.6)
4.4 (2)
12 (5.4)
6.7 (3)
16 (7.3)
9 (4.1)
4.0 (1.8)
3.1 (1.4)
2.2 (1)
6.5 (2.9)
5.2 (2.3)
3.7 (1.7)
9.0 (4.1)
6.3 (2.9)
1-24
6.2 (2.8)
1.7 (0.8) 1.3 (0.6)
10.2 (4.6)
2.8 (1.3) 2.3 (1)
4.6 (2.1) 3.6 (1.6)
4.8 (2.2)
4.0 (1.8)
3.2 (1.5) 2.7 (1.2)
8 (3.6) 6.5 (2.9) 5.4 (2.4) 4.5 (2)

1.8 (0.8)
*
*
*
14.0 (6.4) 11.6 (5.3) 9.6 (4.4)
2.9 (1.3) 2.3 (1.04) 1.9 (0.9)

*
2.0 (0.9)
*
3.2 (1.4)
*
6.8 (3.1)
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts Neoprene To 60 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 33 TO 60 POUNDS (15 TO 27.2 kgf)


Isolator Neoprene
OIL-RESISTANT ELASTOMER
1/2
(12.7)
1/4-20 NC
1
(25.4)
Note: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.
NOTE:
(1.59 mm).
90
40
80
70
50
40
x
30
SHEAR
25
20
x
A
15
20
10
10
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
3/4
(19.1)
3/4
(19.1)
51/64
(20.2)
33
(15)
60
(27.2)
60
(27.2)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
V10Z 2-306A
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-306A
V10Z 2-306C
V10Z 2-306C1
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
850
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3600
7.0
(3.2)
17.0
(7.7)
17.0
(7.7)
5.0
(2.3)
11.5
(5.2)
11.5
(5.2)
3000
3600
1.2
(0.5)
4.5
(2)
4.5
(2)
3.5
(1.6)
3.5
(1.6)
29.0
(13.2)
850
1100
21.0
(9.5)
49.0
(22.2)
49.0
(22.2)
16.0
(7.3)
37.0
(16.8)
37.0
(16.8)
12.5
(5.7)
29.5
(13.4)
29.5
(13.4)
10.5
(4.8)
24.0
(10.9)
24.0
(10.9)
Shear
V10Z 2-306C
V10Z 2-306C1
18
(8.2)
34
(15.4)
34
(15.4)
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500

16.0
(7.3)
9.3
(4.2)
24.5
(11.1)
24.5
(11.1)
7.2
(3.3)
20.0
(9.1)
20.0
(9.1)
1-25
5.0
(2.3)
14.7
(6.7)
14.7
(6.7)
C & C1
x
30
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
60
LOAD (lb.)

35
C & C1
3.8
(1.7)
11.2
(5.1)
11.2
(5.1)
2.8
(1.3)
9.0
(4.1)
9.0
(4.1)
2.3
(1)
7.5
(3.4)
7.5
(3.4)
2.3
(1)
7.5
(3.4)
7.5
(3.4)
0.30
0.35
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:


NOT RECOMMENDED FOR STATIC SHEAR LOADS

1
(25.4)
5/16-18 NC x 9/16 (14.3)

5/16-18 NC
TAPPED
.40 (10.2) DEEP MIN.
1-1/2
(38.1)

450
D
400
C
350
300
LOAD (lb.)

COMPRESSION
250
B
x
x
200
150
x
x
100
50
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-308A
V10Z 2-308B
V10Z 2-308C
V10Z 2-308D

Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1150
95
(43.1)
135
(61.2)
185
(83.9)
210
(95.3)
95
(43.1)
1250
1500
1750
2000
2750
3500
80
(36.3)
125
(56.7)
55
(24.9)
85
(38.6)
140
(63.5)
185
(83.9)
40
(18.1)
60
(27.2)
100
(45.4)
135
(61.2)
30
(13.6)
45
(20.4)
75
(34)
105
(47.6)
1-26
15
(6.8)
22
(10)
40
(18.1)
55
(24.9)
25
(11.3)
35
(15.9)
0.25
0.30
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



25
(.98)
M8
New
13.5 (.53)
M8
38
(1.50)
Metric
The projections shown are per ISO convention.

204
D
181
C

dynamic loads.
LOAD (kgf)
159
136
COMPRESSION
113
x
91
B
x
x
68
x
x
45
23
1.27
2.54
3.81
5.08
DEFLECTION (mm)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2M308AM08
V10Z 2M308BM08
V10Z 2M308CM08
V10Z 2M308DM08
Maximum
Load kgf (lb.)
1150
43.1
(95)
61.2
(135)
83.9
(185)
95.3
(210)
43.1
(95)
1250
1500
1750
2000
2750
3500
36.3
(80)
56.7
(125)
25
(55)
38.6
(85)
63.5
(140)
83.9
(185)
18.2
(40)
27.2
(60)
45.4
(100)
61.2
(135)
13.6
(30)
20.4
(45)
34
(75)
47.6
(105)
1-27
6.8
(15)
10
(22)
18.2
(40)
25
(55)
11.3
(25)
15.9
(35)
6.35
7.62
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:



1
(25.4)
1
(25.4)
5/16-18 NC TAPPED
.20 (5.1) DEEP MIN. (TYP)

120
D
100
x
LOAD (lb.)

80
COMPRESSION
x
C
x
60
x
x
40
x
20
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16 0.18
2500
3000
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z 2-319A
V10Z 2-319B
V10Z 2-319C
V10Z 2-319D

Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
37
(16.8)
48
(21.8)
57
(25.9)
86
(39)
700
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
35.0
(15.9)
24.0
(10.9)
34.0
(15.4)
46.0
(20.9)
80.0
(36.3)
1-28
18.0
(8.2)
26.0
(11.8)
32.5
(14.7)
59.0
(26.8)
13.5
(6.1)
20.5
(9.3)
26.5
(12)
48.0
(21.8)
11.0
(5)
16.0
(7.3)
20.0
(9.1)
36.0
(16.3)
13.0
(5.9)
16.0
(7.3)
30.0
(13.6)
21.0
(9.5)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
Visit Website
Cylindrical Mounts Urethane To 45 lbs.
PONENT
MATERIAL: Fasteners Steel, Zinc Plated
FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF .3 TO 45 POUNDS (0.14 TO 20.4 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF .1 TO 10 POUNDS (0.05 TO 4.5 kgf)
Isolator Urethane
TD
TD
Catalog Number
* V10Z60-MF1U0424
Durometer
Male - Female
24
V10Z60- 1U0452
52
* V10Z60- 2U0624
24
V10Z60- 2U0652
52
* V10Z60- 2U0824
24
V10Z60- 2U0852
52
V10Z60- 3U2552
52
V10Z60- 4U3152
52
Female - Blank
FEATURES:
Highly damped
Very resistant to abrasion, oils, chemicals,
ozone and ultraviolet radiation
These mounts exhibit extremely low amplification at resonance and
quickly return to system equilibrium after shock or vibration input
Load
.320
(8.1)
.200
(5.1)
.060
(1.5)
.405 .500
(10.3) (12.7)
.375
(9.5)
.060
(1.5)
.405 .500
(10.3) (12.7)
.375
(9.5)
.060
(1.5)
.500
.625 .625
(15.9) (15.9) (12.7)
.625
1.000 .750
(25.4) (19.1) (15.9)
.100
(2.5)
.100
(2.5)
.280
(7.1)
TD
lb. (kgf)
Thread
Thread
Size
Depth Cmpr.
Shear
Max.
.3
.1
(0.14) (0.05)
.110
#4-40
(2.8)
.8
2.0
(0.91) (0.36)
.3
.6
(0.27) (0.14)
.160
#6-32
(4.1)
4.0
2.0
(0.91)
(1.8)
.6
.3
(0.27) (0.14)
.160
#8-32
(4.1)
2.0
4.0
(1.8)
(0.91)
3.5
12.0
.260
1/4-20
(6.6)
(1.6)
(5.4)
45.0
10.0
.290
5/16-18
(7.4) (20.4)
(4.5)
Stiffness Ib./in. (kgf/mm)

Static
Dynamic
Cmpr. Shear Cmpr. Shear

31
(0.6)
200
(3.6)
42
(0.75)
270
(4.8)
42
(0.75)
270
(4.8)
900
(16.1)
2580
(46.1)
4
(0.07)
27
(0.5)
7
(0.13)
47
(0.84)
7
(0.13)
47
(0.84)
92
(1.6)
230
(4.1)
120
(2.1)
765
(13.7)
164
(2.9)
1049
(18.7)
164
(2.9)
1049
(18.7)
2350
(42)
6727
(120.1)
23
(0.4)
148
(2.6)
33
(0.6)
208
(3.7)
33
(0.6)
208
(3.7)
385
(6.9)
896
(16)
Temperature Range
Peak
Performacne
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
Max.
Intermittent
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
STYLE:
FB FemaleBlank
MF MaleFemale
* To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

Shear load data not applicable for FemaleBlank style.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
Request Quote
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 1
TION
RA
Buy Product
1-29
OM
MATERIAL:
P
FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF .5 TO 50 POUNDS (0.23 TO 22.7 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS OF .2 TO 13 POUNDS (0.09 TO 5.9 kgf)

Isolator Urethane
Male - Male
Catalog Number
Male - Blank
Durometer
1U0424
24
V10Z60-
1U0452
52
* V10Z60-MB2U0624
* V10Z60-
24
V10Z60-
2U0652
52
* V10Z60-
2U0824
24
V10Z60-
2U0852
52
V10Z60-
3U2552
52
V10Z60-
4U3152
52
.280
(7.1)
.320
(8.1)
.200
(5.1)
.060
(1.5)
.405
(10.3)
.500
(12.7)
.375
(9.5)
.060
(1.5)
.405
(10.3)
.500
(12.7)
.375
(9.5)
.060
(1.5)
.625
(15.9)
1.000
(25.4)
.625
(15.9)
.750
(19.1)
.500
(12.7)
.625
(15.9)
.100
(2.5)
.100
(2.5)
FEATURES:
Highly damped
Very resistant to abrasion, oils, chemicals,
ozone and ultraviolet radiation
These mounts exhibit extremely low amplification at resonance and
quickly return to system equilibrium after shock or vibration input
Thread
Size
Load
lb. (kgf)
Stiffness Ib./in. (kgf/mm)

Static
Dynamic
Cmpr.
Shear Cmpr. Shear Cmpr. Shear
Max.
40
9
25
3
.5
.2
(0.05)
(0.7) (0.16)
(0.23) (0.09)
(0.4)
#4-40
19
262
59
1.5
159
4.0
(4.7) (1.1)
(2.8)
(0.3)
(1.8)
(0.7)
12
4
45
.4
31
1.0
(0.8) (0.22)
(0.6)
(0.07)
(0.45) (0.18)
#6-32
74
200
24
285
8.0
3.0
(0.4)
(5.1) (1.3)
(1.36)
(3.6)
(3.6)
45
12
31
4
1.0
.4
(0.07)
(0.8) (0.22)
(0.45) (0.18)
(0.6)
#8-32
74
285
3.0
200
24
8.0
(5.1) (1.3)
(3.6)
(0.4)
(3.6)
(1.36)
120
320
35
471
5.0
20.0
1/4-20
(0.6)
(8.4) (2.1)
(2.3)
(5.7)
(9.1)
1108
270
75
50.0
13.0
860
5/16-18
(22.7)
(5.9)
(15.4)
(1.3)
(19.8) (4.8)
STYLE:
MB MaleBlank
MM MaleMale
Temperature Range
Peak
Performacne
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+32F to +90F
(0C to +32.2C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
+55F to +105F
(+12.8C to +40.5C)
Max.
Intermittent
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+120F
(+48.9C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+225F
(+107.2C)
+225F
(+107.2C)

Shear load data not applicable for MaleBlank style.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
Visit Website
Cylindrical Mounts Urethane To 50 lbs.
PONENT
Request Quote
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 1
TION
RA
Buy Product
1-30
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts Sorbothane Type
Studs Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated

Damper Sorbothane Polyether-Based Polyurethane
50 or 70 Shore 00 Durometer
B
New
A
D
Fig. 1
VIBRATION ISOLATION SHOCK ABSORPTION

LONG FATIGUE LIFE
Fig. 2
B
A
D
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20F to +160F (-29C to +72C)
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
Thread
Size
A
Diameter
B
C
D
Damper Width Stud Length Thread Depth
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.75
(19.05)
1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.45)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
.85
(21.59)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
Load Range Per

Mount lb. (kgf)
50 Durometer
#8-32
V10Z59-MM0807550
V10Z59-MM2515050
1/4-20
V10Z59-MM2517550
1/4-20
V10Z59-MF0807550
#8-32
V10Z59-MF2515050
1/4-20
V10Z59-MF2517550
1/4-20
V10Z59-MB0807550
#8-32
V10Z59-MB2515050
1/4-20
V10Z59-MB2517550
1/4-20
V10Z59-FB0807550
#8-32
V10Z59-FB2515050
1/4-20
1/4-20
V10Z59-FB2517550
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.25
(6.35)
.35
(8.89)
.35
(8.89)
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.25
(6.35)
.35
(8.89)
.35
(8.89)
4-8
(1.8-3.6)
11-16
(5-7.3)
20-40
(9.1-18.1)
3-6
(1.4-2.7)
11-18
(5-8.2)
20-40
(9.1-18.1)
3-5
(1.4-2.3)
11-18
(5-8.2)
20-40
(9.1-18.1)
3-5
(1.4-2.3)
11-18
(5-8.2)
20-40
(9.1-18.1)
70 Durometer
#8-32
V10Z59-MM0807570
V10Z59-MM2515070
1/4-20
V10Z59-MM2517570
1/4-20
V10Z59-MF0807570
#8-32
V10Z59-MF2515070
1/4-20
V10Z59-MF2517570
1/4-20
V10Z59-MB0807570
#8-32
V10Z59-MB2515070
1/4-20
V10Z59-MB2517570
1/4-20
V10Z59-FB0807570
#8-32
V10Z59-FB2515070
V10Z59-FB2517570
1/4-20
1/4-20
See additional information on technical page.
1-31
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.25
(6.35)
.35
(8.89)
.35
(8.89)
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.25
(6.35)
.35
(8.89)
.35
(8.89)
8-12
(3.6-5.4)
19-27
(8.6-12.2)
35-75
(15.9-34)
5-12
(2.3-5.4)
18-30
(8.2-13.6)
36-75
(16.3-34)
6-8
(2.7-3.6)
18-27
(8.2-12.2)
35-75
(15.9-34)
6-8
(2.7-3.6)
18-27
(8.2-12.2)
35-75
(15.9-34)
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
See Section 1
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Cylindrical Mounts Sorbothane Type

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Studs Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated

Damper Sorbothane Polyether-Based Polyurethane
50 or 70 Shore 00 Durometer
New
B
C
A
D
Fig. 1
B
VIBRATION ISOLATION SHOCK ABSORPTION

LONG FATIGUE LIFE
Fig. 2
B
Metric
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -29C to +72C (-20F to +162F)
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
Thread
Size
A
Diameter
B
C
D
Damper Width Stud Length Thread Depth
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
38.1
(1.5)
44.5
(1.75)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
25.4
(1.00)
21.6
(.85)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
Load Range
Per Mount
kgf
(lb.)
50 Durometer
V10Z59MMM638150
1
V10Z59MMM644550
V10Z59MMF638150
2
V10Z59MMF644550
M6
V10Z59MMB638150
3
V10Z59MMB644550
V10Z59MFB638150
4
V10Z59MFB644550
12
(.47)
13.1
(.52)
13.1
(.52)
5-7
(11-15.4)
9-18
(19.8-39.7)
5-8
(11-17.6)
9-18
(19.8-39.7)
5-8
(11-17.6)
9-18
(19.8-39.7)
5-8
(11-17.6)
9-18
(19.8-39.7)
70 Durometer
V10Z59MMM638170
1
V10Z59MMM644570
V10Z59MMF638170
2
V10Z59MMF644570
M6
V10Z59MMB638170
3
V10Z59MMB644570
V10Z59MFB638170
4
V10Z59MFB644570
See additional information on technical page.
1-32
12
(.47)
13.1
(.52)
13.1
(.52)
8-12
(17.6-26.5)
16-34
(35.3-75)
8-13
(17.6-28.7)
16-34
(35.3-75)
8-12
(17.6-26.5)
16-34
(35.3-75)
8-12
(17.6-26.5)
16-34
(35.3-75)
ADVA
ANTIV
IB
TION
RA
D
CE
OM
PONENT
Sorbothane Technical Information

Inch/Metric
Material Properties of Sorbothane
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
206.06 (1.42)
399
25.47 (0.18)
66.18 (0.46)
54.86 (0.38)
127.02 (0.88)
80.13 (0.55)
165.95 (1.14)
12.00 (0.08)
30.00 (0.21)
105.00 (0.72)
232.00 (1.60)
48.73 (8.58)
2.86 (4.15 x 10-5)
65.26 (11.49)
10.4
4.1
5
3
2
psi (N/mm2)
lb./in. (N/mm)
Pascal (psi)
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.07
2.6
2.5
84.9 (1.36)
1.363
-20 to +160
(-29 to +71)
-34.7 (-37)
lb./ft3 (g/cm3)
570 (299)
F (C)
750 (399)
F (C)
V2
V2
11
22
20
15
25
%
V/mil (kV/mm)
105 (0.72)
120 (0.83)
150 (1.03)
162 (1.12)
210 (1.45)
237 (1.63)
270 (1.86)
300 (2.07)
.56
.56
.58
.60
.57
.59
.50
.55
1.0
F/Fn
10
Transmissibility of Sorbothane and other materials

as a function of the Excitation Frequency/Natural Frequency Ratio
C (F)
261 (10.3)
25
psi (N/mm2)
Impulse
Butyl
Neoprene
10
SORBOTHANE 50 DURO
5
0
-5
-10
-1.4
% wt change
10
Time (ms)
15
20
25
Response of Sorbothane and other materials to an Impulse
No growth
No growth
Stable
Good
Special item
6.4
0.5
F (C)
18
SORBOTHANE 50 DURO SHORE 00

c/cc = 0.4
0.7
0.1
256 (10.1)
NEOPRENE 85 DURO SHORE 00

c/cc = 0.15
1.0
85.5 (1.37)
1.364
-20 to +150
(-29 to +66)
-37.4 (-38.6)
4.3
NAT. RUBBER 80 DURO SHORE 00

c/cc = 0.05
psi (N/mm2)
%
Transmissibility
122.61 (0.85)
568
10
Units
G-Force
Tensile Strength at Break

Elongation at Break
Tensile Elastic Stress at
100% Strain
200% Strain
300% Strain
Compressive Stress at
20% Strain
Compressive Stress at
50% Strain
Tear Strength
Bulk Modulus
Static Coefficient of
Friction
Kinetic Coefficient of
Friction
Density
Specific Gravity
Optimum Performance
Temperature Range
Glass Transition
Flash Ignition
Flammability
Self Ignition Flammability
Flammability Rating with
Flame Retardent Added
Resilience Test
Rebound Height
Resilience Test
Rebound Height
Dielectric Strength
Dynamic Young's
Modulus at 5 Hertz
Dynamic Young's
Modulus at 15 Hertz
Dynamic Young's
Modulus at 30 Hertz
Dynamic Young's
Modulus at 50 Hertz
Tangent Delta at
5 Hertz Excitation
Tangent Delta at
15 Hertz Excitation
Tangent Delta at
30 Hertz Excitation
Tangent Delta at
50 Hertz Excitation
Bacterial Resistance
Fungal Resistance
Heat Aging
Ultraviolet
Ozone
Chemical Resistance to
Hydraulic Fluid
Kerosene
Diesel
Soap Solution
Durometer (Shore 00)

50
70
Normalized Load
(lb.)
Property
5.0
1.2
1
0.8
NR
0.6
0.4
SORBOTHANE
50 DURO
0.2
0
10
15
20
25
Percent Deflection
30
35
Hysteresis Response of Sorbothane and Natural Rubber
1-33
40
M PONENT
Technical Information for Silicone Gel Mounts

New
Metric
General Characteristics
V10Z61MA1
V10Z61MA2 & V10Z61MB1
V10Z61MB2 & V10Z61MSF10
Specific Gravity
Hardness
1.05
1.06
1.07
Needle*
Penetration
(1/10 mm)
55
Asker C**
33
52.5
Specific Heat
J/g x K (Btu /lb. x F)
1.52
(.36)
1.51
(.36)
1.52
(.36)
Thermal
Conductivity
W/m x K
[Btu/(h x ft. x F)]
0.2
(.12)
0.2
(.12)
0.2
(.12)
Volume
Resistance
Ohm x cm
(Ohm x in.)
4.0 x 1014
(1.6 x 1014)
3.2 x 1014
(1.3 x 1014)
6.6 x 1014
(2.6 x 1014)
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
+
+
-
-40C to 200C
(-40F to 392F)
-40C to 200C
(-40F to 392F)
-40C to 200C
(-40F to 392F)
Catalog Number
Quantity of Deflection mm (in.)
Load at Deflection kgf (lb.)
V10Z61MTHB
V10Z61MTHA
V10Z61MTHC
V10Z61MTHTW
V10Z61MMN03
V10Z61MMN05
V10Z61MMN07
V10Z61MMN10
V10Z61MSF02
V10Z61MSF05
V10Z61MSF10
6.3 1 (.248 .04)

3.3 1 (.130 .04)
5 1 (.197 .04)
4.4 0.5 (.173 .02)
Chemical
Resistance
Toluene
Acetone
Methanol
Distilled H20
Fuel
Lubricant
NaCl (10%)
HCL (10%)
NaOH (5%)
Temperature
Range
+ = Has a Reaction
- = No Reaction
3.5 1
0.010
0.010
0.026
0.208
0.031
0.052
0.073
0.104
0.031
0.078
0.146
(.138 .04)
4 0.5 (.157 .02)
*JIS K 2207
**Japan Rubber Association Standard (SRIS 0101)
1-34
(.022)
(.022)
(.057)
(.459)
(.068)
(.115)
(.161)
(.229)
(.068)
(.172)
(.322)
S E C T I O N 1
CO
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Proper Application of Silicone Gel Mounts

RIGHT USE
New
Metric
FEATURES:
1. EVEN LOAD
Highest damping effect arises when gel is
INSTALLED SURFACE
compressed 10% up to 30%.
Low in temperature dependency, this material

offers stable performance from -40C to 200C
(-40F to 392F).
Excellent chemical resistance.

Low in compression set.
Performance stays the same even after
repeated use.
2. HANG IN COMPRESSIVE DIRECTION
Contains nothing harmful. Environment-friendly.
WRONG USE
3. TWIST
1. UNEVEN LOAD
4. TENSILE
DIRECTION
2. BOLT HOLE OUT OF CENTER

5. SHEARING
DIRECTION
1-35
S E C T I O N 1
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Double-Studded Silicone Gel Vibration Mounts
Studs Fig.1 & 2: Brass, Nickel Plated; Fig. 3: Iron,

Unichro Plated
Body Silicone Gel
28
(1.1)
20
(.79)
M6
12 (.47)
New
M6
17 (.67)
20 (.79)
M4
DAMPS LOW FREQUENCY VIBRATIONS

FOR SMALL TO INTERMEDIATE LOAD APPLICATIONS
TO BE USED IN COMPRESSION ONLY
15 (.59)
h
h
h
18
(.71)
Fig. 1
25
(.98)
35
(1.38)
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Note: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.
Metric
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40C to +200C (-40F to +392F)
V10Z61MTHB
1
V10Z61MTHA
V10Z61MTHC
V10Z61MTHTW
MATERIAL:
Optimum Load
Fig.
Number
Catalog Number
kgf / leg (lb./leg)
Resonance
Point
Resonance
Magnification
Hz
dB
Recommended
Frequency
Hz
0.4 to 0.6 (.9 to 1.3)
13 to 11
13 to 12
18
0.5 to 0.8 (1.1 to 1.8)
16 to 15
12
23
0.8 to 2
(1.8 to 4.4)
14 to 12
13 to 12
12.5 to 25 (27.6 to 55.1)
10 to 8
20 to 19
20
from 14
18 (.71)
12 (.47)
18 (.71)
25 (.98)
Studs Iron, Unichro Plated

Body Silicone Gel
New
M6
18 (.71)
22 (.87)
30
(1.18)
24
(.94)

Optimum Load
Catalog Number*
kgf / leg (lb./leg)

2
Resonance
Point
Resonance
Magnification
Hz
dB
Recommended
Frequency
Hz
to 3.5 (4.4 to 7.7)
12 to 10
12
17
**V10Z61MMN05
3.5 to 5.5 (7.7 to 12.1)
11 to 10
14 to 13
16
V10Z61MMN07
5.5 to 8.5 (12.1 to 18.7)
11 to 10
16 to 15
V10Z61MMN10
8.5 to 12.5 (18.7 to 27.6)
11 to 10
20 to 18
V10Z61MMN03
h
mm (in.)
See application page for proper usage.

**See page 2-3 for Transmissibility Chart.
* This type is slotted on the stud for fixing a bolt.
1-36
16
16
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Ring Mounts To 20 lbs.

FOR LOADS OF 1 TO 20 POUNDS (0.45 TO 9.07 kgf)
Fasteners Steel, Cadmium Plated

LOAD
W
L
NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)
CURVE 1
40
35
30
25
121
20
112
111 122
15
10
0
CURVE 2
35
30
25
20
5
0
V10Z 8-112
V10Z 8-111
1
V10Z 8-122
V10Z 8-121
V10Z 8-132
2
V10Z 8-131
V10Z 8-142
3
V10Z 8-141
lb.
(kgf)
1.0
(0.45)
2.0
(0.91)
2.5
(1.13)
3.0
(1.36)
5.0
(2.27)
8.0
(3.63)
13.0
(5.9)
20.0
(9.07)
#6-32
.50
(12.7)
.51
(13)
.62
(15.7)
.75
(19.1)
#10-32
1/4 - 20
5/16 -18
30
25
20
15
141
10
.56
(14.2)
.53
(13.5)
1.56
(39.6)
.31
(7.9)
.58
(14.7)
.68
(17.3)
.68
(17.3)
1.93
(49)
.34
(8.6)
.81
(20.6)
.93
(23.6)
1.00
(25.4)
2.54
(64.5)
.53
(13.5)
.62
1.45
(36.8) (36.8)
1.75
(44.5)
1.62
(41.1)
3.00
(76.2)
.75
(19.1)
1-37
CURVE 3
Static "K" is approximately 1/2 to 1/3 Dynamic Rate.

35
(No
(Load) Load)
LOAD PER MOUNT (lb.)
Dimensions
Rated Load
Curve
132
10
Catalog Number
131
15
5
0
142
5
10
15
20
"K"
"C"
Dynamic
Spring Rate Damping
lb. / in.
Constant
(kgf / mm)
90
(1.6)
155
(2.77)
63
(1.13)
77
(1.38)
137
(2.45)
210
(3.75)
122
(2.18)
172
(3.07)
.193
.376
.025
.058
.027
.174
.136
.262
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Ring Mounts
FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 75 TO 1200 kgf
Mounting Plates Steel, plated

Isolators Natural Rubber
(165 TO 2645 lb.)
TWO RING MOUNTS

L
d1
d2
d1
Style 2HH
Style 2BB
Style 2NN
Metric
THREE RING MOUNTS

d2
d2
d1
FEATURES:
Low natural frequency
Constant natural frequency
in a wide range of load
Excellent stability
Multiple layers are possible
Very easy to install
Style 3HH
Style 3BB
APPLICATIONS
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS
BLOWERS
TRANSFORMERS
Style 3NN
COMBINATION MOUNTS
LIGHTWEIGHT MACHINES
OFFICE EQUIPMENT
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
SCALES
CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION

V10Z47MRM
Load Code
Style HN
Style HB
Mounting Style:
(see drawings at left)
HH, BB, NN, HN, HB or BN
Style BN
Load
Code
No.
0602
0603
0802
0803
1202
1203
1602
1603
2302
2303
Rings
NOTE: These combination mounts shown

above are also available with three rings.
Load Range
Standard
Load
kgf
2
75
3
2
150
3
2
300
3
2
600
3
2
1200
3
lb.
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
kgf
165 25...100
lb.
55...220
331 50...200 110...441

661 100...400 220...882
1322 200...800 440...1763
2645 400...1600 882...3526
Defl. with *Nat.

Std. Load Freq.
mm
11
15
14
20
20
30
27
41
38
57
d1
d2
in. (cpm) mm in. mm in. Thread mm

35 1.38
.43 450
M8
60 2.36
11
51 2.00
.59 370
46 1.81
.55 380
M10 13
80 3.15
67 2.64
.79 320
66 2.60
.79 310
M12 15
120 4.72
97 3.82
1.18 260
86 3.39
1.06 270
M16 19
160 6.30
126 4.96
1.61 220
114 4.49
1.50 230
M16 19
230 9.06
168 6.61
2.24 190
*The natural frequency of 1 layer is 2 layers natural frequency x
1-38
L
in.
mm
in.
30
1.18
.59
35
1.38
.75
55
2.17
.75
55
2.17
.43
.51
S E C T I O N 1
See Section 1
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
SECTION 2
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
Base Mounts Flange Type

Isolator Ozone-Resistant Natural Rubber (55 Shore A)

EXCELLENT TEAR RESISTANCE
Bolt DIN 976
STUD IS REMOVABLE FOR FEMALE THREAD ATTACHMENT
Nut DIN 934 Washer DIN 9021

Base Carbon Steel
D
New
D
C
A
A
I
L
I
L
FIG. 1
13.52
(.532)
Metric
FIG. 2
d1
d2
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10Z77MAGB-30B
V10Z77MAGB-D30B
mm
(in.)
30
(1.18)
38
(1.50)
V10Z77MAGB-D30
mm
(in.)
24
(.94)
V10Z77MAGB-30
mm
(in.)
48
(1.89)
mm
(in.)
88
(3.46)
mm
(in.)
63.6
(2.50)
M8
d1
mm
(in.)
8
(.315)
d2
Maximum
mm
(in.)
Load
N
(lb.)
4
(.157)
300
(67.4)
450
(101.2)
500
(112.4)
700
(157.4)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
4
(.16)
7
(.28)
Minimum
Load
N
(lb.)
50
(11.2)
100
(22.5)
150
(33.7)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
Admissible
Temporary
Overload
1
(.039)
30
2
(.079)
PERFORMANCE Graph
V10Z77MAGB-D30
700
Did You Know?
600
500
V10Z77MAGB-D30B
V10Z77MAGB-30
400
V10Z77MAGB-30B
300
200
...That Advanced Antivibration

Components is well-equipped to
handle an entire project from the
design and manufacturing of individual
components to the assembly of final
products? We are dedicated to quality
products and on time delivery.
100
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
2-2
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
See Section 2
Request Quote
Base Mounts Silicone Gel Type


FOR SMALL TO INTERMEDIATE LOAD APPLICATIONS
CAN BE USED WHEN SPACE IS LIMITED
Stud Steel, Trivalent Chromate Plated

Body Silicone Gel
Flange Plate Stainless Steel
60
(2.36)
46
(1.81)
2-R6
(.24)
24
(.94)
30
(1.18)
SLOTTED
M6
36
(1.42)
2-4.2x6(.17 x .24)
LONG HOLE
18 (.71)
60
22 (.87)
Metric
Optimum Load
Catalog Number
kgf/leg (lb./leg)
V10Z61MSF02
1.25 to 3.25 (2.8 to 7.2)
V10Z61MSF05
3.25 to 7.5
V10Z61MSF10
7.5 to 12.5 (16.5 to 27.6)
(7.2 to 16.5)
Typical Characteristics of the Silicone GEL TYPE Mounts

(Example Shown: V10Z61MMN05)
100
TRANSMISSIBILITY
31.7
Load: 20 kgf / 4 Legs

(44.1 lb./4 Legs)
Vibration Level: 0.2G
Silicone Dampers
10
3.17
Damping Rubber
Resonance Point
Resonance Magnification
1
0.315
0.1
0.0315
0.01
20
40
60
80
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
2-3
100
Silicone Rubber
Dampers Dampers
9.5 Hz
6.5
19.8 Hz
8.8
Buy Product
See Section 2
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:

Request Quote
Visit Website
Platemounts To 20 lbs.

Base Steel or Aluminum
1.25
(31.8)
1.0
(25.4)
.165
(4.2)
.17
(4.3)
.75
(19.1)
.035
(0.89)
SECTION X-X
1.0
(25.4)
40
LOAD (lb.)
.46
(11.7)
LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH
Maximum Recommended
Static Load/Deflection
.17
(4.3)
30
20
C
B
10
.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
1.414
(35.9)
.10
Base Type
Square
1.25
(31.8)
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1210B1
V10Z40-1210C1
V10Z40-1210D1
V10Z40-1210C3
Base Type
Diamond
Aluminum
Steel
V10Z40-1210A2
V10Z40-1210B2
V10Z40-1210C2
V10Z40-1210D2
V10Z40-1210B4
V10Z40-1210C4
V10Z40-1210D4
.165
(4.2)
1.68
(42.7)
Catalog
Number
NOTE: The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum).
Load
Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
A
B
C
D
4 (1.8)
8 (3.6)
12 (5.4)
20 (9.1)
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
1900
2500
3000
4000
4
8
12
20
(1.8)
(3.6)
(5.4)
(9.1)
2
4
7
11
(0.9)
(1.8)
(3.2)
(5)
1.5
3.0
5.0
8.0
(0.7)
(1.4)
(2.3)
(3.6)
1
2
3
5
2-4
(0.5)
(0.9)
(1.4)
(2.3)
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:

1.78
(45.2)
S E C T I O N 2
Maximum Recommended Static Load/Deflection
DL
30
DK
25
.16 DIA.
(4)
1.38
(35)X
LOAD (lb.)
DD
20
CK
CC
15
BK
10
BB
5
AA
0
.05
.26
(6.6)
.10
DEFLECTION (in.)
.39
(9.9)
.20 (5.1)
.63
(16)
.050
(1.3)
Base Type
Square
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1215BB1
V10Z40-1215BK1
V10Z40-1215CC1
V10Z40-1215CK1
V10Z40-1215DD1
V10Z40-1215DK1
V10Z40-1215DL1
V10Z40-1215BB3
V10Z40-1215CC3
V10Z40-1215CK3
V10Z40-1215DL3
Base Type
Diamond
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1215AA2
V10Z40-1215BB2
V10Z40-1215BK2
V10Z40-1215CC2
V10Z40-1215DD2
V10Z40-1215AA4
V10Z40-1215BB4
V10Z40-1215CC4
V10Z40-1215CK4
V10Z40-1215DD4
V10Z40-1215DK4
1.50
(38.1)
SECTION X-X
1.95
(5)
1.78
(45.2)
2.34
(59.4)
.16 DIA.
(4)
NOTE: 1. The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum).
2. The above platemounts may be discontinued but are still available in large quantities.
Load
Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)

1600
1750
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000

AA
BB
BK
CC
CK
DD
DK
DL
3 (1.4)
6 (2.7)
9 (4.1)
12 (5.4)
14 (6.4)
17 (7.7)
20 (9.1)
26 (11.8)
3 (1.4)
6 (2.7)
9 (4.1)
12 (5.4)
14 (6.4)
17 (7.7)
20 (9.1)
26 (11.8)
2
5
7
9
11
13
16
20
(0.9) 1.7 (0.8) 1.0

(2.3) 3.5 (1.6) 2.0
(3.2) 5.0 (2.3) 3.0
(4.1) 7.0 (3.2) 4.5
(5)
9.0 (4.1) 5.5
(5.9) 11.0 (5)
6.5
(7.3) 12.0 (5.4) 8.0
(9.1) 16.0 (7.3) 10.0
(0.5)
(0.9)
(1.4)
(2)
(2.5)
(2.9)
(3.6)
(4.5)
.8
1.6
2.4
3.0
4.0
5.0
5.5
7.0
(0.4)
(0.7)
(1.1)
(1.4)
(1.8)
(2.3)
(2.5)
(3.2)
2-5
.6
1.2
1.7
2.2
2.8
3.4
4.0
5.0
(0.3)
(0.5)
(0.8)
(1)
(1.3)
(1.5)
(1.8)
(2.3)
.4
.8
1.3
1.7
2.2
2.6
3.0
4.0
(0.2)
(0.4)
(0.6)
(0.8)
(1)
(1.2)
(1.4)
(1.8)
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:

S E C T I O N 2
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
2.25
(57.2)
1.75
(44.5) X
LOAD (lb.)
.19 DIA.
(4.8)
.34
(8.6)
.391
(9.9)
.56
(14.2)
1.0
(25.4)
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Maximum Recommended
.062
(1.57)
DK
DD
CC
BB
AA
.05
.10
.15
.20
.25
DEFLECTION (in.)
2.00
(50.8)
SECTION X-X
2.475
(62.9)
2.25
(57.2)
.19 DIA.
(4.8)
2.98
(75.7)
Base Type
Square
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1260CC3
V10Z40-1260DD3
V10Z40-1260DK3
Base Type
Diamond
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1260AA2
V10Z40-1260CC2
V10Z40-1260DD2
V10Z40-1260DK2
V10Z40-1260AA4
V10Z40-1260BB4
V10Z40-1260CC4
V10Z40-1260DD4
V10Z40-1260DK4
Load
Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)

1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
3500

AA
BB
CC
DD
DK
12 (5.4)
20 (9.1)
30 (13.6)
45 (20.4)
60 (27.2)
12 (5.4) 10 (4.5)
20 (9.1) 16 (7.3)
30 (13.6) 23 (10.4)
45 (20.4) 35 (15.9)
60 (27.2) 47 (21.3)
7 (3.2) 5 (2.3)
11 (5)
7 (3.2)
15 (6.8) 11 (5)
23 (10.4) 17 (7.7)
31 (14.1) 22 (10)
3
6
9
13
17
(1.4)
(2.7)
(4.1)
(5.9)
(7.7)
2-6
2
4
5
8
11
(0.9)
(1.8)
(2.3)
(3.6)
(5)
2
3
4
6
7
(0.9)
(1.4)
(1.8)
(2.7)
(3.2)
1
2
3
4
6
(0.5)
(0.9)
(1.4)
(1.8)
(2.7)
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:

2.25
(57.2)
90
S E C T I O N 2
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Maximum Recommended
DD
80
CK
1.75
(44.5) X
70
LOAD (lb.)
60
.19 DIA.
(4.8)
.399 10.1
.386 ( 9.8 )
.22
(5.6)
CC
50
BK
40
BB
30
.59
(15)
20
1.000
(25.4)
10
.062
(1.6)
2.00
(50.8)
.02 .04 .06 .08 .10 .12 .14
DEFLECTION (in.)
SECTION X-X
2.475
(62.9)
2.25
(57.2)
2.98
(75.7)
.19 DIA.
(4.8)
Base Type
Square
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1220BK1
V10Z40-1220DD1
V10Z40-1220BB3
V10Z40-1220CC3
V10Z40-1220DD3
Base Type
Diamond
Aluminum
Steel
Catalog
Number
V10Z40-1220DD2
V10Z40-1220BB4
V10Z40-1220BK4
V10Z40-1220CK4
V10Z40-1220DD4
Load
Rating
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)

1325
1750
2000
2500
3500
3000
4000

BB
BK
CC
CK
DD
30
40
50
70
90
(13.6)
(18.1)
(22.7)
(31.8)
(40.8)
30
40
50
70
90
(13.6)
(18.1)
(22.7)
(31.8)
(40.8)
17
23
29
40
52
(7.7)
(10.4)
(13.2)
(18.1)
(23.6)
13 (5.9)
18 (8.2)
22 (10)
31 (14.1)
40 (18.1)
8.4 (3.8)
11.0 (5)
14.0 (6.4)
20.0 (9.1)
25.0 (11.3)
6.0
7.8
10.0
14.0
18.0
(2.7) 4.3 (2)

3.3
(3.5) 5.7 (2.6) 4.4
(4.5) 7.2 (3.3) 5.5
(6.4) 10.0 (4.5) 7.0
(8.2) 13.0 (5.9) 10.0
2-7
(1.5)
(2)
(2.5)
(3.2)
(4.5)
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:

FOR LOADS OF 440 TO 760 POUNDS (200 TO 344.7 kgf)

Base Steel
S E C T I O N 2
.687 DIA.
(17.4)
3.25 (82.6)
2.90 (73.7) DIA.

MAX.
1.14
(29)
.135
(3.4)
Maximum Recommended
2.25
(57.2)
1000
800
2.26 (57.4) DIA.
LOAD (lb.)
2.75 (69.9) DIA.

.406 DIA.
(10.3)
600
C
B
400
200
0
.05
.10
.15
DEFLECTION (in.)
4.25 (108)
5.25 (133.4)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load
lb. (kgf)

1300
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
V10Z40-1280B
440
(200)
440
(200)
300
(136)
160
(72.6)
100
(45.4)
70
(31.8)
50
(22.7)
40
(18.1)
A10Z40-1280C
560
(254)
560
(254)
380
(172.4)
200
(90.7)
120
(54.4)
90
(40.8)
60
(27.2)
50
(22.7)
A10Z40-1280D
760
(344.7)
760
(344.7)
520
(235.9)
270
(122.5)
170
(77.1)
120
(54.4)
90
(40.8)
70
(31.8)
NOTE: The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum).
2-8
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Housing Zinc Plated Steel with

Clear Dichromate Sealer
Isolator Rubber
S E C T I O N 2
13/64
(5.2)
17/64 DIA. HOLE
(6.7)
2-3/8
(60.3)
1-15/16
(49.2)
1-15/16
(49.2)
2-3/8
(60.3)
Assembled style V10Z 4- mounts are supplied with rubber

bushings and rings permanently installed within a convenient
cadmium plated metal mounting cup. Load is supported by the
top surface of the assembly which has a 17/64 (6.7 mm) diameter
clearance hole to accommodate a screw fastener from the load
member. The cup base dimensions and mounting hole pattern
conform to MIL size 2 specifications. The rubber isolation
members are similiar to the FINGER-FLEX V10R 4-1504
and V10R 5-1505 series.
23/32
(18.3)
V10R 4-1504
1-1/8
(28.6)
V10R 4-1505
3/64
(1.2)
NATURAL FREQUENCY: 630 Hz
V10Z 4-1550D
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
40
40
30
20
10
0
V10Z 4-1550A
10
15
20
20
V10Z 4-1550A
10
0
25
.02
Load Type Compression,

lb. (kgf) per mount
.04
.06
DEFLECTION (in.)
NATURAL FREQUENCY (Hz)
Catalog Number
V10Z 4-1550D
30
Approximate Hardness
Durometer
min.
max.
V10Z 4-1550A
6 (2.7)
20 (9.1)
30
V10Z 4-1550D
15 (16.8)
37 (16.8)
60
2-9
.08
.10
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
See Section 2
Visit Website
FOR LOADS UP TO 50 POUNDS (110.2 kgf)
Fasteners Steel, Zinc Chromate

Isolator Rubber
Request Quote
Fig. 1
V10R 4-1505
1-15/32
(37.3)
1-1/16
(27)
V10R 4-1504
V10R 4-1505
50
40
30
20
10
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
40
NATURAL FREQUENCY: 630 Hz
V10Z 4-1552D
30
20
V10Z 4-1552A
10
0
.04
.08
.12
.16
DEFLECTION (in.)
.20
V10Z 4-1552D
V10Z 4-1552A
.24
10
25
20
15
NATURAL FREQUENCY-Hz
Fig. 2
V10R 4-1505
1-13/16
(46)
V10R 4-1504
1-13/32
(35.7)
V10R 4-1504
V10R 4-1505
NATURAL FREQUENCY: 6-30 Hz

V10Z 4-1553D
30
20
V10Z 4-1553A
10
0
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
40
.04
.08
.12
.16
.20
.24
DEFLECTION (in.)
Catalog Number
Approximate
Hardness Durometer
V10Z 4-1552A
30
V10Z 4-1552D
60
V10Z 4-1553A
30
V10Z 4-1553D
60
FIG 1
FIG 2
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
2-10
50
40
30
20
10
0
V10Z 4-1553D
V10Z 4-1553A
5
10
NATURAL FREQUENCY-Hz
11
12
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:

See Section 2
FOR LOADS OF 33 TO 135 POUNDS (15 TO 61 kgf)

Base Steel, Zinc Plated
Deflections below the line x---x
are useful for calculating deflections
1/4 - 20
UNC TAP
5/8 DP
(15.9)
X
2-3/8
(60.3)
150
100
CC
50
1.50 DIA.
(38.1)
x
.67
(17)
1.13
(28.7)
1.44
(36.6)
DK
DD
LOAD (lb.)
SECTION X-X
.19
(4.8)
.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
BB
AA
.10
.035
(0.89)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Rating
1600
1750
2000
V10Z40-1240AA
33
(15)
33
(15)
27
(12.2)
V10Z40-1240BB
42
(19.1)
42
(19.1)
V10Z40-1240CC
62
(28.1)
V10Z40-1240DD
V10Z40-1240DK
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
Visit Website
Cup Mounts To 135 lbs.
1-15/16
(49.2)
13/64 DIA.
(5.2)
Request Quote
2500
3000
3500
4000
22
(10)
14
(6.4)
10
(4.5)
7
(3.2)
6
(2.7)
34
(15.4)
28
(12.7)
18
(8.2)
13
(5.9)
9
(4.1)
7
(3.2)
62
(28.1)
51
(23.1)
42
(19.1)
27
(12.2)
19
(8.6)
14
(6.4)
11
(5)
90
(40.8)
90
(40.8)
74
(33.6)
60
(27.2)
39
(17.7)
28
(12.7)
20
(9.1)
16
(7.3)
135
(61.2)
135
(61.2)
114
(51.7)
93
(42.2)
60
(27.2)
43
(19.5)
30
(13.6)
24
(10.9)
lb. (kgf)
Maximum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)
2-11
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
Base Mounts Cylindrical Type
LATERAL STIFFNESS 3 TO 4 TIMES GREATER THAN AXIAL STIFFNESS

Base Carbon Steel
DM
D
C
A1
L
l
Metric
DM
Catalog Number*
mm
(in.)
A1
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
V10Z74MMG074-4
V10Z74MMG074-6
V10Z74MMG092-6
V10Z74MMG124-4
V10Z74MMG124-7
Max. Load
in Compression
Deflection
N (lb.)
mm
(in.)
700
(157)
1200
(270)
1750
(393)
1400
(315)
2000
(450)
3600
(809)
8000
(1798)
3
(.12)
2.5
(.10)
2
(.08)
4
(.16)
3
(.12)
5
(.20)
4
(.16)
45
74
(2.91)
53
(2.09)
42
(1.65)
M10
72
(2.84)
9
(.35)
90
(3.54)
32
(1.26)
V10Z74MMG074-7
V10Z74MMG092-4
Hardness
Shore A
60
75
92
(3.62)
63
(2.48)
53
(2.09)
M12
90
(3.54)
11
(.43)
114
(4.49)
36
(1.42)
124
(4.88)
94
(3.70)
75
(2.95)
M16
114
(4.49)
13
(.51)
144
(5.67)
60
(2.36)
45
60
45
75
PERFORMANCE GRAPHS
1800
V10Z74MMG074-7
1500
900
V10Z74MMG074-4
600
V10Z74MMG092-6
2000
V10Z74MMG074-6
1200
10000
3000
1800
5000
1500
V10Z74MMG092-4
1200
600
300
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
2-12
V10Z74MMG124-4
2500
900
300
V10Z74MMG124-7
7500
3 4
5 6
8 9 10
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Base Mounts Cylindrical Type

LIMITED SIDE DEFLECTIONS EASY LEVELING

LOW MAINTENANCE

Base Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated
A
B
A
B
New
Fig. 1
E
K
L
E
K
L
Fig. 2
Metric
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

900
T4115
T4115G
800
LOAD (kgf)
700
600
T3090
T3090G
500
400
300
T2062
T2062G
200
T1048
T1048G
100
DEFLECTION (mm)
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10Z55MT1048
V10Z55MT2062
1
V10Z55MT3090
V10Z55MT4115
V10Z55MT1048G
V10Z55MT2062G
2
V10Z55MT3090G
V10Z55MT4115G
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
48
(1.89)
62
(2.44)
90
(3.54)
115
(4.53)
48
(1.89)
62
(2.44)
90
(3.54)
115
(4.53)
38
(1.50)
50
(1.97)
73
(2.87)
98
(3.86)
38
(1.50)
50
(1.97)
73
(2.87)
98
(3.86)
8.2
(.32)
10.2
(.40)
16.2
(.64)
24.2
(.95)
M8
M10
M14
M16
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
6.2
(.24)
8.2
(.32)
10.2
(.40)
16.2
(.64)
6.2
(.24)
8.2
(.32)
10.2
(.40)
16.2
(.64)
20
(.79)
25
(.98)
44
(1.73)
60
(2.36)
20
(.79)
25
(.98)
44
(1.73)
60
(2.36)
42
(1.65)
55
(2.17)
82
(3.23)
105
(4.13)
42
(1.65)
55
(2.17)
82
(3.23)
105
(4.13)
80
(3.15)
100
(3.94)
130
(5.12)
190
(7.48)
80
(3.15)
100
(3.94)
130
(5.12)
190
(7.48)
68
(2.68)
85
(3.35)
110
(4.33)
160
(6.30)
68
(2.68)
85
(3.35)
110
(4.33)
160
(6.30)
23
(.91)
30
(1.18)
45
(1.77)
50
(1.97)
23
(.91)
30
(1.18)
45
(1.77)
50
(1.97)
1.5
(.06)
2
(.08)
3
(.12)
4
(.16)
1.5
(.06)
2
(.08)
3
(.12)
4
(.16)
2-13
Static
Load
kgf
(lb.)
120
(264.6)
270
(595.2)
450
(992.1)
850
(1873.9)
120
(264.6)
270
(595.2)
450
(992.1)
850
(1873.9)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
2.5
(.10)
3.6
(.14)
4.4
(.17)
6
(.24)
2.5
(.10)
3.6
(.14)
4.4
(.17)
6
(.24)
S E C T I O N 2
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Base Mounts Dome Type
CAN BE MOUNTED IN SERIES

Base Carbon Steel
D
C
A
DM
I
Shown: Catalog Number V10Z75MBM200-..

with upper metal reinforcement visible.
Metric
DM
L
Catalog Number*
V10Z75MBM100-6
V10Z75MBM100-7
DM
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
32
(1.26)
45
(1.77)
96
(3.78)
160
(6.30)
128
(5.04)
M10
33 36
(1.30 1.42)
82
(3.23)
144
(5.67)
226
(8.90)
186
(7.32)
mm
(in.)
Hardness
Shore A
11 x 16
(.43 x .63)
V10Z75MBM150-4
V10Z75MBM150-6
55
75
45
M14
12
55
V10Z75MBM150-7
75
V10Z75MBM200-4
45
V10Z75MBM200-6
40
(1.58)
128
(5.04)
200
(7.87)
280
(11.02)
240
(9.45)
M16
14.5
V10Z75MBM200-7
55
75
Max. Load
Under
Compression
N (lbf)
1600
(359.7)
2200
(494.6)
1300
(292.3)
2500
(562.0)
3500
(786.8)
5000
(1124.0)
8000
(1798.5)
12000
(2697.7)
Max.
Deflection
mm
(in.)
4
(.158)
7
(.276)
6
(.236)
7
(.276)
6
(.236)
PERFORMANCE GRAPHS
2750
2500
2250
2000
V10Z75MBM100-7
V10Z75MBM100-6
1500
V10Z75MBM150-6
2500
1000
V10Z75MBM150-4
2000
750
500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
11250
10000
6250
V10Z75MBM200-6
V10Z75MBM200-4
5000
3750
500
1250
V10Z75MBM200-7
8750
1500
2500
1000
250
13750
12500
7500
3000
1250
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
4500
4000
V10Z75MBM150-7
3500
1756
5500
5000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2-14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Diamond Base Mounts

FOR LOADS OF 45 TO 1100 POUNDS (20.4 TO 499 kgf)
Plates Steel
Isolator Oil-Resistant Neoprene or Durulene
D
F
2HOLES
TOP INSERT PLATE
APPLICATIONS
INDUSTRIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUSINESS MACHINES
CHOOSE DURULENE FOR THE FOLLOWING
ROOFTOP Extreme heat or cold, direct sunlight
INDOOR/OUTDOOR Severe weather
OZONE-EMITTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
CD
CS
BOTTOM INSERT
STEEL PLATE
FEATURES:
Threaded Plate Molded into Mounting
Nonskid Base & Top Surface
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Neoprene -40F to +180F (-40C to +82.2C)

Durulene -65F to +250F (-40C to +121.1C)
Catalog Number*
Neoprene
Durulene
V10Z52-FA0045
V10Z52-FA0045
V10Z52-FA0070
V10Z52-FA0070
V10Z52-FA0120
V10Z52-FA0120
V10Z52-FB0135
V10Z52-FB0135
V10Z52-FB0240
V10Z52-FB0240
V10Z52-FB0380
V10Z52-FB0380
V10Z52-FB0550
V10Z52-FB0550
V10Z52-FC0525
V10Z52-FC0525
V10Z52-FC0750
V10Z52-FC0750
V10Z52-FC1100
V10Z52-FC1100
* To complete the Catalog Number, specify:
S for Standard Deflection

or D for Double Deflection
For Load Deflection Graphs see page 2-17
Graph
Ref.
1S
1D
3S
3D
5S
5D
6S
6D
7S
7D
9S
9D
10S
10D
11S
11D
13S
13D
14S
14D
Max.
Load
lb. (kgf)
45
(20.4)
70
3-1/8
(31.8)
(79.4)
120
(54.4)
135
(61.2)
240
(108.9)
3-7/8
380
(98.4)
(172.4)
550
(249.5)
525
(238.1)
750
5-1/2
(340.2) (139.7)
1100
(499)
Height C
Standard Double
CS
CD
Max. Static
Deflection
Standard Double
1-3/4
(44.5)
1
(25.4)
1-1/4
(31.8)
5/16-18 2-3/8
(60.3)
11/32
(8.7)
1-1/4
(31.8)
3/16
(4.8)
.20
(5.08)
.40
(10.16)
2-3/8
(60.3)
1-1/4
(31.8)
1-3/4
(44.5)
3/8-16
3
(76.2)
11/32
(8.7)
1-3/4
(44.5)
7/32
(5.6)
.25
(6.35)
.50
(12.7)
3-3/8
(85.7)
1-3/4
(44.5)
2-7/8
(73)
1/2-13
Additional load ratings available on special order.
2-15
4-1/8
(104.8)
11/32
(8.7)
2-1/2
(63.5)
1/4
(6.4)
.25
(6.35)
.50
(12.7)
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:

Rectangular Base Mounts

Plates Steel
Isolator Oil-Resistant Neoprene or Durulene
A
E
D
TOP INSERT PLATE
G
CD
CS
APPLICATIONS
INDUSTRIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUSINESS MACHINES
BOTTOM INSERT
STEEL PLATE
CHOOSE DURULENE FOR THE FOLLOWING

ROOFTOP Extreme heat or cold, direct sunlight
INDOOR/OUTDOOR Severe weather
OZONE-EMITTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
FEATURES:
Threaded Plate Molded into Mounting
Nonskid Base & Top Surface
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Neoprene -40F to +180F (-40C to +82.2C)

Durulene -65F to +250F (-40C to +121.1C)
Catalog Number*
Neoprene
Graph
Ref.
Durulene
V10Z53-FB0110
V10Z53-FB0260S
AS
AD
CS
V10Z53-FB0470
V10Z53-FC0500S
DS
DD
FS
V10Z53-FC0720S
GS
V10Z53-FC1120
V10Z53-FC1120
V10Z53-FD1500
V10Z53-FD1500
V10Z53-FD2250
V10Z53-FD2250
V10Z53-FD3000
V10Z53-FD3000
V10Z53-FD4000
V10Z53-FD4000
* To complete the Catalog Number, specify:

S for Standard Deflection
or D for Double Deflection
HS
HD
IS
ID
JS
JD
KS
KD
LS
LD
Rated
Load
lb. (kgf)
110
(49.9)
260
3-3/4
(117.9) (95.3)
470
(213.2)
500
(226.8)
720
5
(326.6) (127)
1120
(508)
1500
(680.4)
2250
(1020.6) 6-1/4
3000 (158.8)
(1360.8)
4000
(1814.4)
Height C
Standard Double
CS
CD
2-1/8
(54)
1-1/8
(28.6)
3-1/16
(77.8)
1-5/8
(41.3)
4-5/8
(117.5)
1-5/8
(41.3)
1-7/8
(47.6)
3/8-16
3
(76.2)
3/8
(9.5)
1-9/16
(39.7)
1/4
(6.4)
1/2-13
9/16
4
(101.6) (14.3)
2-5/16
(58.7)
3/8
(9.5)
.25
(6.35)
9/16
(14.3)
3
(76.2)
3/8
(9.5)
.25
(6.35)
2-3/4
(69.9)
2-3/4
(69.9)
1/2-13
Additional load ratings available on special order.
For Load Deflection Graphs see page 2-17

To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.
2-16
Max. Static
Deflection
5
(127)
Standard Double
.40
(10.16)
.20
(5.08)
.40
(10.16)
.50
(12.7)
.50
(12.7)
PONENT
Load Deflection for Base Mounts

For Catalog Numbers V10Z52-... and V10Z53-... on pages 2-15 and 2-16.
LOAD VS. DEFLECTION

400
350
300
LOAD (lbs.)
OM
9S
9D
7S
7D
CS
250
200
150
AS
AD
3D
1D
1S
0
0.1
6D
5D
3S
50
0
6S
5S
100
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
DEFLECTION (in.)
LOAD VS. DEFLECTION
4000
LS
LD
KS
KD
JS
JD
3500
3000
LOAD (lbs.)
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
2500
2000
HD
14D
13D
HS
1000
14S
13S
GS
DS
11S
FS
10S
500
0
ID
IS
1500
0.1
0.2
0.3
DEFLECTION (in.)
2-17
10D
11D
DD
0.4
0.5
0.6
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
M-Style Mounts
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 15 TO 125 kgf (33.1 TO 275.6 lb.)
Mounting Plates Mild Steel, Painted

Isolators Natural Rubber, 60 Durometer
Y
h2
Bolt Thread
h1
Metric
APPLICATIONS
VIBRATION SCREEN
VIBRATION CONVEYORS
VIBRATION SIEVES
INSTRUMENT PANELS
REFRIGERATORS
COMPRESSORS
X
L
A
l1
l2
FEATURES:
Compared with circular rubber
mounts, they ensure lower spring
rate in vertical direction and higher
stability in horizontal direction.
Suited for machines which generate
considerable vibrations during lowspeed operation.
Excellent in controlling vibrations of
600 cpm or higher.
Can be installed in very small areas
because of its narrow width.
Used for oscillating motions.
DIMENSIONS
Catalog Number
V10Z46MKD040
V10Z46MKD045
V10Z46MKD055
V10Z46MKD065
Bolt
Thread
l1
l2
h1
h2
125
(4.9)
160
(6.3)
210
(8.3)
245
(9.6)
104
(4.1)
130
(5.1)
170
(6.7)
205
(8.1)
30
(1.2)
35
(1.4)
40
(1.6)
50
(2.0)
80
(3.1)
100
(3.9)
130
(5.1)
165
(6.5)
55
(2.2)
70
(2.8)
90
(3.5)
115
(4.5)
4.5
(.18)
4.5
(.18)
6
(.24)
8
(.32)
40
(1.6)
45
(1.8)
55
(2.2)
65
(2.6)
29
(1.14)
34
(1.34)
54
(2.13)
52
(2.05)
25
(.98)
32
(1.26)
50
(2.00)
50
(2.00)
11
(.43)
14
(.55)
17
(.67)
20
(.79)
M10
M12
M16
M16
Provided with hex nut and lock washer.

TECHNICAL DATA
Catalog Number
V10Z46MKD040
V10Z46MKD045
V10Z46MKD055
V10Z46MKD065
Standard Load
in Z Direction
kgf (lb.)
1535
(33.1...77.2)
3050
(66.2...110.2)
5090
(110.2...198.4)
80125
(176.4...275.6)
Allowable Load
kgf (lb.)
Z Dir.
70
(154.3)
100
(220.5)
175
(385.8)
250
(551.2)
X Dir.
12
(26.5)
22
(48.5)
45
(99.2)
45
(99.2)
Spring Rate
in Z dir. Kz
Y Dir. kgf/cm (lb./ft.)

14
200
(30.9)
(13.4 x 103)
20
250
(44.1)
(16.8 x 103)
35
290
(77.2)
(19.5 x 103)
40
370
(88.2)
(24.9 x 103)
2-18
Stiffness
Ratio
Stiffness
Ratio
Kx/Kz
Ky/Kz
0.17
0.2
0.22
0.2
0.25
0.2
0.19
0.16
S E C T I O N 2
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
V - Style Mounts
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 4 TO 900 kgf ( 9 TO 1980 lb.)

Isolators Natural Rubber
X
B
Y
F
d1
t1
Metric
H1
Z
d1
FEATURES:
Compared with circular rubber mounts, these have higher
E
A
stiffness in horizontal direction "X" and better stability.

They are also well-suited for rotating machines which
generate vibrating forces in the horizontal direction.
Fig. 1 Without Base Plate
Easy to install.
The spring rate can be changed just

by altering the mounting positions.
B
Y
d2
2 HOLES
d1
For the base plate attached type (Fig. 2), a rubber pad is fitted
A
F
to the base plate so that the machine can be placed on the floor.
S
Z
45
P1
L
Rubber
Pad
t1
t2 H2 H1
t3
APPLICATIONS
AIR COMPRESSORS
VIBRATION SCREENS
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL
SEPARATORS
MACHINE TOOLS
VIBRATION SIEVES
HIGH-SPEED DIESEL ENGINES
Fig. 2 With Base Plate
LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH

X
KC170BP
P2 B
d2
2 HOLES
A
F
d1
2 PLACES
t1
45
t2 H1
KC140BP
LOAD RANGE NUMBER
ad
30
0
25
0
20
18 0
16 0
0
14
0
12
10 0
0
90
80
70
60
KC100BP
KC070
KC060
KC080 (BP)
(kg
20
18 00
16 00
14 00
12 00
0
10 0
00
40
0
f)
50
KC045
KC075 (BP)
40
30
25
Z
P1
Lo
90
80 0
70 0
60 0
0
50
0
KC035
20
18
16
14
12
10
9
7
6
1.0
Fig. 3 With Base Plate
1.2 1.4 1.61.8 2.0
2.5 3.0
DEFLECTION (mm)
2-19
8 9 10 12 14 16
S E C T I O N 2
Fig. 1 & Fig. 3

Shown
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
V - Style Mounts Selection Data

Metric
CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION
Load Range Number

Base Plate - BP
(where applicable)
Use information in both tables below to
determine appropriate Load Range Number
DIMENSIONS measured in mm and (inches)

Load
Range
Number
Fig.
No.
KC035
KC045
KC060
KC070
KC075
KC080
KC075BP
KC080BP
KC100BP
KC140BP
3
KC170BP
60
(2.4)
82
(3.2)
108
(4.3)
124
(4.9)
135
(5.3)
148
(5.8)
135
(5.3)
148
(5.8)
180
(7.1)
250
(9.8)
288
(11.3)
30
(1.2)
50
(2.0)
70
(2.8)
90
(3.5)
70
(2.8)
90
(3.5)
70
(2.8)
90
(3.5)
110
(4.3)
240
(9.5)
180
(7.1)
30
(1.2)
40
(1.6)
45
(1.8)
55
(2.2)
76
(3.0)
76
(3.0)
26
(1.0)
40
(1.6)
56
(2.2)
65
(2.6)
56
(2.2)
65
(2.6)
56
(2.2)
65
(2.6)
100
(3.9)
127
(5.0)
184
(7.2)
d1
t1
29
(1.1)
34
(1.3)
44
(1.7)
52
(2.0)
44
(1.7)
52
(2.0)
44
(1.7)
52
(2.0)
57
(2.2)
25
(1.0)
32
(1.3)
40
(1.6)
50
(2.0)
40
(1.6)
50
(2.0)
40
(1.6)
50
(2.0)
46
(1.8)
4.5
(.18)
4.5
(.18)
6
(.24)
8
(.32)
6
(.24)
8
(.32)
6
(.24)
8
(.32)
8
(.32)
56
(2.2)
46
(1.8)
12
(.47)
Thread
M10
M12
M12
M16
M12
M16
M12
M16
M20
M20x2
170
(6.7)
180
(7.1)
240
(9.5)
250
(9.8)
300
(11.8)
P1
140
(5.5)
150
(5.9)
200
(7.9)
220
(8.7)
252
(9.9)
P2
H1
175
(6.9)
100
(3.9)
35
(1.4)
45
(1.8)
60
(2.4)
70
(2.8)
73
(2.9)
80
(3.1)
85
(3.3)
94
(3.7)
114
(4.5)
140
(5.5)
170
(6.7)
H2
d2
t2
79
(3.1)
88
(3.5)
108
(4.3)
14
(.55)
14
(.55)
18
(.71)
18x2
.71x.08
22x2
.87x.08
6
(.24)
8
(.32)
8
(.32)
12
(.47)
12
(.47)
t3
6
(.24)
NOTES: "BP" at the end of the Catalog Number stands for base plate attached type.
All units are provided with hex nuts and spring washers.
Load
Range
Number
KC035
KC045
KC060
KC070
KC075
KC080
KC075BP
KC080BP
KC100BP
KC140BP
KC170BP
Standard Load in
Z Direction
4...10
(9...22)
25...45
(55...99)
30...95
(66...209)
50...150
(110...330)
30...90
(66...198)
35...135
(77...297)
30...90
(66...198)
35...135
(77...297)
100...300
(220...660)
300...650
(660...1430)
500...900
(1100...1980)
TECHNICAL DATA measured in kgf and (lb.)

Spring Rate Z
ALLOWABLE LOAD
Direction
X Direction
Y Direction
Z Direction
kgf/cm
20
(44)
90
(196)
185
(407)
290
(638)
170
(374)
260
(572)
170
(374)
260
(572)
600
(1320)
1300
(2860)
1750
(3850)
13
(28)
55
(121)
65
(143)
110
(242)
105
(231)
155
(341)
105
(231)
155
(341)
260
(572)
550
(1210)
650
(1430)
5
(11)
25
(55)
30
(66)
55
(121)
40
(88)
60
(132)
40
(88)
60
(132)
120
(264)
250
(550)
280
(616)
NOTE: Rubber material is natural rubber of hardness 45 durometer.
2-20
Stiffness
Ratio
Kx/Kz
Stiffness
Ratio
Ky/Kz
65
0.75
0.34
235
0.61
0.27
380
0.58
0.26
520
0.54
0.27
190
0.81
0.3
300
0.78
0.28
190
0.81
0.3
300
0.78
0.28
600
0.54
0.26
1200
0.56
0.27
1700
0.33
0.23
S E C T I O N 2
V10Z45M
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
Rectangular Mounts To 900 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 900 POUNDS (408 kgf)


Base Steel
1-3/4
(44.5)
3
(76.2)
S E C T I O N 2
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
5/8 DIA.
(15.9)
3
X (76.2)
X
1-1/2
(38.1)
3/4
(19.1)
6-1/2
(165.1)
1-1/2
(38.1)
5
(127)
3/4-10 NC-2
2-1/4
(57.2)
1200
3-1/8
(79.4)
1100
3/8
(9.5)
COMPRESSION
4-9/16
(115.9)
1000
X
900
1/4
(6.4)
1-7/16
(36.5)
COMPRESSION
LOAD (lb.)
800
SECTION X-X
700
600
500
SHEAR
400
SHEAR
300

Deflection below the line x-x are considered
safe practice for static loads; data above that
line are useful for calculating deflections under
dynamic loads.
200
100
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog
Number
V10Z 6-530C
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
750
900 (408)
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
750
850
950
360 (163.3)
360
(163.3)
850
950
Shear
Catalog
Number
V10Z 6-530C
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
590
(267.6)
390
(177)
270
(122.5)
2000
2500
3000
55
(25)
800
(362.9)

1100
1250
1500
1750

335
(152)
260
(118)
195
(88.5)
155
(70.3)
102
(46.3)
75
(34)
NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency.
Better than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a
given load.
*At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation.
To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.
2-21
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 775 POUNDS (351.5 kgf)


Base Steel
7/8
(22.2)
5-3/16
(131.8)
7/16
(11.1)
1-7/16
(36.5)
3-13/16
(96.8)
11/16
(17.5)
4-1/2
(114.3)

Deflections below the line x-x are considered safe
practice for static loads; data above that line is useful
for calculating deflections under dynamic loads
5/8
(15.9)
1/2
(12.7)
SECTION X-X
1400
5/16-18 UNC (TYP)
1300
COMPRESSION
3/8
(9.5)
1200
COMPRESSION
1100
1000
5-7/8
(149.2)
900
LOAD (lb.)
.120
(3)
SECTION Y-Y
800
X
X
700
600
500
SHEAR
400
300
SHEAR
200
X
100
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
V10Z 6-500B
775
(351.5)
750
850
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
440
(200)
270
(122.5)
175
(79.4)
2000
2500
3000
440
(24.9)
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
750
850
950
V10Z 6-500B
315
(142.9)
315
(142.9)
585
(265.4)
Shear
1100
1250
1500
1750

260
(117.9)
200
(90.7)
165
(74.8)
125
(56.7)
125
(56.7)
585
(29.5)
*At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation.
NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better
than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a given load.
2-22
S E C T I O N 2
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
See Section 2
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 1475 POUNDS (669 kgf)

FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 440 POUNDS (200 kgf)

Base Steel
1-1/2
(38.1)
1-1/8
(28.6)
X
3/16
(4.8)
3/4
(19.1)
1-1/4
(31.8)
3-13/16
(96.8)
4-3/4
(120.7)
1
(25.4)
2-1/2
(63.5)
SECTION X-X
Deflections below the line x-x are considered safe
practice for static loads; data above that line is useful
for calculating deflections under dynamic loads
3/8-24 UNF (TYP)
2800
2600
COMPRESSION
2400
7/16 DIA.
(11.1)
2200
5-7/8
(149.2)
6-3/4
(171.5)
COMPRESSION
2000
LOAD (lb.)
1800
SECTION Y -Y
1600
1400
1200
1000
SHEAR
800
600
400
SHEAR
200
0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
0.9
DEFLECTION (in.)
Compression
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
V10Z 6-520B
1475
(669)
675
850
950
1100
1250
1500
1750
2000
2500
320
(145.1)
(77.1)
2000
2500
50
(22.7)
Minimum Load for 81% Isolation (lb.)
850
950
Shear
1200
(544.3)
1040
(471.7)
650
(294.8)
470
(213.2)
170
Catalog Number
Maximum
Load lb (kgf)
675
V10Z 6-520B
440
(200)
440
(200)
1100
1250
1500
1750
Minimum Load for 81% Isolation (kgf)

250
(113.4)
190
(86.2)
135
(61.2)
110
(49.9)
70
(31.8)
60
(27.2)
*At this forcing frequency, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation.
NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better
2-23
S E C T I O N 2
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Vibration Transmissibility Charts

Transmissibility vs. Frequency Ratio and c/cc
100
80
For more extensive discussion of vibration

analysis and isolation, see the technical
section starting on page T1-0.
60
S E C T I O N 2
c/cc = .01
40
30
Schematic of simple mounting system
20
Amplification
Transmissibility T
c/cc
6
c/cc = .10
4
3
c/cc = .20
2
c/cc = .50
1
.8
K = Stiffness of spring (mount)

c/cc = Critical damping ratio
c = System damping coefficient
cc = Critical damping coefficient
fd = Disturbing frequency
fn = Natural frequency
20%
.6
.10
.4
2% 3%
1%
To
3 4
2
.6 .8 1
Forcing Frequency
Ratio:
Natural Frequency
TRANSMISSIBLITY
ns
tio
lic
ica
Ap
p
pl
Ap
itic
al
Cr
el
Cr
itic
3.0
4.0
Ex
tre
6.0
3000
2000
800
1000
500
600
400
300
200
10.0
100
90%
8 10
1
% TRANSMISSIBILITY = T = 100
( )
fd
fn
2
1
ns
io
at
1.0
.3 .4
io
at
lic
pp
lA
ica
.6
ns
.3
.4
2.0
100
90
80
70
60
5% 10% 20% 30%
RE
SO
NA
NC
E
Av
oid
ed
Be
.2
al
150
.1
nc
rit
200
.2
.06
No
250
.03
.04
Am
pli
fic
at
ion
400
350
300
STATIC DEFLECTION IN INCHES
NATURAL FREQUENCY (fn) CYCLES PER MINUTE
500
10
Vibration Transmissibility Chart for C/Cc = 0

.01
.02
1000
900
800
700
600
0%
.2
2000
70%
.20
.50
.01
.05
.3
.1
.1
40%
Attenuation
DISTURBING FREQUENCY (fd) CYCLES PER MINUTE
2-24
?
TO DETERMINE THE EFFICIENCY OF ISOLATION,

SUBTRACT THE % TRANSMISSIBILITY FROM 100%
Percent Isolation
Mass (M)
c/cc = .05
10
8
SECTION 3
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Level Mounts To 2500 lbs.

Housing Cast Iron

Isolator Oil-Resistant Neoprene
D DIA. x E LONG
LEVELING BOLT
LEG OF
EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION
Raise the machine with conventional lifting
devices, place the mounts beneath the machine
feet and attach the leveling bolts to the mounts.
Lower the machine and ensure that the total
weight is carried by all of the mounts. Level to a
desired height by gradual and sequential
adjustment of the leveling bolts. Tighten the
locknuts.
CHARACTERISTICS
The mounts consist of a high-quality,
nonskid, neoprene isolation element yielding
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) deflection at rated load,
rugged load-bearing top casting and hardware
necessary for leveling and fastening equipment
to mount. Up to 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) leveling
capability eliminates shimming. Bolting
equipment to floor is not required.
Steady
Load
Max.
Impact
lb. (kgf)
lb. (kgf)
V10Z12-MA00120
120
(54.4)
90
(40.8)
V10Z12-MA00200
200
(90.7)
150
(68)
V10Z12-MB00450
450
(204.1)
337
(152.9)
V10Z12-MB01600
1600
(725.7)
1200
(544)
Catalog Number
V10Z12-MC02500
2500
(1134)
1875
(850.5)
Dimensions
A
Maximum
Height
Adjustment
2-7/8
(73)
2-3/8
(60.3)
1-7/8
(47.6)
5/16
(7.9)
2-3/4
(69.9)
1/2
(12.7)
4-15/16
(125.4)
3-7/8
(98.4)
1-3/4
(44.5)
1/2
(12.7)
3
(76.2)
1/2
(12.7)
7-1/2
(190.5)
5-7/8
(149.2)
2-5/16
(58.7)
3/4
(19.1)
3-1/2
(88.9)
1/2
(12.7)
3-2
S E C T I O N 3
1-1/2 MAX.
(38.1)
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Leveling Mounts To 10000 lbs.

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR COMPRESSION LOADS ONLY STAINLESS STEEL MESH

CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT FOR LOADS OF 100 TO 10000 POUNDS
1/2 (12.7)
D
B DIA.
BEFORE LEVELING
Catalog Number
V10Z25-0139-1
V10Z25-0139-2
V10Z25-0139-3
V10Z25-0139-4
V10Z25-0139-5
* V10Z25-0339
V10Z25-0339-1
V10Z25-0339-3
V10Z25-0339-5
INSTALLATION
Raise the machine with conventional lifting
devices; place the mounts beneath the
machine feet and attach the leveling screws
to the mount. Lower the machine and ensure
that the total weight is carried by all of the
mounts. Level to a desired height by gradual
and sequential adjustment of the leveling
screws. Tighten the locknut.
AFTER LEVELING
Load Range
lb.
CHARACTERISTICS
The mounts consist of two rugged
meehanite castings, a resilient pad of knitted
stainless steel mesh and pressed steel
baseplate. The leveling screw seats into the
bottom casting thus providing a built-in
leveling device. The excellent damping
characteristics of this mount are unaffected
by contaminants such as oil, grease or
caustics.
2
(50.8)
4-1/4
(108)
3-1/2
(89)
5/8-11 UNC
2-1/8
(54)
7-45/64
(196)
4-9/32
(109)
1-8 UNC
kgf
100250
45113
250500
113227
5001000
227454
10002000
454907
20004000
9071814
100010000 4544536
10004000
4541814
40007000 18143175
700010000 31754536
3-3
S E C T I O N 3
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Leveling Mounts To 12000 lbs.


Turning leveling bolt
raises height of metal
housing and foot of
machine as much as
1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
High-strength steel
housing carries
load and rides on
neoprene base without
any appreciable
mechanical wear or
fatigue.
Locknut is tightened down

onto machine foot after it
has been leveled for
permanent positioning.
Neoprene
elastomer mounting
base controls
deflections under
vibration and shock
loads with high
isolation efficiency.
STATIC H
BEFORE LEVELING
S E C T I O N 3
Base of mount rests

squarely against floor
surface with no creeping
or walking. Machine
remains readily portable
with no damage to floor.
AFTER LEVELING
INSTALLATION
Raise the machine with conventional lifting devices; place the mounts beneath the machine feet and attach the leveling bolts to the
mounting. Lower the machine and ensure that the total weight is carried by all of the mounts. Level to a desired height by gradual and
sequential adjustment of the leveling bolts. Tighten the locknut.
Load lb. (kgf)
H
Static
Height
Bolt
Size &
Length
Max.
D
Dia.
V10Z25-LM3
100
(45.4)
500
(226.8)
3-1/2
(89)
1-1/8
(28.6)
1/2-13 x 3-1/2
V10Z25-LM5
500
(226.8)
1000
(453.6)
5
(127)
1-3/4
(44.5)
1/2-13 x 5
V10Z25-LM6
1000
(453.6)
4000
(1814.4)
6-1/4
(159)
1-3/4
(44.5)
3/4-10 x 5
V10Z25-LM8
4000
(1814.4)
12000
(5443.1)
8
(203)
2
(50.8)
1-14 x 8
Catalog Number
Min.
3-4
Natural Frequency
at Maximum Load
Hz
8-12
Approximately
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Leveling Mounts Iso-Pad Type To 4000 lbs.

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR LOADS OF 200 TO 4000 POUNDS
Isolator Iso-Pad (Standard Load)

Refer to characteristics shown on page 8-2
Base Casting 30000 psi (2109 kgf/cm2) Tensile Strength
Bolt SAE Grade No. 5 Heat-Treated
(90.7 TO 1814.4 kgf)
S E C T I O N 3
Fig. 1 (REGULAR MOUNT)
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
B
C
*Fig. 2 (FIXED MOUNT)
Catalog Number
Fig.
V10R12-R22
V10R12-R33
1
V10R12-R44
V10R12-R66
V10R12-F22
V10R12-F33
2
V10R12-F44
V10R12-F66
Pad
Dimensions
Pad Pad
Area Area
Load per
Mount
in. (mm)
sq. in. sq. cm
lb. (kgf)
2 x 2 x 5/8
(50.8 x 50.8 x 15.9)
3 x 3 x 5/8
(76.2 x 76.2 x 15.9)
4 x 4 x 5/8
(101.6 x 101.6 x 15.9)
5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5/8
(139.7 x 139.7 x 15.9)
2 x 2 x 5/8
(50.8 x 50.8 x 15.9)
3 x 3 x 5/8
(76.2 x 76.2 x 15.9)
4 x 4 x 5/8
(101.6 x 101.6 x 15.9)
5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5/8
(139.7 x 139.7 x 15.9)
25.8
58.1
16
103.2
30-1/4 195.2
4
25.8
58.1
16
103.2
30-1/4 195.2
200 500
(90.7 226.8)
500 1200
(226.8 544.3)
1200 2400
(544.3 1088.6)
2400 4000
(1088.6 1814.4)
200 500
(90.7 226.8)
500 1200
(226.8 544.3)
1200 2400
(544.3 1088.6)
2400 4000
(1088.6 1814.4)
* Recommended for use under impact machinery.

Additional bolt and mount sizes available on request.
3-5
Dimensions
Bolt
A
Dimensions Minimum
Height
B
Maximum
Adjustment
C
Overall
Height
1/2-20 x 4
1-1/2
(38.1)
2-3/4
(69.9)
5-1/4
(133.3)
3/4-16 x 6
1-3/4
(44.5)
1-7/8
(47.6)
4-3/4
(120.7)
7-1/2
(190.5)
1/2-20 x 4
1-7/8
(47.6)
2-9/16
(65.1)
4-3/4
(120.7)
3/4-16 x 6
2-7/16
(61.9)
2-5/8
(66.7)
3-13/16
(96.8)
3-11/16
(93.7)
6-9/16
(166.7)
6-3/4
(171.5)
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
Leveling Mounts Conical Type
S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365
ISOLATES IMPACTS & STRUCTURAL NOISE

PREVENTS MACHINE PIVOTING
Bolt DIN 976

Nuts DIN 934 Washer DIN 9021
Isolator Natural Rubber (Ozone-Resistant)
New
With Threaded Leveling Bolt
B
C
A
DM
Metric
PERFORMANCE GRAPH

Catalog Number*
V10Z76MSG-30
V10Z76MSG-40
V10Z76MSG-30
V10Z76MSG-40
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
12
(.472)
17
(.669)
18
(.709)
45
(1.772)
30
(1.181)
38
(1.496)
40
(1.575)
50
(1.979)
Load
N
(lbf)
250
(56)
450
(101)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
2
(.079)
2.5
(.089)
650
DM
mm
(in.)
Maximum
Catalog Number*
C
M8/M10
M8
Admissible
Temporary
Deflection
Overload
mm
Minimum
Load
N
(lbf)
50
(11)
80
(18)
(in.)
1
(.039)
600
550
500
450
400
350
100
50
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
V10Z76MSG-40
700
250
200
150
100
50
0
3-6
V10Z76MSG-30
300
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Leveling Carry Mounts

BALL TYPE
FOR LOADS OF 200 TO 600 kgf (441 TO 1323 lb.)
Handle Steel, Painted

Bolt Steel, Zinc Plated
Housing Iron, Galvanized
Ball Steel
Isolator Oil-Resistant Rubber
BOLT THREAD
D3
H1
H2
Metric
h2
D2
D1
DESCRIPTION
CARRY MOUNT is a moveable
mount in which the rubber mount is
incorporated with a rotating ball.
They allow movement of machines
and give excellent vibration-free
installations.
MOUNT IN
ROLLING POSITION
MACHINE LEVELED
RUBBER PAD EXTENDED
INSTALLATION
Place the CARRY MOUNT under the bolt hole of the machine.
Insert the bolt into the screw hole of the CARRY MOUNT and screw
it in until the bolt stops.
Turn the spoked wheel clockwise to lift the rubber mount.
The steel ball then allows free movement.
FEATURES:
Compact Design
Excellent Stability
Easy Movement & Setting
Lightweight
Low Price
APPLICATIONS
SHOP MACHINES
OFFICE EQUIPMENT
MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS
Turn the spoked wheel counterclockwise to lift the steel ball.

The rubber mount now supports the machine in place.
Catalog Number
Working
Load Max.
H1
H2
D1
2
( .08)
D2
D3
h1
h2
58
(2.3)
65
(2.6)
70
(2.76)
79
(3.11)
100
(3.9)
140
(5.5)
80
(3.1)
120
(4.7)
44
(1.7)
54
(2.1)
67
(2.63)
72
(2.83)
7.5
(.3)
12
(.47)
14
(.55)
kgf (lb.)
V10Z44MCM200
V10Z44MCM600
200
(441)
600
(1323)
3-7
Bolt
Thread
M12
M16
S E C T I O N 3
h1
See Section 3
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Leveling Carry Mounts

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
CASTER TYPE
Frame & Bolt Steel, Galvanized

Wheel Nylon
Isolator Oil-Resistant Rubber
d, 4 HOLES
L
L
100
(3.9)
72
(2.8)
d
2 HOLES
100
80
(3.9) (3.1)
100
(3.9) 72
(2.8)
60
(2.4)
CM060 & CM060S
CM100 & CM100S
MOUNTING HOLES
H1
H2
1.
MOUNTING PLATE
2.
FRAME
3.
WHEEL
4.
RUBBER MOUNT
5.
LEVELING BOLT &

ADJUSTING NUT
h1
FEATURES:
Compact Design
Excellent Stability
Easy Movement & Setting
Lightweight
Low Price
4
h2
Metric
D1
APPLICATIONS
SHOP MACHINES
OFFICE EQUIPMENT
MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS
CASTER IN
ROLLING POSITION
MACHINE LEVELED
RUBBER MOUNT EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
CARRY MOUNT is a moveable mount in which the rubber mount is incorporated into a caster. They allow movement of
machines and give excellent vibration-free installations.
INSTALLATION
Raise machine and attach casters with suitable bolts. Insert screwdriver or 1/4 diameter rod into level adjusting hole and
turn it to the left (clockwise) to lift the rubber mount. Machine can now be easily moved. Once relocated, level adjusting
hole is rotated counterclockwise to lift the wheel. The machine is then positioned in place.
Catalog Number
Working
Load Max.
H1
H2
D1
80
(3.1)
70
(2.8)
120
(4.7)
85
(3.3)
30
(1.18)
8.9
(.35)
46
(1.81)
8.9
(.35)
51
(2.00)
50
(1.97)
75
(2.95)
60
(2.36)
57
(2.24)
34
(1.34)
76
(2.99)
34
(1.34)
h1
h2
8.8
(.35)
95
(3.7)
11
(.43)
143
(5.6)
126
(5.0)
kgf (lb.)
V10Z43MCM060
V10Z43MCM060S
V10Z43MCM100
V10Z43MCM100S
60
(132)
100
(220)
3-8
10
(.39)
20
(.79)
15
(.59)
15
(.59)
16
(.63)
17
(.67)
15
(.59)
S E C T I O N 3
LEVEL ADJUSTING
HOLE 6.5 mm
(.26)
SECTION 4
OM
See Section 4
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Suspension Mounts Spring Type
S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365
Spring DIN 17223-C

Box Carbon Steel
SUSPENDS MACHINERY
LATERAL TO AXIAL STIFFNESS RATIO 0.8 TO 1
CYLINDRICAL
METAL CAP
11
C
Assembly
New
A
CYLINDRICAL
RUBBER
BUSHING
22
Metric
Catalog Number*
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
V10Z71MTM015
60
(2.36)
V10Z71MTM025
V10Z71MTM075
Maximum
mm
(in.)
100
(3.94)
M8
55
(2.17)
80
(3.15)
V10Z71MTM100
V10Z71MTM125
V10Z71MTM200
V10Z71MTM250
V10Z71MTM350
150
(5.91)
M12
80
(3.15)
Temperature Range: -90C to 200C (-130F to 392F)
100
(3.94)
V10Z71MTM450
Load
N
Deflection
mm
(in.)
(lb.)
150
(33.7)
250
(56.2)
750
(168.6)
1000
(224.8)
1250
(281)
2000
(449.6)
2500
(562)
3500
(786.8)
4500
(1011.6)
25
(.98)
35
(1.38)
Minimum
Load
N
N/mm
(lb./in.)
mm
(in.)
(lb.)
60
(13.5)
100
(22.5)
300
(67.4)
400
(89.9)
500
(112.4)
860
(193.3)
1070
(240.5)
1050
(236)
1930
(433.9)
Admissible
Temporary Overload
Stiffness
Deflection
6
(34.3)
10
(57.1)
30
(171.3)
40
(228.4)
50
(285.5)
57.14
(326.3)
71.42
(407.8)
100
(571)
128.57
(734.2)
10
(.39)
15
(.59)
10
25
20
14
11
PERFORMANCE GRAPHS
260
V10Z71MTM025
240
1300
220
1100
200
1000
180
900
160
V10Z71MTM015
140
100
500
80
400
60
300
40
200
20
100
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
10 15 20 25
V10Z71MTM075
700
600
4000
V10Z71MTM100
800
120
V10Z71MTM450
V10Z71MTM125
1200
V10Z71MTM350
3000
V10Z71MTM250
V10Z71MTM200
2000
1000
10 15 20 25
4-2
10
15
20
25
30
35
OM
See Section 4
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Suspension Mounts Rubber Type

FOR SUSPENSION FROM CEILING

STRONG & EASY TO ASSEMBLE
Metal Housing Carbon Steel

Bushing Carbon Steel
31.6
M6
58.5
54.5
25
M6
38.5
51.1
Metric
15
44.7
Catalog Number*
V10Z72MTG-50R6
Maximum
Load
Maximum
Deflection
Natural
Frequency
50
(112)
6
(.23)
7-12
kgf
(lbf)
mm
(in.)
Hz.
min - max.
PERFORMANCE GRAPH
Load (kgf) 50
V10Z72MTG-50R6
25
12
0
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
4-3
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Cable Isolators
In Section 5, starting on page 5-23, we offer a large selection of cable isolators.

These assemblies are made of aircraft-quality, stranded, stainless steel cable,
helically wound into metal retaining bars suitable for surface mounting. Shock
and vibration are damped as the result of friction between strands of cable
under load (flexture hysteresis). Their superior characteristics include their
ability to provide protection in compression, extension, shear and roll in all axes
simultaneously.
All stainless steel and aluminum construction gives these units an excellent
ability to resist corrosion and leads to extremely long maintenance-free life.
Below are some of the applications where the cable isolators can be superior to
any other type of vibration mounts.
General Characteristics and Uses

Types of Equipment
Protected
Sources of Vibration
and Shock
Other Environmental
Hazards
Critical Specifications
(Limitations)
Shipboard
Electronics
Navigation Displays,
Radar Communication,
Sonar
Nearby Blast, Ships

Inherent Vibration,
Heavy Weather
Salt Water,
Temperature Extremes
MIL-S-901D
MIL-STD-167
Over-theRoad
Vehicles
Instrumentation,
Generators,
Electronics
Irregular Terrain
Poor Road Condition,
Collision
Temperature Extremes,
Ozone, Radioactivity,
UV Radiation
Munson Rough Road

Course, 10 gs
Repeated Shock
Long Fatigue Life,

Large Displacement
Minimum Space,
Maintenance-Free for
Inaccessible Locations
Altitude Variations,
Exposure to Moisture
Accidental Drop
Excellent Shock
Mitigation
Indefinite Shelf Life,

Repeated Use
Severe Road Shock,

Careless Handling
Maintenance-Free,
No Replacement
Repeated Large Deflections

Due to Load Shock
Shipping
Containers
Jet Engines, Missiles, Transit, Handling Drop,

Gyroscopes, Electronics
Loading / Unloading
Off-the-Road Vehicles, Misaligned Installation,

Transit Ship (Un)loading
Rough Use
Needed Isolator
Other
Characteristics
Requirements
Life of Installed
Equipment, Corrosion Compliant in All Directions
Resistance,
Maintenance-Free
Geophysical
Equipment
Data Acquisition, Data

Processing Electronics
Chemical
Processing
Equipment
Centrifuge, Dryers,
Pumps
Unbalanced Dynamic
Loads, Fluid Hammer
Corrosive Environments,
Chlorine, Sulfur
High Temperature,
Corrosive Environments
Low Frequency
Reponse
Maintenance-Free for
Inaccessible Locations
Avionics
ECM, Communications,
Reconnaissance
Rapid Maneuvering,
Hard Landings,
Turbulent Air
Temperature and
Altitude Extremes
15-g 11ms Hard Landing

MIL-STD-810
Long Fatigue Life, No

Aging Deterioration,
Lightweight
Low Profile, Dynamic

Response Does Not
Change with Temperature
or Altitude
Ordnance
Equipment
Missile Launcher, Tank

Artillery, Computer
Controls, Electronics
Off-Road Vehicles,
Railroad Humping
Nearby Blast
Munson Rough Road

Course, Railroad Humping
Excellent Shock
Mitigation,
Maintenance-Free
Use at Any Altitude
Medical
Equipment
Mechanical Equipment
Critical to Patient Care
Moving Parts,
Moving Carts
Minimal Vibration
Easy to Maintain,
No Outgassing
Can Be Sterilized
4-4
S E C T I O N 4
Application
SECTION 5
Spring Mounts Elliptic Leaf Type (Naval "X" Type)

This type of vibration and shock isolator was designed specifically for shipboard or mobile applications. They are particularly
suitable to protect delicate shipboard equipment from shock due
to underwater explosions or sudden stoppage of vehicles for
vehicle-mounted equipment.
All materials used are impervious to corrosion and will operate
efficiently under a wide range of temperature, making the units
well-suited for naval or aircraft applications. Their basic design
employs two or more high tensile stainless steel "U" formed
leaves, situated at each end, forming an elliptical shape when
joined together in the center portion with face plates. The spaces
between the "U" formed leaves are filled with a specially developed polymer or stainless steel mesh.
Nonmetallic collars backed by stainless steel washers are
supplied for load attachment, while providing noise reduction.
Inch size or metric bolts may be used for fastening of the
equipment to the base or foundation.
Low transmitted shock accelerations are obtained by combining large permitted static deflection in every direction with a high
energy loss within the mount. The high damping efficiency is
obtained by the polymer which has a very low static stiffness. The
load-bearing characteristics are determined by the metal construction of the mountings. These mounts may be used in tension
as well as compression.
The "X" Mount is one of that rare breed that gives both vibration
isolation and shock protection. Its low frequency ensures effective vibration isolation, except where the resonant frequency of
the surrounding structure may be sympathetic with the mount's
natural frequency. Similarly, care must be taken during transportation of equipment supported by "X" Mounts.
The main disadvantage of the mount is that transmissibility at
resonance is high. In most applications this is not critical as the
"X" Mounts are placed in areas that do not coincide with its
resonant frequency. This special applications mount may be of
particular interest not only for its improved vibration performance
at low temperature, but also its lower natural frequency at room
temperatures. This may avoid the need of trying to reduce the
natural frequency by means of adding a rubber washer in tandem,
as this procedure also increases the transmissibility at resonance
of the system.
Shock protection of the new design has the added benefit of
durability under repeated shocks at low temperatures.
any such placement can render the shock protection useless.

Preferred Systems
Mounts supporting the system underneath only, with the center
of gravity in the lower third of the unit, is preferred. When this is
impossible, a fully suspended method should be used. Top
steadies can be used where it is difficult to choose mounts to
support the weight using a fully suspended configuration.
The practice of combining units on one raft is often carried out
to ensure that a suitable loading is obtained. This practice is
especially important for operator-controlled equipment; the seat
can be mounted on the raft as well.
Orientation
Where possible, the horizontal roll axis should be fore and aft,
to minimize equipment movement due to ship roll, but any
orientation is acceptable for shock protection. It is advisable to
place mounts on any one piece of equipment in the same
direction.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS INCLUDE:
Heavy Machine Tools

Air Compressors
Engine Suspension
Machine Mounting
Machine Craft Installations
Laboratory Equipment
Electric Motors
Factory Test Gear
Seat Suspension in Aircraft and
Vehicles
Radar Communications
Equipment
Electronic Control Equipment

Equipment Mountings in Tanks
and Other Military Vehicles
Bomb and Other Lifting Gear

Refrigeration Compressors
Mobile Vehicles
Fuel Tanks
Blowers and Fans
Pumps
INSTALLATION OF "X" MOUNTS

Due to the sophisticated nature of the "X" Mounts, it is essential
that they be correctly loaded. Incorrect loading will mean inadequate shock protection (this is true even in underloaded situations).
Bad Practice
Due to the shape and size of the "X" Mount, there is a strong
tendency to use the space created as storage. Needless to say,
5-2
S E C T I O N 5
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Spring Mounts Elliptic Leaf Type

M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
NATO APPROVED NAVAL "X" MOUNTS
Leaves 304 Stainless Steel*

Washers Nylon and Stainless Steel
Damping Compound Polymer
L
HEIGHT UNDER
NOMINAL LOAD
VIBRATION MODES:
VERTICAL:
H
HORIZONTAL 1:
UNLOADED HEIGHT
d
HORIZONTAL 2:
MOUNTING
HARDWARE
DETAIL
Available only if final use is for

governmental installation
TEMPERATURE RANGE: +50F to +86F
+10C to +30C
Shown as mounted (bolts and washers are not supplied).
Catalog Number
V10Y15-57170025
V10Y15-57180050
V10Y15-57190100
V10Y15-57200150
V10Y15-57210250
V10Y15-84290400
V10Y15-84280700
V10Y15-84271000
Nominal
Load
Load
Range
lb.
(kgf)
lb.
(kgf)
25
(11.3)
50
(22.7)
100
(45.4)
150
(68)
250
(113.5)
400
(181.4)
700
(317.5)
1000
(453.6)
2040
(918)
4075
(1834)
75120
(3454)
120-200
(54-91)
200-300
(91136)
300550
(136250)
550850
(250386)
8501200
(386545)
Bolt Size
h
H
D
d
L
W
UNF
Length Width Height Unloaded Height Loaded Diameter Bolt Hole
in.
in.
in.
with Washers with Washers Washers
in.
(nearest
(mm)
(mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
(mm)
metric)
8
(203)
2
(50.8)
4.5
(114)
4.17
(106)
1.25
(31.75)
.354
(9)
5/16
(8)
1.25
(31.75)
.512
(13)
1/2
(12)
2.5
(63.5)
.827
(21)
3/4
(20)
4.85
(123)
2
(50.8)
8.5
(216)
11.7
(297)
5.25
(133)
4
(101.6)
4.88
(124)
7.3
(185)
7.25
(184)
7.3
(185)
7.5
(190)
Static Stiffness
Catalog Number
Weight
lb. (kg)
1.5
(0.68)
1.75
(0.8)
2.25
(1.02)
2.5
(1.13)
2.75
(1.25)
13
(5.9)
14.5
(6.57)
16
(7.25)
Natural Frequencies - Hz
Horizontal 1
Horizontal 2
lb./in.
lb./in.
(kg/cm)
(kg/cm)
40
100
V10Y15-57170025
(7.14)
(17.88)
80
200
V10Y15-57180050
(14.29)
(35.72)
135
330
V10Y15-57190100
(24.11)
(58.93)
220
520
V10Y15-57200150
(39.29)
(92.86)
350
850
V10Y15-57210250
(62.5)
(151.8)
620
3070
V10Y15-84290400
(110.72)
(548.25)
760
2700
V10Y15-84280700
(135.72)
(482.17)
1100
4000
V10Y15-84271000
(196.44)
(714.33)
*NOTE: Available in natural finish or painted black (at a higher price on special order).
Vertical
lb./in.
(kg/cm)
75
(13.39)
150
(26.79)
250
(44.65)
400
(71.43)
650
(116.08)
2300
(410.74)
3000
(535.75)
4800
(857.2)
5-3
Vertical
Horizontal 1
Horizontal 2
7.5
4.5
5.5
7.5
4.5
5.5
10.5
4.5
5.5
7.5
4.0
5.0
S E C T I O N 5
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product

NATO APPROVED NAVAL "X" MOUNTS

LIGHTWEIGHT
Leaves 304 Stainless Steel

Damping Compound Polymer
HEIGHT UNDER
NOMINAL LOAD
M8 BOLT
New
3.23
(82)
2.99
(76)
1
(25)
UNLOADED HEIGHT
.33 (8.5)
5.26
(133.5)

.79 (20)

VIBRATION MODES:
VERTICAL:
FEATURES:
The 6 kg Mount is designed to isolate lightweight equipment
(i.e. computers, printers, electronics panels etc.) from shock and
vibration and has similar properties to the present range of 'X' mounts
with some reduction in the available deflection under shock conditions.
HORIZONTAL 1:
HORIZONTAL 2:
TEMPERATURE RANGE: +50F to +86F

+10C to +30C
V10Y15-39210013
Load
Range
lb.
(kgf)
lb.
(kgf)
13.2
(6)
10.615.9
(4.87.2)
Bolt Size Weight

Static Stiffness
UNF
Excluding
in.
Bolt
Horizontal 1 Horizontal 2
Vertical
(nearest
metric)
1/4
(6)
lb.
(kg)
.31
(0.14)
lb./in.
(kg/cm)
33
(5.91)
5-4
lb./in.
(kg/cm)
43
(7.68)
lb./in.
(kg/cm)
18
(3.25)
Natural Frequencies - Hz
Vertical
Horizontal 1
7.28.9
8.310.1
Horizontal 2
5.46.6
S E C T I O N 5
Catalog Number
Nominal
Load
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:

NATO APPROVED NAVAL "XM" MOUNTS

FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Leaves 304 Stainless Steel

Damping Compound Stainless Steel Mesh
New
SPRING
ASSY.
h
BUSH
WASHER
L

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -238F to +752F

-150C to +400C
V10Y15-5717M0025
V10Y15-5718M0050
V10Y15-5719M0100
V10Y15-5720M0150
V10Y15-5721M0250
V10Y15-8429M0400
V10Y15-8428M0700
V10Y15-8427M1000
Load
Range
lb.
(kgf)
lb.
(kgf)
25
(11.3)
50
(22.7)
100
(45.4)
150
(68)
250
(113.5)
400
(181.4)
700
(317.5)
1000
(453.6)
2040
(918)
4075
(1834)
75120
(3454)
120-200
(54-91)
200-300
(91136)
300550
(136250)
550850
(250386)
8501200
(386545)
Bolt Size
h
H
D
d
L
W
UNF
Length Width Height Unloaded Height Loaded Diameter Bolt Hole
in.
in.
in.
with Washers with Washers Washers
in.
(nearest
(mm)
(mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
(mm)
metric)
8
(203)
2
(50.8)
4.5
(114)
4.17
(106)
1.25
(31.75)
.354
(9)
5/16
(8)
1.25
(31.75)
.512
(13)
1/2
(12)
2.5
(63.5)
.827
(21)
3/4
(20)
4.85
(123)
8.5
(216)
11.7
(297)
2
(50.8)
4
(101.6)
5.25
(133)
7.5
(190)
5-5
4.88
(124)
7.3
(185)
7.25
(184)
7.3
(185)
Weight
lb.
(kg)
1.5
(0.68)
1.75
(0.8)
2.25
(1.02)
2.5
(1.13)
2.75
(1.25)
13
(5.9)
14.5
(6.57)
16
(7.25)
S E C T I O N 5
Catalog Number
Nominal
Load
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE

TRANSMISSIBILITY / TEMPERATURE / RESONANCE
"Q" / TEMPERATURE
30
20
3.0
10
Q 1.0
0.3
dB
-10
0.1
-20
20
"Q" Factor
Real stiffness
"Q" =
Complex stiffness
10
f
e
d
-30
-40
-30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
Temperature C
c
b
-40
a
5
6 7
10
20
30
50
100
Impressed frequency Hz
NATURAL FREQUENCY / TEMPERATURE
30
a
b
c
d
e
f
Temp C (F)
41.6 (106.9)
29.9 (85.8)
19.7 (67.5)
10.2 (50.4)
0.5 (32.9)
16.1 (3.0)
fn Hz
6.2
6.6
7.6
13.0
22.0
29.6
fn=Natural Frequency
Q
10.2
6.1
2.8
2.2
4.0
22.7
20
10
-40
-30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
Temperature C
5-6
S E C T I O N 5
10.0
OM
See Section 5
Request Quote
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Visit Website
NEW SIZES
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
Spring Mounts Foam Type To 1250 N
WORKING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Spring Steel (Black Cataphoresis or Blue Epoxy)

Base Carbon Steel Bushing Carbon Steel
Isolator Polyethylene
Base Pad Foam Rubber
-90C TO +200C (-130F TO +392F)
New
51 (2.0)
M8
A
80 (3.2)
16 (.63)
M8
63
(2.5)
11 (.43)
Metric
M Style
Base Mounting
shown
106 (4.2)
Catalog Number*
V10Z73MAM025
V10Z73MAM050
V10Z73MAM075
V10Z73MAM100
V10Z73MAM125
Maximum
Load
N
(lb.)
250
(56.2)
500
(112.4)
750
(168.6)
1000
(224.8)
1250
(281.0)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
25
(.98)
Minimum
Load
N
(lb.)
100
(22.5)
200
(45.0)
300
(67.4)
400
(89.9)
500
(112.4)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
10
(.39)
Admissible
Temporary
Overload
Stiffness
N/mm
(lb./in.)
10
(57.1)
20
(114.2)
30
(171.3)
40
(228.4)
50
(285.5)
To complete the part number please specify mounting style.

10
Continued on the next page
PERFORMANCE GRAPHS
Mounting
Style
C
Description
No bases
Lower base attached
Upper and Lower bases attached
Height at
A
Free Height 25 mm (.98 in.)
Deflection
mm (in.)
71 (2.80)
74 (2.91)
77 (3.03)
26
24
130
120
mm (in.)
22
110
20
100
46 (1.81)
18
90
16
80
14
70
12
60
10
50
40
30
20
10
49 (1.93)
52 (2.05)
Rev: 5-7-11 SS
V10Z73MAM025
5-7
10
15 20 25
V10Z73MAM125
V10Z73MAM100
V10Z73MAM075
V10Z73MAM050
10
15 20 25
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Spring Mounts Foam Type To 4500 N
WORKING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Spring Steel (Black Cataphoresis or Blue Epoxy)

Base Carbon Steel Bushing Carbon Steel
Isolator Polyethylene
Base Pad Foam Rubber
-90C TO +200C (-130F TO +392F)
New
69 (2.7)
M12
A
96 (3.8)
128
(5.04)
96
(3.8)
8 (.32)
Metric
12 (.47)
86 (3.4)
3 (.12)
Catalog Number*
V10Z73MAM150
V10Z73MAM200
V10Z73MAM250
V10Z73MAM350
V10Z73MAM450
M Style
Base Mounting
shown
M8
22
(.87)
Maximum
Load
N
(lb.)
1500
(337.2)
2000
(449.6)
2500
(562.0)
3500
(786.8)
4500
(1011.6)
Minimum
Deflection
mm
(in.)
35
(1.38)
Load
N
(lb.)
640
(143.9)
860
(193.3)
1070
(240.5)
1500
(337.2)
1930
(433.9)
Deflection
mm
(in.)
15
(.59)
Stiffness
N/mm
(lb./in.)
Admissible
Temporary
Overload
%
43
(245.5)
57
(325.5)
71
(405.4)
100
(571.0)
129
(736.6)
30
25
20
14
11
To complete the part number please specify mounting style.

PERFORMANCE GRAPH
V10Z73MAM450
4500
Mounting
Style
Description
No bases
Height at
A
Free Height 35 mm (1.38 in.)
Deflection
mm (in.)
111 (4.37)
mm (in.)
76 (2.99)
Lower base attached
114 (4.49)
79 (3.11)
Upper and Lower bases attached
117 (4.61)
82 (3.23)
4000
V10Z73MAM350
3500
3000
2500
V10Z73MAM250
2000
V10Z73MAM200
1500
V10Z73MAM150
1000
500
0
Rev: 5-8-11 SS
5-8
10
15
20
25
30
35
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Spring Mounts Damped Type To 200 lbs.

Base Plate Mild Steel

Springs High-Tensile Steel - Phosphated & Dyed Black
Isolator Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh
End Caps Light Alloy
CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT
STAINLESS STEEL MESH
4.0 (101.6)
3.25 (82.6)
2 HOLES
.386 (9.8) DIA.
3.0 (76.2)
3/8-16 UNC-2B x 1/2 DEEP
2.50 (63.5)
CHARACTERISTICS
Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio approximately 1:1.
Elastic Limit corresponds to a maximum load in
compression of .042 oz. (1.2 g) and radially
.007 oz. (0.2 g). Damping factor c/co .10 to .15.
APPLICATIONS
MEDIUM-HEAVY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT
OPTICAL EQUIPMENT
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
MOUNTING
Must be loaded vertically through its axis.
lb.
kgf
V10Z30-2273
60 90
27 40
V10Z30-2274
90 135
40 61
V10Z30-2275
135 200
61 90
Natural
Frequency
Hz
2 2-1/2
H - Height
Free
Max.Load
in.
mm
In.
mm
5.7
144
3.0
76.2
5-9
S E C T I O N 5
Catalog Number
Static Load
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product

Springs High-Tensile Steel; Phosphated, Dyed Black
Isolators Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh
3-3/4 (95.3)
4-1/2 (114.3)
.563 (14.3) DIA.
CHARACTERISTICS
Lateral to vertical stiffness approximately 1:1.
1/2-20 UNF
APPLICATIONS
HEAVY LOADS
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS
GRAIN VIBRATORS
.260 (6.6) DIA.
SECTION X-X
MOUNTING
Static Load
lb.
kgf
V10Z31-2461
150 260
68 118
V10Z31-2462
250 450
113 205
V10Z31-2463
440 750
200 340
Natural
Frequency
H - Height
Free
Max. Load
Hz
in.
mm
4 4-1/2
3.0
76.2 2.378 60.4
5-10
in.
mm
S E C T I O N 5
Catalog Number
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Selection Criteria V10Z32 Mounts

INDUSTRIAL AND MARINE APPLICATIONS

The following table gives recommended isolation efficiency in relation to site configuration and driving motor power. If site configuration is
not known, assume for basement condition. Transfer the recommended efficiency to the transmissibility curves on the graph.
Recommended Isolation Efficiency:

Upper Floor
Heavy
Construction
50%
75%
90%
95%
97%
Upper Floor
Light
Construction
90%
93%
95%
97.5%
98.5%
EXAMPLE
Project a line from the efficiency required on the right hand side to intersect the performance lines 1008, 1006
and 1004. Project those intersections down to obtain the
two dimensionless ratios (R) for the three mountings.
Divide the lowest running speed (Hz) of the complete
machine by R to give the natural frequency f 'n required.
Compare f 'n with the actual natural frequency (fn) of the
mounting concerned . If f 'n fits into the f n band of the
mounting, select that mounting. If two mountings meet the
above conditions, select the one with higher fn; it will be
more stable.
Recommended efficiency = 93%

first projection gives R = 5.5 for 1008
f
16.3
and from fn = ____ , fn = ____ = 2.96 Hz
R
5.5
discard 1008 as it has fn = 9 to 7 Hz
second projection gives R = 4 for 1006 & 1004
16.3
again fn = ____ = 4.08 Hz
4
which fits 1004, fn = 5 to 3 Hz
A fan turning at 980 rpm (16.3 Hz) driven by a 7 kw motor

running at 1470 rpm, which is to be installed on an upper
floor of light construction:
Now, all that remains is to place sufficient 1004

series mountings under the machine to support
its weight evenly.
TRANSMISSIBILITY (T)
10
20%
40%
70%
80%
0.1
90%
93%
V10Z321008
97%
98.5%
99%
V10Z321006 &
1004
0.01
99.5%
0.001
0.5
6 7 8 9 10
20
30 40 50 60 70 80 100
99.9%
f
ROTATION SPEED OF MACHINERY (Hz)
(R) FREQUENCY RATIO = =
fn
MOUNTING NATURAL FREQUENCY (Hz)
5-11
S E C T I O N 5
Up to 4
4 10
10 30
30 75
75 225
Basement
or Ground
Floor
50%
80%
90%
95%
ISOLATION
Driving
Motor, kW
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product


3.07 (78)
2 HOLES
.433 (11) DIA.
3-15/16 (100)
4.33 (110)
5-33/64 (140)
MOUNTING
Must be loaded vertically
through its axis.
Static Load Range
H
Catalog Number
Free
Equivalent
Natural
Static
Frequency
Loaded
Hz
Deflection
lb.
kgf
V10Z32-100411
165 243
75 110
V10Z32-100412
209 287
95 130
276 353
125 160
353 507
160 230
V10Z32-100415
463 683
210 310
V10Z32-100416
661 926
300 420
V10Z32-100611
66 110
30 50
V10Z32-100612
110 176
50 80
176 275
80 125
276 430
125 195
V10Z32-100615
430 683
195 310
V10Z32-100616
683 926
310 420
V10Z32-100811
88 187
40 85
V10Z32-100812
143 246
65 125
243 419
110 190
386 595
175 270
V10Z32-100815
551 882
250 400
V10Z32-100816
794 1235
360 560
V10Z32-100413
V10Z32-100414
V10Z32-100613
V10Z32-100614
V10Z32-100813
V10Z32-100814
5.82
(148)
3.94
(100)
3.94
(100)
5.04
(128)
3.54
(90)
3.54
(90)
35
57
79
APPLICATIONS
HEAVY LOADS
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS
GRAIN VIBRATORS
.394 1.181
(10 30)
.197 .394
(5 10)
.118 .197
(3 5)
5-12
S E C T I O N 5
M12
CHARACTERISTICS
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:


M12
3-15/16 (100)
4 HOLES
.512 (13) DIA.
8.27 (210)
9-27/32 (250)
CHARACTERISTICS
APPLICATIONS
HEAVY LOADS
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS
GRAIN VIBRATORS
MOUNTING
Static Load Range
V10Z32-100425
V10Z32-100426
V10Z32-100625
V10Z32-100626
V10Z32-100825
V10Z32-100826
Free
Equivalent
Natural
Static
Frequency
Loaded
Hz
Deflection
5.82
(148)
5.04
(128)
35
3.94
(100)
3.54
(90)
57
3.94
(100)
3.54
(90)
79
.394 1.181
(10 30)
.197 .394
(5 10)
.118 .197
(3 5)
lb.
kgf
860 1367
390 620
1323 1852
600 840
860 1367
390 620
1367 1852
620 840
1102 1764
500 800
1587 2469
720 1120
5-13
S E C T I O N 5
H
Catalog Number
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Spring Mounts Silicone Gel Type

Studs Brass
Body Silicone Gel
VERTICAL VIBRATIONS DAMPED WITHOUT HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Spring Piano Wire Type B, Nickel Plated
THREAD
23
(.906)
SPRING
15
(.591)
New
12
(.472)
Metric
28
(1.102)
V10Z61MBG7
kgf/ leg
(lb. / leg)
Resonance
Point
Resonance
Magnification
Hz
dB
0.8 to 1.6
(1.8 to 3.5)
1.5 to 4
(3.3 to 8.8)
Thread
16 to 14
10 to 8
V10Z61MBG8
Recommended
Frequency
Hz
M3
from 14
18 to 16
M6
Demonstration of Silicone Gel's outstanding

shock-absorbing abilities.
An ordinary fresh raw egg dropped down from 18 meters (59 ft.) high to a
2 cm (.787 in.) thick Silcone Gel bed does not break. It is publicly proven
many times.
5-14
S E C T I O N 5
Optimum Load
Catalog Number
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Steel Spring and Mesh Mounts To 10 lbs.

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT STAINLESS STEEL MESH

FOR LOADS OF .5 TO 10 POUNDS (.25 TO 4.6 kgf)
Housing Aluminum Alloy, Anodized

Eyelets Brass, Tin Plated
Isolators Stainless Steel Spring and Mesh
ACROSS FLATS
.15 (3.8)
RADIAL DEFLECTION
.56 (14.2)
1.58 (40.1) DIA.

H
1.62 (41.1) DIA.
59/64 (23.5)
5/32 (4)
NOTE: MAX BOLT LENGTH INTO CAP IS 9/32 (7.1)
TYPICAL TRANSMISSIBILITY CURVE
1.37
(34.9)
as a function of applied load

5
TRANSMISSIBILITY
1-45/64
(43.4)
#8-32 UNC-2B (SUFFIX A)

M4 x 0.7 mm (SUFFIX C)
.27 (7) DEEP
2 HOLES
.157 (4) DIA.
TYPE "D"
OVAL BASE
4 HOLES
.157 (4) DIA.
1.94 (49.4)
TYPICAL
PER SIDE
FOR SQUARE BASE
CONFIGURATION
2-1/4 (57.1)
4.5
4
3.5
3
MIN LOAD
MAX LOAD
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
TYPE "S" SQUARE BASE
3 4 5
8 10
20 30 40 50
100
FREQUENCY
DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS
Ratio between transverse and axial stiffness (vertical)
approximately 1:2.5
Natural frequency = 7 to 11 Hz vertical and 4.5 to 7 Hz
transverse depending on load, for a displacement input
.014 (0.35).
Maximum displacement input .016 (0.4).
Transmissibility 4:1.
Conforms to MIL-E-5400
LOADING LIMITATIONS
Prior to abutting snubber, load corresponding to a
continuous acceleration of at least 2 G.
Loads corresponding to at least 10 G may be accepted
without subsequently affecting the mount performance.
Maximum displacement of the suspended unit under
limiting loads .197 (5).
APPLICATIONS
AIRCRAFT
MARINE
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94F to +347F

-70C to +175C
Static Load
kgf
lb.
.55 1.00
0.25 1
V10Z19-7012SA
.80 1.80
0.35 0.8
V10Z19-7013SA
1.50 3.40
0.7 1.5
V10Z19-7014SA
2.20 5.60
5.60 10.10
2.55 4.6
V10Z19-7011SA
2.55
V10Z19-7015DA
V10Z19-7015DC
V10Z19-7015SA
V10Z19-7015SC
5-15
H - Height
Free
in.
mm
1.35
38.1
Weight
Max. Load (Approx.)
in.
mm
1.09 27.68
oz.
kg
1.4
0.04
S E C T I O N 5
M4 x
0.7 mm
Thread
#8-32
UNC-2B
Oval
Square
Base Type
Catalog Number
MOBILE
ROTATING MACHINES
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Steel Spring and Mesh Mounts To 132 lbs.


FOR LOADS OF 1.5 TO 132 POUNDS (0.7 TO 60 kgf)
Housing Aluminum Alloy, Anodized

Eyelets Brass, Tin Plated
Isolators Stainless Steel Spring and Mesh
1.18 (30)
.205 (5.2)
RADIAL DISPLACEMENT
UNLOADED
1-27/32 (46.3)
2-1/4 (57.27) DIA.
11/64 (4.5)
2-3/8 (60.5)
NOTE:
MAX FIXING BOLT LENGTH
INTO CAP A, B, & C IS 23/64 (9.14)
INTO CAP D IS .580 (14.73)
1.94 (49.2)
1/4-20 UNC-2B
1/4-28 UNF-2B
M6 x 1 mm
3/8-24 UNF
TYPICAL TRANSMISSIBILITY CURVE

as a function of applied load
5
TRANSMISSIBILITY
1-3/16 (30)
(SUFFIX A)
(SUFFIX B)
(SUFFIX C)
(SUFFIX D)
4 HOLES
.197 (5) DIA.
4.5
4
3.5
MIN LOAD
MAX LOAD
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
3 4 5 7.5 9.5
20
30
50
100
FREQUENCY
DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS
In accordance with curve 1 of spec MIL-C-172.
Ratio between transverse and axial stiffness
(vertical): approximately 1:2.5.
Natural Frequency = 7 to 10 Hz vertical and 4.5 to 6 Hz
transverse depending on load for a displacement
input of .030 (0.75).
Maximum displacement input .031 (0.8)
Transmissibility: 4:1
Conforms to MIL-E-5400C
WEIGHT: 3.53 - 4.41 oz. (100-125 g) approx.
APPLICATIONS
AIRCRAFT
MARINE
MOBILE
ROTATING MACHINES
Static Load
1/4-20 UNC-2B
1/4-28 UNF-2B
M6 x 1 mm
3/8-24 UNF
lb.
kgf
V10Z22-7201A
V10Z22-7202A
V10Z22-7203A
V10Z22-7204A
V10Z22-7205A
V10Z22-7206A
V10Z22-7207A
V10Z22-7209A
V10Z22-7210A
V10Z22-7201B
V10Z22-7202B
V10Z22-7203B
V10Z22-7204B
V10Z22-7205B
V10Z22-7206B
V10Z22-7207B
V10Z22-7209B
V10Z22-7210B
V10Z22M7201C
V10Z22M7202C
V10Z22M7203C
V10Z22M7204C
V10Z22M7205C
V10Z22M7206C
V10Z22M7207C
V10Z22M7209C
V10Z22M7210C
V10Z22-7201D
V10Z22-7202D
V10Z22-7203D
V10Z22-7204D
V10Z22-7205D
V10Z22-7206D
V10Z22-7207D
V10Z22-7209D
V10Z22-7210D
V10Z22-7211D
1.55 2.75
2.55 5.00
4.40 9.90
6.20 12.35
9.90 19.85
15.40 30.85
17.65 39.70
35.30 48.50
44.10 72.75
72.75 132.30
0.7 1.25
1.15 2.3
2
4.5
2.8 5.6
4.5 9
7
14
8
18
16
22
20
33
33
60
5-16
S E C T I O N 5
Catalog Number
LOADING LIMITATIONS
Just prior to abutting snubber, load corresponding
to a continuous acceleration of at least 2 G.
Loads corresponding to at least 10 G may be
accepted without subsequently affecting the
mount performance.
Maximum displacement of the suspended unit
under limiting loads .236 (6).
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Steel Mesh Mounts To 1000 lbs.

MATERIAL:

Cap and Base Aluminum Alloy

Center Stud Aluminum Alloy
FINISH: Alochrome 1200 on all Aluminum components
3 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
3/8-16 UNC-2B
APPLICATIONS
LIGHTWEIGHT MACHINE TOOLS
PRINTING AND TEXTILE MACHINERY
4 HOLES
.295 (7.5) DIA.
1-13/32 (35.7)
CHARACTERISTICS
Although normally intended to be used in compression, they will accept accidental tensile loads. The
mounts should be fixed to the floor for loads in
excess of 220 lb. (99.8 kgf) or when working
conditions require it. They will accept compressive
loads at least five times the static load.
Natural
Frequency
Static Load
Catalog Number
kgf
V10Z28-1641
10
20
4.55
V10Z28-1642
20
50
9.05
22.5
V10Z28-1643
50 100
22.5
45.35
V10Z28-1644
100 200
45.35
90.7
V10Z28-1645
200 500
90.7 226.8
V10Z28-1646
500 1000
226.8 453.5
H - Height
Free
Max. Load
Hz
oz.
kg
in.
mm
in.
mm
13 17
For an
amplitude
of .012(0.3)
6.33
0.18
1.91
48.6
1.44
36.6
9.05
5-17
S E C T I O N 5
lb.
Weight
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product


Housing Machine Casting

Center, Cup and Washer are
Cadmium Plated Mild Steel
Isolator Stainless Steel Mesh
4 HOLES
.323 (8.2) DIA.
3-1/4
(82.55)
8000
LOAD
INCREASING
2.45
(62.3)
LOAD
DECREASING
6000
LOAD (lb.)
5/8-11 UNC
4000
2000
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
DEFLECTION (in.)
*
APPLICATIONS
Primarily developed for heavy-duty applications
where severe shock forces are encountered,
these mounts are especially recommended for
vehicle and marine installations where there are
high starting torques or reversals of loads. They
are capable of withstanding compression loads as
high as ten times the static loads and are used for
isolating marine fans, mobile engines,
generators, instrument consoles and general
machine tools such as lathes, milling
machines, slotters, broachers, etc.
lb.
kgf
V10Z27-3021
70 400
32 181
V10Z27-3022
300 800
136 363
V10Z27-3023
600 1600
273 725
Natural
Frequency
Hz
14 22
H - Height
Free
Loaded
1-61/64
1-53/64
(49.68)
(46.38)
*A locking device is provided for the removal of rusted mounting bolts.
5-18
S E C T I O N 5
Static Load
Catalog Number
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF

1000 TO 20000 POUNDS (450 TO 9070 kgf)
FREESTANDING CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT

6-1/2 (165.1)
2.618 (66.5)
APPLICATIONS
DESIGNED PRINCIPALLY FOR

X
HEAVY-DUTY PUNCH AND

PANEL PRESSES
5/8-11 UNC
15/16
(23.9)
LOADED
1-7/64
(28.4)
FREE
SECTION X-X
3/4
(20)
FLOOR MOUNTING
To support heavy loads, the mounts
are grouped together on a spreader
plate.The spreader plate should be made
the same size as the floor bearing area
of the base. Fasten the mounts to the
spreader plate by the 5/8 tapped hole
provided, then fasten the spreader to the
machine base.
EXAMPLE:
Total Weight of Machine = 65 TONS
MACHINE
BASE
SPREADER
PLATE
NOTE:
Dimensions
in ( ) are mm.
LARGE MACHINE TOOLS

ROCK CRUSHERS
MUST BE FREESTANDING
ON FLOOR OR FOUNDATION
Catalog Number
V10Z33-1133
V10Z33-1133-2
V10Z33-1133-4
Machine Weight
Capacity of Mount
65
= 7.22 (use 8 mounts)
9
Static Load Range

lb.
kgf
1000 20000
2000 5000
10000 20000
450 9070
905 2265
4530 9070

6-1/2
(165.1)
2.630
(66.8)
5/8-11 UNC
X
X
.915
(23.24)
1.281
(32.5) DIA.
3/8
(10)
FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF
800 TO
16000 POUNDS (360 TO 7250 kgf)
FLOOR MOUNTED CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT

2.875
(73) DIA.
1.500
(38) DIA.
APPLICATIONS
Designed for heavy machine tools,
this low profile mount serves the dual
purpose of effectively isolating machine
vibration while preventing movement
by holding firmly on its base.
FLOOR
LEVEL
FLOOR MOUNTING
It is important that the stud is firmly
fixed into the floor before the machine
is bolted down. In the illustration, Rawbolt
"studding" has been used, but foundation
anchoring hardware is not provided with the mount.
For use on level surfaces only. Use 1.0
(24) maximum diameter fixing studs.
1.118
(28.4) FREE
Catalog Number*
1/8
(3)
MACHINE
BASE
1.281 DIA.
(32.5)
SECTION X-X
V10Z34-1139
Static Load Range

lb.
kgf
800 16000
360 7250
*To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.
5-19
S E C T I O N 5
MATERIAL:
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Spring Mounts Suspension Type

ALL METAL
Mounting Plates Steel, Cadmium Plated

Springs Spring Steel Wire
B
K MAX.
C
E
D
F
J MAX.
A
J Designates vertical displacement

K Designates radial displacement
26
24
STATIC LOAD DEFLECTION CURVE
22
AXIAL
20
RADIAL
LOAD (lb.)
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -76 F to +302 F

-60 C to +150 C
Catalog Number
Nominal
Load
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)
Weight
lb.
kgf
oz.
1
2
3
4
0.45
0.91
1.36
1.81
.38 0.011
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
10
15
20
25
30
35
Dimensions
kg
in.
mm
in.
mm
A
B
C
D
7/8
1-1/4
1
.17
22.23
31.75
25.4
4.22
E
F
J
K
.14
9/32
5/32
1/8
3.56
7.14
3.97
3.18
0.91
1.81
2.72
3.63 1.14 0.033
4.54
5.44
6.35
A
B
C
D
1-1/4
1-25/32
1-3/8
.26
31.75
45.25
34.93
6.53
E
F
J
K
.17
23/64
3/16
3/16
4.22
9.13
4.76
4.76
4.54
6.80
9.07
3.01 0.086
11.34
13.61
15.88
A
B
C
D
1-3/4
2-5/16
1-3/4
.39
44.45
54.77
44.45
9.93
E
F
J
K
.2
17/32
1/4
3/16
4.98
13.5
6.35
4.76
LIGHT-DUTY
V10C16-LS197501
V10C16-LS197602
V10C16-LS197703
V10C16-LS203704
V10C16-MS197802
V10C16-MS197904
V10C16-MS198006
V10C16-MS198108
V10C16-MS198210
V10C16-MS198312
V10C16-MS371114
HEAVY-DUTY
V10C16-HS198410
V10C16-HS198515
V10C16-HS198620
V10C16-HS198725
V10C16-HS198830
V10C16-HS198935
NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds.
Deflection curve for mounts with other load ratings may be drawn by shifting the curve shown to
pass through a point defined by the intersection of the mounts nominal load (pounds) with a
standard deflection of .06 inches.
5-20
S E C T I O N 5
MEDIUM-DUTY
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Spring Mounts Pedestal Type

ALL METAL

K MAX.
B
C
H
D
F
J MAX.
G
J Designates vertical displacement

K Designates radial displacement
26
24
22
AXIAL
20
RADIAL
LOAD (lb.)
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0.02
0.04
0.06

-60 C to +150 C
Catalog Number
Nominal
Load
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
Weight
0.18
0.20
oz.
Dimensions
in.
mm
.71 0.021
A
B
C
D
E
7/8
1-11/16
1-3/8
.170
.150
22.23
42.85
34.93
4.22
3.73
F
G
H
J
K
15/64
9/16
1-9/16
5/32
1/8
5.95
14.29
39.67
3.97
3.18
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0.91
1.81
2.72
3.63 2.05 0.061
4.54
5.44
6.35
A
B
C
D
E
1-1/4
2-3/8
1-15/16
.257
.196
31.75
60.33
49.20
6.53
4.98
F
G
H
J
K
21/64
13/16
2-25/32
3/16
3/16
8.33
20.64
70.64
4.76
4.76
10
15
20
25
30
35
4.54
6.80
9.07
3.01 0.138
11.34
13.61
15.88
A
B
C
D
E
1-3/4
3.0
2-1/2
.39
.26
44.45
76.20
63.5
9.93
6.53
F
G
H
J
K
31/64
1-3/32
2-3/4
1/4
3/16
12.30
29.37
69.85
6.35
4.76
lb.
kgf
0.08
DEFLECTION (in.)
kg
in.
mm
LIGHT-DUTY
V10C17-LP199301
V10C17-LP199402
V10C17-LP199503
V10C17-LP199604
1
2
3
4
0.45
0.91
1.36
1.81
V10C17-MP199702
V10C17-MP199804
V10C17-MP199906
V10C17-MP235008
V10C17-MP235110
V10C17-MP235212
V10C17-MP370914
HEAVY-DUTY
V10C17-HP235310
V10C17-HP235415
V10C17-HP235520
V10C17-HP235625
V10C17-HP235730
V10C17-HP371035
NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds.
Deflection curve for mounts with other load ratings may be drawn by shifting the curve shown to
pass through a point defined by the intersection of the mounts nominal load (pounds) with a
standard deflection of .06 inches.
5-21
S E C T I O N 5
MEDIUM-DUTY
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Spring Mounts Single Hole Type

ALL METAL

G MAX.
D
B
C
F MAX.
A
D
F Designates vertical displacement

G Designates radial displacement
26
24
22
AXIAL
20
RADIAL
LOAD (lb.)
18
16
14
12
10
DEFLECTION
8
6
4
2
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)
-60 C to +150 C
Catalog Number
Nominal
Load
Weight
lb.
kgf
oz.
1
2
3
4
0.45
0.91
1.36
1.81
.93 0.026
2
4
6
8
10
12
10
15
20
25
30
35
Dimensions
kg
in.
mm
in.
mm
A
B
C
D
3/8
1-19/64
3/8
#4 BA
9.53
32.94
9.53
4
E
F
G
1-3/32
5/32
1/8
27.78
3.97
3.18
0.91
1.81
2.72
2.71 0.076
3.63
4.54
5.44
A
B
C
D
1/2
1-7/8
1/2
#1/4 BSF
12.7
47.63
12.7
6
E
F
G
1-21/64
3/16
3/16
33.73
4.76
4.76
4.54
6.80
9.07
6.47 0.182
11.34
13.61
15.88
A
B
C
D
11/16
2-9/16
27/32
#3/8 BSF
17.46
61.91
21.43
10
E
F
G
1-51/64
1/4
3/16
45.64
6.35
4.76
LIGHT-DUTY
V10C18-LF237001
V10C18-LF237102
V10C18-LF237203
V10C18-LF237304
V10C18-MF237402
V10C18-MF237504
V10C18-MF237606
V10C18-MF237708
V10C18-MF237810
V10C18-MF237912
HEAVY-DUTY
V10C18-HF238210
V10C18-HF238315
V10C18-HF238420
V10C18-HF238525
V10C18-HF238630
V10C18-HF371235
NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds (2.7 kgf).
Deflection curve for mounts with other load ratings may be drawn by shifting the curve shown to pass through
a point defined by the intersection of the mounts nominal load (pounds) with a standard deflection of .06 inches (1.5 mm).
5-22
S E C T I O N 5
MEDIUM-DUTY
CO
Cable Isolators
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
COMPRESSION
SHEAR
LOAD
New
LOAD
WALL
FLOOR OR BASE
45 COMPRESSION & ROLL
ROLL
LOAD
UNIT BEING
ISOLATED
WALL
WALL / FLOOR
LOAD
45
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS AND USES

Typical Equipment
Protection From
Operational Advantages
Electronics, Computers, Machinery
Long life, Maintenance-free, Temperature

Explosive blast, Inherent vibration, Storms extremes, Corrosion resistance, All axes
protection
Rough
Terrain
Vehicles
Instrumentation, Generators, Electronics
Rough terrain, Poor road conditions,

Collision
Long life, Maintenance-free, Temperature

extremes, Ozone, Radioacitvity, UV
Radiation
Aircraft
Electronics, Computers
High-G maneuvering, Hard landings,

Turbulent air
Temperature and altitude extremes,

Lightweight
Shipping
Containers
Optics, Instruments, Missiles, Electronics
Transit, Handling drop, Loading/Unloading
Long life, Maintenance-free, Exposure

to moisture, Repeated use
Industrial
Equipment
Centrifuge, Dryers, Pumps
Unbalanced dynamic loads, Fluid hammer, Long life, Maintenance-free, Corrosive

Inherent vibration, Foundation weakness
environments
Ordnance
Equipment
Missile launchers, Tank artillery, Computer

Rough terrain, Railroad humping,Transit
controls, Electronics
Maintenance-free, Temperature extremes,

Nearby blast
Medical
Equipment
Mechanical equipment necessary for

patient care
Maintenance-free, No outgassing, Can be

sterlized
Chimneys
Wind causing resonant frequencies, Stack Maintenance-free, Temperature extremes,

Chimneys, Scrubbers, Measuring devices gas causing turbulence near scrubber, etc. Corrosive environments
Shipboard
Vibration from moving parts, Mobile cartsTransport shock
5-23
S E C T I O N 5
Applications
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
Cable Isolators 1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia.

MATERIAL:
ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES

RESISTS CORROSION MAINTENANCEFREE
Cable Stainless Steel (MIL-W-83420)

Retaining Bars Aluminum Alloy

6061-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541)
Retaining Clips Stainless Steel
New
MOUNTING
HOLES
W1
O.D.
H1
1/16 Diameter Cable
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z70-0625100
V10Z70-0625110
V10Z70-0625120
V10Z70-0625130
V10Z70-0625140
V10Z70-0625150
O.D.
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
H1
.16
(4.1)
3.12
(79.2)
2.69
(68.3)
.20
(5.1)
.40
(10.2)
W1
.20
(5.1)
Mounting
Holes
.177 (4.3)
Hole
Countersink
.31 (7.9)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
3/32 Diameter Cable
V10Z70-0938110
V10Z70-0938120
V10Z70-0938130
V10Z70-0938150
V10Z70-0938160
V10Z70-0938170
O.D.
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
.9
(22.9)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
H1
.25
(6.4)
4.44
3.95
(112.8) (100.3)
.24
(6.1)
.50
(12.7)
W1
.25
(6.4)
Mounting
Holes
.196 (5)
Hole
Countersink
.41 (10.4)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
99
(1.77)
65
(1.16)
36
(0.64)
25
(0.45)
18
(0.32)
14
(0.25)
.3
(7.6)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
69
(1.23)
54
(0.96)
48
(0.86)
32
(0.57)
24
(0.43)
21
(0.38)
.3
(7.6)
.4
(10.2)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
.9
(22.9)
Compression
Catalog Number
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
377
(6.73)
233
(4.16)
146
(2.61)
85
(1.52)
61
(1.09)
48
(0.86)
.2
(5.1)
.3
(7.6)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
177
(3.16)
136
(2.43)
84
(1.50)
51
(0.91)
38
(0.68)
32
(0.57)
.3
(7.6)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./ in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
37
(0.66)
23
(0.41)
11
(0.20)
8
(0.14)
5
(0.09)
4
(0.07)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
.9
(22.9)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./ in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
82
(1.46)
75
(1.34)
49
(0.88)
24
(0.43)
17
(0.3)
14
(0.25)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)

Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
5-24
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
Cable Isolators 1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia.

MATERIAL:



New
MOUNTING
HOLES
.56
(14.2)
O.D.
.28
(7.1)
.25
(6.4)
4.50
(114.3)
5.00
(127)
1/8 Diameter Cable
H1
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z70-1250140
V10Z70-1250150
V10Z70-1250160
V10Z70-1250170
V10Z70-1250180
V10Z70-1250190
V10Z70-1250210
V10Z70-1250230
O.D.
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
1.8
(45.7)
1.9
(48.3)
2.1
(53.3)
2.3
(58.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.8
(45.7)
2.0
(50.8)
H1
.31
(7.9)
Mounting
Holes
.257 (6.5)
Hole
Countersink
.52 (13.2)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
5/32 Diameter Cable
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
696
(12.43)
450
(8.04)
290
(5.18)
215
(3.84)
170
(3.04)
135
(2.41)
82
(1.46)
61
(1.09)
.2
(5.1)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
1.0
(25.4)
1.2
(30.5)
335
(5.98)
263
(4.7)
181
(3.23)
146
(2.61)
129
(2.3)
125
(2.23)
75
(1.34)
67
(1.2)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
.9
(22.9)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z70-1563160
V10Z70-1563170
V10Z70-1563190
V10Z70-1563210
V10Z70-1563230
V10Z70-1563250
O.D.
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
1.9
(48.3)
2.1
(53.3)
2.3
(58.4)
2.5
(63.5)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.8
(45.7)
2.0
(50.8)
2.2
(55.9)
H1
.38
(9.7)
Mounting
Holes
.257 (6.5)
Hole
Countersink
.52 (13.2)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
767
(13.7)
543
(9.7)
329
(5.88)
196
(3.5)
133
(2.38)
97
(1.73)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.7
(17.8)
.9
(22.9)
1.0
(25.4)
1.2
(30.5)
377
(6.73)
295
(5.27)
210
(3.75)
149
(2.66)
131
(2.34)
86
(1.54)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
.8
(20.3)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
5-25
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
162
(2.89)
130
(2.32)
98
(1.75)
75
(1.34)
56
(1)
44
(0.79)
28
(0.5)
20
(0.36)
.9
(22.9)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.7
(43.2)
1.9
(48.3)
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
264
(4.71)
179
(3.2)
114
(2.04)
67
(1.2)
45
(0.8)
30
(0.54)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
1.1
(27.9)
1.4
(35.6)
1.6
(40.6)
1.8
(45.7)

Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
PONENT
See Section 5
Request Quote
Cable Isolators 3/16" Cable Dia.

MATERIAL:



New
MOUNTING
HOLES
.56
(14.2)
O.D.
.28
(7.1)
.25
(6.4)
4.50
(114.3)
5.00
(127)
.38
(9.7)
3 / 16 Diameter Cable - Standard Duty

Compression
Catalog Number
V10Z70-1875140
V10Z70-1875150
V10Z70-1875160
V10Z70-1875170
V10Z70-1875180
V10Z70-1875190
O.D.
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
1.8
(45.7)
1.9
(48.3)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.4
(35.6)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
Mounting
Holes
.257 (6.5)
Hole
Countersink
.52 (13.2)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
1891
(33.77)
1534
(27.39)
1149
(20.52)
811
(14.48)
612
(10.93)
492
(8.79)
.3
(7.6)
.3
(7.6)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.7
(17.8)
.8
(20.3)
913
(16.3)
710
(12.68)
558
(9.96)
433
(7.73)
340
(6.07)
263
(4.7)
.4
(10.2)
.4
(10.2)
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.5
(12.7)
.6
(15.2)
NOTES: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Same cable diameter but additional sizes are available on the following page.
Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are
available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for
more information.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
Visit Website
5-26
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
845
(15.09)
537
(9.59)
414
(7.39)
280
(5)
231
(4.13)
204
(3.64)
.4
(10.2)
.6
(15.2)
.7
(17.8)
.9
(22.9)
.9
(22.9)
1.0
(25.4)
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product



New
MOUNTING
HOLES
.56
(14.2)
O.D.
.28
(7.1)
.25
(6.4)
2.58
(65.6)
5.66
(143.8)
.38
(9.7)
5.16
(131.1)
3 /16 Diameter Cable Light-Duty

Catalog Number
V10Z70-1875228
V10Z70-1875250
V10Z70-1875294
V10Z70-1875319
V10Z70-1875345
V10Z70-1875420
O.D.
2.28
(57.9)
2.50
(63.5)
2.94
(74.7)
3.19
(81)
3.45
(87.6)
4.20
(106.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.06
(52.3)
2.13
(54.1)
2.19
(55.6)
2.45
(62.2)
3.20
(81.3)
Mounting
Holes
.28 (7.1)
Hole
Countersink
.53 (13.5)
to
82 deg.
(6x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./ in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
279
(4.98)
227
(4.05)
155
(2.77)
129
(2.3)
82
(1.46)
39
(0.7)
1.00
(25.4)
1.05
(26.7)
1.10
(27.9)
1.20
(30.5)
1.40
(35.6)
2.00
(50.8)
159
(2.84)
131
(2.34)
95
(1.7)
77
(1.38)
58
(1.04)
31
(0.55)
.8
(20.3)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
1.8
(45.7)
1.9
(48.3)
2.1
(53.3)
NOTES: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Same cable diameter but additional sizes are available on the previous page.
more information.
5-27
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf / mm)
in.
94
(1.68)
72
(1.29)
57
(1.02)
54
(0.96)
36
(0.64)
18
(0.32)
1.90
(48.3)
2.20
(55.9)
2.50
(63.5)
2.65
(67.3)
2.75
(69.9)
3.20
(81.3)
S E C T I O N 5
Compression
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product



Retaining Screws Stainless Steel
New
MOUNTING
HOLES
.62
(15.7)
O.D.
.31
(7.9)
.29
(7.4)
.5
(12.7)
5.162
(131.1)
5.75
(146.1)
1/4 Diameter Cable

Catalog Number
V10Z70-2500220
V10Z70-2500250
V10Z70-2500280
V10Z70-2500313
V10Z70-2500350
V10Z70-2500375
V10Z70-2500395
V10Z70-2500425
O.D.
2.20
(55.9)
2.50
(63.5)
2.80
(71.1)
3.13
(79.5)
3.50
(88.9)
3.75
(95.3)
3.95
(100.3)
4.25
(108)
1.90
(48.3)
2.13
(54.1)
2.31
(58.7)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
2.63
(66.8)
2.63
(66.8)
3.25
(82.6)
Mounting
Holes
.28 (7.1)
Hole
Countersink
.53 (13.5)
to
82 deg.
(4x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./ in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
1033
(18.45)
623
(11.13)
423
(7.55)
304
(5.43)
234
(4.18)
181
(3.23)
159
(2.84)
100
(1.79)
.6
(15.2)
.8
(20.3)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.5
(38.1)
2.0
(50.8)
516
(9.21)
323
(5.77)
277
(4.95)
192
(3.43)
174
(3.11)
124
(2.21)
110
(1.96)
67
(1.2)
.8
(20.3)
1.0
(25.4)
1.3
(33)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
1.9
(48.3)
2.0
(50.8)
2.2
(55.9)

more information.
5-28
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./ in.
Deflect.
(kgf / mm)
in.
300
(5.36)
182
(3.25)
122
(2.18)
96
(1.71)
92
(1.64)
76
(1.36)
75
(1.34)
39
(0.7)
1.5
(38.1)
1.8
(45.7)
2.2
(55.9)
2.3
(58.4)
2.5
(63.5)
2.7
(68.6)
2.8
(71.1)
3.0
(76.2)
S E C T I O N 5
Compression
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product

Retaining Screws Alloy Steel; Cadmium Plated (QQ-P-416)

RESISTS
CORROSION MAINTENANCEFREE
New
MOUNTING
HOLES
1.00
(25.4)
O.D.
.50
(12.7)
1.19
(30.2)
1.75
(44.5)
.63
(16)
4.38
(111.3)
6.13
(155.7)
8.50
(215.9)
3/8 Diameter Cable

Catalog Number
V10Z70-3750331
V10Z70-3750350
V10Z70-3750413
V10Z70-3750425
V10Z70-3750450
V10Z70-3750475
V10Z70-3750550
O.D.
3.31
(84.1)
3.50
(88.9)
4.13
(104.9)
4.25
(108)
4.50
(114.3)
4.75
(120.7)
5.50
(139.7)
2.80
(71.1)
2.90
(73.7)
3.00
(76.2)
3.25
(82.6)
3.50
(88.9)
4.13
(104.9)
4.25
(108)
Mounting
Holes
.28 (7.1)
Hole
Countersink
.53 (13.5)
to
82 deg.
(8x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./ in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
1099
(19.63)
1017
(18.16)
734
(13.11)
598
(10.68)
447
(7.98)
319
(5.7)
228
(4.07)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.7
(43.2)
2.0
(50.8)
2.2
(55.9)
638
(11.39)
454
(8.11)
385
(6.88)
313
(5.59)
236
(4.21)
179
(3.2)
135
(2.41)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1
(27.9)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
2.0
(50.8)
2.2
(55.9)

more information.
5-29
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf / mm)
in.
662
(11.82)
442
(7.89)
357
(6.38)
212
(3.79)
167
(2.98)
100
(1.79)
89
(1.59)
1.5
(38.1)
2.0
(50.8)
2.3
(58.4)
2.8
(71.1)
3.5
(88.9)
4.0
(101.6)
4.5
(114.3)
S E C T I O N 5
Compression
See Section 5
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Cable Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D1)

Retaining Screws Alloy Steel; Cadmium Plated (QQ-P-416)
or Stainless Steel

RESISTS
New
MOUNTING
HOLES
1.00
(25.4)
O.D.
.50
(12.7)
1.19
(30.2)
1.75
(44.5)
.75
(19.1)
4.38
(111.3)
6.13
(155.7)
8.50
(215.9)
1/2 Diameter Cable

Catalog Number
V10Z70-5000400
V10Z70-5000413
V10Z70-5000475
V10Z70-5000525
V10Z70-5000565
V10Z70-5000613
V10Z70-5000710
O.D.
4.00
(101.6)
4.13
(104.9)
4.75
(120.7)
5.25
(133.4)
5.65
(143.5)
6.13
(155.7)
7.10
(180.3)
3.25
(82.6)
3.50
(88.9)
3.75
(95.3)
4.25
(108)
4.90
(124.5)
5.40
(137.2)
6.10
(154.9)
Mounting
Holes
.328 (8.3)
Hole
Countersink
.66 (16.8)
to
82 deg.
(8x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./ in.
(kgf / mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
1730
(30.89)
1492
(26.64)
1159
(20.7)
718
(12.82)
469
(8.38)
339
(6.05)
229
(4.09)
1.5
(38.1)
1.6
(40.6)
1.7
(43.2)
2.3
(58.4)
2.8
(71.7)
3.5
(88.9)
4.1
(104.1)
795
(14.2)
674
(12.04)
507
(9.05)
357
(6.38)
243
(4.34)
209
(3.73)
120
(2.14)
1.2
(30.5)
1.3
(33)
1.5
(38.1)
1.8
(45.7)
2.3
(58.4)
2.6
(66)
3.0
(76.2)

more information.
5-30
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./ in.
Deflect.
(kgf / mm)
in.
705
(12.59)
604
(10.79)
409
(7.3)
280
(5)
180
(3.21)
134
(2.39)
87
(1.55)
2.5
(63.5)
2.7
(68.6)
3.2
(81.3)
3.5
(88.9)
4.0
(101.6)
4.5
(114.3)
5.2
(132.1)
S E C T I O N 5
Compression
Buy Product
ADVA
N
TION
RA
PONENT
Request Quote

MATERIAL:

RESISTS
Cable Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D-1)



New
MOUNTING
HOLES
1.00
(25.4)
O.D.
.50
(12.7)
1.49
(37.85)
2.15
(54.61)
5.38
(136.65)
10.50
(266.7)
1.00
(25.4)
Compression
V10Z70-6250400
V10Z70-6250440
V10Z70-6250530
V10Z70-6250600
V10Z70-6250650
O.D.
Mounting
Holes
4.0
(101.6)
4.4
(111.8)
5.3
(134.6)
6.0
(152.4)
6.5
(165.1)
3.5
(88.9)
3.9
(99.06)
4.3
(109.2)
4.7
(119.4)
5.0
(127)
.41 (10.4)
Hole
Countersink
.78 (19.8)
to
82 deg.
(8x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
3721
(66.45)
2789
(49.81)
1774
(31.58)
1199
(21.41)
974
(17.39)
1.2
(30.48)
1.4
(35.56)
1.8
(45.72)
2.2
(55.88)
2.5
(63.5)
1602
(28.61)
1258
(22.47)
821
(14.66)
641
(11.45)
523
(9.34)
1.2
(30.48)
1.4
(35.56)
1.8
(45.72)
2.2
(55.88)
2.5
(63.5)

more information.
Rev: 3-21-09 SS
7.53
(191.26)
5/8 Diameter Cable

Catalog Number
Visit Website
NEW
N
D A TIVIB
CE
OM
See Section 5
5-30A
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
1950
(34.82)
1533
(27.38)
888
(15.86)
549
(9.80)
462
(8.25)
1.8
(45.7)
2.3
(58.4)
2.8
(71.1)
3.2
(81.28)
3.6
(91.44)
OM
PONENT
See Section 5
Request Quote

MATERIAL:

RESISTS
Cable Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D-1)



New
MOUNTING
HOLES
1.50
(38.1)
O.D.
.75
(19.5)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
7.50
(190.5)
14.50
(368.3)
1.50
(38.1)
Compression
V10Z70-8750550
V10Z70-8750650
V10Z70-8750700
V10Z70-8750825
V10Z70-8750925
O.D.
Mounting
Holes
5.5
(139.7)
6.5
(165.1)
7.0
(177.8)
8.25
(209.6)
9.25
(235)
5.25
(133.4)
6.0
(152.4)
6.25
(158.8)
7.5
(190.5)
8.5
(215.9)
.53 (13.46)
Hole
Countersink
1.0 (15.4)
to
82 deg.
(8x)
Shear or Roll
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
Spr. Rate
lb./in.
(kgf/mm)
Max.
Deflect.
in.
4375
(78.13)
2782
(49.68)
1956
(34.93)
1277
(22.8)
842
(15.04)
2.0
(50.8)
2.6
(66.04)
3.0
(76.2)
3.6
(91.44)
4.2
(106.7)
2865
(51.16)
1541
(27.52)
1419
(25.34)
809
(14.45)
493
(8.80)
2.1
(53.34)
2.6
(66.04)
2.9
(73.66)
3.3
(83.82)
4.0
(101.6)

more information.
Rev: 3-21-09 SS
10.50
(266.7)
7/8 Diameter Cable

Catalog Number
Visit Website
NEW
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
5-30B
45 Compression
& Roll
Spr. Rate
Max.
lb./in.
Deflect.
(kgf/mm)
in.
2820
(50.36)
1441
(25.73)
1271
(22.70)
770
(13.75)
388
(6.04)
2.5
(63.5)
3.2
(81.28)
3.8
(96.52)
4.7
(119.4)
6.4
(162.6)
SECTION 6
M PONENT
Bumper Technical Information

ENERGY ABSORBING PRODUCTS

Within the family of antivibration products, we are introducing a line of ENERGY-ABSORBING PRODUCTS.
GENERAL
In order to lend full understanding of the importance and capabilities of this product line, we will deal with the concept of ENERGY as well as present some practical
examples of several applications. The examples will also include calculations of the forces involved.
Energy-absorbing components are often used as parts of a system or a device itself or, alternatively, they might be used as a safety measure to absorb runaway energy in
case of failure of a component or a system. Some numerical examples are addressing both types of these applications.
ENERGY
A body is said to possess energy if it has the ability to perform work. This ability can be the result of its position or its condition. The position of the body produces
POTENTIAL ENERGY, whereas if the body is moving with some velocity it possesses energy of motion or KINETIC ENERGY.
The formulas governing energy are as follows:
Kinetic Energy of a body in translation
2
E = mV
2
.....................lb. in. or lb. ft.
where m is mass:
m=
W .....................lb. sec2/in. or lb. sec2/ft.

g
V is velocity in in./sec or ft./sec

W is weight in lb.
g is acceleration of gravity 32.16 ft./sec2 or 386 in./sec2
Kinetic Energy of a body in rotation
E = Io 2 .....................lb. in. or lb. ft.
where Io is the mass moment of inertia about the axis of rotation in lb. in.sec2 or lb. ft.sec2
is angular velocity in rad/sec or 1/sec
Potential Energy
E = W h .....................lb. in. or lb. ft.
where W is weight in lb.
h is height of free fall in in. or ft.
If the velocity at the end of the free fall is needed, it can be found from:
V=
2gh .....................in./sec or ft./sec
The total energy is considered the sum total of all energies involved, and this is the amount which is available to perform work.
In the examples which follow, simplified formulas have been developed and used to provide a very close approximation. This enables the application of units which are
most commonly used. The nomenclature used in these examples are as follows:
E1
E2
E3
E4
WE
W
V
Kinetic energy (lb. in.)

Work (propelling force) Energy (lb. in.)
Total energy (E1 + E2 lb. in.)
Total energy (E1 + E2) Per Hour (lb. in.)
Effective weight (lb.)
Weight of object (lb.)
Velocity (ft./sec)
F
C
HP
T
g
H
S
Propelling force (lb.)

Cycles per hour
Motor energy (horsepower)
Torque (lb. in.)
Acceleration due to gravity (ft./sec2)
Falling height including stroke of shock absorber (in.)
Shock absorber stroke (in.)
t
a
u
RS
K
VS
q
Deceleration time (sec)

Decelertaion (ft./sec2)
Friction (coefficient)
Shock absorber mounting radius (in.)
Distance from pivot to center of gravity (in.)
Velocity at the shock absorber (ft./sec)
Reaction force (lb.)
The actual nature of the application and the availability of space will determine which type of Bumper will be used. In order to facilitate the choice, the following graph is given
which compares the Force vs. Travel characteristics of the different types.
FORCE vs TRAVEL CURVE

V10P81-R05
700
V10P80-A01
600
400
V10P80-AS102
V10P81-R05
300
V10P80-AS102
200
V10P80-A01
FORCE (lb.)
500
100
This drawing shows size comparison of identical capacity

bumpers from each product group. The graph at the right shows
comparable performance characteristics.
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
TRAVEL (in.)
6-2
S E C T I O N 6
CO
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT

EXAMPLES
1. Weight with no propelling force

S
V
Formulas
E1 = (0.2)(W)(V2)
E4 = (E1)(C)
WE = W
Example
W = 500 lb.
V = 6 fps
C = 500/hour
Formulas
E1 = (0.2)(W)(V2)
E2 = (F)(S)
E3 = E1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
WE = E1 + E2
(0.2)(V2)
Example
W = 800 lb.
V = 5 fps
F = 300 lb.
C = 250/hour
S = 3 in.
Formulas
E1 = (0.2)(W)(V2)
E2 = (1375)(HP)(S)
V
E3 = E1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
WE = E1 + E2
(0.2)(V2)
Example
W = 1700 lb.
V = 4 fps
Formulas
E1 = (0.2)(W)(V2)
E2 = (T)(S)
RS
E3 = E1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
VS = (V)(RS)
K
WE = E1 + E2
(0.2)(VS2)
Example
W = 350 lb.
V = 3 fps
Formulas
E1 = (W)(H-S)
E2 = (W)(S)
E3 = (W)(H)
E4 = (E3)(C)
V = 5(H-S)
WE = (W)(H)
H-S
Example
W = 900 lb.
H = 20 in.
C = 100/hour
S = 4 in.
E1 = (0.2)(500)(62) = 3600 lb. in.

E4 = (3600)(500) = 1,800,000 lb. in./hour
2. Weight with propelling force
S
W
3. Motor driven weight

HP
4. Swinging weight with torque

W
V
V
S
VS
RS
5. Free-falling weight
H
S
Formulas
E1 = (W)(M)(sin A)
E2 = (W)(S)(sin A)
E3 = (M+S)(W)SIN (A)
E4 = (E3)(C)
WE = (W)(M+S)
M
5.1 Weight without additional propelling force

M
5.2 (Calculate as in Ex. 5) Free-swinging weight
HP = 8
C = 100/hour
S = 4 in.
T = 1500 lb. in.

RS = 20 in.
K = 30 in.
C = 250/hour
S = 1 in.
Example
W = 900 lb.
M = 75 in.
S = 4 in.
C = 100/hour
A = 15
E1
E2
E3
E4
WE
= (0.2)(800)(52) = 4000 lb. in.

= (300)(3) = 900 lb. in.
= 4000 + 900 = 4900 lb. in.
= (4900)(250) = 1,225,000 lb. in./hour
= 4000 + 900
= 980 lb.
(0.2)(52)
E1 = (0.2)(1700)(42) = 5440 lb. in.

E2 = (1375)(8)(4)
= 11,000 lb. in.
4
E3 = 5440 + 11,000 = 16,440 lb. in.
E4 = (16,440)(100) = 1,644,000 lb. in./hour
WE = 5440 + 11,000
= 5138 lb.
(0.2)(42)
E1 = (0.2)(350)(32) = 630 lb. in.

E2 = (1500)(1)
= 75 lb. in.
20
E3 = 630 + 75 = 705 lb. in.
E4 = (705)(250) = 176,250 lb. in./hour
VS = (3)(20)
= 2 fps
30
WE = 630 + 75
= 881 lb.
(0.2)(22)
E1
E2
E3
E4
V
WE
= (900)(20-4) = 14,400 lb. in.

= (900)(4) = 3600 lb. in.
= (900)(20) = 18,000 lb. in.
= (18,000)(100) = 1,800,000 lb. in.
= (5)(20-4) = 8.9 fps
= (900)(20)
= 1125 lb.
20-4
E1 = (900)(75)(sin A) = 17,470 lb. in.

E2 = (900)(4)(sin A) = 932 lb. in.
E3 = 17,470 + 932 = 18,402 lb. in.
E4 = (18,402)100 = 1,840,200 lb. in.
WE = (900)(75 + 4)
= 948 lb.
75
W
H
6-3
S E C T I O N 6
CO
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE

M PONENT
EXAMPLES
6. Turntable with propelling force (horizontal or vertical)
VT
RT
RS
VS
Formulas
E1 = (0.1)(W)(VT)2
E2 = (T)(S)
RS
E3 = E 1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
VS = (RS)(VT)
RT
WE = E1 + E2
0.2 VS2
RS = 32 in.
VT = 3.5 fps
T = 15,000 lb. in.
C = 100/hour
E1 = (0.1)(2000)(3.5)2 = 2450 lb. in.

E2 = (15,000)(2) = 938 lb. in.
32
E3 = 2450 + 938 = 3388 lb. in.
E4 = (3388)(100) = 338,800 lb. in./hour
VS = (32)(3.5)
= 2.24 fps
50
WE = 2450 + 938
= 3376 lb.
0.22.242
S = 2 in.
VR
7. Turn over
Formulas
E1 = (W)(VR)2
15
E2 = (T)(S)
RS
E3 = E1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
VS = (RS)(VR)
RR
WE = E1 + E2
0.2(VS2)
VS
RR
RS
S
S
T
Example
W = 2000 lb.
RT = 50 in.
Example
W = 700 lb.
RR = 60 in.
RS = 30 in.
VR = 5 fps
T = 25,000 lb. in.
C = 700/hour
E1 = (700)(52)
= 1167 lb. in.
15
E2 = (25,000)(1) = 833 lb. in.
30
E3 = 1167 + 833 = 2000 lb. in.
E4 = (2000)(700) = 1,400,000 lb. in./hour
VS = (30)(5)
= 2.5 fps
60
WE = 1167 + 833
= 1600 lb.
(0.2)(2.52)
S = 1 in.
Formulas
E1 = (W)(VR)2
15
E2 = (T)(S) = (F)(R)(S)
RS
RS
E3 = E 1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
VS = (RS)(VR)
RR
WE = E1 + E2
0.2(VS2)
8. Swinging weight with propelling force
RR
VR VS
RS
Formulas
E1 = (0.2)(W)(V2)
E2 = (W)(S)
E3 = E1 + E2
E4 = (E3)(C)
WE = E1 + E2
(0.2)(V2)
9. Descending weight at controlled speed

W
S
Reaction force (pounds) q

For all examples
(1.5)(E3)
q=
S
Example
W = 90 lb.
VR = 6.5 fps
F = 150 lb.
RR = 50 in.
R = 24 in.
RS = 30 in.
C = 1800/hour
S = 1 in.
Example
W = 40,000 lb.
V = 2.5 fps
C = 5 hour
S = 5 in.
Stopping time (seconds) For all examples

S
t=
(6)(VS)
E1 = (90)(6.5)2
= 254 lb. in.
15
E2 = (150)(24)(1) = 120 lb. in.
30
E3 = 254 + 120 = 374 lb. in.
E4 = (374)(1800) = 673,000 lb. in./hour
VS = (30)(6.5)
= 3.9 fps
50
WE = 254 + 120
= 123 lb.
(0.2)(3.92)
E1 = (0.2)(40,000)(2.52) = 50,000 lb. in.

E2 = (40,000)(5) = 200,000 lb. in.
E3 = 50,000 + 200,000 = 250,000 lb. in.
E4 = (250,000)(5) = 1,250,000 lb. in./hour
WE = 50,000 + 200,000
= 200,000 lb.
(0.2)(2.52)
Deceleration (feet per second2) For all examples

(6)(VS)2
a=
S
NOTE: VS = Velocity at impact with shock absorber
6-4
S E C T I O N 6
CO
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
OM
See Section 6
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Bumpers Axial Type High-Load

OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTS HIGH-PERFORMANCE

HIGHLY INERT TO MOST CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS
High-Performance Elastomer-Polyester
New
A
F
H
E
D
G
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40F to +120F (-40C to +48.9C)
Catalog Number
V10P80-A01
V10P80-A02
V10P80-A03
V10P80-A05
V10P80-A07
V10P80-A08
V10P80-A10
V10P80-A11
V10P80-A12
V10P80-A14
Catalog Number
V10P80-A01
V10P80-A02
V10P80-A03
V10P80-A05
V10P80-A07
V10P80-A08
V10P80-A10
V10P80-A11
V10P80-A12
V10P80-A14
lb. in. (kgf. m.)
lb. (kgf)
100
(1.15)
250
(2.88)
400
(4.61)
700
(8.06)
1100
(12.67)
1400
(16.13)
2000
(23.04)
2500
(28.8)
3000
(34.56)
4000
(46.08)
700
(318)
1200
(544)
2000
(907)
2500
(1134)
3300
(1497)
3800
(1724)
5000
(2268)
5300
(2404)
6100
(2767)
7500
(3402)
D
Base
Diameter
in. (mm)
.75
(19.1)
.98
(24.9)
1.16
(29.5)
1.35
(34.3)
1.61
(40.9)
1.71
(43.4)
1.97
(50)
2.08
(52.8)
2.23
(56.6)
2.46
(62.5)
A
Free
Height
Max.
Force
Energy
Capacity
E
Mounting
Hole
in. (mm)
.31
(7.9)
.42
(10.7)
.55
(14)
.81
(20.6)
F
Loaded
Height
in. (mm)
.40
(10.2)
.53
(13.5)
.63
(16)
.73
(18.5)
.86
(21.8)
.92
(23.4)
1.06
(26.9)
1.12
(28.4)
1.19
(30.2)
1.32
(33.5)
in. (mm)
.76
(19.3)
1.01
(25.7)
1.18
(30)
1.37
(34.8)
1.62
(41.1)
1.77
(45)
2.02
(51.3)
2.11
(53.6)
2.26
(57.4)
2.54
(64.5)
B
Free
Bulge
in. (mm)
.85
(21.6)
1.11
(28.2)
1.35
(34.3)
1.55
(39.4)
1.83
(46.5)
1.96
(49.8)
2.25
(57.2)
2.43
(61.7)
2.54
(64.5)
2.81
(71.4)
C
Wrench
Hole
G
Loaded
Bulge
H
Base
Thickness
Weight
in. (mm)
1.07
(27.2)
1.43
(36.3)
1.70
(43.2)
2.00
(50.8)
2.33
(59.2)
2.51
(63.8)
2.86
(72.6)
3.05
(77.5)
3.22
(81.8)
3.58
(90.9)
See page 6-2 for technical information.
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
6-5
in. (mm)
.13
(3.3)
.16
(4.1)
.19
(4.8)
.22
(5.6)
.26
(6.6)
.28
(7.1)
.32
(8.1)
.34
(8.6)
.36
(9.1)
.40
(10.2)
in. (mm)
.41
(10.4)
.56
(14.2)
.66
(16.8)
.80
(20.3)
.93
(23.6)
1.02
(25.9)
1.16
(29.5)
1.23
(31.2)
1.30
(33)
1.41
(35.8)
oz. (g)
.16
(4.5)
.37
(10.5)
.62
(17.6)
1.00
(28.3)
1.70
(48.2)
2.00
(56.7)
3.10
(87.9)
3.70
(104.9)
4.60
(130.4)
6.10
(172.9)
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Bumpers Radial Type

New
A
H
F
E
B
G
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40F to +120F (-40C to +48.9C)
Catalog Number
V10P81-R01
V10P81-R02
V10P81-R03
V10P81-R04
V10P81-R05
V10P81-R06
V10P81-R07
Catalog Number
Energy
Capacity
Max.
Force
lb. in. (kgf. m.)
lb. (kgf)
10
(0.12)
20
(0.23)
30
(0.35)
50
(0.58)
100
(1.15)
200
(2.30)
300
(3.46)
75
(34)
100
(45)
150
(68)
200
(91)
300
(136)
475
(215)
600
(272)
D
Width
in. (mm)
V10P81-R01
V10P81-R02
V10P81-R03
V10P81-R04
V10P81-R05
V10P81-R06
V10P81-R07
.52
(13.2)
.76
(19.3)
.79
(20.1)
1.36
(34.5)
1.70
(43.2)
1.82
(46.2)
1.80
(45.7)
A
Free
Height
B
Free
Bulge
C
Wrench
Hole
in. (mm)
.97
(24.6)
1.25
(31.8)
1.47
(37.3)
1.72
(43.7)
2.17
(55.1)
2.31
(58.7)
2.65
(67.3)
in. (mm)
1.12
(28.4)
1.44
(36.6)
1.67
(42.4)
1.95
(49.5)
2.48
(63)
2.61
(66.3)
3.00
(76.2)
in. (mm)
E
Mounting
Hole
F
Loaded
Height
G
Loaded
Bulge
H
Base
Thickness
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
.32
(8.1)
.41
(10.4)
.48
(12.2)
.37
(9.4)
.47
(11.9)
.74
(18.8)
.85
(21.6)
in. (mm)
1.51
(38.4)
1.96
(49.8)
2.27
(57.7)
2.68
(68.1)
3.43
(87.1)
3.47
(88.1)
4.03
(102.4)
in. (mm)
.15
(3.8)
.20
(5.1)
.23
(5.8)
.16
(4.1)
.26
(6.6)
.35
(8.9)
.40
(10.2)
.22
(5.6)
.28
(7.1)
6-6
.38
(9.5)
.44
(11.1)
Weight
oz. (g)
.24
(6.8)
.48
(13.6)
.60
(17)
.90
(25.5)
1.80
(51)
2.80
(79.4)
3.60
(102.1)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
OM
See Section 6
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Bumpers Axial Type Low-Load


New
A
F
H
E
D
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40F to +120F (-40C to +48.9C)
Catalog Number
V10P80-AS101
V10P80-AS102
V10P80-AS103
V10P80-AS105
V10P80-AS107
V10P80-AS108
V10P80-AS109
V10P80-AS111
Catalog Number
V10P80-AS101
V10P80-AS102
V10P80-AS103
V10P80-AS105
V10P80-AS107
V10P80-AS108
V10P80-AS109
V10P80-AS111
lb. in. (kgf. m.)
lb. (kgf)
50
(0.58)
100
(1.15)
200
(2.3)
300
(3.46)
550
(6.34)
700
(8.06)
800
(9.22)
1200
(13.82)
300
(136)
400
(181)
600
(272)
900
(408)
1300
(590)
1600
(726)
1900
(862)
2200
(998)
D
Base
Diameter
in. (mm)
.73
(18.5)
.98
(24.9)
1.18
(30)
1.35
(34.3)
1.58
(40.1)
1.73
(43.9)
1.85
(47)
2.09
(53.1)
A
Free
Height
Max.
Force
Energy
Capacity
E
Mounting
Hole
in. (mm)
.31
(7.9)
.56
(14.2)
F
Loaded
Height
in. (mm)
.40
(10.2)
.53
(13.5)
.63
(16)
.73
(18.5)
.86
(21.8)
.92
(23.4)
.99
(25.1)
1.12
(28.4)
in. (mm)
.81
(20.6)
1.09
(27.7)
1.27
(32.3)
1.48
(37.6)
1.75
(44.5)
1.91
(48.5)
2.03
(51.6)
2.33
(59.2)
B
Free
Bulge
in. (mm)
.79
(20.1)
1.02
(25.9)
1.24
(31.5)
1.46
(37.1)
1.68
(42.7)
1.88
(47.8)
1.99
(50.5)
2.28
(57.9)
C
Wrench
Hole
G
Loaded
Bulge
H
Base
Thickness
Weight
in. (mm)
1.08
(27.4)
1.45
(36.8)
1.72
(43.7)
1.99
(50.5)
2.35
(59.7)
2.53
(64.3)
2.71
(68.8)
3.07
(78)
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
6-7
in. (mm)
.12
(3)
.16
(4.1)
.19
(4.8)
.22
(5.6)
.26
(6.6)
.28
(7.1)
.30
(7.6)
.35
(8.9)
in. (mm)
.48
(12.2)
.63
(16)
.77
(19.6)
.82
(20.8)
.98
(24.9)
1.09
(27.7)
1.12
(28.4)
1.30
(33)
oz. (g)
.14
(4)
.32
(9.1)
.56
(15.9)
1.00
(28.3)
1.50
(42.5)
2.10
(59.5)
2.50
(70.9)
3.50
(99.2)
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Bumpers Conical
FOR LOADS OF 44 TO 62 POUNDS (20 to 28.1 kgf)

5/16 - 24 UNF THREAD
1-1/2 DIA.
(38.1)
1 DIA.
(25.4)
3/4
(19.1)
1-1/4
(31.8)
Recommended Maximum Load

Catalog Number
V10Z 7-1020A
V10Z 7-1020B
V10Z 7-1020C
V10Z 7-1020D
Static
Occasional Dynamic
lb. (kgf)
lb. (kgf)
44
(20)
49
(22.2)
56
(25.4)
62
(28.1)
80
(36.3)
100
(45.4)
122
(55.3)
145
(65.8)
6-8
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Bumpers Conical

New
M8
38
(1.50)
25
(.98)
13.5
(.53)
32
(1.26)
Metric
Recommended Maximum Load

Catalog Number
Static
Occasional Dynamic
kgf (lb.)
kgf (lb.)
V10Z 7M1020AM
20
(44)
36.3 (80)
V10Z 7M1020BM
22.2 (49)
45.4 (100)
V10Z 7M1020CM
25.4 (56)
55.3 (122)
V10Z 7M1020DM
28.1 (62)
65.8 (145)
Did You Know?

...That substantial quantity discounts are available for all products?
6-9
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Channel Mounts To 52 lbs./in.

FOR LOADS UP TO 52 lb. / in. (0.93 kgf / mm) OF LENGTH
SUPPLIED IN 30 INCH (762 mm) LENGTHS

Channels Steel
2-3/32
(53.2)
7/64
(2.8)
3/4
(19.1)
1-7/8
(47.6)
4-1/4
(108)
1-3/16
(30.2)
INSTALLATION INFORMATION
HOLES DRILLED AT ASSEMBLY
BY CUSTOMER, AS REQUIRED

Deflections below the line x-x are
considered safe practice for static loads;
data above that line are useful for
calculating deflections under dynamic loads.
MFG. HOLE
70
LOAD
60
SUPPORT
LOAD (lb.)
50
30
(762)
Style 110 for Suspended Loads
x
x
110C
(PER INCH
LENGTH)
40
30
20
10
0.10
0.05
0.15
0.20
0.25
DEFLECTION (in.)
Spacers and Mounting Hardware NOT Provided
Catalog Number
V10Z 5-110C
Load
Limit
lb. /in.
(kgf / mm)
52
(0.93)

1200
1500
1800
2100
Min. Load for 81% Isolation lb./ in. (kgf/mm)

52
(0.93)
35
(0.63)
26.5
(0.47)
20
(0.36)
Dimensions
in. (mm)
2400
16
(0.29)
A
3/8
(9.5)
B
1-39/64
(40.9)
NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mount indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better
6-10
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Bumpers Rectangular
FOR LOADS TO 4700 POUNDS (2132 kgf)

Base Steel
X
9
(228.6)
2
(50.8)
1-1/2
(38.1)
2
(50.8)
4
(101.6)
Y
1-3/4
DIA.
(44.5)
11/16 DIA.
(17.5)
SECTION X-X
13
(330.2)
1/4
(6.4)
SECTION Y-Y
Recommended Maximum Loads lb. (kgf)

Catalog Number*
V10Z 7-1001
Static
Occasional Dynamic
4700 (2132)
11000 (4990)
MATERIAL:
FOR LOADS TO 1200 POUNDS (544 kgf)

Base Steel
1-1/4
(31.8)
6-3/4
(171.5)
4-3/4
(120.7)
1
(25.4)
1-1/16
(27)
3/16
(4.8)
7/16 DIA.
(11.1)
2-1/2
(63.5)
5-7/8
(149.2)
1-1/4
(31.8)
7/16
(11.1)
SECTION X-X
Recommended Maximum Loads lb. (kgf)

Catalog Number*
V10Z 7-1011
Static
Occasional Dynamic
1200 (544)
2150 (975)
6-11
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
M PONENT
Shock Absorber Features

4
3
New
2
1
10
9
8
Metric
7
6
5
DOUBLE ENERGY ABSORPTION

SMOOTH DAMPING
RESERVE OIL
FEATURES:
1 Metering piston with helical groove
2 Storage chamber / oil reserve storage
3 Guide
These features are obtained by:

Energy absorption: Up to three times as much as conventional shock
absorbers. This is achieved by the size of the piston and the large
volume of oil.
4 Housing
Service life: Substantially longer and more reliable as a result of

reserve oil storage.
7 Seal
Damping action: Constant over the entire stroke due to the spiral
groove design.
9 Seal
Cycle time: Minimal due to the large nominal size of the check valve.
Adjustability: Fast and simple due to the adjustment by means of rotation
of the threaded housing.
Quality: Made to meet the highest requirements: steel, hardened and ground,
nickel-plated. Made in Germany.
6-12
5 Spring I
6 Check Valve
8 Spring II
10 Piston Rod
S E C T I O N 6
CO
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Stroke Control
Threaded body of
the machine
STROKE 1
Threaded body of
the machine
Threaded body of
the machine
STROKE 2
Threaded body of
the machine
STOP
The damping amount can easily be adjusted within a very narrow

range due to the new and unique design of our shock absorbers.
Adjustment of damping is possible even to the last mm of the stroke.
The shock absorber just has to be retracted slightly. By reducing the
stroke, you can decrease the braking action.
Stroke control
Attention! The shock absorber may not be used as a fixed stop.
6-13
S E C T I O N 6
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers

SMOOTH DAMPING RESERVE OIL
HELICAL GROOVE TECHNOLOGY
Housing Steel, Hardened and Ground, Nickel Plated
62
(2.44)
M10 x 1
New
5
(.20)
SW7
(.28)
2 x SW13 (.51)
(SUPPLIED)
Stroke: 8 mm (.3 in.)

Piston Reset Time: .2 sec.
Min. Resetting Force: 6 N (1.35 lbf)
Max. Resetting Force: 12 N (2.70 lbf)
Weight: 0.02 kg (.71 oz.)
8.8
(.35)
3
(.12)
2.3
(.09)
51
(2.00)
11
(.43)
8 (.31)
STROKE

SW indicates dimension across flats.
Metric
Max. Energy Max. Energy

Absorption Absorption
per Hour
per Stroke
Catalog Number
J (lbf in.)
J (lbf in./h)
V20S10M100H
16000
(141600)
10
(88.5)
V20S10M100M
V20S10M100S
Effective Mass*
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.2
(.66)
1.2
(3.94)
2
(6.56)
1.4
(4.59)
2.2
(7.22)
4
(13.12)
50
(110.2)
14
(30.9)
5
(10)
10
(22)
4
(8.8)
1
(2.2)
*As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers.

All data measured at 20% safety.
Accessories
Head
Shaft Support / Dirt Seal
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS10
Steel
V21S02M16045
Vanadium Steel Alloy

V21S04MSS10100
Aluminum
V21S03MCN10100
Steel with Plastic Insert**

V21S01MMKK10
M16 X 1.5
M10
X1
3 (.12)
16
(.63)
1 X M5
6
(.24)
SW 13
(.51)
SW13
(.51)
8
(.31)
**Fig.
with
insert
5
(.20)
2.5
(.10)
34
(1.34)
45
(1.77)
11
(.43)
M10 X 1
15
(.59)
8
(.31)
SECTION A-A
6-14
16
(.63)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
0.5 (.020)
x 45
17
(.67)
12
(.47)
M10 X 1
23
(.90)
30
(1.18)
7 SW13
(.28) (.51)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers

69.5
(2.74)
M12 x 1
New
6
(.24)
SW8
(.31)
2 x SW14(.55)
(SUPPLIED)
10
(.39)
3
(.12)
2.3
(.09)
56
(2.20)
13.5
(.53)

Weight: 0.04 kg (1.41 oz.)
10 (.39)
STROKE

Metric

per Hour
per Stroke
Catalog Number
J (lbf in.)
J (lbf in./h)
V20S12M100H
30000
(265500)
16
(141.6)
V20S12M100M
V20S12M100S
Effective Mass*
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.2
(.66)
1.2
(3.94)
2
(6.56)
1.4
(4.59)
2.2
(7.22)
5
(11.00)
800
(1764)
22
(48.5)
8
(17.6)
16
(35.3)
7
(15.4)
1
(2.2)

Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS12
Steel
V21S02M18054

V21S04MSS12100
Aluminum
V21S03MCN12100

V21S01MMKK12
M18 X 1.5
M12
X1
3 (.12)
20
(.79)
1 X M5
6
(.24)
SW 15
(.59)
SW14
(.55)
10
(.39)
**Fig.
with
insert
6
(.24)
3.5
(.14)
40
(1.57)
53.5
(2.11)
13.5
(.53)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M12 X 1
16
(.63)
8
(.31)
SECTION A-A
6-15
20
(.79)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
20
(.79)
14
(.55)
M12 X 1
33
(1.30)
40
(1.57)
7 SW17
(.28) (.67)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers

New
83
(3.27)
SW10
(.39)
8
(.31)
2 x SW17(.67)
(SUPPLIED)
12
(.47)

Weight: 0.06 kg (2.17 oz.)
4
(.16)
3.5
(.14)
66
(2.60)
17
(.67)
12 (.47)
STROKE

F
Thread
Size
Catalog Number

per Hour
per Stroke
J (lbf in.)
J (lbf in./h)
Metric
Effective Mass
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
1.4
(4.59)
2.2
(7.22)
5
(11.00)
1.4
(4.59)
2.2
(7.22)
5
(11.00)
1550
(3417)
43
(94.8)
16
(35.3)
1550
(3417)
43
(94.8)
16
(35.3)
32
(70.5)
13
(28.7)
2
(4.4)
32
(70.5)
13
(28.7)
2
(4.4)
0.2
(.66)
1.2
V20S14M100M
M14 X 1
(3.94)
2
V20S14M100S
(6.56)
31
50000
(274.4)
(442500)
0.2
V20S14M150H
(.66)
1.2
V20S14M150M
M14 X 1.5
(3.94)
2
V20S14M150S
(6.56)
As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety.
V20S14M100H
Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS14
Steel
V21S02M20063

V21S04MSS14100**
V21S04MSS14150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN14100
V21S03MCN14150
Steel with Plastic Insert*

V21S01MMKK14
M20 X 1.5
M14
X 1.5
4 (.16)
23
(.91)
1 X M5
8
(.32)
SW 17
(.67)
SW16
(.63)
11
(.43)
*Fig.
with
insert
7
(.28)
3
(.12)
46
(1.81)
63
(2.48)
17
(.67)
M14 X 1**
M14 X 1.5
18
(.71)
8
(.31)
SECTION A-A
6-16
25
(.98)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M14 X 1
M14 X 1.5
23
(.91)
16
(.63)
42
(1.65)
50
(1.97)
8 SW19
(.31) (.75)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers

New
95
(3.74)
SW14
(.55)
10
(.39)
2 x SW24(.94)
(SUPPLIED)
M20 x 1.5 18
(.71)

Weight: 0.13 kg (4.59 oz.)
6
(.24)
4
(.16)
76
(2.99)
15 (.59)
STROKE
19
(.75)

Catalog Number

per Hour
per Stroke
Stop
J (lbf in.)
J (lbf in./h)
V20S20M150H
V20S20M150M
Power
Stop
70
(619.5)
63000
(557550)
Emergency
Stop
150
(1327.5)
V20S20M150S
V20S20M150HN
V20S20M150MN
V20S20M150SN
Metric
Effective Mass*
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.2
(.66)
1
(3.28)
1.8
(5.91)
0.2
(.66)
1
(3.28)
1.8
(5.91)
1.2
(3.94)
2
(6.56)
4.5
(14.76)
1.2
(3.94)
2
(6.56)
4.5
(14.76)
3500
(7716)
140
(308.6)
43
(94.8)
7500
(16534)
300
(661)
93
(205)
97
(213.8)
35
(77.2)
7
(15.4)
208
(458.6)
75
(165.3)
15
(33)
*As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety.
Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS20
Steel
V21S02M25077

V21S04MSS20150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN20150

V21S01MMKK20
M25 X 1.5
20
(.79)
6 (.24)
SW 22
(.87)
A
1 X M5
SW22
(.87)
10
(.39)
17
(.67)
**Fig.
with
insert
8
(.31)
3.5
(.14)
M20
X 1.5
58
(2.28)
77
(3.03)
19
(.75)
M20 X 1.5
25
(.98)
10
(.39)
SECTION A-A
6-17
25
(.98)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M20 X 1.5
30
(1.18)
23
(.91)
51
(2.00)
60
(2.36)
9 SW24
(.35) (.94)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Shock Absorbers

136
(5.35)
12
(.47)
SW19
(.75)

Weight: 0.27 kg (9.52 oz.)
2 x SW30(1.18)
(SUPPLIED)
M25 x 1.5 23
(.91)
New
8
(.31)
4
(.16)
105
(4.13)
31
(1.22)
25 (.98)
STROKE

Catalog Number

per Hour
per Stroke
Stop
J (lbf in.)
Metric
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
J (lbf in./h)
V20S25M150H
Power
Stop
210
(1858.5)
95000
(840750)
Emergency
Stop
550
(4867.5)
V20S25M150M
V20S25M150S
V20S25M150HN
V20S25M150MN
V20S25M150SN
Effective Mass*
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.8
(2.62)
1.8
(5.91)
4
(13.1)
0.8
(2.62)
1.8
(5.91)
4
(13.1)
10500
(23148)
1167
(2573)
214
(471.8)
27500
(60627)
3056
(6737)
561
(1237)
656
(1446)
130
(286.6)
26
(57.3)
1719
(3790)
340
(749.6)
69
(152)
Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS25
Steel
V21S02M33103

V21S04MSS25150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN25150

V21S01MMKK25
M33 X 1.5
22
(.87)
A
1 X M5
8 (.31)
SW 30
(1.18)
SW27
(1.06)
12
(.47)
22
(.87)
**Fig.
with
insert
10.5
(.41)
5
(.20)
M25 X 1.5
32
(1.26)
M25
X 1.5
72
(2.83)
130
(4.05)
31
(1.22)
10
(.39)
SECTION A-A
6-18
35
(1.38)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M25 X 1.5
36
(1.42)
27
(1.06)
69.5
(2.74)
80
(3.15)
10.5 SW27
(.41) (1.06)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Visit Website
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers
165
(6.50)
Stroke: 30 mm (1.18 in.)

Weight: 0.48 kg (16.93 oz.)
2 x NUT 41 (1.61)
(SUPPLIED)
M33 x 1.5
New
10
(.39)
28
(1.10)
10
(.39)
5
(.20)
30 (1.18)
STROKE
41
(1.61)
125
(4.92)

Catalog Number

per Hour
per Stroke
Stop
J (lbf in.)
Metric
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
J (lbf in./h)
V20S33M150H
Power
Stop
320
(2832)
120000
(1062000)
Emergency
Stop
900
(7965)
V20S33M150M
V20S33M150S
V20S33M150HN
V20S33M150MN
V20S33M150SN

Accessories
Head
Steel
V21S01MMKS33
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.8
(2.62)
2
(6.56)
3.5
(11.48)
0.8
(2.62)
2
(6.56)
3.5
(11.48)
16000
(35273)
1778
(3920)
327
(720.9)
45000
(99207)
5000
(11023)
918
(2024)
1000
(2204.6)
160
(352.7)
52
(114.64)
2813
(6202)
450
(992)
147
(324.1)
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S02M45130

V21S04MSS33150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN33150
M45 X 1.5
28
(1.10)
SW 41
(1.61)
A
1 X M5
10 (.39)
14
(.55)
SW36
(1.42)
28
(1.10)
M33
X 1.5
11.5
(.45)
m/s (ft./s)

V21S01MMKK33
**Fig.
with
insert
Effective Mass*
Max.
kg (lb.)
5
(.20)
90
(3.54)
130
(5.12)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M33 X 1.5
38
(1.50)
40
(1.57)
15
(.59)
SECTION A-A
6-19
40
(1.57)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M33 X 1.5
44
(1.73)
36
(1.42)
91.5
(3.60)
103.5
(4.07)
12 SW36
(.47) (1.42)
S E C T I O N 6
Request Quote
N
D A TIVIB
CE
CO
SW24
(.94)
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Visit Website
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
Shock Absorbers

170
(6.69)
New
2 x NUT 60 (2.36)
(SUPPLIED)

Weight: 1.25 kg (44.1 oz.)
M45 x 1.5
12
(.47)
43
(1.69)
10
(.39)
6
(.24)
25 (.98)
STROKE
30
(1.18)
140
(5.51)

Catalog Number
Stop
Metric

per Hour
per Stroke
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
0.2
(.66)
0.6
(1.97)
1.4
(4.59)
0.7
(2.30)
1.6
(5.25)
3.5
(11.48)
0.7
(2.30)
1.6
(5.25)
3.5
(11.48)
32500
(71650)
3611
(7961)
663
(1462)
75000
(165345)
8333
(18371)
1531
(3375)
2653
(5849)
508
(1120)
106
(233.7)
6122
(13497)
1172
(2584)
245
(540.1)
J (lbf in./h)
J (lbf in.)
V20S45M150H
Power
Stop
650
(5753)
150000
(1327500)
Emergency
Stop
1500
(13275)
V20S45M150M
V20S45M150S
V20S45M150HN
V20S45M150MN
V20S45M150SN
Effective Mass*
Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS45

V21S04MSS45150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN45150
V21S03MCN45150L (Longer Length)

V21S01MMKK45
SW55
(2.17)
12 (.47)
38
(1.50)
**Fig.
with
insert
15
(.59)
5
(.20)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M45 X 1.5
M45 X 1.5
58
(2.28)
15
(.59)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
60
(2.36)
52
(2.05)
50
(1.97)
6-20
92 or 132
(3.62) (5.20)
110 or 150
(4.33) (5.91)
18 SW55
(.71) (2.17)
S E C T I O N 6
Request Quote
N
D A TIVIB
CE
CO
SW36
(1.42)
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
CO
Shock Absorbers

250
(9.84)
SW36
(1.42)
New
2 x NUT 60 (2.36)
(SUPPLIED)
M45 x 1.5
12
(.47)
43
(1.69)
10
(.39)
6
(.24)
55
(2.17)
195
(7.68)
50 (1.97)
STROKE
Stroke: 50 mm (1.97 in.)

Piston Reset Time: 1 sec.
Weight: 2 kg (70.5 oz.)

Catalog Number
Stop
Metric

per Hour
per Stroke
Min. Impact
Speed
Max. Impact
Speed
m/s (ft./s)
m/s (ft./s)
Max.
kg (lb.)
Min.
kg (lb.)
0.7
(2.30)
1.6
(5.25)
3.5
(11.48)
0.7
(2.30)
1.6
(5.25)
3.5
(11.48)
65000
(143299)
7222
(15922)
1327
(2926)
150000
(330690)
16667
(36744)
3061
(6748)
5306
(11698)
1016
(2240)
212
(467.4)
12245
(26995)
2344
(5168)
490
(1080)
J (lbf in./h)
J (lbf in.)
Effective Mass*
0.2
(.66)
Power
1300
190000
0.6
V20S45M150LM
(11505)
(1681500)
(1.97)
Stop
1.4
V20S45M150LS
(4.59)
0.2
V20S45M150LHN
(.66)
Emergency
3000
0.6
V20S45M150LMN
(26550)
(1.97)
Stop
1.4
V20S45M150LSN
(4.59)
*As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety.
V20S45M150LH
Accessories
Head
Stop Sleeves
Cooler Nut
Steel
V21S01MMKS45

V21S04MSS45150
Aluminum
V21S03MCN45150
V21S03MCN45150L (Longer Length)

V21S01MMKK45
SW55
(2.17)
12 (.47)
38
(1.50)
** Fig.
with
insert
15
(.59)
5
(.20)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
M45 X 1.5
M45 X 1.5
58
(2.28)
15
(.59)
0.5 (.020)
x 45
60
(2.36)
52
(2.05)
50
(1.97)
6-21
92 or 132
(3.62) (5.20)
110 or 150
(4.33) (5.91)
18 SW55
(.71) (2.17)
S E C T I O N 6
See Section 6
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
SHOCK ABSORBERS - FORMULAS AND CALCULATION EXAMPLES

W1
W2
W3
W4
me
m
v
vD
w
F
n
P
Kinetic energy per stroke; mass load only

Energy/work of propelling force per stroke
Total energy per stroke (W1 + W2)
Total energy per hour (W3 x n)
Effective mass
Mass to be braked
Final velocity of mass
Shock absorber impact velocity
Angular velocity
Additional propelling force
Number of strokes per hour
Motor drive
HM
M
J
g
h
s
L/R/r
Q
Holding moment factor (normal 2.5)

Torque
Mass inertia moment
Gravity constant = 9.81
Falling height without shock absorber stroke
Stroke of shock absorber
Radius
Countervailing force/supporting force
Friction coefficient
Braking time
Angle
Free Falling Mass

Formula:
W1 = m x g x h
W2 = m x g x s
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = 2 x g x h
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
h
s
Example:
m = 10 kg
h = 0.3 m
n = 120 1/h
s = 0.02 m
Free Falling Mass without Propelling Force

Formula:
Example:
m = 13000 kg
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5
W2 = m x g x s
v = 2 m/s
W3 = W1 + W2
s = 0.22 m
W4 = W3 x n
n = 30 1/h
vD = v
2
me = 2 x W3 / vD
m
s
Mass on a Conveyor Belt

Formula:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5
W2 = m x x g x s
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = v
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
m
s
Mass with Motor Drive

Formula:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5
W2 = 1000 x P x HM x s / v
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = v
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
s
m
in Nm
in Nm
in Nm
in Nm/h
in kg
in kg
in m/s
in m/s
in 1/s
in N
in 1/h
in kW
Example:
m = 190 kg
v = 1.8 m/s
n = 170 1/h
= 0.2 (Stahl/Gu)
s = 0.04 m
Example:
m = 980 kg
v = 1.7 m/s
HM = 2.7
P = 6 kW
n = 80 1/h
s = 0.11 m
1 to 2.5
in Nm
in kgm2
in m/s2
in m
in m
in m
in N
Metric
in s
in
W1
W2
W3
W4
vD
me
= 10 x 0.3 x 9.81
= 10 x 9.81 x 0.02
= 29.43 + 1.962
= 31.392 x 120
= 2 x 9.81 x 0.3
= 2 x 31.392 / 2.426
= 29.43 Nm
= 1.962 Nm
= 31.392 Nm
= 3767.04 Nm/h
= 2.426 m/s
= 25.88 kg
W1
W2
W3
W4
me
= 13000 x 22 x 0.5
= 13000 x 9.81 x 0.22
= 26000 + 28056.6
= 54056.6 x 30
= 2 x 54056.6 / 22
= 26000 Nm
= 28056.6 Nm
= 54056.6 Nm
= 1621698 Nm/h
= 27028.3 kg
W1
W2
W3
W4
me
= 190 x 1.82 x 0.5

= 190 x 0.2 x 9.81 x 0.04
= 307.8 + 14.91
= 322.71 x 170
= 2 x 322.71 / 1.82
W1
W2
W3
W4
me
= 980 x 1.72 x 0.5

= 1000 x 6 x 2.7 x 0.11 / 1.7
= 1416,1 + 104824
= 2464.34 x 80
= 2 x 2464.34 / 1.72
= 307.8 Nm
= 14.91 Nm
= 322.71 Nm
= 54860 Nm
= 199.2 kg
= 1416.1 Nm
= 1048.24 Nm
= 2464.34 Nm
= 197146.8 Nm
= 1705.43 kg
Note: Add rotational energies of motor, coupling and gear, if not negligible, to W1.
h
F
mg
Mass on an Incline
a. with Propelling
b. with Propelling Force
Formula:
Force Downward:
Upward:
2
W1 = m x g x h = m x vD x 0.5 W2 = (F - m x g x sin) W2 = (F + m x g x sin)
W2 = m x g x sin x s
xs
xs
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = 2 x g x h
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
6-22
S E C T I O N 6
Shock Absorbers Technical Information

M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
CO
Shock Absorbers Technical Information

M PONENT
Mass without Propelling Force

Formula:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5
W2 = 0
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = v
me = m
s
m
F
m
2.1 with vertical motion upward:

2.2 with vertical motion downward
R
m
s
vD
L
r
m
F
R
vD
A
s
vD
L
s
m
s
W1
W2
W3
W4
= 200 x 32 x 0.5
=0
= 900 + 0
= 900 x 1000
= 900 Nm
= 900000 Nm/h
Example:
m = 30 kg
v = 1.9 m/s
F = 300 N
n = 800 1/h
s = 0.03 m
W1
W2
W3
W4
me
= 30 x 1.92 x 0.5
= 300 x 0.03
= 54.15 + 9
= 63.15 x 800
= 2 x 63.15 / 1.92
= 54.15 Nm
= 9 Nm
= 63.15 Nm
= 50520 Nm/h
= 34.97 kg
= 900 Nm
Rotary Table with Horizontal or Vertical Propelling Moment

Example:
Formula:
W1 = 1200 x 1.32 x 0.25
W1 = m x v2 x 0.25 = 0.5 x J x w2 m = 1200 kg
W2 = m x s / R
v = 1.3 m/s
W2 = 1200 x 0.04 / 0.9
W3 = W1 + W2
M = 1200 Nm
W3 = 507 + 53.3
W4 = W3 x n
s = 0.04 m
W4 = 560.33 x 90
vD = v x R / L = w x R
L = 1.35 m
vD = 1.3 x 0.9 / 1.35
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
R = 0.9 m
me = 2 x 560.33 / 0.862
n = 90 1/h
Mass with Propelling Force

Formula:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5
W2 = F x s
W3 = W1 + W2
W4 = W3 x n
vD = v
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
W2 = (F - m x g) x s
W2 = (F + m x g) x s
Swinging Mass with Propelling Force

Formula:
Example:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.18 = 0.5 x J x w2 m = 1500 kg
W2 = F x r x s / R = M x s / R
v = 3 m/s
W3 = W1 + W2
F = 6000 N
W4 = W3 x n
s = 0.05 m
r
= 0.7 m
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
R = 0.9 m
L = 1.5 m
n = 700 1/h
W1
W2
W3
W4
vD
me
= 507 Nm
= 53.3 Nm
= 560.33 Nm
= 50429.7 Nm/h
= 0.86 m/s
= 1515.22 kg
= 1500 x 32 x 0.18
= 6000 x 0.7 x 0.05 / 0.9
= 2430 + 233.33
= 2633.33 x 700
= 3 x 0.9 / 1.5
= 2 x 2633.33 / 1.82
Swinging Mass with Propelling Moment (e.g. Turning Device)

Formula:
Example:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.18 = 0.5 x J x w2 J = 41 kgm2
W1 = 0.5 x 41 x 22
W2 = F x r x s / R = M x s / R
w = 2 1/s
W2 = 400 x 0.025 / 0.9
W3 = W1 + W2
M = 400 Nm
W3 = 82 + 11.1
W4 = W3 x n
s = 0.025 m
W4 = 93.1 x 1,300
L = 1.8 m
vD = 2 x 0.9
me = 2 x W3 / vD2
R = 0.9 m
me = 2 x 93.1 / 1.82
n = 1300 1/h
= 2430 Nm
= 233.33 Nm
= 2633.33 Nm
= 1864333 Nm/h
= 1.8 m/s
= 1625.51 kg
= 82 Nm
= 11.1 Nm
= 93.1 Nm
= 121044 Nm/h
= 1.8 m/s
= 57.47 kg
Note: Please check impact angle long = s/R (see example 6.2)
M
L
R
vD
Counterv. force/supporting force Q (N)

Braking Time t (s)
Retardation a (m/s2)
Metric
Example:
m = 200 kg
v = 3 m/s
n = 1000 1/h
s = 0.01 m
Swinging Mass with Propelling Moment

Example:
Formula:
W1 = m x v2 x 0.5 = 0.5 x J x w2 m = 30 kg
W2 = M x s / R
v = 1.5 m/s
W3 = W1 + W2
M = 60 Nm
W4 = W3 x n
R = 0.6 m
L = 0.9 m
2
me = 2 x W3 / vD
n = 1600 1/h
s = 0.02 m
Applies for all examples: Q = 1.2 x W3 / s

Applies for all examples: t = 2.6 x s / vD
Applies for all examples: a = 0.6 x vD2 / s
Note: If used in a damp environment, please consult our engineering department.
6-23
W1
W2
W3
W4
vD
me
= 30 x 1.52 x 0.5
= 60 x 0.02 / 0.6
= 33.75 + 2
= 35.75 x 1600
= 1.5 x 0.6 / 0.9
= 2 x 33.75 / 12
= 33.75 Nm
= 2 Nm
= 35.75 Nm
= 57200 Nm
= 1 m/s
= 71.5 kg
S E C T I O N 6
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Shock / Vibration Isolation Application Sheet

Completed By:
The following data will

help us to determine your
needs to meet your
shock and vibration requirements. If a drawing
cannot be included,
please include a sketch
with this form.
Date:
Company Name:
Address:
Contact Name/Position:
Telephone:
FAX:
e-mail:
Technical Requirements
Equipment Description:
Equipment Weight (lbs. or kg.):
Temperature Range (F or C): Low:
Excitation Source:
Preferred Damping Material (Circle One):
Excitation Frequency (rpm, cpm, cps or Hz):
High:
Natural Rubber, Neoprene, Urethane,

Sorbothane, Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin,
Silicone Gel,Wire Mesh, Cable,
others:
Allowable Static Deflection of Isolators (inch or mm):

% Vibration Isolation Efficiency Desired:
Space Limitation if any:
Examples of how to choose vibration isolators for various operating situations are given in the Vibration Mount Technical Section
starting on page T1-27.
Prototype/Production Requirements
Prototype Quantity:
Timing:
Production Forecast:
Timing:
6-24
S E C T I O N 6
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
SECTION 7
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Finger-Flex Mounts
Typical Installations
Finger-Flex mounts are used for
office machines, electronic equipment,
motors, air conditioning equipment,
heating equipment, fans, blowers,
pumps and scientific equipment.
Multiple Installations
Any number of Finger-Flex mounts
can be installed in parallel to achieve
greater load-carrying capacity. These
mounts may also be stacked in series
to meet greater deflection requirements.
Separators between mounts, if used,
must be designed to meet the specific
requirements of the installation.
Shoulder bolt
A.
If the load support is
1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
or more thick, two
Finger-Flex bushings are
generally used.
Mounting base
Finger-Flex bushing
Mounting support
Finger-Flex bushing
Rebound plate
B.
When the load
supporting member is
1/8 inch (3.18 mm) to
1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick,
the standard bushing
and ring combination is
most suitable.
C.
If the load supporting
member is less than
1/8 inch (3.18 mm) thick,
the metal surrounding the
mounting hole should be
turned up. This provides
additional mounting area
for the bushing.
Shoulder bolt
Mounting base
Finger-Flex bushing
Mounting support
Finger-Flex bushing
Rebound plate
Shoulder bolt
Mounting base
Finger-Flex bushing
Mounting support
Finger-Flex bushing
Rebound plate
7-2
Rubber parts used are similiar to

type V10R 4-1504 & V10R 4-1505
combination. The difference is that the
flange of the rubber bushing within this
assembled mounting has fingers on
only one of its surfaces. The ring
member absorbs both vibration and
shock.
S E C T I O N 7
TYPICAL INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENTS
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
Finger-Flex Mounts To 12 lbs.

FOR LOADS UP OF 4 TO 12 POUNDS (1.8 TO 5.4 kgf)
Natural Rubber
1/4
(6.4)
5/64
(2)
5/64
(2)
13/16
(20.6)
S E C T I O N 7
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
8 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
29/64
(11.5)
Fig. 1
RING STYLE
60
LOAD
LOAD (lb.)
50
5/64
(2)
5/64
(2)
3/16
(4.8)
40
D
30
SUPPORT
20
10
A
0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16
13/16
(20.6)
15/32 1/4
(11.9) (6.4)
DEFLECTION (in.)
8 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
Deflection below the X are considered safe practice for

static loads; data above the X are useful for calculating
12
1/4
(6.4)
8 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF
PHASE
10
Fig. 2
LOAD (lb.)
9/16
(14.3)
BUSHING STYLE
8
C
6
4
0
16
18
20
22
24
26
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10R 4-1500A
Hardness
Durometer
30
V10R 4-1500B
40
1
V10R 4-1500C
50
V10R 4-1500D
60
V10R 4-1501A
30
V10R 4-1501B
40
2
V10R 4-1501C
50
V10R 4-1501D
60
Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute

2400
3300
3000
2700
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
12
(5.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
12
(5.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
12
(5.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
12
(5.4)
7-3
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
9
(4.1)
2
(0.9)
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
7
(3.2)
2
(0.9)
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
7
(3.2)
3
(1.4)
5
(2.3)
3
(1.4)
5
(2.3)
28
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
10 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
51/64
(20.2)
7/64
(2.8)
7/64
(2.8)
5/16
(7.9)
Fig. 1
RING STYLE
80
70
.193
(4.9)
10 FINGERS
(12 on 1503B)
1/16
(1.6)
40
30
20
10
0
D
SUPPORT
C
B
A
0.04
0.08
0.12
0.16
0.20
DEFLECTION (in.)
3/8
(9.5)
11/16
(17.5)
LOAD
60
50
35/64
(13.9)
1-11/64
(29.8)
S E C T I O N 7
1-11/64
(29.8)
FOR LOADS UP OF 10 TO 25 POUNDS (4.5 TO 11.3 kgf)
Natural Rubber
LOAD (lb.)
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Deflections below the X are considered safe practice

for static loads; data above the X are useful for
24
17/32
(13.5)
Fig. 2
20
LOAD (lb.)
12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF
PHASE
BUSHING STYLE
16
C
12
8
4
0
A
12
14
16
18
22
20
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10R 4-1502A
Hardness
Durometer
30
V10R 4-1502B
40
1
V10R 4-1502C
50
V10R 4-1502D
60
V10R 4-1503A
30
V10R 4-1503B
40
2
V10R 4-1503C
50
V10R 4-1503D
60
Compression
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1750
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
25
(11.3)
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
25
(11.3)
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
25
(11.3)
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
25
(11.3)
2000
2250
2500
2750
7-4
7
(3.2)
9
(4.1)
14
(6.4)
20
(9.1)
7
(3.2)
9
(4.1)
14
(6.4)
20
(9.1)
5
(2.3)
7
(3.2)
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
5
(2.3)
7
(3.2)
10
(4.5)
13
(5.9)
4
(1.8)
5
(2.3)
8
(3.6)
10
(4.5)
4
(1.8)
5
(2.3)
8
(3.6)
10
(4.5)
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
8
(3.6)
3
(1.4)
4
(1.8)
6
(2.7)
8
(3.6)
24
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Natural Rubber
21/64
(8.3)
S E C T I O N 7
3/32
(2.4)
3/32
(2.4)
3/4
(19.1)
Fig. 1
12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
200
175
RING STYLE
3/32
(2.4)
3/32
(2.4)
LOAD
150
125
LOAD (lb.)
1-3/8
(34.9)
D
SUPPORT
100
75
50
25
0
5/16
(7.9)
C
B
A
0.04
0.08 0.12
0.16
0.20 0.24
DEFLECTION (in.)
1-3/8
(34.9)
11/16
(17.5)
3/8
(9.5)

12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
35
D
30
LOAD (lb.)
12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF
PHASE
21/64
(8.3)
21/32
(16.7)
Fig. 2
BUSHING STYLE
25
20
15
10
A
5
0
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
Hardness
Durometer
30
V10R 4-1504A
40
V10R 4-1504B
1
V10R 4-1504C
50
V10R 4-1504D
60
30
V10R 4-1505A
40
V10R 4-1505B
2
V10R 4-1505C
50
V10R 4-1505D
60
Compression
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
14
(6.4)
19
(8.6)
27
(12.2)
37
(16.8)
14
(6.4)
19
(8.6)
27
(12.2)
37
(16.8)

2250
2000
2500
2750
3000
19
(8.6)
12
(5.4)
14
(6.4)
25
(11.3)
12
(5.4)
14
(6.4)
25
(11.3)
19
(8.6)
7-5
9
(4.1)
10
(4.5)
19
(8.6)
32
(14.5)
9
(4.1)
10
(4.5)
19
(8.6)
32
(14.5)
7
(3.2)
8
(3.6)
16
(7.3)
25
(11.3)
7
(3.2)
8
(3.6)
16
(7.3)
25
(11.3)
5
(2.3)
6
(2.7)
13
(5.9)
21
(9.5)
5
(2.3)
6
(2.7)
13
(5.9)
21
(9.5)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
1-29/32
(48.4)

Natural Rubber
S E C T I O N 7
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
1-1/4
(31.8)
5/32
(4)
5/32
(4)
1/2
(12.7)
Fig. 1
RING STYLE
300
3/8
(9.5)
LOAD (lb.)
250
12 FINGERS
3/32
(2.4)
150
SUPPORT
C
B
50
0
9/16
(14.3)
1-5/32
(29.4)
100
35/64
(13.9)
1-29/32
(48.4)
LOAD
200
A
0
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
DEFLECTION (in.)
12 FINGERS
EACH SIDE
OUT OF PHASE
7/8
(22.2)
BUSHING STYLE
LOAD (lb.)
Fig. 2
80
70
40
30
20
10
0
60
50
10
12
A
14
16
18
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10R 4-1506A
Hardness
Durometer
30
V10R 4-1506B
40
1
V10R 4-1506C
50
V10R 4-1506D
60
V10R 4-1507A
30
V10R 4-1507B
40
2
V10R 4-1507C
50
V10R 4-1507D
60
Compression
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
1500
35
(15.9)
50
(22.7)
65
(29.5)
80
(36.3)
35
(15.9)
50
(22.7)
65
(29.5)
80
(36.3)
30
(13.6)
50
(22.7)
1750
2000
2250
2500
30
(13.6)
50
(22.7)
7-6
17
(7.7)
24
(10.9)
40
(18.1)
76
(34.5)
17
(7.7)
24
(10.9)
40
(18.1)
76
(34.5)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
31
(14.1)
56
(25.4)
13
(5.9)
18
(8.2)
31
(14.1)
56
(25.4)
10
(4.5)
14
(6.4)
24
(10.9)
43
(19.5)
10
(4.5)
14
(6.4)
24
(10.9)
43
(19.5)
8
(3.6)
12
(5.4)
20
(9.1)
33
(15)
8
(3.6)
12
(5.4)
20
(9.1)
33
(15)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
M PONENT
MATERIAL:

Natural Rubber
1-1/4
(31.8)
2-3/16
(55.6)
S E C T I O N 7
CO
ADVA
N
Buy Product
5/8
(15.9)
1/8
(3.2)
13/16
(20.6)
Fig. 1 RING STYLE

800
13/32
(10.3)
7/32
(5.6)
32 30'
500
SUPPORT
400
300
X
X
200
1-1/16
(27)
7/8
(22.2)
5/8
(15.9)
100
3
(76.2)
600
LOAD (lb.)
5 FINGERS
ON OUTSIDE
OF SHAFT
LOAD
700
0
0
2-1/8
(54)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
DEFLECTION (in.)
11/16
(17.5)
15/32
(11.9)
350
1-25/32
(45.2)
LOAD (lb.)
300
Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE
250
C
200
150
100
A
50
0
6
10
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
Hardness
Durometer
50
V10R 4-1508C
1
V10R 4-1508D
60
V10R 4-1509A
30
40
V10R 4-1509B
2
V10R 4-1509C
50
V10R 4-1509D
60
Compression
Maximum
Load lb. (kgf)
250
(113.4)
350
(158.8)
120
(54.4)
160
(72.6)
250
(113.4)
350
(158.8)
900
250
(113.4)
324
(147)
160
(72.6)
250
(113.4)
324
(147)
7-7
1000
178
(80.7)
242
(109.8)
98
(44.5)
104
(47.2)
178
(80.7)
242
(109.8)
1250
105
(47.6)
141
(64)
46
(20.9)
67
(30.4)
105
(47.6)
141
(64)
1500
1750
65
(29.5)
93
(42.2)
30
(13.6)
46
(20.9)
65
(29.5)
93
(42.2)
48
(21.8)
66
(29.9)
22
(10)
34
(15.4)
48
(21.8)
66
(29.9)
11
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Solo Unitized

Outer Body Natural Rubber Load-Carrying Member

Spacer Steel, Tubular Rolled
SOLO TYPE
G
E
INSTALLATION:
1. Lubricate mount and
socket with water
or rubber lubricant.
2. Insert into socket, hand
rotate with axial force.
3. If necessary, use driving
bolt. Care must be taken
that the driving bolt does
not overhang the steel
sleeve O.D.
H
A
ISOLATED
UNIT
M
L
J BEVEL
CINCH WASHER
F
SUPPORT
PLATE
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS
SELECTION CRITERIA:
Calculate static load.
Select a mount of equal
or greater capacity. For
dynamic loads greater
than 3X static load,
select next larger size.
CINCH WASHER
ASSEMBLY BOLT
SOLO MOUNTING
SELECTION GUIDE AND SPECIFICATIONS
Catalog Number
V10Z42-1010
V10Z42-2000
Nominal Nominal
Load Deflection
Rating
Rating
Axial
Axial
lb. (kgf)
60
(27.2)
125
(56.7)
V10Z42-6000
V10Z42-6020
V10Z42-7000
V10Z42-8020
1.00
(25.4)
1.09
(27.7)
.17
(4.3)
.19
(4.8)
.48
(12.2)
.46
(11.7)
.46
(11.7)
.56
(14.2)
.71
(18)
.76
(19.3)
.94
(23.9)
1.12
(28.4)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.13
(3.3)
.31
(7.9)
.62
(15.7)
.25
(6.4)
.25
(6.4)
.75
(19.1)
.93
(23.6)
.50
(12.7)
.75
(19.1)
1.75
(44.5)
.44
(11.2)
.69
(17.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.71
(43.4)
2.00
(50.8)
1.56
(39.6)
2.12
(53.8)
3.37
(85.6)
425
(192.8)
500
(226.8)
.030
(0.76)
3.00
(76.2)
900
(408.2)
1300
(590)
.075
(1.91)
.030
(0.76)
3.75
(95.3)
4.53
(115.1)
200
(90.7)
V10Z42-4050
V10Z42-5000
in. (mm)
.010
(0.25)
.018
(0.46)
.015
(0.38)
.035
(0.89)
.030
(0.76)
.020
(0.51)
V10Z42-4000
V10Z42-4040
2.00
(50.8)
2.01
(51.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.50
(38.1)
1.81
(46)
2.00
(50.8)
2.75
(69.9)
7-8
.38
.18
.77
(9.7) (4.6) (19.6)
.38
.21
.78
(9.7) (5.3) (19.8)
.52
1.31
(13.2)
(33.3)
.52 1.32
.39
(9.9) (13.2) (33.5)
.64
1.25
(16.3)
(31.8)
.62 1.52
.64
(16.3) (15.7) (38.6)
.03
(0.8)
.03
(0.8)
.81 1.81
.64
(16.3) (20.6) (46)
.12
(3)
.77
(19.6)
1.06
(26.9)
1.16
(29.5)
1.22
(31)
.06
(1.5)
.06
(1.5)
.09
2.06
(52.3) (2.3)
.12
2.75
(69.9) (3)
.55
.38
(14)
(9.7)
.96
.38
(24.4) (9.7)
2.18
.52
(55.4) (13.2)
1.30
.38
(33)
(9.7)
1.30
.64
(33) (16.3)
2.12
.64
(53.8) (16.3)
2.42
(61.5) .64
1.97 (16.3)
(50)
2.66
.77
(67.6) (19.6)
4.34 1.06
(110.2) (26.9)
1.00
(25.4)
1.12
(28.4)
N
(min)
.09
(2.3)
.09
(2.3)
2.00
.12
(50.8) (3)
2.50
.15
(63.5) (3.8)
3.00
.19
(76.2) (4.8)
3.70
(94)
4.50
(114.3)
.25
(6.4)
.25
(6.4)
S E C T I O N 7
PREASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Tandem Unitized

Outer Body Natural Rubber Load-Carrying Member

Spacer Steel, Tubular Rolled
TANDEM TYPE
FOR LOADS OF 150 TO 900 POUNDS (68 TO 408.2 kgf)
PREASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS
S E C T I O N 7
A
H
G
E
INSTALLATION:
1. Lubricate mount and
socket with water or
rubber lubricant.
2. Insert into socket, hand
rotate with axial force.
3. If necessary, use driving
bolt. Care must be taken
that the driving bolt does
not overhang the steel
sleeve O.D.
SHOWN FOR
MOUNTING
ORIENTATION
A
M
L
ISOLATED UNIT
MOUNT
CINCH WASHER
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS
D 2xE
SUPPORT PLATE
SELECTION CRITERIA:
Calculate static load.
Select a mount of equal
or greater capacity. For
dynamic loads greater
than 3X static load,
select next larger size.
MOUNT
ASSEMBLY BOLT
CINCH WASHER
TANDEM MOUNTING
SELECTION GUIDE AND SPECIFICATIONS
Catalog Number
V10Z42-A3010
V10Z42-A5020
V10Z42-A6010
V10Z42-A7010
Nominal Nominal
Load Deflection
Rating
Rating
Axial
Axial
lb. (kgf)
150
(68)
425
(192.8)
500
(226.8)
900
(408.2)
.52
(13.2)
.64
(16.3)
.64
(16.3)
.77
(19.6)
.43
(10.9)
.92
(23.4)
.40
(10.2)
1.12
(28.4)
1.16
(29.5)
1.62
(41.1)
1.85
(47)
2.28
(57.9)
.03
(0.8)
.06
(1.5)
.12
(3)
.12
(3)
.62
(15.7)
1.17
(23.7)
1.19
(30.2)
1.50
(38.1)
.52
(13.2)
.64
(16.3)
.64
(16.3)
.77
(19.6)
1.75
(44.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
4.00
(101.6)
N
(min)
in. (mm)
.010
(0.25)
.015
(0.38)
.018
(0.46)
.080
(2.03)
1.78
.59
1.12
.38
.38
(45.2) (9.7) (28.4) (9.7) (15)
2.58
.50 1.05
.87 1.50
(65.5) (22.1) (38.1) (12.7) (26.7)
3.00
1.81
.75 1.16
.75
(76.2) (19.1) (46)
(19.1) (29.5)
3.75
2.25
.75 1.13
.74
(95.3) (18.8) (57.2) (19.1) (28.7)
7-9
.10
(2.5)
.15
(3.8)
.19
(4.8)
.25
(6.4)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Ring and Bushing Type

WEAR PLATE DESIGN IMPROVES FATIGUE LIFE
Isolator Neoprene
Wear Plate & Sleeve Carbon Steel,
Rust-Resistant Coating
AND WEAR RESISTANCE
RESISTS OILS, OZONE AND MOST SOLVENTS

FAIL-SAFE DESIGN WITH SNUBBING WASHER
.53
(13.5)
New
1.94
.45
(49.3)
(11.4)
R 06
(1.5)
WEAR
PLATE
1.23
(31.2)
S E C T I O N 7
APPLICATIONS
SMALL ENGINES
GENERATORS
PUMPS
RADIATORS
OPERATOR CABS IN
SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS
.78
(19.8)
AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION

.563 (14.3) Thick Mounting Plate
1400
.78
(19.8)
LOAD (lb.)
1200
.77
(19.6)
1.88
(47.8)
-RX3031500
1000
800
600
-RX3031260
400
200
-RX3031150
0
0
.025
.05
Max. Load lb. (N)

Thin Mounting Plate
Inch (mm)
.563 (14.3)
Inch (mm)
.50 (12.7)
Axial
Axial
Radial
.10
.125
.15
.175
.20
.225
Thick Mounting Plate
.50 (12.7) Thick Mounting Plate

1400
1200
Radial
V10Z82-RX3031150
150
(667)
75 (333)
80
(355)
40 (177)
V10Z82-RX3031260
260 (1156)
130 (578)
160
(711)
80 (355)
V10Z82-RX3031500
500 (2224)
250 (1112)
300 (1334)
150 (667)
LOAD (lb.)
Catalog Number
.075
DEFLECTION (in.)
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20F to +180F (-28.9C to +82.2C)
-RX3031500
1000
-RX3031260
800
600
400
200
-RX3031150
0
0
.025
.05
.075
.10
.125
.15
.175
DEFLECTION (in.)
TYPICAL INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION
SNUBBING WASHER V 9C20-051

(Zinc Plated Carbon Steel)
ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
DIA.
.51 (13)
.563 (14.3)
or .50 (12.7)
.06 (1.5) CHAMFER
REQUIRED
1.94 (49.3)
INSTALLED
SUPPORT
STRUCTURE
1.25 (31.75) MIN.
MOUNTING HOLE
DIAMETER
SNUBBING
WASHER
DIA.
2.00 (50.8)
NOTE: Install so bushing supports static load.
7-10
THICKNESS
.13 (3.3)
.20
.225
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Isolator Neoprene
FULL REBOUND PROTECTION STRUCTURE-BORNE NOISE ATTENUATION
Sleeve Carbon Steel
F
APPLICATIONS
HIGHWAY AND OFF-HIGHWAY
VEHICLES: ISOLATE ENGINES,
CABS, RADIATORS, BATTERY
BOXES, FUEL TANKS AND
ACCESSORIES
MOTOR GENERATORS AND
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS AND CENTRIFUGES
MARINE EQUIPMENT AND
POWER PLANTS
HVAC EQUIPMENT
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT AND
MACHINERY
OFFICE EQUIPMENT/COMPUTERS
J
RAD.
H
B
G
A
New
S E C T I O N 7
(.38 Thick Mounting Plate)
600

2500
1400
-R41391300
-R30310500
-R21200200
1200
500
2000
-R21200120
300
200
-R30310300
800
600
-R30310150
LOAD (lb.)
400
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
1000
-R41390700
1500
1000
400
-R21200060
500
100
-R41390350
200
0
.02
.04
.06
.08
.10
.12
.025
.05
.075
.10
.125
.15
.175
.20
.02
.225
.06 .08
.10 .12
.14
.16
.18
DEFLECTION (in.)
DEFLECTION (in.)
DEFLECTION (in.)
.04
Catalog Number
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
Durometer
40
V10Z82-R21200060
V10Z82-R21200120
1.31
(33.3)
.59
(15)
.39
(9.9)
.48
(12.2)
.79
(20.1)
1.25
(31.8)
.04
(1)
70
V10Z82-R21200200
48
V10Z82-R30310150
V10Z82-R30310300
56
1.88
(47.8)
.77
(19.6)
.53
(13.5)
.78
(19.8)
1.3
(33)
1.94
(49.3)
.06
(1.5)
64
V10Z82-R30310500
68
V10Z82-R41390350
40
V10Z82-R41390700
2.55
(64.8)
1.03
(26.2)
.65
(16.5)
.9
(22.9)
1.58
(40.1)
2.43
(61.7)
.09
(2.3)
56
70
V10Z82-R41391300
NOTE: For Snubbing Washers and Installation Configurations see page 7-13
7-11
Axial Static
Load, Max.
Radial Static
Load, Max.
lb. (N)
lb. (N)
60
(266)
120
(533)
200
(889)
150
(667)
300
(1334)
500
(2224)
350
(1556)
700
(3113)
1300
(5782)
30
(133)
40
(177)
50
(222)
60
(266)
120
(533)
200
(889)
140
(622)
300
(1334)
650
(2891)
Mounting
Plate
Thickness
Natural
Frequency
(Max. Load)
in. (mm)
Hz (ref)
.38
(9.7)
15
.56
(14.2)
12
.88
(22.4)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Isolator Neoprene
FULL REBOUND PROTECTION STRUCTURE-BORNE NOISE ATTENUATION
Sleeve Carbon Steel,
F
New
S E C T I O N 7
G
K
J
RAD.
H
B
G
A
(1.12 Thick Mounting Plate)
1.25 Thick Mounting Plate
5000
8000
-R78544600
7000
-R56462100
4000
-R78543600
3000
-R56461000
2000
LOAD (lb.)
LOAD (lb.)
6000
-R56460500
5000
-R78542600
4000
3000
2000
1000
1000
.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.05
DEFLECTION (in.)
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
APPLICATIONS
HIGHWAY AND OFF-HIGHWAY
VEHICLES: ISOLATE ENGINES,
CABS, RADIATORS, BATTERY
BOXES, FUEL TANKS AND
ACCESSORIES
MOTOR GENERATORS AND
COMPRESSORS
PUMPS AND CENTRIFUGES
MARINE EQUIPMENT AND
POWER PLANTS
HVAC EQUIPMENT
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT AND
MACHINERY
OFFICE EQUIPMENT/COMPUTERS
DEFLECTION (in.)
Catalog Number
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
Durometer
40
V10Z82-R56460500
V10Z82-R56461000
3.5
1.41
(88.9) (35.8)
.93
(23.6)
1
(25.4)
2.3
(58.4)
2.88
(73.2)
V10Z82-R56462100
.12
(3)
V10Z82-R78542600
V10Z82-R78543600
60
4.88
(124)
1.86
(47.2)
1.063
(27)
1.25
(31.8)
2.55
(64.8)
3.38
(85.9)
70
60
68
74
V10Z82-R78544600
NOTE: For Snubbing Washers and Installation Configurations see next page.
7-12
Axial Static
Load, Max.
Radial Static
Load, Max.
lb. (N)
lb. (N)
500
(2224)
1000
(4448)
2100
(9341)
2600
(11565)
3600
(16013)
4600
(20461)
200
(889)
400
(1779)
900
(4003)
1000
(4448)
1450
(6449)
1900
(8451)
Mounting
Plate
Thickness
Natural
Frequency
(Max. Load)
in. (mm)
Hz (ref)
1.12
(28.4)
10
1.25
(31.8)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Washers and Installation

Carbon Steel - Zinc Plated
Snubbing Washers
New
THICKNESS
Z
DIA. Y
Catalog Number
For
Series
V10Z82-
V 9C20-040
R21
V 9C20-051
R30 & RX30
V 9C20-066
R41
V 9C20-094
R56
V 9C20-106
R78
S E C T I O N 7
DIA. X
Dia. X
Dia. Y
Thickness Z
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
.40
(10.2)
.51
(13)
.66
(16.8)
.94
(23.9)
1.06
(26.9)
1.56
(39.6)
2.00
(50.8)
2.81
(71.4)
3.88
(98.6)
5.25
(133.4)
.09
(2.3)
.13
(3.3)
.19
(4.8)
.25
(6.4)
.38
(9.7)
INSTALLATION CONFIGURATIONS
ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
SNUBBING
WASHER
D
SUPPORT
STRUCTURE
B RADIUS
REQUIRED
E
MOUNTING
HOLE
DIAMETER
C
INSTALLED
E
MOUNTING
HOLE
DIAMETER
C
INSTALLED
ISOLATED
STRUCTURE
B RADIUS
REQUIRED
SNUBBING
WASHER
Installation Dimensions
For Bolt Mounts,
see previous pages.
Mount Series
V10Z82-R21
V10Z82-R30
V10Z82-R41
V10Z82-R56
V10Z82-R78
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
.04
.06
.09
.12
.12
7-13
(1.02)
(1.52)
(2.29)
(3.05)
(3.05)
1.25
1.94
2.43
2.88
3.38
(31.8)
(49.3)
(61.7)
(73.2)
(85.9)
.38
.56
.88
1.12
1.25
(9.7)
(14.2)
(22.4)
(28.4)
(31.8)
.75
1.25
1.50
2.25
2.50
(19.1)
(31.8)
(38.1)
(57.2)
(63.5)
ADVA
ANTIV
IB
TION
RA
D
CE
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Vinyl Elastomer Grommets
VIBRATION & SHOCK CONTROL SMALL SIZES

NOISE CONTROL EXCELLENT PHYSICAL INTEGRITY
Highly-Damped Blue Vinyl Elastomer

G
E C
New
H
D
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
D
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
A
E C
C
H
Fig. 3
Fig. 3
D
Fig. 4
D
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
A
B
Fig.
Plate
Hole
No. Thickness Diameter
C
Inside
Diameter
Peak performance Temperature range: 55F to 105F (13C to 41C)
D
Overall
Height
E
Outside
Diameter
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
.063
(1.60)
.224 (5.69)
.313 (7.95)
V10R14-G402-1
.125
(3.18)
.226 (5.74)
.375 (9.53)
.063
(1.60)
.276 (7.01)
.313 (7.95)
V10R14-G404-1
.125
(3.18)
.281 (7.14)
.375 (9.53)
V10R14-G410-1
.057
(1.45) .250
(6.35) .158 (4.01)
.230 (5.84)
.379
.063
(1.60) .375
(9.53) .188 (4.78)
.031
(0.79) .250
.043
(1.09) .375
in. (mm)
V10R14-G411-1
V10R14-G412-1
V10R14-G414-1
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
V10R82-F10-1
V10R82-M10-1
V10R82-F25-1
V10R82-M25-1
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
.375
lb. (N)
Load
.125 (3.18)
.063 (1.60)
.063 (1.60)
6 (26.7)
(9.63)
.050 (1.27)
.040 (1.02)
.050 (1.27)
3 (13.3)
.323 (8.20)
.563 (14.30)
.130 (3.30)
.063 (1.60)
.063 (1.60)
6 (26.7)
(6.35) .158 (4.01)
.230 (5.84)
.379
(9.63)
.050 (1.27)
.040 (1.02)
.050 (1.27)
3 (13.3)
(9.53) .188 (4.78)
.323 (8.20)
.563 (14.30)
.130 (3.30)
.063 (1.60)
.063 (1.60)
6 (26.7)
D
Overall
Height
E
Flange
Diameter
F
Flange
Height
G
Rib
Height
H
Rib
Width
lb. (N)
C
Inside
Diameter
.460 (11.68)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
(7.95) .469 (11.91) .260
H
Rib
Width
in. (mm)
B
Shank
Diameter
in. (mm)
G
Rib
Height
in. (mm)
(9.53)
in. (mm)
.250
(6.35)
(6.60)
.563 (14.30)
.457 (11.61)
.520 (13.21)
.544 (13.82) .473 (12.01) .260
(6.60) 1.060 (26.92)
7-14
in. (mm)
F
Edge
Radius
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
A
Shank
Height
.313
APPLICATIONS
COMPUTER DISK DRIVES
COMPUTER PRINTERS AND PERIPHERALS
PRECISION EQUIPMENT MEDICAL, OFFICE
AND LABORATORY
V10R14-G401-1
V10R14-G403-1
Fig. 5
BE
Catalog Number
Fig. 6
Fig. 2
.563 (14.30)
.625 (15.88)
in. (mm)
.813 (20.65)
1.000 (25.40)
in. (mm)
.250
(6.35)
.516 (13.11)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
.078 (1.98)
.085 (2.16)
.132 (3.35)
.125 (3.18)
.135 (3.43)
Load
10
(44.5)
25 (111.2)
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Silicone Gel Type

PROTECTS FRAGILE SUBJECTS FROM MICROVIBRATIONS
Collar Brass
Bushing Silicone Gel
AND LIGHT SHOCKS
New
Fig. 1
3 (.12)
3.5 (1.4)
3 (.12)
4
(.16)
11
(.43)
7
(.28)
11
(.43)
7
(2.8)
d
Metric
4 (.16)
4 (.16)
Fig. 2
4 (.16)
9
(.35)
14
(.55)
5
(.20)
14
(.55)
BOLT
(NOT SUPPLIED)
9
(.35)
WASHER
(NOT SUPPLIED)
GEL BUSHING
OBJECT TO ISOLATE
COLLAR
GEL BUSHING
MOUNTING BASE
Fig. 3
6.5
(.26)
14
(.55)
5 (.20)
14
(.55)
6
(2.4)
d
L
Collar
Fig.
Collar Collar
Thickness
No.
ID
Length
1
3
(.12)
6
(.24)
0.5 (.02)
3
(.12)
7
(.28)
4
(.16)
11
(.43)
V10Z61MA1
V10Z61MA2
V10Z61MB1
3
V10Z61MB2
25
(.98)
25
(.98)
Catalog Number
V10Z61MS
INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
5 (.20)
Optimum Load
Resonance Resonance
Point
Magnification
kgf/ leg
(lb./leg)
Hz
dB
.41)
64 to 42
7 to 9
0.125 to 0.625 (.28 to 1.38)
67 to 35
9 to 10
0.625 to 1
49 to 37
15 to 16
49 to 23
15 to 17
20 to 15
19 to 23
0.05 to 0.188 (.11 to
(.04)
(1.38 to 2.2)
to 3.75 (2.2 to 8.27)
(.04)
3.75 to 8
(8.27 to 17.64)
NOTE: More technical data is given on pages 1-34, 1-35 & 2-3.
7-15
Recommended
Frequency
Hz
90 @ 0.05 kg (.11 lb.)
60 @ 0.188 kg (.41 lb.)
95 @ 0.125 kg (.28 lb.)
50 @ 0.625 kg (1.38 lb.)
70 @ 0.625 kg (1.38 lb.)
55 @ 1
kg (2.2 lb.)
70 @ 1
kg (2.2 lb.)
35 @ 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.)
30 @ 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.)
25 @ 8
kg (17.64 lb.)
S E C T I O N 7
OM
See Section 7
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Bolt Mounts Washer Type

CAN BE USED AS SEALING WASHER

ONE-PIECE CONSTRUCTION SELF-SEALING
Washer Stainless Steel

Seal Silicone Rubber
New
Bottom View
Top View
RUBBER
METAL
5/64
Thread
Size
O.D.
SECTION X-X
Thread
Size
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -160F to +500F (-106.7C to +260C)

PRESSURE RANGE: 100 psi (0.69 N/mm2) Internal & External
Washer
O.D.
Catalog Number
1/2
V10Z14-08100
V10Z14-08150
V10Z14-04150
1-1/2
V10Z14-10100
V10Z14-05050
1/2
V10Z14-10150
V10Z14-12100
V10Z14-05150
1-1/2
V10Z14-12150
V10Z14-06050
1/2
V10Z14-14100
V10Z14-14150
1-1/2
V10Z14-16100
INSTALLATION: Bolt Mounts Washer Type are installed on

bolts or screws in the same manner as regular washers. The
rubber section should always face the panel.
V10Z14-16150
Catalog Number
V10Z14-04050
V10Z14-04100
V10Z14-05100
V10Z14-06100
V10Z14-06150
Rev: 8-24-10 SS
#6
#8
#10
7-16
Thread
Size
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
Washer
O.D.
1
1-1/2
1
1-1/2
1
1-1/2
1
1-1/2
1
1-1/2
Silicone vs. Rubber

New
No matter what the temperature could be, Silicone Gel
performs more stably than other materials.
Metric
70
REBOUND RESILENCE (%)
60
50
V10Z61 and V10Z62 Series Silicone
Urethane High Damping Rubber
NBR (Rubber)
Natural Rubber
40
30
20
10
0
-100
-50
50
100
150
TEMPERATURE (C)
COMPRESSION SET
Outstanding restoration is available even when Silicone Gel
stays compressed.
70
60
1. Compress above materials by 25% and leave

compressed for 22 hours in 70C (158 F).
2. Release compression and leave in normal
temperature for 30 minutes.
50
40
30
20
10
0
V10Z61
and
V10Z62
Series
Silicone
Urethane
High
Damping
Rubber
NBR
(Rubber)
Natural
Rubber
EPDM
Rubber
7-17
S E C T I O N 7
REBOUND RESILIENCE
COMPRESSION SET (%)
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Unique Properties of Silicone Gel

Silicone gel has many properties that are superior to many other
vibration damping materials such as rubber and urethane.
Stable performance over wide temperature range: -40C (-40F)
to 100 ~ 200C (212 ~ 392F) depending on the composition.
S E C T I O N 7
Good thermal conductivity.

Excellent in light-load and high-frequency vibration applications.
High ozone, UV and chemical resistance.
Many Forms of Silicone Gel Products Are Offered in This Catalog
Stud Type Mounts p. 1-34 thru 1-36
Base Mounts p. 2-3
Shock Absorbent Test

Spring Mounts p. 5-14
Impact of dropping a fresh egg from
a height of 18 m (59 feet) onto a
2 cm (.79 in.) thick silicone gel pad
is gently absorbed without breaking the egg.
Bolt Mounts p. 7-15
Silicone Foam Pads p. 8-8
Silicone Gel Pads p. 8-9
Silicone Gel Tape & Chips p. 8-10
7-18
SECTION 8
See Section 8
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Iso-Pads
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 50 TO 100 PSI (3.5 TO 7 kgf/cm2)
A compound of two layers of tough vinyl

chloride elastomeric resin bonded to both
sides of a strong reinforcing core of
monofilament fiberglass and fused in a
special process.
COLOR: Orange
COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION: .8
W
NATURAL FREQUENCY vs TEMP AT 100 PSI (7 kgf/cm2):
-50F (-45.6C)
Room Temperature
+230F (110C)
PATTERNED
60
fn = 24 Hz
fn = 27 Hz
fn = 19 Hz
180
LOAD DEFLECTION vs. RECOVERY
NATURAL FREQUENCY vs. LOAD (PSI) (STATIC)
50
20
120
90
60
10
30
APPLIED LOAD IN PSI
30
FREQUENCY IN HZ
40
150
IN
30
60
45
75
90
AD
LO
STATIC LOAD IN PSI
15
IN
AD
LO
DEFLECTION IN PERCENT OF ORIGINAL THICKNESS
105 120
1.6
3.2 4.8
6.4
8.0
9.6 11.2 12.8
2400
1200
800
1.0
.50
.250
.125
400
.062
.031
.10
DEFLECTION IN INCHES
Catalog Number
.020 .040 .060 .080 .100 .120 .140 .160 .180
W
in.
L
mm
558
in.
23
T
mm
in.
Pad Area
mm sq. in. sq. cm
584
V10R10-00
22
* V10R10-33
76.2
76.2
* V10R10-44
* V10R10-36
101.6
101.6
76.2
* V10R10-48
101.6
506
3265
58.1
16
103.2
152.4
18
116.1
203.2
32
206.5
5/8
15.9
*Priced per box of 12 pieces.
8-2
GAIN
SCALE IN DB
1600
4.0
2.0
STATIC LOAD IN PSI
8.0
TRANSMISSIBILTY
TRANSMISSIBILITY
LOAD vs. DEFLECTION
2000
LOSS
RATIO OF
fo (Applied Frequency)
fn (Natural Frequency)
1.0
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
10
S E C T I O N 83
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50F to +230F (-45.6C to 110C)
See Section 8
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Iso-Pad Sheets
UNPATTERNED PATTERNED
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
FIG. 1
ISO-PAD FOR BOLT INSULATOR (UNPATTERNED)
Color: Orange
Sheet Dimensions
Catalog Number
V10R11-B11
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
11
279.4
11
279.4
3/32
2.4
For Bolt Isolation:

Occasionally, machinery must be bolted down because of unbalanced structure, upward pull, safety requirements or local ordinances.
Shimming instructions would apply for bolted machinery.
The bolt head should be isolated from the machine base or feet by using a metal washer over a piece of ISO-PAD. The body of the bolt must
also be isolated. This can be achieved with Bolt Insulator material cut to size, rolled into a cylinder, and slipped over the bolt.
FIG. 2
ISO-PAD FOR SHIM (PATTERNED)
Coefficient of Friction: .8
Color: Orange
Sheet Dimensions
Catalog Number
V10R11-A00
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
22
558
22
558
3/32
2.4
For Machine Leveling:

SHIM increases ISO-PAD height in 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) increments. If metal shims are required, use ISO-PAD SHIM to isolate them from the
machine base and eliminate metal-to-metal contact. It is especially useful in assuring level machine installations on unlevel floors.
ISO-PAD SHIM has a composition similiar to ISO-PAD Standard. (See previous page for ISO-PAD Standard)
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS:
MACHINE
ISO-PAD
SHIM
STANDARD
METAL SHIM STOCK
(.001 TO .062 as required)
ISO-PAD
MACHINE
ISO-PAD
FLOOR
8-3
METAL WASHER
(3/16 thick)
ISO-PAD
ISO-PAD BOLT
INSULATOR
S E C T I O N 83
OM
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 8
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Iso-Pads
FOR LIGHT LOADS OF 20 TO 120 PSI (1.4 TO 8.4 kgf/cm2)
Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin
UNPATTERNED
NATURAL FREQUENCY vs. TEMP. AT 80 PSI (5.6 kgf/cm2)
-50 F (-45.6C)
Room Temperature
+230 F (110C)
fn = 24 Hz
fn = 40 Hz
fn = 24 Hz
LOAD DEFLECTION VS. RECOVERY
NATURAL FREQUENCY VS. LOAD (PSI) (STATIC)

120
80
60
40
20
100
80
60
UN
LO
AD
IN
G
100
LO
AD
IN
G
APPLIED LOAD IN PSI
FREQUENCY IN Hz
120
40
20
15
30
45
60
75
90
STATIC LOAD IN PSI
1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.2

0 .4 .8
DEFLECTION IN PERCENT OF ORIGINAL THICKNESS
105 120
TRANSMISSIBILITY VS. FREQUENCY RATIO
LOAD VS. DEFLECTION
8.0
4.0
800
2.0
1.0
600
400
200
.062
.025
.050
.075
.031
.10
.100
DEFLECTION IN INCHES
in.
Pad Dimensions
mm
in.
mm
V10R 9-00
22
V10R 9-11
25.4
25.4
V10R 9-22
50.8
50.8
V10R 9-33
76.2
76.2
V10R 9-44
101.6
101.6
Rev: 11-1-11 SS
558
23
in.
Pad Area
mm
sq. in.
584
506
.25
+.062
-.000
1.0
RATIO OF
COLOR: Orange
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50 F to +230F (-45.6C to 110C)
Catalog Number
.50
.250
.125
6.4
+1.58
0
8-4
sq. cm
3265
6.5
25.8
58.1
16
103.2
fo(Applied Frequency)
fn(Natural Frequency)
20
15
GAIN
10
5
0
5
10
LOSS
15
20
25
30
10
SCALE IN dB
1000
TRANSMISSIBILITY
STATIC LOAD IN PSI
1200
OM
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 8
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Square Rubber Mounts

100% RUBBER HOLE FOR EASY INSTALLATION

GREAT FOR IMPACT LOADS
Natural Rubber (55-60 Shore A Black)

E
D
L
t1
Catalog Number
V10R79MPA05020
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
mm
(in.)
50
(1.97)
50
(1.97)
70
(2.76)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
80
(3.15)
100
(3.94)
100
(3.94)
20
(1.79)
25
(.98)
30
(1.18)
35
(1.38)
35
(1.38)
30
(1.18)
60
(2.36)
V10R79MPA07025
V10R79MPA07030
V10R79MPA07035
V10R79MPA08035
V10R79MPA10030
V10R79MPA10060
Metric
mm
(in.)
t1
mm
(in.)
Max. Load
11
(1.43)
21
(.83)
29
(1.14)
150
(331)
200
(441)
300
(661)
400
(882)
600
(1323)
900
(1984)
1500
(3307)
kgf
(lbf)
35
(1.38)
38
(1.50)
40
(1.57)
25
(.98)
PERFORMANCE GRAPHS
Load (kgf)
350
Load (kgf)
V10R79MPA07035
300
V10R79MPA07030
250
V10R79MPA07025
200
150
1200
800
200
8-5
V10R79MPA08035
600
50
V10R79MPA10030
1000
400
V10R79MPA10060
1400
100
Rev: 5-12-11 SS
V10R79MPA05020
16000
3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
OM
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 8
TION
RA
Buy Product
Pads Single Ribbed
VERSATILE
SMALL FOOTPRINT
Natural Black Rubber (Ozone-Resistant Rubber)
New
Fig. 1
V10R78MS300-10..
280
(11.02)
280
(11.02)
V10R78MS400-12N
Fig. 2
t
Metric
380
(14.96)
380
(14.96)
Dimensions in ( ) are in.
Catalog Number **
V10R78MS300-10N
*V10R78MS300-10CR
V10R78MS400-12N
t
Thickness
Compression
Load
10 (.39)
26 (38)
12 (.47)
30 (44)
Figure
Number
mm (in.)
N/cm2 (lb./in.2)
Admissible
Temporary Overload
%
30
*The material for this item is Neoprene.

**To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.
ASSEMBLY EXAMPLES
DIRECT MOUNTING:
Free installation of the
machine on the pad simply
by resting it there.
GLUED MOUNTING:
Attachment using glue.
METAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING
METAL
PADS
METAL
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
8-6
SPLIT MOUNTING:
One single pad can be used by
splitting it, to insulate the different
legs of a machine.
OM
See Section 8
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Pads Paired Ribbed

VERSATILE
SMALL FOOTPRINT
Natural Black Rubber (Ozone-Resistant Rubber)
Metric
The serrated sides of the pads enable the pads

to fit together so that they generate greater
continuity to help insulate vibrations better.
PADS (matched antivibratory pads), compress
simultaneously, whether or not they are of the
same hardness.
Catalog Number *
V10R78MD400-16
H
Height
W
Width
mm (in.)
mm (in.)
380 (14.96)
380 (14.96)
t
Thickness
mm (in.)
16 (.63)
Rev: 5-9-11 SS
8-7
N/cm2 (lb./in.2)
Admissible
Temporary
Overload
35 (51)
30
Compression
Load
Made up of
(2x) V10R78MS400-12N
OM
Request Quote
Visit Website
ANTIV
IB
ADVA
D
CE
See Section 8
TION
RA
Buy Product
PONENT
MATERIAL:
Silicone Foam Pads

OUTSTANDING DURABILITY LOW COMPRESSION SET DURABLE IN ANY WEATHER

FOR OUTSIDE USE SHOCK ABSORBER low flammability
Silicone Foam
New
L
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40C to 200C (-40F to 392F)
W
Width
Catalog Number
V10Z62MNPGRN0500
V10Z62MNPGRN2000
V10Z62MNPWTE0500
V10Z62MNPWTE1000
50
450 (17.72)
300 (11.81)
L
Length
500 (19.69)
2000 (78.7)
500 (19.69)
1000 (39.4)
COMPRESSION SET
Color
3 (.118)
Green
6 (.236)
White
CHARACTERISTICS:
Specific Gravity
0.26
Tensile Strength (Mega Pascal)
0.32
Elongation (%)
40
COMPRESSION (%)
T
Thickness
269.5
Specific Heat (Joule/g K)
1.15
Specific Volume Resistance Ratio ( cm)

Dielectric Breakdown Strength (kV/mm)
20
10
Chemical
Resistance
1
0.2
8-8
3.8
X
Acetone
Methanol
Distilled H20
Fuel
Lubricant
HCI (10%)
X = Has a reaction
O = No reaction
0.06
3.8x1014
Toluene
NaCI (10%)
Silicone Chloro- Poly- Urethane

Foam prene ethylene Foam
Foam
1. Compress the materials by 50% and leave
compressed for 22 hours in 70C (158F).
2. Release compression and leave subject in
normal temperature for 30 minutes.
Rev: 1-22-08 SS
73
Young's Modulus (Kilo Pascal)

Thermal Conductivity (Watt/m K)
30
Metric
NaOH (5%)
O
X
X
O
O
O
See Section 8
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Silicone Gel Pads

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
LOW RESONANCE MAGNIFICATION OZONE, UV AND CHEMICAL RESISTANT

ABSORBS SHOCKS REDUCES NOISE
Silicone Gel
9
(.354)
New
10
(.394)
100
(3.94)
Metric
5
(.197)
100
(3.94)
NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch
Optimum
Load
Catalog Number
Resonance Resonance Recommended

Point
Magnification
Frequency
kgf/pad(lb./pad)
Hz
dB
Hz
4.4)
27 to 21
from 38
V10Z62MSN02
0.5 to 2 (1.1 to
V10Z62MSN05
to 5 (4.4 to 11.0)
29 to 23
from 40
V10Z62MSN15
to 15 (11.0 to 33.1)
26 to 18
13
from 37
V10Z62MSN50
15
to 50 (33.1 to 110.2)
22 to 15
20 to 18
from 30
Deflection
mm (in.)
1.4 to 3
(.06 to .12)
1.5 to 2.5
(.06 to .10)
1.1 to 2.2
(.04 to .09)
0.7 to 2
(.03 to .08)
Color
Yellow
Green
Orange
Blue
Divide for light load. Add for heavy load.

Make sure of total object load and then
INSTALLATION
select optimum gel pad.
OBJECT
BOARD
(Example)
For 0.3 kgf (.66 lb.) load, add a
GEL PAD
8-9
board for extra weight or divide

V10Z62MSN02 to reduce
projections.
For 10 kgf (22.1 lb.) load, divide
V10Z62MSN15 into pieces.
For 80 kgf (176.4 lb.) load, use
two of V10Z62MSN50 and
divide if needed.
S E C T I O N 83
2 (.08)
See Section 8
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Silicone Gel Tape & Chips

LOW COMPRESSION SET HIGH CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

HIGH WEATHER RESISTANCE EFFECTIVE IN NARROW SPACE
Silicone Gel
ADHESIVE AGENT ON ONE SIDE
New
W
Fig. 1
ADHESIVE AGENT
ON ONE SIDE
Metric
W
Fig. 2
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40C to 100C (-40F to 212F)
W
Width
Catalog Number
Fig. 1
L
Length
T
Thickness
TAPE
V10Z62MGT1
10 (.394)
V10Z62MGT2
20 (.787)
V10Z62MGT3
10 (.394)
V10Z62MGT4
20 (.787)
V10Z62MGT5
10 (.394)
V10Z62MGT6
20 (.787)
1 (.039)
1000
(39.4)
2 (.079)
3 (.118)
Fig. 2
CHIPS*
V10Z62MGC1
3 (.118)
10 (.394)
10 (.394)
V10Z62MGC2
5 (.197)
V10Z62MGC3
3 (.118)
V10Z62MGC4
15 (.591)
15 (.591)
5 (.197)
V10Z62MGC5
10 (.394)
V10Z62MGC6
3 (.118)
V10Z62MGC7
V10Z62MGC8
20 (.787)
20 (.787)
5 (.197)
10 (.394)
*Priced per sheet (25 chips per sheet)

8-10
S E C T I O N 83
SECTION 9
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Couplings Neo-Flex Short

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Hubs 303 Stainless Steel

Center Molded Neoprene, Durometer 73
L
L1
L2
D1 A1
MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER SHAFT-TO SHAFT INSULATION

FAIRLOC AND PIN TYPE HUBS
TORSIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATION
1/4
(6.4)
A2
11/16 13/16
A 2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
D1 A1
1/4
(6.4)
L2
1-1/4
(31.8)
SPOT DRILL
SET SCREW
11/16 13/16
A 2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
D1 A1
SPOT DRILL
SET SCREW
11/16 13/16
D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
L
L1
1-1/4
(31.8)
11/16 13/16
A 2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
D1 A1
Fig 1. FairLoc Type Hub
Fig 2. Pin Type Hub
MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION
Max. Angular Offset

Max. Lateral Offset
Ribbed
Style
Smooth
Style
5
.010 (0.25)
1
.005 (0.13)
Fig. 1 Fairloc Type Hub
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50FSR-0303
V50FSR-0304
V50FSR-0404
V50FSR-0406
V50FSR-0408
V50FSR-0606
V50FSR-0608
V50FSR-0808
V50FSS-0303
V50FSS-0304
V50FSS-0404
V50FSS-0406
V50FSS-0408
V50FSS-0606
V50FSS-0608
V50FSS-0808
A1
Bore
A2
Bore
+.001
(+0.025)
+.001
(+0.025)
.1200 (3.048)
.1200 (3.048)
.1250 (3.175)
.1250 (3.175)
.1250 (3.175) .1875 (4.763)
.2500 (6.35)
.1875 (4.763)
.1875 (4.763)
.2500 (6.35)
.2500 (6.35) .2500 (6.35)
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
L1
Hub
Length
L2
Hub
Length
L
Overall
Length
1/64
( 0.4)
Cap
Screw
.440 (11.18)
.440 (11.18)
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
1.264 (32.1)
#2-56
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
.328 (8.33)
.257 (6.53)
.295 (7.49)
.295 (7.49)
1.264 (32.1)
1.264 (32.1)
1.335 (33.9)
1.264 (32.1)
1.302 (33.1)
1.330 (33.8)
#2-56
#2-56
#2-56 / #4-40
#2-56
#2-56 / #4-40
#4-40
.610 (15.49)
.440 (11.18)
.495 (12.57)
.610 (15.49)
.495 (12.57)
.610 (15.49)
.610 (15.49)
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
Set
Screw
5/16 (7.94)
5/16 (7.94)
#2-56
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
#2-56
#2-56 / #4-40
#2-56 / #6-32
#4-40
#4-40 / #6-32
#6-32
.440 (11.18)
.495 (12.57)
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
.295 (7.49)
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

Catalog Number
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50PSR-0303
V50PSR-0304
V50PSR-0404
V50PSR-0406
V50PSR-0408
V50PSR-0606
V50PSR-0608
V50PSR-0808
V50PSS-0303
V50PSS-0304
V50PSS-0404
V50PSS-0406
V50PSS-0408
V50PSS-0606
V50PSS-0608
V50PSS-0808
A1
Bore
+.0005
(+0.013)
A2
Bore
+.0005
(+0.013)
.1200 (3.048)
.1200 (3.048)
.1248 (3.17)
.1248 (3.17)
.1248 (3.17) .1873 (4.757)
.2498 (6.345)
.1873 (4.757)
.1873 (4.757)
.2498 (6.345)
.2498 (6.345) .2498 (6.345)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
Max.
Torque
oz. in. (N m)
Other bore sizes and combinations available on special order.
9-2
100 (0.71)
120 (0.85)
150 (1.06)
180 (1.27)
Max.
Torque
oz. in. (N m)
100 (0.71)
120 (0.85)
150 (1.06)
180 (1.27)
S E C T I O N 9
Catalog Number
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Couplings Neo-Flex Short

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER SHAFT-TO-SHAFT INSULATION

6.3

6.3
(.25)
SET
SCREW
l1
l2
17.5
d2 D2 (9.69) 20.6
(.81)
D1 d1
SPOT DRILL
17.5
d2 D2 (.69)
20.6
(.81)
Ribbed Style
6.3
(.25)
SET
SCREW
l2
17.5
d2 D2 (.69)
20.6
(.81)
D1 d1
(.25)
D1 d1
Ribbed Style
l1
31.8
(1.25)
31.8
(1.25)
6.3
(.25)
17.5
d2 D2 (.69)
20.6
(.81)
D1 d1
Smooth Style
SPOT DRILL
Metric
Smooth Style
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

Max. Angular Offset

Max. Lateral Offset
Ribbed
Style
Smooth
Style
5
0.25 (.010)
1
0.13 (.005)
Fig. 1 Fairloc Hub Type
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50FSRM0303
V50FSRM0304
V50FSRM0305
V50FSRM0306
V50FSRM0404
V50FSRM0405
V50FSRM0406
V50FSRM0505
V50FSRM0506
V50FSRM0606
V50FSSM0303
V50FSSM0304
V50FSSM0305
V50FSSM0306
V50FSSM0404
V50FSSM0405
V50FSSM0406
V50FSSM0505
V50FSSM0506
V50FSSM0606
d1
Bore
d2
Bore
+.0.025
(+.0010)
+0.025
(+.0010)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
6 (.24)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
l1
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
11 (.43)
11 (.43)
11 (.43)
12.5 (.49)
12.5 (.49)
12.5 (.49)
16 (.63)
11 (.43)
12.5 (.49)
16 (.63)
12.5 (.49)
16
16
(.63)
16
(.63)
l2
Hub
Hub
Length Length
L
Overall
Length
0.4
( .016)
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50PSRM0303
V50PSRM0304
V50PSRM0306
V50PSRM0404
V50PSRM0406
V50PSRM0606
V50PSSM0303
V50PSSM0304
V50PSSM0306
V50PSSM0404
V50PSSM0406
V50PSSM0606
d2
Bore
+.0.013
(+.0005)
+0.013
(.0005)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
6 (.24)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
D1
Hub
Dia.
7.9 (.31)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
N m (oz. in.)
M2
M2
M2/M2.5
M2/M2.5
0.71 (100)
(.63)
33.1 (1.30)
33.1 (1.30)
33.6 (1.32)
33.6 (1.32)
33.1 (1.30)
33.6 (1.32)
33.6 (1.32)
M2.5
0.85 (120)
16
(.63)
7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30)
34.1 (1.34)
M2.5
1.06 (150)
16
(.63)
7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30)
34.1 (1.34)
M2.5
1.27 (180)
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

d1
Bore
Max.
Torque
7 (.28)
7 (.28)
7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
7 (.28)
(.28) 7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
(.28)
NOTE: Fairloc hubs require controlled shaft tolerances.

Suggested tolerance according to g6, h6 or h7.
Catalog Number
Cap
Screw
D2
Hub
Dia.
7.9 (.31)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
7.9 (.31)
Max.
Torque
Set
Screw
N m (oz. in.)
M2
0.71 (100)
M2
0.85 (120)
M3
1.27 (180)
9-3
S E C T I O N 9
Catalog Number
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
Couplings Neo-Flex Long


L
9/16
(14.3)
L1
MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER SHAFT-TO SHAFT INSULATION

L2
13/16
11/16
A2 D2 (17.5)(20.6)
O.D.
O.D.
D1 A1
L
9/16
(14.3)
L1
L2
13/16
11/16
A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D.
O.D.
D1 A1

1/4
(6.4)
1/4
(6.4)
2-1/2
(63.5)
9/16
(14.3)
SET
SCREW
Fig 2. Pin Type Hub
SPOT DRILL
11/16 13/16
A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
D1 A1
1/4
(6.4)
1/4
(6.4)
2-1/2
(63.5)
9/16
(14.3)
SET
SCREW
SPOT DRILL
11/16 13/16
d2 D2 (17.5) (20.6)
O.D. O.D.
D1 A1
Max. Angular Offset

Max. Lateral Offset
Fig 2. Pin Type Hub
Ribbed
Style
Smooth
Style
15
.015 (0.38)
8
.010 (0.25)
Catalog Number
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50FLR-0303
V50FLR-0304
V50FLR-0404
V50FLR-0406
V50FLR-0408
V50FLR-0606
V50FLR-0608
V50FLR-0808
V50FLS-0303
V50FLS-0304
V50FLS-0404
V50FLS-0406
V50FLS-0408
V50FLS-0606
V50FLS-0608
V50FLS-0808
A1
Bore
A2
Bore
+.001
(+0.025)
+.001
(+0.025)
.1200 (3.048)
.1200 (3.048)
.1250 (3.175)
.1250 (3.175)
.1250 (3.175) .1875 (4.763)
.2500 (6.35)
.1875 (4.763)
.1875 (4.763)
.2500 (6.35)
.2500 (6.35) .2500 (6.35)
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
L1
Hub
Length
L2
Hub
Length
L
Overall
Length
1/64
Cap
Screw
.440 (11.18)
.440 (11.18)
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
2.514 (63.9)
#2-56
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
.328 (8.33)
.257 (6.53)
.295 (7.49)
.295 (7.49)
#2-56
2.514 (63.9)
#2-56
2.514 (63.9)
2.585 (65.7) #2-56 / #4-40
#2-56
2.514 (63.9)
2.552 (64.8) #2-56 / #4-40
#4-40
2.590 (65.8)
.610 (15.49)
.440 (11.18)
.495 (12.57)
.610 (15.49)
.495 (12.57)
.610 (15.49)
.610 (15.49)
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
Set
Screw
5/16 (7.94)
5/16 (7.94)
#2-56
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
#2-56
#2-56 / #4-40
#2-56 / #6-32
#4-40
#4-40 / #6-32
#6-32
.440 (11.18)
.495 (12.57)
.257 (6.53)
.257 (6.53)
.295 (7.49)
(0.4)
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

Catalog Number
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50PLR-0303
V50PLR-0304
V50PLR-0404
V50PLR-0406
V50PLR-0408
V50PLR-0606
V50PLR-0608
V50PLR-0808
V50PLS-0303
V50PLS-0304
V50PLS-0404
V50PLS-0406
V50PLS-0408
V50PLS-0606
V50PLS-0608
V50PLS-0808
A1
Bore
+.0005
(+0.013)
A2
Bore
+.0005
(+0.013)
.1200 (3.048)
.1200 (3.048)
.1248 (3.17)
.1248 (3.17)
.1248 (3.17) .1873 (4.757)
.2498 (6.345)
.1873 (4.757)
.1873 (4.757)
.2498 (6.345)
.2498 (6.345) .2498 (6.345)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
1/2 (12.7)
Max.
Torque
oz. in. (N m)
100 (0.71)
120 (0.85)
150 (1.06)
180 (1.27)
9-4
Max.
Torque
oz. in. (N m)
100 (0.71)
120 (0.85)
150 (1.06)
180 (1.27)
S E C T I O N 9
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Couplings Neo-Flex Long

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product


L
14.3
(.56)
l1
MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER SHAFT-TO-SHAFT INSULATION

l2
20.6
(.81)
d2 D2 17.5
(.69)
D1 d1
Ribbed Style
L
14.3
(.56)
l1
l2
20.6
(.81)
d2 D2 17.5
(.69)
D1 d1
Metric
Smooth Style
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

6.3
(.25)
6.3
(.25)
63.5
(2.50)
14.3
(.56)
SET
SCREW
SPOT DRILL
20.6
d2 D2 17.5 (.81)
(.69)
Ribbed Style
6.3
(.25)
6.3
(.25)
63.5
(2.50)
14.3
(.56)
SET
SCREW
SPOT DRILL
20.6
d2 D2 17.5 (.81)
(.69)
D1 d1
Smooth Style
Fairloc Type Hub
Smooth
Ribbed
Style
Style
1
5
0.25 (.010)
0.38 (.015)
Max. Angular Offset

Max. Lateral Offset
Pin Type Hub

Ribbed
Smooth
Style
Style
15
0.38 (.015)
8
0.25 (.010)

Catalog Number
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50FLRM0303
V50FLRM0304
V50FLRM0305
V50FLRM0306
V50FLRM0404
V50FLRM0405
V50FLRM0406
V50FLRM0505
V50FLRM0506
V50FLRM0606
V50FLSM0303
V50FLSM0304
V50FLSM0305
V50FLSM0306
V50FLSM0404
V50FLSM0405
V50FLSM0406
V50FLSM0505
V50FLSM0506
V50FLSM0606
d1
Bore
d2
Bore
+.0.025 (+.0010)
+.0.025 (+.0010)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
6 (.24)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
5 (.20)
6 (.24)
l1
l2
Hub
Length
Hub
Length
L
Overall
Length
0.4 ( .016)
7 (.28)
7 (.28)
7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
7 (.28)
7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
64.8 (2.55)
64.8 (2.55)
65.3 (2.57)
65.3 (2.57)
64.8 (2.55)
65.3 (2.57)
65.3 (2.57)
M2
M2
M2/M2.5
M2/M2.5
0.71 (100)
M2.5
0.85 (120)
7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
65.8 (2.59)
M2.5
1.06 (150)
7.5 (.30)
7.5 (.30)
65.8 (2.59)
M2.5
1.27 (180)
D1
Hub
Dia.
D2
Hub
Dia.
11 (.43)
11 (.43)
11 (.43)
12.5 (.49)
12.5 (.49)
12.5 (.49)
16 (.63)
11 (.43)
12.5 (.49)
16 (.63)
12.5 (.49)
(.28)
16
(.63)
(.28)
16
(.63)
16
(.63)
16
(.63)
16
(.63)
NOTE: Fairloc hubs require controlled shaft tolerances.

Suggested tolerance according to g6, h6 or h7.
Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

Catalog Number
Ribbed Style
Smooth Style
V50PLRM0303
V50PLRM0304
V50PLRM0306
V50PLRM0404
V50PLRM0406
V50PLRM0606
V50PLSM0303
V50PLSM0304
V50PLSM0306
V50PLSM0404
V50PLSM0406
V50PLSM0606
d1
Bore
d2
Bore
+.0.013 (+.0005)
+.0.013 (+.0005)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
6 (.24)
3 (.12)
4 (.16)
6 (.24)
D1
Hub
Dia.
7.9 (.31)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
D2
Hub
Dia.
7.9 (.31)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
9.5 (.37)
12.7 (.50)
12.7 (.50)
N m (oz. in.)
M2
0.71 (100)
M2
0.85 (120)
M3
1.27 (180)
9-5
Max.
Torque
Set
Screw
Cap
Screw
Max.
Torque
N m (oz. in.)
S E C T I O N 9
D 1 d1
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Spline Type

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
HYTREL SPLINE FOR HEAVY-DUTY
Spline Hytrel or Polyurethane

Hub Zinc Alloy Die Casting (Sizes 16, 20, 25)
Sintered Metal (Size 32)
L
T (2 at 90)
D
(TYP)
O.D.
K
2
FEATURES:
High rpm
Electrically Isolated
Dampens Shock & Vibration
No Lubrication
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Hytrel -22F to +212F

(-30C to +100C)
Polyurethane -4F to +140F
(-20C to +60C)
Max. Angular Offset 2

Max. Lateral Offset .008 (0.2)
Rated Torque
Coupling
Size
16
20
25
32
Max.
rpm
lb. in. (N m)
Hytrel
6.6
13.3
20.4
39.8
Polyurethane
(0.75)
(1.5)
(2.3)
(4.5)
4.4
8.8
13.3
26.6
(0.5)
(1)
(1.5)
(3)
24000
19000
15000
12000
Catalog
Complete
Coupling
Hub
Only
V 5Z2
-1608
V 5D28-1608
V 5Z2
-2008
V 5D28-2008
V 5Z2
-2012
V 5D28-2012
V 5Z2
-2508
V 5D28-2508
V 5Z2
-2512
V 5D28-2512
V 5Z2
-3212
V 5D28-3212
V 5Z2
-3216
V 5D28-3216
Spline
Only
O.D.
V 5R2
-16
5/8
(15.9)
V 5R2
-20
25/32
(19.8)
V 5R2
-25
1
(25.4)
-32
1-1/4
(31.8)
V 5R2
+.001
-.000
+0.025
0
.250
(6.35)
.250
(6.35)
.375
(9.53)
.250
(6.35)
.375
(9.53)
.375
(9.53)
.500
(12.7)
L
Length
E
Spline
Length
Spline
Bore
1-1/16
(27)
15/32
(11.9)
5/16
(7.9)
7/16
(11.1)
1/8
(3.2)
15/64
(6)
1-11/32
(34.1)
19/32
(15.1)
25/64
(9.9)
35/64
(13.9)
5/32
(4)
5/16
(7.9)
1-39/64
(40.9)
45/64
(17.9)
15/32
(11.9)
21/32
(16.7)
13/64
(5.2)
25/64
(9.9)
1-57/64
(48)
53/64
(21)
9/16
(14.3)
25/32
(19.8)
15/64
(6)
15/32
(11.9)
Max.
Bore
**
.315
(8)
#4-40
.394
(10)
.472
(12)
#6-32
**Other bore diameter combinations and bore sizes not exceeding the maximum listed above are available on special order.
To complete the Catalog Number, specify:

8 for a Polyurethane Spline
9 for a Hytrel Spline
Example: For a Complete Coupling with a Polyurethane Spline, specify Catalog Number V 5Z28-2008.
9-6
T
Set
Screw
.591
(15)
S E C T I O N 9
B
Bore
Number
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Spline Type

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
HYTREL SPLINE FOR HIGH-TORQUE AND
Spline Hytrel or Polyurethane

Hub Zinc Alloy Die Casting (Sizes 16, 20, 25)
Sintered Metal (Size 32)
HIGH-TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS
T (2 at 90)
L
S
(TYP)
l1
1
l
2 1
l2
Metric
The projections are shown per ISO convention.
FEATURES:
High rpm
Blind Assembly
No Lubrication
Max. Lateral Offset 0.2 (.008)
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Hytrel -30C to +100C

(-22F to +212F)
Polyurethane -20C to +60C
(-4F to +140F)
Rated Torque
Coupling
Size
16
20
25
32
N m ( lb. in.)
Hytrel
Polyurethane
0.75 (6.6)
1.5 (13.3)
2.3 (20.4)
4.5 (39.8)
0.5 (4.4)
1
(8.8)
1.5 (13.3)
3 (26.6)
Max.
rpm
24000
19000
15000
12000
Catalog
Complete
Coupling
Hub
Only
Spline
Only
d*
Bore
H8
V 5Z2 M1603
V 5D28M1603
3 (.12)
V 5Z2 M1604
V 5D28M1604
4 (.16)
16
27
V 5Z2 M1605
V 5D28M1605
V 5R2 M16
5 (.20)
(.63)
(1.06)
V 5Z2 M1606
V 5D28M1606
6 (.24)
V 5Z2 M1608
V 5D28M1608
8 (.31)
V 5Z2 M2005
V 5D28M2005
5 (.20)
V 5Z2 M2006
V 5D28M2006
20
34
6 (.24)
V 5R2 M20
V 5Z2 M2008
V 5D28M2008
(.79)
8 (.31) (1.34)
V 5Z2 M2010
V 5D28M2010
10 (.39)
V 5Z2 M2506
V 5D28M2506
6 (.24)
V 5Z2 M2508
V 5D28M2508
25
41
8 (.31)
V 5R2 M25
V 5Z2 M2510
V 5D28M2510
(.98)
10 (.39) (1.61)
V 5Z2 M2512
V 5D28M2512
12 (.47)
V 5Z2 M3208
V 5D28M3208
8 (.31)
V 5Z2 M3210
V 5D28M3210
32
48
10 (.39)
V 5R2 M32
V 5Z2 M3212
V 5D28M3212
(1.26)
12 (.47) (1.89)
V 5Z2 M3214
V 5D28M3214
14 (.55)
3 mm +0.014 (.12 +.0006)
*Bore Tolerance:
4, 5 & 6 mm +0.018 (.16, .20 & .24 +.0007)
8 & 10 mm +0.022 (.31 & .39 +.0009)
12 & 14 mm +0.027 (.47 & .55 +.001)
To complete the Catalog Number, specify:

8 for a Polyurethane Spline
9 for a Hytrel Spline
Example: For a Complete Coupling with a Hytrel Spline, specify Catalog Number V 5Z29M1604
9-7
l1
l2
12
8
11
3
(.47) (.31) (.43) (.12)
Spline
Bore
T
Set
Screw
6
(.24)
Max.
Bore
**
8
(.31)
M3
15
10
14
4
(.59) (.39) (.55) (.16)
8
(.31)
10
(.39)
18
12
17
5
(.71) (.47) (.67) (.20)
10
(.39)
12
(.47)
M4
12
(.47)
21
14
20
6
15
(.83) (.55) (.79) (.24)
14
(.59)
(.55)
**Other bore diameter combinations and bore sizes not exceeding
the maximum listed above are available on special order.
S E C T I O N 9
Number
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Spider Type

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
SPLIT HUB
PRELOADED RUBBER SPIDER
Hubs Aluminum
Spider NBR Rubber 86, 92 or 98 Durometer
HUB
CAP SCREWS
SUPPLIED
O.D.
S
C
SPIDER
COMPLETE COUPLING
CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION:
(Consists of two hubs and a spider)
FEATURES: Precision machined hub with integral

fasteners & prestressed spiders which
eliminate backlash. Allows limited
axial motion.
V 5Z27
Coupling Size Code

Spider Durometer Code
EXAMPLE: V 5Z27-201092 is a 25/32 (19.8) O.D. coupling with a .3125 (7.9) bore & a 92 durometer spider.
Coupling
Series
(Ref. only)
L
Overall
Length
C
Distance
Between
Flanges
V 5Z27-20
V 5Z27-30
V 5Z27-40
25/32 (19.8)
1-3/16 (30.2)
1-37/64 (40.1)
1-3/16 (30.2)
1-37/64 (40.1)
2-23/64 (59.9)
25/64 (9.9)
15/32 (11.9)
19/32 (15.1)
HUB ONLY
Catalog Number
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5A27-2008
5A27-2010
5A27-3008
5A27-3010
5A27-3012
5A27-4012
5A27-4016
5A27-4020
Coupling
Size Code
2008
2010
3008
3010
3012
4012
4016
4020
O.D.
25/32
(19.8)
1-3/16 (30.2)
1-37/64 (40.1)
B Bore
+.001 (+0.025)
-.000 (+0.025)
.250 (6.35)
.3125 (7.94)
.250 (6.35)
.3125 (7.94)
.375 (9.53)
.375 (9.53)
.500 (12.7)
.625 (15.88)
D
Length
Through
Bore
Rated
Torque
Max.
Axial
Motion
7/16 (11.1)
19/32 (15.1)
15/16 (23.8)
See
Spider
Data
.030 (0.76)
.040 (1.02)
.050 (1.27)
Cap
Screw
.20 (5.1)
#4-40
.27 (6.9)
#6-40
.43 (10.9)
#10-32
SPIDER ONLY
Catalog Number
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5R27-2086
5R27-2092
5R27-2098
5R27-3086
5R27-3092
5R27-3098
5R27-4086
5R27-4092
5R27-4098
O.D.
25/32
(19.8)
1-3/16 (30.2)
1-37/64 (40.1)
Durometer
Code
Color
86
92
98
86
92
98
86
92
98
Tan
Black
Rust
Tan
Black
Rust
Tan
Black
Rust
Temp. Range
Operating
Maximum
Nonoperating
Max.
Lateral
Offset
.007
-58F to +175F
-76F to +248F
.005
(-50C to +79C) (-60C to +120C)
.003
.008
-40F to +194F
-58F to +248F
.006
(-40C t0 +90C) (-50C to +120C)
.004
.006
-22F to +194F
-48F to +248F
.004
(-30C to +90C) (-44C to +120C)
.002
9-8
(0.178)
(0.127)
(0.076)
(0.203)
(0.152)
(0.102)
(0.152)
(0.102)
(0.051)
Rated
Torque
lb. in. (N m)
19 (2.1)
26 (2.9)
44 (5)
48 (5.4)
66 (7.5)
110 (12.4)
62 (7)
88 (9.9)
150 (16.9)
S E C T I O N 9
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
Couplings Flexible Spider Type

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
MATERIAL:
SPLIT TYPE HUB

PRELOADED RUBBER SPIDER
Hubs Aluminum
Spider NBR Rubber - 86, 92 or 98 Durometer
HUB
CAP SCREWS
SUPPLIED
l1
L1
SPIDER
Metric
COMPLETE COUPLING
CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION:
(Consists of two hubs and a spider)
FEATURES: Precision machined hub with integral

fasteners & prestressed spiders which
eliminate backlash. Allows limited
axial motion.
V 5Z27M
Coupling Size Code

Durometer Code
EXAMPLE: V 5Z27M200692 is a 20mm O.D.
coupling with a 6mm bore & a 92 durometer spider.
Coupling
Series
(Ref. only)
L
Overall
Length
V 5Z27M20
V 5Z27M30
V 5Z27M40
20 (.79)
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
60 (2.36)
10 (.39)
12 (.47)
15 (.59)
L1
Length
Through
Bore
Rated
Torque
Max.
Axial
Motion
11 (.43)
15 (.59)
24 (.94)
See
Spider
Data
0.8 (.03)
1 (.04)
1.2 (.05)
S E C T I O N 9
C
Distance
Between
Flanges
HUB ONLY
Catalog Number Coupling
Size Code
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5A27M2005
5A27M2006
5A27M2008
5A27M3006
5A27M3008
5A27M3010
5A27M4010
5A27M4012
5A27M4016
2005
2006
2008
3006
3008
3010
4010
4012
4016
D
20
(.79)
30
(1.18)
40
(1.57)
d
+0.025
5 (.2)
6 (.24)
8 (.31)
6 (.24)
8 (.31)
10 (.39)
10 (.39)
12 (.47)
16 (.63)
l1
Cap
Screw
5
(.2)
M3
7
(.28)
M3
11
(.43)
M4
SPIDER ONLY
Catalog Number
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5R27M2086
5R27M2092
5R27M2098
5R27M3086
5R27M3092
5R27M3098
5R27M4086
5R27M4092
5R27M4098
D
20
(.79)
30
(1.18)
40
(1.57)
Temp. Range
Durometer
Code
Color
86
92
98
86
92
98
86
92
98
Tan
Black
Rust
Tan
Black
Rust
Tan
Black
Rust
Operating
Maximum
Nonoperating
-50C to +80C
(-58F to +176F)
-60C to +120C
(-76F to +248F)
-40C to +90C
(-40F to +194F)
-50C to +120C
(-58F to +248F)
-30C to +90C
(-22F to +194F)
-40C to +120C
(-40F to +248F)
9-9
Max.
Lateral
Offset
Rated
Torque
N m (lb. in.)
0.18 (.007)
0.13 (.005)
0.08 (.003)
0.21 (.008)
0.15 (.006)
0.09 (.004)
0.14 (.006)
0.1 (.004)
0.06 (.002)
2.2 (19.47)
3
(26.55)
5
(44.25)
5.5 (48.68)
7.5 (66.38)
12.5 (110.63)
7
(61.96)
10
(88.51)
17 (150.47)
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Jaw Type

M PONENT
ADVA
N
Buy Product
RUBBER SPIDER
Body Sintered Iron

Spider NBR Rubber 80 Durometer
S
C
SPIDER
B
O.D.
BODY
D
SET
SCREW
Coupling
Series
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
3-035..
3-050..
3-070..
3-075..
3-090..
L
Overall
Length
C
Distance
Between
Flanges
D
Length
Through
Bore
Set
Screw
13/16 (20.6)
1-23/32 (43.4)
2
(50.8)
2-1/8 (54)
2-1/8 (54)
9/32 (7.1)
15/32 (11.9)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
17/64 (6.7)
5/8 (15.9)
3/4 (19.1)
13/16 (20.6)
13/16 (20.6)
#6 - 32
1/4 - 20
1/4 - 20
1/4 - 20
1/4 - 20
.13 (3.3)
.31 (7.9)
.38 (9.7)
.31 (7.9)
.44 (11.2)
O.D.
(Reference Only)
V
V
V
V
V
5/8
(15.9)
1-5/64 (27.4)
1-23/64 (34.5)
1-3/4 (44.5)
2-7/64 (53.6)
Rated
Torque
lb. in. (N m)
3.5 (0.4)
26.3 (3)
43.2 (4.9)
90.0 (10.2)
144.0 (16.3)
H.P.
@ 1800 rpm
.10
.75
1.20
2.50
4.00
Catalog Number
Complete
Coupling
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
3-03504
3-03506
3-03508
3-03510
3-03512
3-05008
3-05010
3-05012
3-05014
3-05016
3-07012
3-07014
3-07016
3-07508
3-07510
3-07512
3-07514
3-07516
3-09008
3-09010
3-09012
3-09014
3-09016
Body
Only
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
3-03504
3-03506
3-03508
3-03510
3-03512
3-05008
3-05010
3-05012
3-05014
3-05016
3-07012
3-07014
3-07016
3-07508
3-07510
3-07512
3-07514
3-07516
3-09008
3-09010
3-09012
3-09014
3-09016
Spider
Only
V 5R 3-035 *
V 5R 3-050 *
V 5R 3-070
V 5R 3-075
V 5R 3-090
B
Bore
Size
1/8 (3.18)
3/16 (4.76)
1/4 (6.35)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
1/4 (6.35)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
7/16 (11.11)
1/2 (12.7)
3/8 (9.53)
7/16 (11.11)
1/2 (12.7)
1/4 (6.35)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
7/16 (11.11)
1/2 (12.7)
1/4 (6.35)
5/16 (7.94)
3/8 (9.53)
7/16 (11.11)
1/2 (12.7)
NOTE: Complete coupling consists of two bodies plus spider.

* These spiders have four legs only.
9-10
Approximate
Weight @ Max.
Bore
Windup
@ Maximum
Torque
lb. (kg)
deg.
.1 (0.05)
5.0
.2 (0.09)
4.5
.4 (0.18)
3.5
.8 (0.36)
4.7
1.2 (0.54)
3.2
S E C T I O N 9
NOTE: If couplings are run at 3600 rpm, H.P. values shown in table can be doubled.
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Geargrip

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Sleeve Neoprene with Ground O.D.

Hub Zinc Alloy Die Casting
SET
SCREW
O.D.
B
FEATURES:
No Lubrication
Nominal
Torque
lb. in. (N m)
11
18
21
31
6 (0.7)
12 (1.4)
18 (2)
60 (6.8)
H.P. @
1750 rpm
Max. Angular
Offset
Max. Lateral
Offset
Max.
Speed
Operating
Temperature
.17
.33
.50
1.66
1
1
130'
2
.015 (0.38)
.015 (0.38)
.020 (0.51)
.025 (0.64)
3500 rpm
-20F to +160F
(-29C to +71C)
Catalog Number
Complete
Coupling
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
5Z
1-1104
1-1106
1-1108
1-1110
1-1112
1-1810
1-1812
1-1814
1-1816
1-2110
1-2112
1-2114
1-2116
1-3112
1-3114
Hub
Only
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
5D
1-1104
1-1106
1-1108
1-1110
1-1112
1-1810
1-1812
1-1814
1-1816
1-2110
1-2112
1-2114
1-2116
1-3112
1-3114
Sleeve
Only
V 5R 1-11
V 5R 1-18
V 5R 1-21
V 5R 1-31
B
Bore
+.002 (0.050)
-.001 (0.025)
.125 (3.18)
.188 (4.78)
.250 (6.35)
.3125 (7.94)
.375 (9.53)
.3125 (7.94)
.375 (9.53)
.438 (11.13)
.500 (12.7)
.3125 (7.94)
.375 (9.53)
.438 (11.13)
.500 (12.7)
.375 (9.53)
.438 (11.13)
O.D.
1/16
(1.6)
L
1/16
(1.6)
K
1/16
(1.6)
.78
(19.8)
1
(25.4)
.70
(17.8)
7/32
(5.6)
.56
(14.2)
1/32
(0.8)
1/8
(3.2)
1.17
(29.7)
1-1/2
(38.1)
1.15
(29.2)
5/16
(7.9)
.90
(22.9)
3/64
(1.2)
5/32
(4)
1/4-20
1.17
(29.7)
2-1/4
(57.2)
1.15
(29.2)
5/16
(7.9)
1-19/32
(40.5)
1/16
(1.6)
5/32
(4)
1/4-20
1.43
(36.3)
2-3/8
(60.3)
1.45
(36.8)
3/8
(9.5)
1-19/32
(40.5)
1/16
(1.6)
3/16
(4.8)
1/4-20
Set
Screw
#6-32
9-11
#8-32
S E C T I O N 9
Coupling
Size
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Couplings Flexible "K" Type

Hubs Steel, Zinc Plated

Body Polyurethane
A* Points
A* Flats
B
SET SCREW
Fig. 1 STANDARD HUB
E
D
Fig. 1
C
A* Flats
B
SET SCREW
A* Points
Fig. 2 INVERTED HUB
D
C
Fig. 2
UNIQUE, DURABLE ELEMENT
Speeds up to 3600 rpm
Tough polyurethane material is strong,
flexible, cut- and tear- resistant
Unique configuration gives maximum flexibility
Generous radius for added strength
Ozone-proof
Full wraparound design stays securely in hub
Catalog Number
Dimensions
B
Bore
+.002
C
-.000
A*
Fig.
No.
Flats
Points
V 5Z 7-10606
V 5Z 7-10808
1
V 5Z 7-11010
55/64
(21.8)
1-1/8
(28.6)
1-5/8
(41.3)
1-7/8
(47.6)
V 5Z 7-11212
V 5Z 7-20808
V 5Z 7-21010
V 5Z 7-21212
V 5Z 7-21414
V 5Z 7-21616
V 5Z 7-31212
V 5Z 7-31414
1-53/64 2-1/8
(46.4) (54)
V 5Z 7-31616
V 5Z 7-41616
1-55/64 2-9/64
(47.2) (54.4)
Max.
Max.
Torque
Set Capacity Angular
Screw
lb.in.
Offset
Max.
Lateral
Offset
(Nm)
(+.051
0 )
.1875
(4.76)
.250
(6.35)
.312
(7.92)
.375
(9.53)
.250
(6.35)
.312
(7.92)
.375
(9.53)
.438
(11.13)
.500
(12.7)
.375
(9.53)
.438
(11.13)
.500
(12.7)
.500
(12.7)
TEMPERATURE RANGE : -4F to +140F

-20C to +60C
11/16
(17.5)
1/16
(1.6)
1-3/16
(30.16)
#6-32
3
(0.3)
10
3/32
(2.4)
1
(25.4)
3/8
(9.5)
1-7/8
(47.6)
#10-24
12
(1.4)
15
1/8
(3.2)
1-1/8
(28.6)
7/16
(11.1)
2-1/4
(57.2)
1/4-20
28
(3.2)
15
3/16
(4.8)
1-1/8
(28.6)
3/8
(9.5)
2-7/16
(61.9)
1/4-20
40
(4.5)
15
1/8
(3.2)
9-12
S E C T I O N 9
OUTSTANDING HUB FEATURES

Annealed steel for maximum strength
Zinc plating to resist corrosion
Inside hub to decrease overall length
Rounded corners to prevent cutting
Precision swaged mechanical crimp
Accommodates standard size set screws
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
TION
RA
CO
M PONENT
MATERIAL:
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Couplings Flexible "K" Type

Hubs Steel, Zinc Plated

Body Polyurethane
S* Points
S* Flats
d
SET SCREW
Fig. 1 STANDARD HUB
L
H
Fig. 1
S* Points
S* Flats
d
SET SCREW
Metric
Fig. 2 INVERTED HUB
H
D
Fig. 2
UNIQUE, DURABLE ELEMENT

Speeds up to 3600 rpm
Tough polyurethane material is strong,
flexible, cut- and tear- resistant
Unique configuration gives maximum flexibility
Generous radius for added strength
Ozone-proof
Full wraparound design stays securely in hub
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20C to +60C
-4F to +140F
Catalog Number
Fig.
No.
S*
Flats Points
V 5Z 7M10606
V 5Z 7M10808
V 5Z 7M11010
V 5Z 7M21010
V 5Z 7M21414
2
V 5Z 7M41414
V 5Z 7M41616
Dimensions
d
Bore
D
+0.05
(+.002)
6
(.24)
24
28
8
(.94) (1.10)
(.31)
10
(.39)
10
(.39)
43
47
(1.69) (1.85)
14
(.55)
14
54
50
(.55)
(1.97) (2.13)
16
(.63)
Max.
Torque
Max.
Set
Screw Capacity Angular
Nm
Offset
Max.
Lateral
Offset
10
2.4
(.09)
15
3.2
(.13)
(lb.in.)
17.5
(.69)
0.8
(.03)
30
(1.18)
M3
0.4
(3.54)
25.4
(1.00)
8.5
(.33)
48
(1.89)
M5
1.4
(12.39)
28.5
(1.12)
9.8
(.39)
9-13
59
(2.32)
M6
3.2
(28.32)
S E C T I O N 9
OUTSTANDING HUB FEATURES

Annealed steel for maximum strength
Zinc plating to resist corrosion
Inside hub to decrease overall length
Rounded corners to prevent cutting
Precision swaged mechanical crimp
Accommodates standard size set screws
See Section 9
Request Quote
Visit Website
N
D A TIVIB
CE
MATERIAL:
Couplings Flexible Bantam

M PONENT
CO
TION
RA
ADVA
N
Buy Product
Hubs Zinc Alloy Die Cast, Chromated

Sleeve Natsyn Polyisoprene Rubber
13/16
(20.6)
DIA.
13/16
(20.6)
3/8
(9.5)
5/32
(4)
#10-24 X 1/4
SET SCREW
TWO EACH END
BORE
FEATURES:
CAPACITY RATING:
Isolates vibration up to 85%
1/20 hp @ 1725 rpm or 30 oz. in.
Sleeve provides electrical insulation
(0.21 N m)
Max. Angular Offset 1-1/2
Catalog Number
Complete
Coupling
V
V
V
V
Bore
Hub Only
5Z25-104
5Z25-106
5Z25-108
5Z25-110
V
V
V
V
5D25-104
5D25-106
5D25-108
5D25-110
Sleeve Only
+.0015 (+0.038)
-.0000 (+0.038)
V 5R25-1
1/8 (3.2)
3/16 (4.8)
1/4 (6.4)
5/16 (7.9)
Couplings Flexible One-Piece

ONE-PIECE CONSTRUCTION
Hubs Steel
Sleeves Buna Nitrile Rubber
1/4-20
SET SCREW
1.30 DIA.
11/32
7/8
CAPACITY RATING:
Rated 1/2 hp @ 1725 rpm
Max. Lateral Offset 1/8 (3.2)
Catalog Number
B
Bore
L
Length
V 5R 5-2516
V 5R 5-3016
V 5R 5-3516
1/2
(12.7)
2-1/2 (63.5)
3
(76.2)
3-1/2 (88.9)
9-14
S E C T I O N 9
MATERIAL:
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Technical Section: Vibration and Shock Isolation

1.0 FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION AND SHOCK

1.1
What Is Vibration? ...................................................................................................................................... T1-2
1.1.1 Damping ........................................................................................................................................ T1-2
1.2
What is Shock? ........................................................................................................................................... T1-3
1.3
What is Noise? ........................................................................................................................................... T1-3
1.4
Principles of Vibration Isolation ................................................................................................................... T1-4
1.5
Principles of Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................................... T1-5
2.0 BASIC DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS IN VIBRATION AND SHOCK ANALYSIS
2.1
Kinematic Characteristics ........................................................................................................................... T1-5
2.2
Rigid-Body Characteristics ......................................................................................................................... T1-6
2.3
Spring and Compliance Characteristics ..................................................................................................... T1-6
2.4
Damping, Friction and Energy-Dissipation Characteristics ........................................................................ T1-7
2.5
Vibration Characteristics of Mechanical Systems ....................................................................................... T1-7
2.5.1 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Forced Vibrations ........................................................... T1-8
3.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION ...................................................................................................................................... T1-9
3.1
Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Producing Products ................................................................................... T1-10
3.2
Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Sensitive Objects ....................................................................................... T1-12
3.3
Shock Isolation ........................................................................................................................................... T1-14
3.3.1 Shock Motion of Base (Base Suddenly Stops or Accelerates) ......................................................... T1-16
3.3.2 Sudden Impact on Equipment ........................................................................................................... T1-17
4.0 NONLINEARITIES ................................................................................................................................................ T1-17
5.0 MULTIDEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS, COUPLED MODES ....................................................................... T1-19
6.0 STATIC LOAD DISTRIBUTION CALCULATION ................................................................................................. T1-20
6.1
Advantages of CNF Vibration Isolators ....................................................................................................... T1-21
7.0 CONNECTIONS OF SPRING ELEMENTS .......................................................................................................... T1-22
7.1
Springs in Parallel ....................................................................................................................................... T1-22
7.2
Springs in Series ........................................................................................................................................ T1-22
7.3
Spring Connected Partly in Parallel and Partly in Series ............................................................................ T1-22
8.0 3-D OBJECT DRIVEN BY VIBRATORY FORCE AND TORQUES ...................................................................... T1-23
8.1
Displacement of the Object ........................................................................................................................ T1-23
8.2
Undamped Natural Frequencies ................................................................................................................. T1-24
8.3
Mount Deflections ....................................................................................................................................... T1-24
9.0 COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES ............................................................................................................................ T1-25
10.0 DESIGN PROBLEM EXAMPLES ......................................................................................................................... T1-26
REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................................... T1-34
APPENDIX
1
Useful Formulas in Vibration Analysis ........................................................................................................ T1-35
2
Properties of Rubber and Plastic Materials ................................................................................................ T1-37
3
Hardness Conversion Charts ..................................................................................................................... T1-38
T1-1
T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n
Table of Contents
FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION AND SHOCK
1.1 What Is Vibration?

Mechanical vibration is a form of oscillatory motion. It occurs in all forms of machinery and equipment. It is what you feel
when you put your hand on the hood of a car, the engine of which is running, or on the base of an electric motor when the
motor is running. Perhaps the simplest illustration of a mechanical vibration is a vertical spring loaded with weight (W), as
shown in Figure 1. In this position, the deflection of the spring from its free state is just sufficient to counterbalance the weight
W. This deflection is called the STATIC DEFLECTION of the spring. The position in which the spring is at rest is No. 1. The
spring is then slowly extended to position No. 2 and released. The elastic force moves the block W upward, accelerating up
to the mean position and then decelerating moving further up. The uppermost position of the weight (position No. 3) is at the
same distance from position No. 1 as position No. 2, but in the opposite direction. The subsequent motion of the weight as a
function of time, if there is only negligible resistance to the motion, is repetitive and wavy if plotted on a time scale as shown
by line 1 in the graph. This simple model exhibits many of the basic characteristics of mechanical vibrations. The maximum
displacement from the rest or mean position is called the AMPLITUDE of the vibration. The vibratory motion repeats itself at
regular intervals (A1, A2, A3). The interval of time within which the motion sequence repeats itself is called a CYCLE or
PERIOD. The number of cycles executed in a unit time (for example, during one second or during one minute), is known as
the FREQUENCY. The UNITS OF FREQUENCY are 1 cycle/sec or 1 Hertz (Hz) which is standard. However, "cycles per
minute" (cpm) are also used, especially for isolation of objects with rotating components (rotors) which often produce one
excitation cycle per revolution which can be conveniently measured in cpm. When, as in Figure 1, the spring-weight system
is not driven by an outside source, the vibration is a FREE VIBRATION and the frequency is called the NATURAL FREQUENCY of the system, since it is determined only by its parameters (stiffness of the spring and weight of the block).
Position of weight (x)
Amplitude
Line 1
W
W = Weight
Position No. 3
spring contracted
Ad1
Line 2
Ad2
Ad3
W
Position No. 1;
spring at rest
(mean position)
x
W
A3
A0
Weight, W in
position No. 2
spring extended
Figure 1
1 Cycle
A1
A2
Free Vibrations of a Simple Vibratory System
In general, vibratory motion may or may not be repetitive and its outline as a function of time may be simple or complex.
Typical vibrations, which are repetitive and continuous, are those of the base or housing of an electric motor, a household
fan, a vacuum cleaner, and a sewing machine, for example. Vibrations of short duration and variable intensity are frequently
initiated by a sudden impulsive (shock) load; for example, rocket upon takeoff, equipment subject to impact and drop tests,
a package falling from a height, or bouncing of a freight car. In many machines, the vibration is not part of its regular or
intended operation and function, but rather it cannot be avoided. Vibration isolation is one of the ways to control this unwanted vibration so that its adverse effects are kept within acceptable limits.
1.1.1 Damping
The vibratory motion as a function of time as shown in Figure 1 (line 1) does
not change or fade. The elastic (potential) energy of the spring transforms into
motion (kinetic) energy of the massive block and back into potential energy of
the spring, and so on. In reality, there are always some losses of the energy
(usually, into thermal energy) due to friction, imperfections of the spring material, etc. As a result, the total energy supporting the vibratory motion in the system is gradually decreasing (dissipated), thus diminishing the intensity (amplitude) of the spring excursions, as shown by line 2 in Figure 1 ("decaying vibration"). This phenomenon is called DAMPING, and energy-dissipating components are called DAMPERS, Figure 2. The rate of decay of amplitude in a system with damping is often characterized by LOGARITHMIC (or LOG) DECREMENT defined as
= log (An/An-1),
(1)
T1-2
x
W
Object
Damping
Element
Spring
c
k
Base
Figure 2
Simple Vibratory
System with
Damping
1.0
where An and An-1 are two sequential amplitudes of the vibratory process. In many cases can be assumed constant during
the decaying vibratory process. Although the cycles of the damped motion as shown by line 2 in Figure 1 are not fully
repetitive, the number of cycles in a unit of time is still called FREQUENCY.
What Is Shock?
Shock is defined as a TRANSIENT condition whereby kinetic energy is transferred to a system in a period of time which
is short, relative to the natural period of oscillation of the system. Shock usually contains a single impulse of energy of short
duration and large intensity which results in a sudden change in velocity of the system undergoing shock. The principles
involved in both vibration and shock isolation are similar. However, differences exist due to the steady-state nature of vibration and the transient nature of shock. Shock may occur in an infinite variety of ways and can be very complex. The simplest
form is a single impulse of extremely short duration and large magnitude. Figure 3 [5] shows the most commonly employed
pulse shapes used in test specifications.
Half sine wave
0
Square wave
Figure 3
Sawtooth
Basic Pulse Shapes
The reduction in shock severity, which may be obtained by the use of isolators, results from the storage of the shock
energy within the isolators and its subsequent release into a "smoother" vibratory process, over a longer period of time (at
the natural frequency of the spring-mass system) and/or from dissipation of the shock energy (its transformation into thermal
energy). However, the energy storage can only take place by a generally large deflection of the isolator.
Inasmuch as a shock pulse may contain frequency components ranging from very low to very high, it is not possible to
avoid excitation of vibratory process of the isolator/mass system with its natural frequency. On the other hand, if the duration
of the shock pulse is short, the response of the system may not have serious consequences. Figure 4 [5] demonstrates the
comparative response of a spring mass system to a rectangular pulse whose duration is greater than the natural period of the
vibratory system (I) and to a relatively short impulsive-type shock (II).
Motion of mass
Mass
Motion of base
(I)
Damper
Spring
Base
Motion of base
Motion of mass
(II)
(a)
t
(b)
Figure 4
Response of System in Figure 2 to Rectangular Pulses of Varying Duration
1.3
What Is Noise?
Sound is a vibration of air. The air in this case is an elastic member. The vibrations of the air have a frequency and an
intensity (loudness). The frequency can be expressed in cycles per second or cycles per minute. The audible frequencies
range from about 20 Hz to about 18,000 Hz, although some human ears are more sensitive and may have a somewhat
broader range. Some sounds are desirable and pleasant for some people, such as music. Unwanted/objectionable sounds
represent NOISE. Intensity or loudness of noise is measured in decibels (dB). The decibel is a measure of the sound
pressure in relation to a standard or reference sound (.0002 microbars, which is the threshold of hearing for sounds for many
people). The sound/noise loudness in dB is equal to 20 times the common logarithm of this ratio. Typical values of sound
pressure level in dB are shown in Tables 1a and 1b.
T1-3
1.2
SPL
dB
180
160
140
120
SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS (SPL) FROM TYPICAL

NOISE SOURCES
Effect
Impairs Hearing
Impairs Hearing
Pain
Threshold of pain
110
Deafening
100
90
Very Loud
80
70
Loud
60
50
Moderate
40
30
Faint
20
10
0
Very Faint
Source
Various industrial operations and related noise levels

recorded at distances of from one to three feet
from machine. **
Table 1b:
Rocket engines
Jet aircraft engines
Jet aircraft engine
Thunder, artillery
Nearby riveter,
elevated train
Boiler factory, loud
street noise
Noisy factory,
unmuffled truck
Police whistle,
noisy office
Average street noise,
average radio
Average factory,
noisy home
Average coversation,
average office
Quiet radio, quiet
home or private office
Average auditorium,
quiet conversation
Rustle of leaves,
whisper
Soundproof room
Threshold of hearing
VALUES OF SOUND
AND NOISE INTENSITY
Machine
Overall Sound Pressure Level
Grinder (portable)
Drop hammer
Lathes
Punch press
Riveting guns
Sander (portable)
Screw machine
Sewing machines
Wood saw
90-100 decibels
100-105 decibels
80-90 decibels
95-105 decibels
95-105 decibels
80-95 decibels
90-100 decibels
90-100 decibels
95-100 decibels
** From: "Acoustical Enclosures Muffle Plant Noise"

by S. Wasserman and A. Oppenheim, Plant Engineering,
January 1965
From: Marks' Standard Handbook for Mechanical Engineers, Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill Book
Co. Inc. New York, 1958, Section 12, p. 153; and "How to Specify Audible Noise" by
E.A. Harris and W.E. Levine, Machine Design Nov. 9, 1961, p. 168.
1.4
Principles of Vibration Isolation

In discussing vibration isolation, it is useful to identify the three basic elements of all vibrating systems: the object to be
isolated (equipment unit, machine, motor, instrument, etc.); the isolation system (resilient isolation mounts or isolators); and
the base (floor, base plate, concrete foundation, etc). The isolators (rubber pads, springs, etc.), are interposed between the
object and the base. They are usually much smaller than the object and the base.
If the object is the source of vibration, the purpose of vibration isolation is to reduce the force transmitted from the object
to the base.
If the base is the source of vibration, the purpose of isolation is to reduce the vibratory motion transmitted from the base
to the object, so that vibratory displacements in the work zone (between the tool and the part in a precision machine tool, the
measuring stylus and the measured part in a coordinate measuring machine, the object and the lens in a microscope, etc.)
do not exceed the allowable amounts. That is, probably, the most common case (protecting delicate measuring instruments
and precision production equipment from floor vibrations, transportation of vibration-sensitive equipment, etc.).
In both cases, the principle of vibration isolation is the same. The isolators are resilient elements. They act as a time
delay and as a source of temporary energy storage, which evens out the force or motion disturbance on one side of the
vibration mounts and transmits, if properly selected, a lesser disturbance to the other end (to the base in case of force
isolation, to the object in case of motion isolation).
A judicious design of the vibration isolation system insures that this effect is achieved. Conversely, a poorly designed
isolation system, not having proper frequency characteristics, can be worse than no isolation at all.
In addition to its function as a time delay and source of temporary energy storage, vibration mounts can also function as
energy dissipators or absorbers. This effect is usually produced by the damping characteristics of materials, viscous fluids,
sliding friction, and dashpots, although in general these may or may not be part of the isolator. The damping, or energydissipating effect of an isolator may be negligible or substantial depending on the application. The main purpose of isolator
damping is to reduce or to attenuate the vibrations as rapidly as possible. Damping is particularly important at certain
frequencies which cause RESONANCE. This occurs when the natural frequency of the object on isolators comes close to
the vibration frequency of the source. For example, if an electric motor runs at 3600 rpm, then the object-isolator natural
frequency of 3600 cycles per minute (60 Hz) corresponds to the resonance condition. If a machine operates near resonance,
or has to pass through a resonant speed in order to attain the operating speed, damping is important in alleviation of the
vibration buildup.
In summary, a good vibration mount functions as a time delay, temporary energy absorber and to some extent as an
energy dissipator, or damper. The engineering design of a vibration mount consists in identifying the characteristics of the
source of the vibration, the mechanical characteristics of the equipment and the determination of the mount characteristics,
in order to achieve a specified degree of vibration reduction.
T1-4
Table 1a:
Principles of Noise Reduction

A good vibration isolation system is reducing vibration transmission through structures and thus, radiation of these
vibration into air, thereby reducing noise.
There are many ways to reduce noise. One of the most practical and effective may be the use of vibration mounts. As a
general rule, a well-designed vibration isolator will also help reduce noise. In the case of panel flutter, for example, a welldesigned vibration mount could reduce or eliminate the noise. This can be achieved by eliminating the flutter of the panel
itself, or by preventing its transmission to ground, or by a combination of the two. The range of audible frequencies is so high
that the natural frequencies of a vibration mount can usually be designed to be well below the noise-producing frequency.
In order to reduce noise, try to identify its sources; e.g., transformer hum, panel flutter, gear tooth engagement, rotor
unbalance, etc. Next, identify the noise frequencies. Vibration isolators for these sources designed in accordance with the
guidelines for vibration and shock control may then act as barriers either in not conducting the sound, or in attenuating the
vibration which is the source of the noise.
2.0
BASIC DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS IN VIBRATION AND SHOCK ANALYSIS
2.1
Kinematic Characteristics
COORDINATE A quantity, such as a length or an angle, which defines the position of a moving part. In Figure 1, x is
a coordinate, which defines the position of the weight, W.
DISPLACEMENT A change in position. It is a vector measured relative to a specified position, or frame of reference.
The change in x (Figure 1) measured upward, say, from the bottom position, is a displacement. A displacement can be
positive or negative, depending on the sign convention, translational or rotational. For example, an upward displacement
may be positive, and a downward displacement negative. Similarly, a clockwise rotation may be positive and a counterclockwise rotation negative. Units: inches, feet, meters (m), millimeters (mm), or, in the case of rotations: degrees, radians, etc.
VELOCITY The rate of change of displacement. Units: in/sec, mph., m/sec, etc. Velocity is a vector whose magnitude
is the SPEED. Angular velocity might be measured in radians/sec or deg/sec, clockwise or counterclockwise.
ACCELERATION The rate of change of velocity. Units: in/sec2, m/sec2, etc. It is a vector and has a magnitude and
direction. Angular acceleration might be measured in rad/sec2 or deg/sec2, clockwise or counterclockwise.
VIBRATORY MOTION An oscillating motion; such as, that of the weight W, in Figure 1.
SIMPLE VIBRATORY MOTION A form of vibratory motion, which as a function of the time is of the form x = a sin t,
where a and are constants. The maximum displacement, a, from the mean position (x = 0) is the AMPLITUDE; the
FREQUENCY (rate at which the motion repeats itself) is f = /2 cycles/sec, where ANGULAR FREQUENCY has the
dimensions of rad/sec, and frequency f has the dimensions of reciprocal time; e.g. reciprocal seconds 1/sec. Such motion is
also called harmonic or sinusoidal motion.
PERIOD, CYCLE The interval of time within which the motion repeats itself. In Figure 5, this is T seconds. The term
cycle tends to refer also to the sequence of events within one period.
x
a2
a6
a1
a5
a4
Time, t, secs
2T
3T
a3
Figure 5
Periodic Motion
AMPLITUDE Figure 5 shows time history of a vibratory motion, which repeats itself every T seconds. The maximum
values of the displacement, x, from the reference position (x = 0) are called PEAKS. These are (a1, a2...). The largest of these
is called the PEAK AMPLITUDE.
STEADY-STATE MOTION A periodic motion of a mechanical system; e.g., a continuously swinging pendulum of
constant amplitude.
STOCHASTIC or RANDOM MOTION A motion which changes with time in a nonperiodic, possibly very complex,
manner.
T1-5
1.5
HARMONICS Any motion can be considered as made up of a sum (often an infinite number) of simple harmonic
motions of different frequencies and amplitudes. The lowest-frequency component is usually called the FUNDAMENTAL
FREQUENCY; higher frequency components are called HARMONICS. Their frequencies are multiples of the fundamental
frequency. Sometimes, components with frequencies which are fractions of the fundamental frequency (subharmonics) are
significant (e.g., the "half-frequency" whirl of rotating shafts, etc.).
PULSE Usually a displacement-time or force-time function describing a transient input into a dynamical system.
PULSE SHAPE The shape of the time-displacement or force-displacement curve of a pulse. Typically, this might be a
square wave, a rectangular pulse, or a half sine-wave pulse. In general, however, the shape can be an arbitrary function of
the time.
2.2
Rigid-Body Characteristics
MASS Inertia of the body equal to its weight in lbs. or in Newtons (N) divided by the gravitational constant (g = 32.2 ft/
sec2 = 386 in/sec2 = 9.81 m/sec2). Unit of mass, if the weight is expressed in N, is a kilogram (kg).
CENTER OF GRAVITY (CENTER OF MASS, C.G.) Point of support at which a body would be in balance.
MOMENT OF INERTIA The moment of inertia of a rigid body about a given axis in the body is the sum of the products
of the mass of each volume element and the square of its distance from the axis. Units are in-lb-sec2, or in kg-m2 for
example. Moments of inertia of the standard shapes are tabulated in handbooks. If instead of mass of the element its volume
is used, the result is also called a moment of inertia. Depending on the application, mass-, volume-, or area moments of
inertia can be used.
PRODUCT OF INERTIA The product of inertia of a rigid body about two intersecting, perpendicular axes in the body
is the sum of the product of the mass (volumes, areas) of constituent elements and the distances of the element from the two
perpendicular axes. Units are the same as for the moment of inertia. Tabulations are available in handbooks and textbooks.
PRINCIPAL AXES OF INERTIA At any point of a rigid body, there is a set of mutually perpendicular (orthogonal) axes
intersecting in the C.G. such that the products of inertia about these axes vanish. These axes are called the principal axes of
inertia. In a body having axes of symmetry, the principle axes coincide with them. (An axis of symmetry is a line in the body,
such that the body can be rotated a fraction of a turn about the line without changing its outline in space).
2.3
Spring and Compliance Characteristics

TENSION When a body is stretched from its free configuration, its particles are said to be in tension (e.g., a stretched
bar). The tensile force per unit area is called the tensile stress (Units: lbs/in2 (psi) or Pascals, 1Pa = 1N/m2, 1 Mega Pascal
(MPa) = 106 N/m2).
COMPRESSION When a body is compressed from its free configuration (e.g., a column in axial loading), the compressive force unit per area is called the compressive stress (Units: lbs/in2 or Pa).
SHEAR When a body is subjected to equal and opposite forces, which are not collinear, the forces tend to "shear" the
body; e.g., a rubber pad under parallel forces in the planes of its upper and lower faces. The shear force per unit area is
called the shear stress (Units: lbs/in2 or Pa). A body can be in a state of tension, compression and shear simultaneously;
e.g., a beam in bending.
SPRING CONSTANT When a helical cylindrical spring is stretched or compressed by x, the displacement x is proportional to the applied force, F (Hook's law). The proportionality constant (k) (Units: lbs/in, N/m) is called the SPRING CONSTANT or STIFFNESS, F = kx. If the spring deflects in torsion, the units of k are in-lb/rad, lb/deg, N-m/rad. Such springs are
called LINEAR SPRINGS. More generally, the load and the displacement are not proportional (a NONLINEAR SPRING). In
such cases stiffness is changing with the changing load and displacement, and k is the ratio of a force increment F to the
corresponding displacement increment x in the loading process. An important issue for spring materials most often used in
vibration isolators, such as elastomeric (rubber) materials, wiremesh materials, etc., is influence of rate of loading on their
stiffness. The stiffness constant measured at low rate of loading (frequency of load application < ~0.1 Hz) is called STATIC
STIFFNESS, kst and the stiffness constant measured at higher frequencies of load application is called DYNAMIC STIFFNESS, kdyn. The DYNAMIC STIFFNESS COEFFICIENT is defined as Kdyn = kdyn / kst.
FORCE-DEFLECTION CHARACTERISTIC This refers to the shape of the force-deflection curve. For the linear
spring, it is a straight line through the origin of coordinates (constant k). If, for a nonlinear spring, its stiffness increases with
increasing force or displacement (as in many rubber springs loaded in compression), the characteristic is called "hardening
nonlinear". If it decreases with force or displacement (e.g., as in a Belleville spring), the characteristic is called "softening
nonlinear".
T1-6
SHOCK MOTION A motion in which there is a sharp, nearly sudden change in velocity; e.g., a hammer blow on a nail,
a package falling to the ground from a height, etc. Its mathematical idealization is that of a motion in which the velocity
changes suddenly. This idealization often represents a good approximation to the real dynamic behavior of the system.
ENERGY STORAGE This is the area under the force-deflection curve of the spring. It represents the strain energy
stored in the spring (Units: lb. in., lb. ft., N m).
PRELOAD A spring or other elastic element used in an isolator or in a coupling may or may not be assembled in a
condition in which it has its natural, free, or unstretched length. If its assembled length is not its free length, the spring is in
tension or compression even before the isolator is loaded by the object weight or the coupling is loaded by the transmitted
torque. The amount of this tension or compression is called the preload. When measured in force units, it is a preload force;
when measured in deflection from the free position, it is a preload deflection.
2.4
Damping, Friction and Energy-Dissipation Characteristics

STATIC FRICTION, SLIDING FRICTION, COULOMB FRICTION These are all terms used for the frictional resistance
for sliding of one body relative to another; e.g., a weight dragged along the floor. The frictional force is approximately proportional to the contact force between the two bodies and is opposed to the direction of relative motion. The proportionality
constant f is known as the friction coefficient. If a 10 lb. weight is dragged along a horizontal floor with a friction coefficient
f = 0.2, the frictional resistance is 0.2 x 10 = 2 lb. Sometimes a distinction is made between the value of the coefficient of
friction when motion is just starting after a stationary condition (STATIC FRICTION) and its value during motion (SLIDING or
DYNAMIC FRICTION). The coefficient of friction in the latter case is generally lower and changes with the motion velocity,
unless it is DRY or COULOMB FRICTION, wherein the sliding friction coefficient does not depend on velocity. The motion
(kinetic) energy is decreasing due to energy dissipation during a sliding process with friction. Thus, frictional connections can
be used as dampers.
VISCOUS DAMPING If, in a damper, the body moves relative to a second body, VISCOUS DAMPING refers to a
resisting (friction) force which is proportional and opposite to the relative velocity between the two bodies. The proportionality
constant is the coefficient of viscous damping, c. Units: force per unit velocity; i.e., lb/(in/sec) or N/(m/sec). Viscous damping
is encountered, for example, in hydraulic dashpots and devices which squeeze a liquid through an orifice. The more viscous
the fluid, the greater the damping. If c = 0.5 lb/(in/sec) and the body moves at 10 in/sec, the viscous damping force is
0.5 x 10 = 5 lb. Typical example: hydraulic door closers.
MATERIAL or HYSTERETIC DAMPING such as damping in rubber isolators, wire mesh isolators, etc., depends on
vibration amplitudes rather than on vibratory velocity. While both viscous and hysteretic damping reduce resonance amplitudes, the viscous damping spoils vibration isolation efficiency at high frequencies (when vibration amplitudes are decreasing) while the intensity of hysteretic damping automatically decreases with the decreasing amplitudes and it results in a
better isolation efficiency.
CRITICAL DAMPING ccr Value of damping constant in mass-spring-damping system just sufficiently high so as to
prevent vibration.
DAMPING RATIO c/ccr The ratio of the damping constant to the critical damping constant for that system. The
damping ratio is related to log decrement as
= 2 (c/ccr).
(2)
2.5
Vibration Characteristics of Mechanical Systems

MATHEMATICAL MODEL An idealized representation of the real mechanical system, simplified so that it can be
analyzed. The representation often consists of rigid masses, springs and dampers (dashpots). The model should be sufficiently realistic so that results of the analysis of the model correspond reasonably closely to the behavior of the physical
system from which it was derived.
LUMPED- AND DISTRIBUTED-PARAMETER SYSTEMS In a lumped-parameter system, the mass, elastic spring
and damping properties are separated or lumped into distinct components, each having only mass, only elasticity or only
damping, but not more than one of these properties per component. In a distributed-parameter system, a component may
possess combined mass, elasticity and damping, distributed continuously through the component. The latter systems represent more realistic models, but are more difficult to analyze.
DEGREES OF FREEDOM This is the number of independent quantities (dimensions or coordinates), which must be
known in order to be able to draw the mechanical system in any one position, if the fixed dimensions of the system are
known. The simple mass-spring system of Figure 1 has one degree of freedom; a mechanical differential, for example, has
two degrees of freedom; a rigid body moving freely in space has six degrees of freedom (three translational and three
angular coordinates should be known in order to fully describe the position of the body in space).
T1-7
ELASTIC (YOUNG'S) MODULUS (E) AND SHEAR MODULUS (G) These are material properties, which characterize
resistance of the material to deformation in tension or in compression (E) and in shear (G). They are defined as the ratio of
stress to strain, where strain is the change in length (or deformation) per unit length. E involves tensile or compressive stress/
strain and G involves shear stress/strain. Units: lb/in2, Pa. In many practical applications, especially for metals, E and G are
constants within a limit of material stress known as the proportionality limit. Rubber and plastics often do not have a welldefined proportionality limit.
FORCE AND MOTION EXCITATION If a force varying in time is applied to a dynamical system, it usually is a source
of vibration (e.g., centrifugal force due to an unbalanced rotor). The vibrations are then said to be due to force excitation. If,
on the other hand, the foundation (or other part) of a machine is subject to a forced motion (vibration or shock), the resulting
machine vibration is said to be due to motion excitation; e.g., an earthquake actuating a seismograph.
FREE VIBRATION If the massive block in Figure 1 is moved out of its equilibrium position, and released, the system
will vibrate without the action of any external forces. Such an oscillation is called a free vibration.
FORCED VIBRATION If an external force is applied to the weight in Figure 1, which causes it to vibrate (e.g., a force
varying harmonically with time), the resulting motion of the spring-mass system is called a forced vibration. If the base which
supports the spring, undergoes a forced motion which in turn causes the weight to vibrate, the vibration is also forced.
NATURAL FREQUENCY Whether the system is without damping or with damping, the frequency of free vibration is
called the free-undamped natural frequency or the free-damped natural frequency. The natural frequency is a function of the
mass and stiffness distribution in the system. For a simple-mass spring system, which is a reasonable approximation to
many real mechanical systems, the natural frequency, fn, is
1
fn = ____
2
kg
1
____
= ____
W
2
g
____
Hz.
xst
(3)
Here, k is spring constant (dynamic stiffness constant kdyn should be used, see Section 2.3); W is the weight; g is the
gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 or 9.8 m/sec2; and xst is the static deflection of the spring. The reciprocal to the natural
frequency is the NATURAL PERIOD T = 1/fn, sec. If xst is expressed in cm (1 cm = 0.01 m), then the natural frequency can
be conveniently found as
5
fn ____ Hz.
xst
(4)
The angular natural frequency n in radians per second is

n =
kg
____
W
(5)
Thus, flexible systems tend to have low natural frequencies and rigid systems tend to have high natural frequencies. At the
same time, the natural frequency can be changed by altering the stiffness and mass distribution of the system. A system may
have more than one natural frequency, in which case the lowest of these is often the most significant one. The number of
natural frequencies is equal to the number of degrees of freedom of the system. Presense of damping is slightly reducing the
natural frequency; The DAMPED NATURAL FREQUENCY is
fdn = fn
( )
c
1 ____
ccr
= fn
1 2
______
42
(3a)
F = Fo Sin (2 ft)
where = 2 (c/ccr)
c = damping constant
ccr = critical damping constant
x
W = mg
Object
FORCING FREQUENCY The frequency of an external force or motion excitation applied to a vibrating system.
c
Vibration
Isolator
Spring
Constant
Damping
Coefficient
2.5.1 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Forced Vibrations

If a sinusoidal force F(t) = Fo sin2ft is acting on massive block W
connected with the base by spring having stiffness k and viscous damper
Base
with resistance coefficient c, Figure 6, then sinusoidal vibration of block
Figure 6 Simple Vibratory
W is excited. If frequency f is changing but amplitude Fo is constant in
System Under Forced
a broad frequency range, then amplitude of the vibratory displacement
Excitation
of block W changes with frequency along an AMPLITUDE-FREQUENCY
CHARACTERISTIC, Figure 7. Figure 7 shows plots of the displacement amplitudes vs. FREQUENCY RATIO f/fn for various degrees of damping (LOG DECREMENT ) in the vibratory system. The plots in Figure 7 are described by the following expression for the response amplitude A of the massive block W to
the force excitation:
T1-8
RANDOM VIBRATION Equipment may be caused to vibrate by applied forces or motions in which frequencies and
amplitudes of harmonics vary in a random manner with time (e.g., wind gusts on a missile). The resulting vibration is called
random.
Fo
Fo / k
A = __________________________
= ________________________
f2 2

f 2
c
f 2
f2 2
k
1 ____ + 2 ___ ___
1 ____ + ___ ___
fn2
fn
ccr fn
fn2
) (
RESONANCE It is seen in Figure 7

that displacement and stress levels tend to
build up greatly when the forcing frequency
coincides with the natural frequency, the buildup being restrained only by damping. This
condition is known as RESONANCE.
In many cases, the forced vibration is
caused by an unbalanced rotating mass, such
as the rotor of an electrical motor. The degree of unbalance can be expressed as distance e between the C.G. of the rotor and its
axis of rotation. The vertical component of the
centrifugal force generated by the unbalanced
rotor (mass M) is
A
Fo/k
Fc.f. = M2e sin t = 42Mf2 e sin 2t, (7)
2.0
where is angular speed of rotation in rad/

sec and f is the number of revolutions per
second. In case of vibration excitation by the
unbalanced rotor, combining of (6) and (7) results in
1.0
) (
=0
0
0.31
4.0
0.47
0.31
0.47
0.63
0.63
(6)
0.94
3.0
1.3
1.6
42Mf2e
A = ___________________________
f2 2
c
f 2
k
1 ____ + 2 ___ ___
fn2
ccr fn
) (
0.5
Figure 7
1.0
1.5
2.0
Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of
Massive Block Motion in Figure 6
Me
42Mf2e
f2 / fn2
= __________________________ = ___ __________________________
,
2
2
m
2
2
2
2

f

f
f
f
k
1 ____ + ___ ___
1 ____ + ___ ___
fn
fn
fn2
fn2
) (
f/fn
) (
(6a)
where m is the total mass of the object. Expression (6a) is plotted in Figure 8 for several values of damping ().
3.0
Vibration Isolation
Although VIBRATION ISOLATION is a very large area of vibration control, there are two most widely used techniques of
vibration isolation:
Reduction of transmission of vibratory or shock forces from the object, in which these forces are generated, to the
base; and
Reduction of transmission of vibratory motions of the base to the work area of vibration-sensitive objects.
These techniques are similar, but also quite different. They both deal with TRANSMISSIBILITY or TRANSMISSION
RATIO. There are several transmission ratios. Usually these refer to the ratios of the maximum values of the transmitted
force or displacement to the maximum values of the applied force or the forced motion. The important direction of transmission is from the object to the base for the force isolation, or from the base to the object for the motion isolation.
T1-9
10

0.31
7
5
0.63
3
1.26
3.14
1.0
A
Me
m
4.4
0.7
c = 1.0
ccr
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
10
Frequency Ratio, f/fn
Figure 8
Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Massive Block

Motion in Figure 6 Excited by an Unbalanced Rotor
3.1
Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Producing Products

Figure 9 shows a simplified single-degree-of-freedom model of a vibration isolation
system. While in models in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the base (foundation) is shown as
having infinite mass, in Figure 9 model the foundation has a finite mass mf. If the force
F(t) = Fo sin2ft is generated in the object (mass m), the force transmissibility F from the
object to the foundation is equal to the motion transmissibility x from the foundation to
the object and is expressed as
f 2
1 + __ __
fn
mf
Ff
x1
F = x = ___ = ___ = ______ ____________________ .
(8)
2
2 2
m + mf
Fo
x2

f
f
1 ___ + __ __
fn
fn2
( )
) ( )
This expression (for mf = ) is plotted in Figure 10 which shows that "isolation" of the
force source or the condition of F < 1 develops at frequencies greater than f = 1.41fn and
fast improving with further increasing of the frequency ratio f/fn. The maximum transmissibility occurs at the resonance when the frequency ratio f/fn = 1. At resonance (f = fn), the
transmissibility at not very high damping is expressed as
mf

(F)max = (x)max ______ __ .
m + mf
F (t)
mf
Figure 9
x1
x2
Dynamic Model of
a Basic Vibration
Isolation System
(9)
While increasing of damping is beneficial at and around the resonance, the isolation at high frequencies deteriorates with
increasing damping . This effect must be considered in designing the isolation system for a given application. Still, a
reasonable increase of damping is important since it makes the system more robust if subjected to inevitable spurious
excitations. Also, the higher damping improves behavior of the system if the object generates forces in a broad frequency
range; e.g., as unbalanced motor(s) generating continuously changing excitation frequency during its acceleration phase. It
should be considered that the transmissibility curves in Figure 10 are plotted for viscous damping in the isolators. Damping
in elastomeric and wire-mesh (or cable) elements is different, so-called hysteretic damping. This latter type of damping does
not affect the preresonance and the resonance behavior of the system, but demonstrate only a minimum deterioration of the
isolation at high frequencies even for highly-damped isolators (more in [1]).
T1-10
As mentioned before, the goal of vibration isolation of vibration-sensitive objects from the base vibration is to reduce relative vibratory displacements in
the work zone. Transmissibility of the base motion into
the relative vibrations = x1 x2 is (for any value of
mf):
10
=0
0.31
0.63
1.26
3.14
c = 1.0
ccr
f
+ __ __
fn
) (
(10)
Expression (10) is plotted in Figure 11. It is clear that

transmissibility of low frequency (as compared with
the natural frequency) foundation vibrations into the
relative vibrations is very small (since at low frequencies the motions are very slow and the object is moving following the vibrating foundation).
ISOLATION EFFICIENCY Isolation is the percent of vibration force that is not transmitted through
the vibration mounts and which improves with increasing frequency ratio. Isolation efficiency of 81.1% corresponding to a frequency ratio of 2.5, is generally
adequate as shown in Table 2. Figure 12, the basic
vibration chart, gives static deflection vs. frequency
and % of vibration isolation (1 - F). It is useful for
selection of vibration isolators/mounts and for calculations (see Section 11).
A more complete treatment of this case of vibration isolation, considering more complex and more realistic (several degrees of freedom) models is given
in [1].
0.7
0.5
0.3
c = 0.5
ccr
0.2
0.1
= 1.26
0.07
0.05

0.63
0.03
c = 0.1
ccr
0.31
0.02
0
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
10
Figure 10
Force/Motion Transmissibility
in Figure 9 System
10
=0
7
0.31
0.63
VIBRATION ABSORPTION
Frequency
Ratio
Vibration Absorption,
Percent
Results
Attained
10.0
4.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.4
1.0
98.9
93.3
87.5
81.1
66.7
20.0
0
(resonance)
excellent
excellent
very good
good
fair
poor
none
worse than with
no mountings
3
Relative Transmissibility, rel
Table 2:
1.26
c = 0.5
ccr
c = 0.7
ccr
1.0
0.7
c = 1.0
ccr
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
Figure 11
T1-11
0.5
1.0
2
Transmissibility of Vibratory
Base Motion to Relative Vibratory
Motion in the Work Zone
10
f2
1 ___
fn2
1.0
Absolute Transmissibility,
rel = ___ =
x2
f2
___
fn2
_____________________
VIBRATION FREQUENCY (Hz)

10.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
2.5
3.3
5.0
6.7
8.3
10
11.7
13.3
15
16.7
25
33
50
67
7.0
25
23
20
18
6.0
15
5.0
12.7
4.0
10
3.0
7.6
2.0
5.1
1.5
3.8
70
99
95
85
97
93
STATIC DEFLECTION (INCHES)
1.0
.9
.8
ISOLATION
EFFICIENCY %
2.5
2.3
2.0
.7
1.8
.6
1.5
.5
1.27
.4
1.0
.3
0.76
RESONANCE
NATURAL
FREQUENCY
.2
90
80
0.5
.15
0.38
.10
.09
.08
.07
0.25
0.23
0.2
0.18
.06
0.15
STATIC DEFLECTION (CM)
60
0.13
.05
REGION
OF
AMPLIFICATION
.04
0.1
4000
3000
2000
1500
900
1000
800
700
0.025
600
.01
500
0.038
400
.015
300
0.05
200
.02
150
0.076
100
.03
VIBRATION FREQUENCY (CYCLES PER MINUTE)
Figure 12
Vibration Frequency vs Static Deflection of Isolators vs Isolation Efficiency
3.2
Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Sensitive Objects

Since, for this group of objects, the relative vibrations in the work zone are determined by dynamic characteristics of the
object itself, a model in Figure 13 should be considered. Floor (foundation) vibration x1 = x10 sin2ft is transmitted through
vibration isolators (stiffness kv, damping coefficient cv) to frame/bed of the object (mass MB) causing its vibrations
xB = xB0 sin2ft. The work zone of the object is between the frame/bed and its "upper unit", mass Mu (e.g., tool head of a
machine tool or illumination unit of a photo-lithography tool). Stiffness km and damping coefficient cm describe structural
dynamic characteristics of the object, whose structural natural frequency is
1
fm = ___
2
km (Mu + MB)
_____________
.
MuMB
(11)
T1-12
Mu
Km
Xrel
Cm
MB
XB
Kv, Cv
Xf
Floor
Figure 13
Two-Mass Dynamic Model

for Vibration Sensitivity of
Precison Object
Xf
ao
f
(a) Maximum Intensity ao of Floor Vibrating
c
a
f
fn2
fn1
(b) Transmissibility from Floor to Object Frame
fn
= ___ .
(12a)
The magnitude of this criterion can be calculated if vibration sensitivity of

the object in the frequency range of interest is measured and its tolerance
is assigned, see [1]. The object is properly isolated if
<
of2
______
,
Xff
f
fm
(12b)
(c) Transmissibility From Object Frame to Work Zone
where o is the maximum tolerated vibratory displacement in the work

zone of the object, Xf is the maximum amplitude of floor vibration with
frequency f; f is the transmissibility into the work zone at frequency f
(ratio of relative vibration amplitude in the work zone to amplitude of the
object frame vibration at frequency f). According to this criterion widely
validated by practical applications, stiffness of isolators for a given installation can be increased (usually, a very desirable feature) if the isolators
have higher damping.
a
o
b
c
f
fv2
fv1
fm
(d) Resultant Transmissibility (Product of (a), (b) & (c))
Figure 14
T1-13
Model of Vibration Transmission

from Floor to Work Zone
Accordingly, transmissibility of the vibratory motion of the foundation into

the work zone can be expressed as a product of (transmissibility x of the
foundation motion X1 to the frame motion from expression (7) where x2 =
X1, x1 = XB; and m = MB) and (transmissibility of the frame motion XB to
the relative motion Xrel in the work zone rel from expression (8) where x2
= XB, = Xrel, and fn = fm from expression (11)). This operation is illustrated in Figure 14.
In Figure 14, the plot (a) is maximum intensity ao of floor vibration
(displacements amplitudes compounded from numerous on-site measurements). It is shown in [1] that for a majority of manufacturing plants ao
2.5m in the 4-30 Hz range and is much smaller outside of this range for
vertical floor vibrations, and ao 2.0 m in the 4-20 Hz range and much
smaller outside of this range for horizontal floor vibrations. For high precision facilities, the levels of allowable floor vibrations are recommended by
BBN plots in Figure 15. The next plot (b) in Figure 14 illustrates transmissibility from the floor to the object frame for three cases: a - the object
installed on rigid mounts (e.g., jack mounts or rigid isolator mounts); b the object installed on softer, isolating mounts (lower fn) with the same
degree of damping (height of the resonance peak) as the mounts in a; c the same fn as in b, but greater damping. The third plot (c) illustrates
transmissibility from the frame of the object into its work zone; fm is the
structural natural frequency of the object. The bottom plot shows the product of the previous three plots. An installation is considered successful if
the vibration amplitude in the work zone does not exceed the allowable
amplitude o.
It can be seen that a rigid installation results in two peaks of the relative vibration amplitude, which often exceed the tolerance. Both peaks
are reduced by using soft isolator mounts: the second one due to reduced
transmissibility at high frequencies per expression (6), and the first one
due to lower sensitivity of the object structure to lower resonance frequency of the object on softer isolating mounts. It is clear, that increasing
damping also results in reduced relative vibrations. Accordingly, the requirement for an adequate vibration isolation of a vibration-sensitive object is formulated not as a required upper limit of the natural frequency fn,
but as a required upper limit of the "Isolation Criterion" ,
100
Workshop (ISO)
90
30000
Office (ISO)
80
10000
Residential day (ISO)

4 m
70
Operating theatre (ISO)
2 m
1 m
VC - A (2000 micro-inches/sec)
0.2 m
0.5 m
VC - B (1000 micro-inches/sec)
0.1 m
3000
60
1000
VC - C (500 micr-inches/sec)
VC - D (250 micro-inches/sec)
50
0.063 m
0.25 m
Rms Velocity, micro-inch/sec
100000
300
0.012 m
VC - E (125 micro-inches/sec)
40
100
4
6.3
10
12.5
16
20
25
31.5
40
50
63
80
One-third Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
Figure 15 BBN Vibration Criteria (VC) for Installation of Precision Equipment

Shock Isolation
The information in this section has been taken from [2] with
mz
permission of the publisher.
z
It is often necessary to determine the effectiveness of a shock
isolator as well as the magnitude of the acceleration experienced
kz
by elements of the protected equipment. Figure 16, similar to
Figure 13, describes the system experiencing a velocity shock
as illustrated by the displacement-time curves of Figure 17.
my
The displacement of equipment (y) supported by isolators
and subjected to a velocity shock (V) is expressed by the followy
ing equation:
3.3
1
y = V 1 ____ sin 2fyt
2fy
ky
(13)
1
where fy = ___
2
system
ky
___
is the natural frequency, Hz, of the elastic
my
Support
Figure 16
consisting of chassis (my) and isolator (ky). Double differentiation

of equation (13) yields the acceleration experienced by the equipment chassis during shock. This is designated the transmitted
acceleration and is expressed as:
y 0 = 2fyV
Schematic Representation of
Equipment, Comprised of Chassis
my and Element mzkz, Mounted
Upon Isolator ky.
(14)
The units of acceleration y 0, are linear distance (inches, m, etc)

per second per second. This equation can be expressed another
way, using more convenient engineering units, as:
y 0
2fyV
fyV
Transmitted Shock = ___ = ______ = ____ ,
(15)
g
386
61.4
where: V = shock velocity change, in/sec.
fy = natural frequency of isolator, Hz.
y 0/ g = maximum acceleration experienced by chassis, expressed as a dimensionless multiple of the acceleration due to gravity.
Thus, the maximum acceleration of the chassis during shock, is
directly proportional to the magnitude of the velocity change and
to the natural frequency of the isolator. Figure 18 is a graphic
representation of the maximum transmitted acceleration computed
from Equation (15).
T1-14
Figure 17
Displacement-Time Curves for Support,

Chassis, and Element of Equipment
(Inelastic Impact)
Velocity Level (dB re 1 micro-inch/sec)
Thus, while vibration isolation

of the force-producing objects
requires reducing natural frequency in accordance with nomogram in Figure 12, isolation
of a vibration-sensitive object
can be successful even when
some part of the system is at
resonance, provided that the
natural frequency of the isolation system and its damping
are properly selected. Vibration
isolation in the latter case is
greatly simplified if structural
stiffness and structural natural
frequency of the vibration-sensitive object are enhanced.
40
30
50
20
30
20
10
10
1.0
0.8
8
5
0.6
0.5
6
5
0.4
0.3
0.3
1
2
(17)
5 6
8 10
20
30 40
60 80 100
Natural frequency of isolator, Hz
Figure 18
Maximum Acceleration of Chassis my and Maximum

Deflection of Linear Isolator ky Shown in Figure 16,
When Support Experiences Velocity Shock as
Illustrated in Figure 17.
100
80
60
Damping ratio
for isolator
40
0.005
30
0.01
20
Damping ratio for

element mzkz = 0.01
10
8
6
0.05
0.10
4
3
2
0.50
1.00
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.50
1.00
0.4
0.3
0.1
0
Natural frequency of element

Ratio
Natural frequency of isolator
Figure 19
( )
fz
fy
Shock Transmissibility for System Shown in Figure 13,

When Subjected to Velocity Shock as illustrated in
Figure 17 [3].
T1-15
ec
/s
in
0
0
40
10
where shock transmissibility (Ts) is the

ratio of the maximum acceleration of
the mass element, mz, to the maximum
acceleration of the same element
which would occur if the isolator's
spring constant, ky, were infinitely rigid.
Using values for the amplification
factor A0 as determined in [3], and plotted for a range of values of damping
ratio, shock transmissibility can be determined for a damped system as
shown in Figure 19. The damping between mz and my is assumed to be
constant at one percent critical damping ( = 0.063). However, wide variations in the degree of damping have
little effect on the results. Figure 20
gives the amplification factor A0 for the
system shown in Figure 16 when the
support experiences velocity shock as
illustrated in Figure 17. The factor A0
is the ratio of the maximum acceleration of mass mz to the maximum acceleration of mass my.
60
50
40
20
30
ec
75
75
/s
10
50
in
20
15
10 0
0
15
in., (dotted lines)
6
5
0.1
Shock transmissibility (Ts)
( )
80
20
sy)0,
(16)
In the absence of damping, A0 is a function only of the element's natural frequency (fz) and the isolator's natural
frequency (fy). For an undamped system, shock transmissibility (Ts) is related to the amplification factor (A0) as
follows:
fy
Ts = A0 ____
fz
100
Maximum deflection of isolator (
z 0
A0 = ___
y 0
10
Maximum transmitted acceleration (y 0/g), (solid lines)

Maximum Transmitted Shock
The maximum acceleration experienced by the chassis of the mounted

equipment, as indicated in Figure 18,
should not be confused with the maximum acceleration experienced by various elements of the equipment. The
latter is equal to the product of the
maximum chassis acceleration y0 and
the amplification factor A0, which is defined as the ratio of the maximum acceleration of the element (z 0) to the
maximum acceleration of the chassis
(y 0) and is given by:
100
80
60
Damping ratio
for isolator
40
30
0.005
0.01
10
8
6
Damping ratio for

element mzkz = 0.01
0.05
1.00
0.10
4
3
0.50
2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.50
1.00
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
Natural frequency of element

Ratio
Natural frequency of isolator
Figure 20
( )
fz
fy
Amplification Factor for System Shown in Figure 16 When

Subjected to Velocity Shock as Illustrated in Figure 17
3.3.1 Shock Motion of Base (Base Suddenly Stops or Accelerates)

The time history of the sudden acceleration process of the base in Figure. 21(a) is shown in Figure 21(b). The analytical
results taken from [3] are also applicable to the object (equipment unit) dropping from a height onto a hard surface.
x
Velocity change of base
Object
c
Vibration
Isolator
Damping
constant
0
y
t
t
Time
0 y=0
0 y = Vt
Base
(b) Motion of Base
(a) System
Figure 21
If: V
c/ccr
fn
g
dmax
dst
amax
Vibration Isolation System for Object W (a) Subjected

to Shock Motion of Base with Time History (b)
= sudden velocity change of base, in/sec or m/sec

= /2 = damping ratio where is log decrement
= undamped natural frequency of system, Hz
= gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 = 9.81 m/sec2
= max. isolator deflection, measured from equilibrium position, in. or m
= static isolator deflection = W/k, in. or m
= maximum acceleration of object, in/sec2 or m/sec2
then, for 0 c/ccr 0.2 or 0 1.25,

dmax
amax
2fn(1 c/ccr)
_____
= _____ = ____________
dst
g
g
(18)
T1-16
Amplification factor (A0)
20
Figure 22 illustrates Equation (18). When the damping is small, maximum force transmitted to equipment
is very nearly kdmax.
4
= 0.2
= 1.26
= 0.1
= 0.63
3
V
g
=0
=0
Figure 22
3.3.2
dmax
a
= max
dst
g
Shock Effect at Different

Damping Values
Sudden Impact on Equipment [3]

I
Sudden impulse (large force Fo acting

over very short time (to): I = Foto).
x
Object
Impulse
Time
to
Vibration
Isolator
Damping
constant
Base
(b) SYSTEM
(a) FORCE TIME CURVE OF AN IMPULSE
Figure 23
Vibration Isolation System of Object W (b) Subjected

to Sudden Impact on the Object with Time History (a)
Sudden impact, or a sharp blow is characterized by a large force (Fo) acting for a short period of time (to) as shown in
Figure 23(a). For practical purposes, suddenness is taken to mean that to is small in comparison with the natural period of
vibration of the system in Figure 23(b). The impulse, I, is defined as the area under the force-time curve; i.e.,
I = Fo to lb-sec or kg m/sec
(19)
Application of impulse I results in a sudden downward velocity V of the object,

V = Ig/W.
(20)
The maximum isolator deflection and the maximum acceleration of the object can be obtained by substituting V into Equation
(18).
4.0
NONLINEARITIES
The equations previously given for transmissibilty (Section 3.1) make certain assumptions which may not always be
valid. For example, it is assumed that the damping is viscous or linear (resistance to relative motion is proportional to the
relative velocity). The assumption greatly simplifies the analysis. However, the damping provided by wire mesh is a combination of localized frictional losses by individual wires and hysteresis in the cushion itself. Damping in elastomeric materials has
similar characteristics. In practical terms, this means that the damping is a function of displacement in addition to velocity,
and the terms describing the damping in the equations of motion are nonlinear. At resonance, where the displacement is
large, the damping is high. In the isolation band, where displacement is small, the damping is negligible. This condition gives
the best of both worlds as damping is only desirable under resonance conditions. Thus, the idealized curves in Figure 10 are
on the conservative side since they show deterioration of isolation in the high frequency (after resonance) range.
T1-17
A second assumption is that the flexible members or mounts behave as linear springs. This again is not strictly true as
many mounts behave as hardening springs to a lesser or greater extent, depending on material of their flexible elements
(e.g., proportion of mesh cushion in the wire-mesh mounts) and/or on design features of rubber flexible elements. As the
term suggests, the stiffness increases with load/displacement. This property has the useful effect of increasing the dynamic
load-carrying capability of the mounts. Consider the Equation (3) for the natural frequency of a simple spring-mass system.
As can be seen, increasing the weight load (mass) of the isolated object reduces the natural frequency. But if the stiffness is
increasing as well (as in the case of a hardening spring) then the ratio k/m is less dependent on the mass of the object and
the mount can be used in a wider load range. Some vibration isolators are designed with their stiffness proportional to the
weight load,
k = AW = Amg,
(21)
1
fn = ___
2
kg
1
___
= ___
W
2
AWg
1
_____
= ___
W
2
Ag = const.
(22)
Accordingly, such vibration isolators are called CONSTANT NATURAL FREQUENCY (or CNF) ISOLATORS. This means
that a mount will give the same degree of isolation for a broad load range, with the ratio of upper load limit and lower load limit
up to and exceeding 20:1 [1]. An example of a CNF isolator is Ring Mount V10Z47M in this catalog.
Besides the convenience of using the same isolators for widely different objects, CNF isolators have many other advantages. The tolerance on stiffness of constant stiffness (linear) isolators with rubber flexible elements is usually about 17%.
Such wide tolerance leads to a need for greater safety factors in order to achieve the required degree of isolation, and thus
to softer isolators. The soft isolators are undesirable since they may result in a shaky installation. CNF isolators, on the other
hand, are very robust and variation of rubber hardness due to production tolerances do not influence the natural frequency
significantly [1]. Other advantages of CNF isolators are addressed below in Section 6.0.
The other way in which a stiffening spring affects the dynamic performance of a system is to make the natural frequency
a
a
"input sensitive". As the amplitude increases, so does the displacement. Consequently, that stiffness increases as well. The
natural frequency (fn) increases also. Figure 24 [5] shows a
comparison between the way frequency fn changes with amplitude for a linear spring (a) and a hardening spring (b). As can
be seen, with a hardening spring, fn increases with amplitude.
Without going into the mathematical treatment, it should be
fn
fn
0
0
appreciated that the actual responses for various inputs will be
(a)
(b)
as shown in Figure 25 [5]. It can be seen that the resonant point
Figure 24 Amplitude of Linear (a) and
actually changes with different inputs. A softening spring is added
Hardening (Nonlinear) (b)
for comparison.
Springs as a Function of fn
fn
(a) Hardening Spring
Figure 25
fn
(b) Linear Spring
fn
(c) Softening Spring
Typical Resonance Curves for Various Levels of Excitation
T1-18
where A is a proportionality constant. For such mounts the natural frequency is
Another property of mesh mounts is demonstrated by Figure 26 [5]. As can be seen, in practice there is a sudden sharp
drop from the resonant point, ensuring that isolation is achieved almost immediately. However, it is again safer to assume
that isolation does not begin until 2 fn is achieved.
Free vibration
"backbone"
Figure 26
5.0
Theoretical Frequency Response Curve for a Hardening Spring Type Resonant System
MULTIDEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS, COUPLED MODES
Figure 27 demonstrates that there are six independent ways in which a body can move; i.e., it has SIX DEGREES OF
FREEDOM. The reader must be aware from this that there is a potential of six independent natural frequencies, as well as
possible coupled modes of vibration.
Vertical
Yaw
Vertical
Roll
Pitch
Lateral
Figure 27
Fore and Aft or

Longitudinal
Degrees of Freedom of a Solid Body
T1-19
The hatched areas indicate

the region of instability.
x
y
T
Fx
m, I
kxky
Figure 28
kxky
Fy
Planar (Three-Degreesof-Freedom) Vibration

Isolation System
6.0
STATIC LOAD DISTRIBUTION CALCULATION

In order to calculate the weight distribution between the mounting points, the position of the CENTER OF GRAVITY
(C.G.) has to be determined first. It is a simple task only for an axisymmetrical object. Position of the C.G. can be obtained by
computation or experiment. The computational approach is feasible in most cases to the manufacturer who has all relevant
drawings containing the data on mass distribution inside the object. The experiment is suggested by the definition of the C.G.
as the point of support at which the body will be in equilibrium. For example, a small object can be supported on a peg; when
in equilibrium, a vertical line drawn through the peg will pass through the C.G. Unfortunately, this method is applicable only
to small objects. For large objects, such as machine tools, the object is mounted, for the C.G. location purposes, onto three
load cells LC1, LC2, LC3, as shown is the plane view in Figure 29. If the weight loads as sensed by these load cells are W1,
W2, W3, respectively, then coordinates of the C.G. are as follows:
X1W1 + X2W2 + X3W3
xC.G. = _________________
;
W1 + W2 + W3
y1W1 + y2W2 + y3W3

yC.G. = __________________
.
W1 + W2 + W3
(23)
After the C.G. position is known, weight distribution between the

mounting points should be calculated. Such a calculation can be
rigorously performed only for the case of an object with three mounting points (a statically-determinate problem). Unfortunately, only a
relatively small percentage of objects requiring vibration isolation
are designed with the "three point" mounting arrangement. If the
number of the mounting points is greater than three, the accuracy
of weight distribution calculations is suffering, unless the mounting
surface of the floor is flat and horizontal and the mounting surface
of the object is also flat. The tolerance on the "flatness" requirement
should be a small fraction of the projected static deformations xst of
the selected vibration isolators.
For example, if the vertical natural frequency of the isolated
object is fn = 20 Hz, then, from Equation (4), xst = 0.0625 cm or
0.625 mm.
Similarly, for fn = 10 Hz, xst = 2.5 mm, and
for fn = 5 Hz, xst = 10 mm.
T1-20
LC1
x1
LC3
xC.G.
C.G.
y1
x3
yC.G.
y2
y3
LC2
x
x2
Figure 29
Setup for Experimental

Finding of the C.G. Location
The coupling concept can be illustrated on the example of a simpler "planar" system shown in Figure 28, which shows a mass supported by springs and
constrained so that it can move only in the plane of the drawing [5]. Such a
system has three coordinates which fully describe its configuration: translational
coordinates x and y, and angular coordinate . If the system is symmetrical
about axis y, then when excited by a sinusoidal force Fy, in the vertical direction
along the axis of symmetry, the object will behave as previously shown (Figure
1), namely by vibrating in the vertical (y) direction. However, if the force vector
does not coincide with the axis of symmetry, then the vertical force would excite
vibratory motions not only in the y-direction, but also in x and directions. When
or longitudinal
the mass is excited by a horizontal force Fx, both horizontal (y)
mode and pitching () vibratory motions are excited. These modes are said to
be coupled when vibrations of one mode can be stimulated by a vibratory force
or displacement in another. Coupling modes are in most cases undesirable. For
example, many vibration-sensitive objects have the highest vibration sensitivity
in a horizontal direction, while the floor vibrations are often more intense in the
vertical direction. Coupling between the vertical and horizontal directions can
be avoided by using vibration isolating mounts at each mounting point whose
stiffness is proportional to the weight load acting on this mount (CNF mount) [1].
0.5
0.35
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
2
10
Figure 33
7.0
15
20
25
Frequency (Hz)
30
35
Amplitude of Relative Motion in Work Zone with: 1 - Regular (Linear) Isolators; 2 - CNF Isolators
CONNECTIONS OF SPRING ELEMENTS
7.1 Springs in Parallel

These combine like electrical resistance in series. This is the case when several springs
support a single load, as shown in Figure 34. The springs are equivalent to a single spring,
the spring constant of which is equal to the sum of the spring constants of the constituent
springs. The spring constant k of the single equivalent spring is given by:
k = k1 + k1 + k1.
k1
k2
k3
(27)
Figure 34
Parallel
Connection
of Springs
7.2 Springs in Series

The series connected springs in Figure 35 combine like electrical resistances in parallel.
The equivalent single spring is softer than any of the component springs. The spring constant k of the equivalent single spring is given by:
k1
1
1
1
__
= __ + __ .
k
k1
k2
(28)
If n springs are in series, this formula is readily extended to:

1
1
1
1
1
__
= __ + __ + __ + ..... + __ .
k
k1
k2
k3
kn
7.3 Spring Connected Partly in Parallel and Partly in Series

Obtain equivalent spring constants for each set of parallel or series springs separately
and then combine. For example, in Figure 36, the springs k1 and k2 are equivalent to a single
spring, the spring constant of which, ke1, is given by:
1
1
1
k1 + k2
___
= __ + __ = _______
ke1
k1
k2
k1k2
or
k2
(29)
k1k2
ke1 = ______
k1 + k2
Figure 35
(30a)
k1
The three springs, k3, k4, k5 in parallel, are equivalent to a single spring, the spring constant
of which, ke2, is given by:
ke2 = k3 + k4 + k5
k2
(30b)
Now equivalent springs ke1 and ke2 are in series. Hence, the spring constant k of the equivalent spring for the entire system is:
1
1
1
__
= ___ + ___
k
ke1
ke2
or
Series
Connection
of Springs
(k1k2)(k3 + k4 + k5)
k = ______________________
k1k2 + (k1 + k2)(k3 + k4+ k5)
T1-22
(30c)
k3
k4
Figure 36
k5
Mixed
Connection
of Springs
Relative Motion in Work Zone

Double Amplitude m
Hz. When the machine is installed on five linear isolators with rubber flexible elements selected in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, different for different mounting points (line 2, fn = 15 Hz), the maximum amplitude of the
relative vibrations (resulting in waviness of the ground surface) was 0.35 m. However, when the grinder was installed on
five indentical CNF isolators with rubber flexible elements (line 1, fn = 20 Hz, or about two times stiffer than the linear
isolators), the maximum relative vibration amplitudes was 0.25 m, about 30% lower.
8.0
3-D OBJECT DRIVEN BY VIBRATORY FORCE AND TORQUES
Figure 37 shows an object with its C.G. at C, mounted on 4 flexible mounts and acted upon by a disturbing harmonic
force Fy in the y-direction (vertical) and/or by torques, Tx, Ty and Tz acting singly or in combination about the x, y and z axes,
which are principal inertia axes passing through the C.G. (point C).
Ty
y
Fy
z
Tx
Tz
(x, y, z)
by
ky/4
ky/4
ky/4
bx
ky/4
bz
y
x
Figure 37
Solid Body on Vibration Isolators
The four mounts are symmetrically disposed relative to the C.G., their location defined by distances bx, by and bz from
the axes, as shown. The mass moments of inertia about the principal inertia axes are Ix, Iy and Iz, respectively. As a result of
the external force and torques, the object motion is (a) a displacement of C.G., maximum values of which are denoted by
translational motions of the C.G. (x, y, z) and (b) rotations of the object (from equilibrium) about the coordinate axes (x, y,
z). These displacements are generally small relative to the major dimensions of the object.
Let:
M =
ky =
ks =
mass of object (W/g where W is weight of the object, g = 386 in/sec2 = 9.8 m/sec2);
total vertical stiffness of the four supports in lb./in. or N/m; i.e., 4 times the stiffness of each support
if all four supports are identical
total horizontal or shear stiffness of the four supports; i.e., 4 times the horizontal stiffness of each
support, if all supports are identical and for each support kx = kz = ks, lb./in. or N/m;
angular frequency of sinusoidally applied force and torques (rad/sec)
Damping is assumed to be negligible.

8.1
Displacement of the Object
Due to Fy only:
Fy
y = ________
ky M2
(31)
Due to Tz only:
Tzbyks
x = _____________________________________
IzM4 2 (Izks + kybx2 M + ksby2 M) + kyksbx2
(32)
Tz(ks M2)
z = _____________________________________
IzM4 2 (Izks + kybx2 M + ksby2 M) + kyksbx2
(33)
T1-23
Due to Tx only:
Due to Ty only:
Txbyks
z = _____________________________________
IxM4 2 (Ixks + Mkybz2 + Mby2ks) + kyksbz2
(34)
Tx(ks M2)
x = _____________________________________
IxM4 2 (Ixks + Mkybz2 + Mby2ks) + kyksbz2
(35)
Ty
y = _________________
ks (bx2 + bz2) Iy2
(36)
In these equations Fy, Tx, Ty and Tz represent peak values of the corresponding applied force or torques.
Undamped Natural Frequencies
Source
Mode
Equation
Fy
Translation
along y-axis
ky
1 = ___
M
Tz
Rotation about
axes parallel to
z-axis
Tx
Ty
Rotation about
axes parallel to
x-axis
Rotation about
y-axis
(37)
2 =
kyksbx2
A A2 ______
I zM
(38)
3 =
kyksbx2
A + A2 ______
IzM
(39)
ks
kybx2 + ksby2
where A = ___ + __________
2M
2Iz
(40)
4 =
kyksbz2
B B2 ______
I xM
(41)
5 =
kyksbz2
B + B2 ______
IxM
(42)
ks
kybz2 + by2ks
where B = ___ + __________
2M
2Ix
(43)
ks(bx2 + bz2)
6 = __________
Iy
(44)
8.3 Mount Deflections

If the object motions in all coordinates are as expressed in 8.1 (x, y, z, x, y, z,) and if the coordinates of the mounting
point (vibration isolators) are (X, Y, Z) in the equilibrium position, then their deflections (X, Y, Z) from equilibrium due to
the applied force/torques are:
X = x zY + yZ
Y = y xZ + zX
Z = z yX + xY
(45)
provided the deflections are small relative to the object dimensions.

However, if the effects of more than one disturbing force/torque are to be combined, the corresponding deflections of
each mount must be combined vectorially, not be added algebraically, as in Equation (45).
General Comments
1. It is desirable to make sure that the disturbing forces and torques operate at frequencies sufficiently far removed
from the computed natural frequencies, so that resonance conditions are avoided.
2. The compliance of the vibration mounts in compression and shear should be such that their combined compliance
yields natural frequencies which are sufficiently lower than the frequencies of the disturbing forces and torques
(hopefully at least by a factor of 2.5).
T1-24
8.2
3. The displacements (max. deflections) of the mounts can be calculated from Equation (45) for any given single
disturbing force or torque. If several force/torques act simultaneously, vector addition of forces in different directions
is required, and Equation (45) cannot be used.
4. The case of a horizontal disturbing force has not been considered in this presentation.
5. Other things being equal, the best arrangement for the mounts is to arrange them so that their resultant force
passes through the center of gravity of the equipment and that its line of action is a principal axis. If there is a
resultant torque about the center of gravity, its direction should be about a principal axis through the center of
gravity. However, if this arrangement is impractical, it need not be adhered to.
COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES
When the disturbing forces are neither sinusoidal nor suddenly applied, the vibration analysis becomes more complicated. While it is more difficult to give general guidelines or methods of analysis, one can consider every force-time variation
as composed of components of different frequencies, each being a multiple of the basic (usually driving) frequency. Mathematically, this is known as expanding an arbitrary function into a Fourier series. Once these frequency components (harmonics) are determined, each one being sinusoidal at a different frequency, any component can be analyzed like a sinusoidal force. This can provide at least some understanding of the vibration phenomenon. Often the lowest-frequency (fundamental) component predominates and is the most important component to analyze. It is possible, however, that the design of
the vibration isolation system will appear unfeasible on the basis of an analysis of only the fundamental component, whereas
the exact analysis would show that a vibration isolation mounting can be useful; i.e., sometimes an analysis of components
of several frequencies may be required [1]. This, however, may be quite difficult. In such cases, resolving an arbitrary forcetime variation into several harmonics can provide some insight.
The following represents data in the Fourier series (decomposition into several harmonics) of some representative forcetime variations in Figure 38, which are neither sinusoidal nor sudden. Each force is assumed to be a periodic function of the
time;
= /T, where is pulse width, T is the process period;
= fundamental frequency.
The Fourier expansions for these forcing functions are given in Table 2.
y
h
Square wave
2h
h
y
h
Saw tooth
2h
h
2
y
Repeated step
2h
t
Figure 38
Typical Periodic Nonsinusoidal Vibratory Processes
T1-25
9.0
3. The displacements (max. deflections) of the mounts can be calculated from Equation (45) for any given single
disturbing force or torque. If several force/torques act simultaneously, vector addition of forces in different directions
is required, and Equation (45) cannot be used.
4. The case of a horizontal disturbing force has not been considered in this presentation.
5. Other things being equal, the best arrangement for the mounts is to arrange them so that their resultant force
passes through the center of gravity of the equipment and that its line of action is a principal axis. If there is a
resultant torque about the center of gravity, its direction should be about a principal axis through the center of
gravity. However, if this arrangement is impractical, it need not be adhered to.
COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES
When the disturbing forces are neither sinusoidal nor suddenly applied, the vibration analysis becomes more complicated. While it is more difficult to give general guidelines or methods of analysis, one can consider every force-time variation
as composed of components of different frequencies, each being a multiple of the basic (usually driving) frequency. Mathematically, this is known as expanding an arbitrary function into a Fourier series. Once these frequency components (harmonics) are determined, each one being sinusoidal at a different frequency, any component can be analyzed like a sinusoidal force. This can provide at least some understanding of the vibration phenomenon. Often the lowest-frequency (fundamental) component predominates and is the most important component to analyze. It is possible, however, that the design of
the vibration isolation system will appear unfeasible on the basis of an analysis of only the fundamental component, whereas
the exact analysis would show that a vibration isolation mounting can be useful; i.e., sometimes an analysis of components
of several frequencies may be required [1]. This, however, may be quite difficult. In such cases, resolving an arbitrary forcetime variation into several harmonics can provide some insight.
The following represents data in the Fourier series (decomposition into several harmonics) of some representative forcetime variations in Figure 38, which are neither sinusoidal nor sudden. Each force is assumed to be a periodic function of the
time;
= /T, where is pulse width, T is the process period;
= fundamental frequency.
The Fourier expansions for these forcing functions are given in Table 2.
y
h
Square wave
2h
h
y
h
Saw tooth
2h
h
2
y
Repeated step
2h
t
Figure 38
Typical Periodic Nonsinusoidal Vibratory Processes
T1-25
9.0
FOURIER EXPANSIONS FOR VIBRATORY PROCESSES IN FIGURE 38 (angles in radians)
Wave Shape Function
Harmonic Amplitude as Fractions of 2h ( = fundamental frequency)
Frequency of
Harmonics
2
2
___
1
___
2sin
______
Square wave
Saw tooth
Repeated steps
3
0
1
___
2
2sin 2
_______
2
4
2
___
3
1
___
3
2sin 3
_______
3
0
1
___
4
2sin 4
_______
4
5
2
___
5
1
___
5
2sin 5
_______
5
6
0
1
___
6
2sin 6
_______
6
To illustrate this approach in a particular case, let's consider a connecting-rod motion of a slider-crank mechanism,
Figure 39, as in internal-combustion engines. This motion can be shown to have the following Fourier expansion:
Connecting rod
r
Piston or slider
Crank
Figure 39
r =
=
=
x =
crank length, in.

connecting rod length, in.
crank angle, rad or deg.
piston placement (piston motion
in-line with crank pivot), in.
= crank speed, assumed constant,
rad/sec
a = piston acceleration, in/sec2
Schematic of a Slider-Crank Mechanism
x
1
1
1
__
= A0 + cos + __ A2 cos 2 __ A4 cos 4 + __ A6 cos 6 ...
r
4
16
36
(46)
a = cos + A cos 2 A cos 4 + A cos 6 ...

___
2
4
6
r2
(47)
where A2, A4, A6 are given as follows in Table 3 [4].

TABLE 3
10.0
COEFFICIENTS FOR FOURIER EXPANSION OF CONNECTING ROD MOTION

/r
A2
A4
A6
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.3431
0.2918
0.2540
0.2250
0.2020
0.0101
0.0062
0.0041
0.0028
0.0021
0.0003
0.0001
0.0001
DESIGN PROBLEM EXAMPLES
The following are a number of problems intended to familiarize the reader with the basic applications of vibration isolators. More advanced techniques which would result in stiffer isolators while achieving adequate isolation can be found in [1].
NOTE: In the following problems, unless otherwise stated, it is assumed that the loads are evenly distributed among the
mounting points.
T1-26
TABLE 2
Problem No. 2
Consider the tumbling unit of Problem No. 1 and suppose the motor speed were increased to 2500 rpm. What isolators
could be used, allowing loading both in shear and in compression?
From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, for a forcing frequency of 2500 cpm and 81% isolation, we find a static
deflection of about 0.037 in. Hence we must look for isolators with a load rating not less than 50 lbs and with a corresponding
deflection of not less than 0.037 in. The following mounts can be considered:
Load in Compression
V10Z 2-300C (0.078 in. deflection)
V10Z 2-317C (0.078 in.)
V10Z 2-310B (0.138 in.)
V10Z 2-314C (0.042 in.)
Load in Shear
V10Z 2-330B (0.14 in. deflection)
V10Z 2-311C (0.31 in.)
Amongst these, the highest percentage of isolation is afforded by the mount with the largest deflection (V10Z 2-311C),
provided that such a deflection is permissible.
Problem No. 3
A small business machine is to be mounted for 81% vibration isolation effieciency. The weight is 25 lbs and there are 4
mounting points. What additional information is required for the selection of the vibration isolation system?
Information which is needed is as follows: allowable vibration amplitudes of the machine, as a function of frequency;
frequency of disturbing force; direction and point of application of disturbing force; space limitations, if any; ambient conditions, if unusual; mass and compliance distribution of machine if not uniform.
Problem No. 4
A device contains 4 symmetrically located special-configuration isolators (Finger-Flex), Part Number V10R 4-1502D,
each isolator deflecting just over 0.07 in. at 20 lb load. In order to obtain satisfactory vibration isolation, it is desired to
increase the deflection from 0.07 in. to 0.14 in., the load remaining the same. How can this be done?
One way is to stack two (identical) mounts in series, see section 7.2, each of the four isolators being replaced by such a
set.
Problem No. 5
A unit which is to be mounted for 81% vibration isolation efficiency has a forcing frequency of 1500 cpm (25 Hz), weighs
1080 lbs and is to use 6 vibration isolators in shear. Isolators with a female tap are required. Select an isolator model.
The load per isolator is 1080/6 = 180 lbs. At 1500 cpm and 81% isolation effieciency, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12,
gives a static deflection of 0.10 in.
Isolator V10Z 2-308C loaded in shear has a deflection of about 0.13 in. at 180 lbs. This being in excess of 0.10 in., the
degree of isolation is certainly satisfactory. This model has a female tap.
Problem No. 6
A 275 lb motor is mounted with cylindrical isolators V10Z 2-311C loaded in shear at six points, the forcing frequency
being 1100 cpm (~ 18 Hz). What is the percentage of vibration isolation attained?
The load per isolator = 275/6 = 45.8 lbs, assuming mounts to be symmetrically located, so that load is evenly distributed.
From the design information furnished in the catalog, the shear deflection of the isolator at this load is ~ 0.28 in.
From Figure 12, the point of intersection of 0.28 in. static deflection and forcing frequency of 1100 cpm gives an isolation
efficiency of about 87%.
Problem No. 7
An air conditioner weighs 250 lbs and is driven by a motor at 1700 rpm. The unit is mounted in shear on four V10Z 2317B cylindrical isolators. Is this design satisfactory?
T1-27
Problem No. 1
A metal tumbling unit weighing 200 lbs and driven by a 950 rpm motor is to be mounted for at least 81% vibration
isolation effieciency from the tumbling drum and motor unbalance (one cycle per revolution, or 950 cpm) using 4 cylindrical
mounts in shear. Select the isolators.
The weight load per mounting is (1/4) x 200 lbs = 50 lbs. From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, a forcing frequency of
950 cpm (~ 16Hz) and 81% isolation lead to a point of intersection corresponding to a static deflection of 0.25 in.
Cylindrical mount Part Number V10Z 2-311C, loaded in shear, has a deflection 0.32 in. at 50 lbs. Since this deflection is
in excess of 0.25 in., the isolation will be greater than the design minimum. From the basic chart in Figure 12, it is seen to be
between 85-90%.
The isolated unit is not properly installed because the maximum load rating for this isolator, as indicated in the catalog,
is 21 lbs in shear and 40 lbs in compression. The load per mount is 250/4 = 62.5 lbs. Even if the isolator is installed so that
it is loaded in compression, it would not be satisfactory, since the load (62.5 lbs) is significantly in excess of the 40 lbs
recommended limit.
Mounts, which have sufficient load capacity, are as follows (with static deflection indicated):
Part Number
V10Z 2-310B (Compression)
V10Z 2-311C (Shear marginal)
V10Z 2-330B (Shear)
Static Deflection
(0.175 in.)
(0.38 in.)
(0.175 in.)
Problem No. 8
If, in the preceding problem, the air conditioner weighs 350 lbs, what is the choice of mounts?
The load/mount is 350/4 = 87.5 lbs. The following mounts can be considered (with static deflection indicated):
Part Number
V10Z 2-314C (Compression)
V10Z 2-311D (Compression)
V10Z 2-330B (Shear)
Static Deflection
(0.075 in.)
(0.094 in.)
(0.26 in.)
At 1750 cpm, 81% vibration isolation corresponds to a static deflection of 0.074 in.
Problem No. 9
A computer weighs 200 lbs. It is to be vibration isolated with 4 mounts. The forcing frequency is 1750 cpm (~ 29 Hz). If
the isolators are to be loaded in compression, what models are available and what is the percentage of vibration isolation
attained in each case?
The load per mount is 200/4 = 50 lbs. Hence, isolators with a load capacity of at least 50 lbs in compression are needed.
For each isolator, the catalog contains data (table or plots) from which static deflection under a 50 lb load can be found. From
the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, with this value of static deflection and a forcing frequency of 1750 cpm, the point of
intersection defines the attained vibration isolation efficiency. Thus, the following isolators can be selected:
Type of Mount
Cylindrical
Cylindrical
Cylindrical
Special (Finger-Flex)
Special (Finger-Flex)
Part Number
V10Z 2-317C
V10Z 2-300C
V10Z 2-310B
V10R 4-1506B
V10R 4-1506C
Static deflection, in.,

at 50 lb compression
0.078 in.
0.078 in.
0.138 in.
0.14 in.
0.09 in.
Isolation
Efficiency, %
82%
82%
91%
~ 91%
~ 85%
Problem No. 10
A 4-cylinder engine weighing 370 lbs and operating at 2800 rpm is to be isolated for 81% vibration isolation for one-perrevolution excitation frequency. Discuss the possible selection of isolators.
The lowest frequency to be isolated is 2800 cpm (~ 46.5 Hz). In general, it is desirable to arrange the mounts so that the
resultant of the loads, supported by the mounts, passes through the C.G. This is the same condition (but stated differently) as
the one described in Section 5.0 above. If the isolators are symmetrically arranged, and each isolator carries the same load,
this usually means that the symmetry axis of the isolators passes through the C.G. In this case, we are concerned not only
with the translational displacement of the engine as a whole, but also with engine rotation. In addition, flexible gas lines and
the throttle linkage can vibrate and their vibration isolation may pose an additional problem.
At 2800 cpm and 81% isolation efficiency, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, gives a static deflection of about 0.03 in.
The load is 370/4 = 92.5 lbs per mount.
Consider rectangular mount V10Z 6-500B loaded in shear. This has a deflection of about 0.12 in. in shear, which can
accommodate the rotation of the engine about the torque-roll axis. The mount deflection in compression would serve to
accommodate the shock load in translation.
T1-28
The choice of isolators depends (amongst other matters) on the degree of isolation desired. With any of the above
isolators, this will be in excess of 81% for the forcing frequency equal to motor rpm.
Problem No. 11
An 80 lb fan is to be vibration isolated in shear at four points with at least 93% vibration isolation efficiency when the fan
is turning at 2000 rpm. Specify the mounts.
The main source of vibration is rotor unbalance, and the transmission to ground of the vertical component of this force,
(which is sinusoidal) is undesirable (see [1] for isolation of other vibration components). Hence, consider Section 3.1, Equation (8), with negligible damping.
Solution #2: (Analytical)

When the isolation efficiency is 93%, the force transmissibility, F is 1 0.93 = 0.07 or 7%. With zero damping ( = 0),
Equation (8) gives for = 0:
1
F = __________
f2
1 ___
fn2
(48)
where F = 0.07;
"+" is to be used when f < fn, and
"" is to be used when f > fn.
Since for good isolation, f > fn, "" sign will be used.
Solving for f/fn from Equation (48), we obtain f/fn = 3.91.
Since f = 33.3 Hz, fn = 8.52 Hz.
From Equation (4), solving for xst = 0.344 cm = 0.136 in.
These calculations agree adequately with the values found from the chart in Figure 12.
Problem No. 12
Data as in problem 11, but damping is estimated at c/ccr = 0.1, see Section 2.4 above. How would it change the specifications?
The force transmissibility, F, corresponding to 93% vibration isolation efficiency, is 0.07 and the forcing frequency is
2000 cpm (33.3 Hz). From Figure 10, for damping ratio c/ccr = 0.1 at = 0.07, the frequency f/fn = ~ 5.
Hence, fn = 2000/5 = 400 cpm (~ 6.7 Hz).
From the basic chart, Figure 12, this natural frequency corresponds to a static deflection of ~ 0.21 in. Since the load
remains at 20 lbs per mount, the isolators specified for Problem 11 are too stiff. Isolator V10Z 2-310B loaded in shear
appears to be satisfactory (deflection ~ 0.33 in. at 20 lbs).
This problem could also have been solved by a computer program, or analytically. In the latter case, Equation (8) can be
solved for fn at the value c/ccr = 0.1, f = 33.3 Hz.
Comparison of Problems 11 and 12 shows that viscous damping in isolators results in increasing transmissibility at the
isolation frequency range (which starts from f/fn = 2 = 1.41); i.e., reducing effectiveness of isolation and requiring softer
isolators to get the desired efficiency. This is the price to pay for very desirable reduction of resonance amplitudes. When the
damping is not viscous but material damping, such as in isolators with rubber flexible elements, the deterioration of the high
frequency isolation is minimal.
Problem No. 13 A Vibroactive Object (Machine)
A small machine tool weighs between 3.5 lbs and 5 lbs depending on the weight of the work piece. When the forcing
frequency, which is generated by the vibration source inside the machine, is between 60-90 Hz. and again when it is within
200-400 Hz range, the vibration is objectionable. Design a vibration mount for a 3-point support with vibration isolation
efficiency of not less than 81%.
T1-29
Solution #1:
From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, 93% isolation at a forced frequency of 2000 cycles/minute (~ 33.3 Hz) corresponds to a static deflection of about 0.14 in. and to a natural frequency of about 500 cpm (~ 8.5 Hz).
Consider cylindrical vibration isolators, Part Number V10Z 2-300C loaded in shear, which deflects about 0.17 in. at 20
lbs and appears to be suitable for this application.
Problem No. 14 A Vibration/Shock Sensitive Object

Sensitive radio equipment is to be mounted with a 3-point suspension on a boat. Protection from engine disturbance is
required, as well as from impacts of waves and from bumping against pier. The equipment weighs 54 lbs and the engine runs
at 2000 rpm.
Here we have both steady vibrations at 2000 cycles/min as well as shock loads, caused by wave pounding and by
bumping against the dock. We have no precise information on the latter and need to do the best we can.
For the steady vibration, consider Equation (8) with zero damping which becomes Equation (48). At 81% efficiency and
forcing frequency of 2000 cycles/min, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, gives a static deflection of about 0.058 in. The load
per mount is 54/3 = 18 lbs. The natural frequency obtained from the chart is about 760 cycles/min = 12.7 Hz.
V10R 4-1504B ring-style special-configuration (Finger-Flex) mount approximately fulfills this condition.
In order to limit the effect of shock loads, conical bumpers may be added to limit the horizontal shock load, possibly with
the V10Z 7-1020C type.
It can, however, also be made an arbitrary guess and assumption that the pier and waves effects are equivalent approximately to a 0.5 mph sudden change of horizontal velocity of the boat and try to design the vibration mount for this condition.
This will provide some insight into how much of a sudden velocity can be expected to be cushioned by vibration mounting.
This corresponds to Section 3.3.1 of horizontal motion and negligible damping (c/ccr = 0).
It is also important to know how much force the sensitive radio equipment can take without damage. Often such a force
is expressed as a g-load; i.e., how many times its own weight the equipment can survive. For example, a 1/2 g-load means
that the object can withstand a maximum force of (1/2) (54) = 27 lbs without damage. Usually, the allowable shock loads are
determined by testing. Let's assume that the maximum safe load on the radio equipment is 1g or 54 lbs.
From Equation (15), Section 3.3.1, we have
amax
2fV
____
= _____ = 1,
g
g
where V = 0.5 mph = 8.8 in/sec = 0.22 m/sec. Hence, f = 7 Hz.
This frequency is quite low, and associated with undesirably large deflections of vibration isolators. This suggests using
a cylindrical mount loaded in compression for the vertical (engine) vibrations and having reasonably large compliance in the
horizontal (shear) mode to take care of some of the shock, with a conical bumper to limit excessive horizontal deflections.
For example, cylindrical mount V10Z 2-300A has 0.075 in. deflection at 20 lbs compressive load, while in shear, the
deflection at 16 lbs is about 0.32 in., or six times as much. This is an overload, but might still be considered due to the
infrequent occurences of the shock load.
The natural frequency in the shear mode based on the 16 lb load is about 5.7 Hz, which is 20% lower than the 7 Hz
specified above.
dmax
amax
From Equation (18), ____ = ____ = 1, thus dmax = 0.32 in. Note that dmax is computed as if the weight were supported
dst
g
in shear.
This is too large a maximum deflection. A conical bumper should be used to limit the deflection by 0.20 in., say. Alternatively, a stronger and stiffer mount should be considered, for example, V10Z 2-300B, which deflects 0.26 in. at 18 lbs in
shear. The isolation effectiveness in compression is reduced to about 65%; and while the isolation ratio in shear is also
reduced, so is the corresponding maximum deflection. In addition, the conical bumpers should be added. The final choice of
mounts is a matter of judgment.
Problem No. 15
A single-cylinder gasoline engine drives a one-cylinder air compressor with belt. Both units are bolted to a light-gage
metal pan, which is welded to the top of an air-receiver tank, which is in turn mounted to a four-wheel steel-tired dolly. The
whole unit vibrates and walks all over the floor. The engine weighs 100 lbs and turns at 3000 rpm. The compressor weighs
120 lbs and turns at 1200 rpm. The tank weighs 25 lbs and the dolly weighs 50 lbs. What can be done?
T1-30
In the absence of more information, we may assume that isolators have zero damping. If we isolate for the lowest
objectionable forced frequency (60 Hz), that would take care of all the troublesome regions.
From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, an 81% isolation ratio at a forced frequency of 60 Hz corresponds to a static
deflection of about 0.019 in. The weight supported by each mounting ranges from 3.5/3 lbs to 5/3 lbs, or from 1.17 to 1.67 lbs.
The natural frequency is read off from the chart at about 23 Hz. Hence, the vibration mount specification is:
0.019 in. deflection
1.17 lbs to 1.67 lbs supported weight.
Square mount V10Z 1-321B loaded in compression is a possibility. Considering the special configuration (Finger-Flex)
mounts, Part Number V10R 4-1500A can be selected. Its deflection at 1.17 lbs is only about 0.03 in. In view of its construction, the spring rate of this mount increases rapidly with deflection and the special configuration unit would be both more
economical in the use of space and more effective in taking care of overloads, if this should arise.
Possibly good rubber tires on the dolly and/or wheel suspension would help. If the tank is mounted to the dolly, total
weight is:
The lowest-frequency disturbing force is that due to the air compressor; i.e., 1200 cycles/min = 20 Hz. At 81% vibration
isolation efficiency, Figure 12 gives a static deflection of the isolator of about 0.15 in. Considering a 4-mount suspension, the
load per mount is 74 lbs.
Cylindrical mount V10Z 2-310B would be a possibility, loaded in compression. If the dolly continues to move, since it
weighs only 50 lbs, it might require a little softer material than the 40-durometer rubber, in order to effect more isolation.
Next, consider mounting on isolators the pan that holds the engine and air-compressor unit. The total weight here is 100
+ 220 lbs and with the same static deflection of 0.15 in., a V10Z 2-310A mount would suffice in compression, considering the
fact that the chart shows the V10Z 2-310B mounts to deflect 0.12 in. at 55 lbs. The lower-durometer mount (Type A, at 30durometer) should, therefore, approximate the 0.15 in. required deflection. Note that the last letter in the mount identification
specifies the approximate durometer hardness of the rubber (A = 30, B = 40, C = 50).
Problem No. 16 Isolation of a Punch Press (also see [1]).
This is one of the most difficult applications for isolation. Shock absorption is all that can be expected. Unit weighs 1500
lbs, sits on four feet, operates at 50-100 rpm, and is driven by a 5 H.P., 1750 rpm electric motor, the flywheel turning at 250
rpm.
While many vibration problems deal with sinusoidal or nearly sinusoidal forces and some (such as in package cushioning) deal with essentially sudden velocity changes, here we have a suddenly applied force, which is periodic, but not harmonic. The force-time variation is essentially that of the "Repeated Step" in Section 9.0.
If we assume that the punching operation of the press occurs, say, during 30 of crank rotation, then the in this case
(Repeated Step, Section 9.0) is 30/360 = 1/12 = 0.08333. From Section 9.0, we find that the amplitude of the fundamental
harmonic is (2/) sin or 0.164. This is only about 16% of the amplitude of the force pulse, and its frequency is operating
frequency (50-100 rpm or 0.85 - 1.7 Hz).
Consider, however, the 4th harmonic (200-400 cycles/min). Its amplitude is (2 sin 4)/4 = .1376 or 13.8%. This is not
much less than the amplitude of the basic (fundamental) frequency. This shows that in the punch-press type of disturbing
force, the higher harmonics cannot be neglected.
The fundamental frequency (50-100 cycles/min) is so low that isolation with vibration isolation mounts would lead to their
excessive static deflections. However, it is conceivable that a practical vibration isolator would be successful in isolating
some of the significant higher harmonics. For vibration isolation of punch presses, the following few rules might be useful
(also see [1]).
1. Slow-speed presses should be mounted with mounts of greater deflection than high-speed presses.
2. Mount deflections used for presses by direct installation of vibration isolation mounts under their feet may vary
from 1/32 in. to 3/4 in. depending largely on operating speed and stroke length, with the smaller deflection being
the more common.
3. There may be several static deflections that will work, while other static deflections interspaced in between them
will not work; i.e., 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. may work, while 1/8 in. may not work. This can be caused, at least in part,
by the fact that a significant set of higher harmonics may be isolated at one deflection, but not at another.
4. Even the best mounting system will still transmit a significant amount of vibration and shock.
5. If the ultimate in isolation is required, the punch press must be attached solidly to an inertia block of large mass
and the entire press and the block mounted on vibration isolators.
Problem No. 17
A relatively high-precision experiment is to be conducted in the laboratory of a textile plant. The laboratory floor vibrates
at an amplitude of 0.0005 in. due to the operation of industrial sewing machines and other textile machinery. The basic floorvibration frequencies are that excited by the industrial sewing machines, which operate in the 1500-5000 rpm range. It is
desired to vibration isolate the test unit, which weighs 25 lbs, with a four-point mounting at not less than 81% isolation of
displacement.
At 81% displacement isolation, the displacement transmissibility, x is 0.19. It is calculated using the same equations (8)
and (48) as for F.
For zero damping, Equation (48) gives:
1
F = ________
f2
1 ___
f2n
)
T1-31
W = 100 + 120 + 75 = 295 lbs.
Problem No. 18
Data as in Problem 17, except that system damping is estimated at 10% of critical ( = ~ 0.63). Reevaluate the specification of the isolators.
In Problem 17, we found that the displacement transmissibility corresponding to 81% isolation is x = 0.19; and that the
lowest forcing frequency, f = 1500 cycles/min. = 10 Hz. From Figure 10, p.T1-11, which applies to x as well as to F, we find
that the given value of the transmissibility at = ~ 0.63 yields a frequency ratio f/fn = ~ 2.7. Hence, fn = 1500/2.7 = ~ 9 Hz.
At this natural frequency, the basic vibration chart (Figure 12) gives a static deflection of about 0.117 in. The load per
mount, as in Problem 17, is 6.25 lbs.
The isolator specification V10Z 2-316B of Problem 17 remains satisfactory.
Problem No. 19
An impact testing machine consists of a simple pendulum of length 4 feet and weight 5 lbs, which is initially horizontal. It
is released and at the bottom of its swing impacts the test object. In this test, it comes to rest essentially instantaneously
(inelastic impact). The object (equipment to be tested) weighs 100 lbs and is capable of withstanding accelerations up to 2g.
Design a vibration isolation/mounting system so that the equipment will survive the impact test.
The velocity aquired by the pendulum in the 4 foot drop is
Vo =
2gh, = 193 in/sec (striking velocity), where g = 386 in/sec2; h = 4 ft. x 12 = 48 in.
The momentum of the pendulum just prior to impact is equal to the impulse "I" applied to the object. It is equal to the mass of
the pendulum times its velocity,
5
I = ____ x 193, or 2.5 lb-sec.
386
If the pendulum retains a residual velocity Vp' just after striking the test object, "I" would be computed from
I = (Vp Vp') x (mass of pendulum).
The impact result is an essentially sudden velocity change by V1, of the equipment, which, can be calculated from Equation
(20) as:
Ig
V = ___ in/sec.
W
(2.5) (386)
= _______ in./sec. = 9.65 in./sec.
100
This value of V can be used in Equation (15), or
2fV
d
amax
max
____
= ____ = _____
dst
g
g
with amax = 2g and V = 9.65 in./sec. Then fn = g/V = 1.35 Hz.
Realization of such low natural frequency (albeit, in a horizontal direction; less destabalizing than in the vertical direction)
is a very special problem. It can be addressed by utilizing information in [1].
Problem No. 20 Vibration Isolation of High Precision Object
Formulate requirements for vibration isolation system (fn and ) for a projection aligner for semiconductor manufacturing
for two conditions:
T1-32
Taking f as the lowest sewing-machine speed (1500 cycles/min or 25 Hz) and F = 0.19, we find fn = 600 cycles/min = 10 Hz.
The static deflection of the vibration isolators is determined from Equation (4), as xst = 0.25 cm = 0.1 in. The same result can
be obtained from Figure 12. The isolation specification, therefore, is 0.10 in. static deflection at a load of 25/4 = 6.25 lbs.
Considering cylindrical vibration isolators, mount V10Z 2-316B loaded in shear, has a 0.10 in. deflection at about 6.25
lbs. Soft mounts, such as this one, are often using shear deformation of the flexible elements.
A - the apparatus is installed on the floor of a regular manufacturing plant so that for vertical direction Xf(f) = const = 3.0 m
200
30 m for frequencies
for frequencies 3 ~ 30 Hz and Xf(f) = 3.0 ___
f
100
f > 30 Hz; for the horizontal direction Xf(f) = const = 2.5 m for
Vibration sensitivity of this apparatus to vertical and horizontal vibration of its frame (base) was experimentally determined
and shown in Figure 40. These plots show what amplitude of
vibration Xb at the given frequency results in a relative vibration
amplitude in the working zone (image motion) not exceeding the
tolerated amplitude o = 0.1 m. The minima on these plots represent structural natural frequencies of the devices. At each frequency f, transmissibility from the base to the work zone is f =
o/Xb.
Since the vibration sensitivity f of this precision object is
known (can be easily calculated from the experimentally obtained
plots in Figure 40) then Expression (12b) can be used for specifying vibration isolation parameters.
Table 4 gives the values of f (o divided by the ordinate of
the plot in Figure 40 for a given frequency) calculated for critical
points from the plots in Figure 40 for vertical and horizontal directions, respectively.
Table 4 also contains values of Av and Ah calculated for
these points using Equation (12b) and vertical and horizontal
floor vibration amplitudes specified in A.
TABLE 4
f Hz
11
12
20
25
30
32
41
70
f Hz
7
12
22
65
70
100
10
1
v = 125 microns/sec
5000 micro-inch/sec
0.1
10
30 50 100
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 40
Vibration Sensitivity for

Projection Aligner
Perkin-Elmer Microlign Mod. 341
for 0.1 m Image Motion
(Solid Line - Limit of Vertical Floor
Vibration Amplitude, Broken Line Limit of Horizontal Floor Vibration
Amplitude).
VIBRATION ISOLATION SYNTHESIS FOR FIGURE 40

A. Vertical Direction (Y-axis)
(f)
Av Hz
Bv Hz
0.0083
4.51
12.9
0.010
12.3
36.6
0.087
7.0
26.9
0.0091
26.9
116
0.056
13.0
61
0.303
6.3
29.7
0.05
22.5
106
0.0077
128
601
B. Horizontal Direction (X-axis)
Ah Hz
(f)
0.0033
13.7
0.05
6.05
0.125
22.3
0.071
49.6
0.090
49.2
0.090
84
T1-33
200 300
Bh Hz
23.1
37.5
78
174
172
294
B - floor vibration levels corresponding to line VC-B in Figure

15 (both for vertical and horizontal directions).
30
Base Displacement in Micron (rms)
20
frequencies 2 ~ 20 Hz, and Xf(f) = 2.5 ___ m for frequencies
f
f > 20 Hz.
References
[1] Rivin, E.I., Passive Vibration Isolation, ASME Press, N.Y., 2003
[2] Crede Ch. E., Vibration And Shock Isolation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, Chapter Three, 1951
[3] Mindlin, R.D., "Dynamics of Package Cushioning", Bell System Technical Journal, Vol. XXIV,
Nos. 3-4, July-October, 1945
[4] Hirschhorn, J., Kinematics and Dynamics of Plane Mechanisms, McGraw-Hill, 1962
[5] C.M.T. Wells Kelo Ltd., A Commercial Guide to Shock And Vibration Isolation, Sept 1982,
First Amendment, May 1983.
T1-34
The values of Bv and Bh were calculated using floor vibration levels corresponding to line VC-B in Figure 15 (both for
vertical and horizontal directions). Since plots in Figure 15 are given for vibratory velocity Vf, vibration displacement amplitudes Xf were calculated for each frequency of interest as Xf = Vf/2f.
Values of A calculated per Specification A are interesting only for comparison, since high precision microelectronic
production equipment is never used in conventional plant facilities, only in specially designed buildings complying with some
of VC criteria.
It can be seen from Table 4A that the lowest value of Av (case A) for vertical direction is 4.51 Hz. If vibration isolators
with medium damping = 0.6 are used, then from Equation (12a) the required vertical natural frequency fv = 4.51 0.6 =
3.04 Hz. However, if isolators made of rubber with high damping = 1.2 are used, then fv = 4.51 1.2 = 5.0 Hz, which can
be realized by passive isolators with soft rubber flexible elements.
Much stiffer isolators (fvz > 14 Hz) can be used to comply with values of Bv, per Specification B, which represent
(according to not very stringent requirement VC-B) floor conditions at the microelectronics industry installations.
A similar situation is seen in Table 4B; however, realization of natural frequencies corresponding to Bh (4.7 Hz for =
0.6, 6.63 Hz for = 1.2) in horizontal directions with elastomeric isolators does not present any difficulty; even much lower
values can be easily realized.
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Appendix 1 Useful Formulas in Vibration Analysis

Natural Frequency
k
1
____
= ____
m
2
kg
1
____
= ____
W
2
g
____
xst
1
fn = ____
2
where fn = natural frequency in cycles-per-second (Hz)

k = spring constant (lbs/in, N/m)
m = mass of load (lb mass, kg mass)
g = gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 or 9.8 m/sec2
W = weight of load, m g (lb or N)
xst = static deflectionof the spring (in or m)
3.13
188
fn ____ cycles/sec = ____ cycles/min if xst is in inch
xst
xst
5
300
____ cycles/sec = ____ cycles/min if xst is in cm
xst
xst
Damped Natural Frequency
fdn = fn
( )
c
___
ccr
= fn
1 2
______
42
where = 2 (c/ccr) = log (An/An-1) logarithmic decrement

c = damping constant (lb-sec/in or N-sec/m)
ccr = critical damping constant = 2 km
An = nth amplitude of vibration
Natural Frequency of Torsional Vibrations
1
ft = ___
2
kt
___
I
where kt = torsional stiffness (lb-in/rad or N-m/rad)

I
= polar mass moment of inertia (lb-in-sec2 or kg-m2)

(continued)
T1-35
Appendix 1 (continued)
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Transmissibility
2
( )
) ( )
mf
F = x = ______
m + mf
f
1 + __ __
fn
____________________
f2 2 __
f 2
1 ___
+ __
2
fn
fn
F = force transmissibility
x = motion transmissibility
m = mass of load
mf = mass of base (foundation)
For mf = :
F < 1 for f
1.41 fn
For mf = and o (negligible damping):
1
F = __________
f2
1 ___
fn2
At resonance (f/fn = 1), with some damping:

mf

___
(F)max = (x)max ______
m + mf
T1-36
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Appendix 2 Properties of Rubber and Plastic Materials

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FIVE STANDARD STRUCTURAL RUBBER COMPOUNDS

R-325-BFK
Shear modules, lb per sq in.

Logarithmic decrement of amplitude *
(referred to base 10)
Successive amplitude ratio *
Percent energy loss due to hysteresis,
per cycle of vibration
Specific heat
Thermal conductivity in B.T.U., per sq ft
per hr for a temp gradient of 1F per in.
thickness
Velocity of sound in rubber rods, ft per sec
R-430-BFK
50
R-530-BFK
70
R-630-BFK
95
R-725-BFK
140
195
.041
.055
.14
.23
.35
.91
.88
.72
.59
.45
17
22
65
47
80
.47
.43
.40
.38
.35
.97
1.04
1.08
1.15
1.26
115
165
345
210
750
* The logarithmic decrement given here represents the negative of the power to which 10 must be raised in order to obtain
the ratio of any two consecutive amplitudes (on the same side of zero deflection) as unexcited vibration dies out. For
instance, if the logarithmic decrement is 0.2, the ratio of one amplitude to the preceding one is
1
1
10-0.2 = _____ = _____ = 0.631 = successive amplitude ratio.
100.2
1.585
(Ordinarily, logarithmic decrement is referred to natural logarithm base e, and if such values are required, they would be
2.30 times the values given here.)
** Table from U.S. Rubber Engineering Guide #850 p. 25
COMPARATIVE PROPERTIES OF RUBBER AND RELATED MATERIALS

SAE Abbreviation
Butyl
HR
Ethylene
Propylene
EPT
Cost Relative to Natural Rubber

Tensile of Compounded Stocks
Durometer
Elongation
Aging
Heat Aging
Sunlight Aging
Lubricating Oil Resistance
Aromatic Oil Resistance
Animal-Vegetable Oils Resistance
Flame Resistance
Tear Resistance
Abrasion Resistance
Compression Set Resistance
Permeability to Gases
Dielectric Strength
Freedom from Odor
Maximum Temperature (F)
Minimum Temperature (F)
110%
2000 psi
40-75
fair
excellent
excellent
good
poor
poor
excellent
poor
good
good
fair
very low
good
good
250
-50
110%
3000 psi
30-100
good
excellent
excellent
excellent
poor
poor
poor
poor
good
good
fair
good
good
fair
300
-50
Natural
Hypalon
Rubber
CSM
NR
150%
3000 psi
55-95
fair
excellent
good
excellent
good
poor
good
excellent
excellent
excellent
good
good
good
excellent
250
-50
100%
3500 psi
30-90
excellent
good
good
poor
poor
poor
fair
poor
good
excellent
good
fair
excellent
excellent
210
-65
T1-37
Neoprene
(Chloroprene)
CR
Nitrol
(GR-A)
NBR
Styrene
FlouroSilicone Butadiene Urethane Elastomer
(GR-S)
SI
PU
(Viton)
SBR
HK
110%
3000 psi
30-90
excellent
excellent
very good
good
good
fair
excellent
good
good
excellent
fair
low
fair
good
260
-50
125%
2500 psi
40-95
good
excellent
excellent
poor
excellent
good
good
poor
fair
good
good
fair
poor
fair
260
-60
850%
800 psi
45-85
fair
excellent
excellent
good
fair
poor
good
fair
poor
poor
fair
fair
good
fair
600
-150
85%
2500 psi
40-90
good
good
good
poor
poor
poor
fair
poor
fair
good
fair
fair
excellent
fair
215
-60
450%
8000 psi
65-95
good
excellent
excellent
excellent
good
good
fair
poor
excellent
excellent
excellent
good
fair
good
250
-60
2000%
2000 psi
50-90
good
excellent
excellent
excellent
good
good
good
good
fair
fair
good
excellent
good
fair
500
-40
Compound Numbers**
CO
M PONENT
ADVA
N
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Appendix 3 Hardness Conversion Charts

FOR RUBBER AND PLASTICS
DUROMETER PLASTOMETER CONVERSION CHART*
100
TYPES
90
80
70
Durometer Scale
60
50
A
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
B
85
81
76
71
66
62
56
51
47
42
37
32
27
22
17
12
6
C
77
70
59
52
47
42
37
32
28
24
20
17
14
12
9
D
55
46
39
33
29
25
22
19
16
14
12
10
8
7
8
OO
84
79
75
72
69
65
61
57
53
48
42
35
28
21
14
8
98
97
95
94
93
91
90
88
86
83
80
76
70
62
55
45
A DURO.
40
B DURO.
30
20
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Plastometer Scale
Conversions Are Approximate Values Dependent on Grades and Conditions of Materials Involved
*Courtesy of Shore Mfg. Co., New York
Durometer Hardness of Some Rubber Compounds
Hardness (Shore A)
ASTM Designation
Load Rating
30
40
50
60
70
R-325-BFK
R-430-BFK
R-530-BFK
R-630-BFK
R-725-BFK
A
B
C
D
T1-38
Durometer
Conversions
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Technical Section: Shaft Couplings

Table of Contents
1.0 INTRODUCTION
3.0 GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF COUPLINGS AND THEIR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

3.1
Rigid Couplings ........................................................................................................................................... T2-4
3.2
Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ...................................................................................................... T2-5
3.2.1 Selection Criterion for Frictional Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ................................... T2-5
3.2.1a Oldham Couplings ............................................................................................................ T2-5
3.2.1b Universal or U-joints ......................................................................................................... T2-6
3.2.1b.1 General ............................................................................................................ T2-6
3.2.1b.2 Kinematics ....................................................................................................... T2-7
Example 1: Determining the Maximum Inertia Torque ................................................................ T2-7
3.2.1b.3 Joint Selection (Torque Rating) ........................................................................ T2-9
Example 2: Universal Joint Selection for Continuous Operation ................................................ T2-9
Example 3: Universal Joint Selection for Intermittent Operation with Shock Loading ................ T2-9
Example 4: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft ................................................ T2-9
3.2.1b.4
Secondary Couples ........................................................................................ T2-10
3.2.1b.5
Joints in Series ............................................................................................... T2-10
Example 5: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft in a Series .............................. T2-10
Example 6 ....................................................................................................................................... T2-11
3.2.2 Selection Criterion for Misalignment-Compensating Couplings with
Elastic Connectors ....................................................................................................................... T2-11
3.2.2.1 Designs of Elastic Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ............................................. T2-11
3.3
Torsionally Flexible Couplings and Combination Purpose Couplings .......................................................... T2-12
3.3.1 Torsionally Flexible Couplings ..................................................................................................... T2-12
3.3.2 Combination Purpose Couplings ................................................................................................. T2-13
3.3.2.1 Miscellaneous Combination Purpose Couplings .............................................................. T2-15
3.3.2.1a Flexible Shafts ................................................................................................. T2-15
3.3.2.1b Uniflex Couplings ............................................................................................. T2-15
3.3.2.1c Jaw and Spider Couplings ............................................................................... T2-16
3.3.2.1d Sleeve Type Couplings (Geargrip) ................................................................... T2-17
4.0 REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................................................... T2-17
T2-1
2.0 APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.1
Torque and Horsepower .............................................................................................................................. T2-2
2.2
Shaft Misalignment ......................................................................................................................................T2-2
2.3
Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Couplings ..................................................................................................... T2-3
2.4
Torsional Flexibility ....................................................................................................................................... T2-3
2.5
Backlash ..................................................................................................................................................... T2-3
2.6
Rotational Velocity Error .............................................................................................................................. T2-3
2.7
Service Conditions ....................................................................................................................................... T2-3
1.0
INTRODUCTION
A coupling is a design component intended to connect shafts of two mechanical units, such as an electric motor and a
hydraulic pump or compressor driven by this motor, etc. As stated in the Resolution of the First International Conference on
Flexible Couplings [1, 3], "...a flexible coupling, although it is relatively small and cheap compared to the machines it connects, is a critical aspect of any shaft system and a good deal of attention must be paid to its choice at the design stage." The
following is a brief engineering data on couplings. More details are available in [1, 3].
The application considerations for couplings are numerous. The most important are the following:
Torque and Horsepower
Allowable Shaft Misalignment
Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Coupling
Torsional Flexibility
Backlash
Rotational Velocity Error
Service Conditions
2.0 APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS
Flexible couplings are designed to accommodate various types of load conditions. No one type of coupling can provide
the universal solution to all coupling problems; hence many designs are available, each possessing construction features to
accommodate one or more types of application requirements. Successful coupling selection requires a clear understanding
of application conditions. The major factors governing coupling selection are discussed below.
2.1
NT
63,000
rp
m
25
00
rpm
00
0
18
where N = rotational speed in rpm and T= torque in lb. in. This relationship is graphically represented in Figure 1.
Shaft Misalignment
Shaft misalignment can be due to unavoidable tolerance build-ups in a
mechanism or intentionally produced to fulfill a specific function. Various types
of misalignment, as they are defined in AGMA Standard 510.02, are shown
in Figure 2.
HP =
36
NT
HP = ______
63,000
HORSEPOWER
Torque and Horsepower

The strength of a coupling is defined as its ability to transmit a required
torque load, frequently in combination with other factors.
Hence, a coupling may be selected whose rated torque capacity is many
times greater than needed. For example, in a coupling subject to wear and
increasing backlash, a useful torque rating would depend chiefly on backlash limitations rather than strength. For manually operated drives, the torque
imposed through improper handling may be in excess of the drive torque
required. Couplings are frequently specified in horsepower capacity at various speeds.
Horsepower is a function of torque and speed, and it can be readily determined from the formula:
0r
pm
1/2
1/3
1/4
2.2
T2-2
0 4
12
25 28
40
50
TORQUE lb. in.
Figure 1
Relationship Between
Horsepower, Torque and
Rotational Speed
A>B
Alignment
B
Nonsymmetrical
Angular Misalignment
Parallel Offset or Lateral

Misalignment
A=B
Y
A
Combined Angular-Offset
Misalignment
Symmetrical Angular
Misalignment
Figure 2
Various Types of Shaft Misalignment
2.3
Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Couplings

Lateral and axial flexibility of couplings are factors frequently overlooked. The term flexible does not mean that the
coupling gives complete freedom of relative movement between the coupled shafts. More properly, flexible couplings give a
limited freedom of the relative movement. Some forces are needed to make a flexible coupling flex. These forces are either
lateral (at right angles to the shafts), or axial, or a combination of both. Lateral forces may produce a bending moment on the
shafts and a radial load on the shaft support bearings. Axial force can produce undesirable thrust loads if not considered in
the original design. Universal Cardan joints and Oldham couplings impose friction-generated lateral loads on the bearings.
The elastomeric types of couplings will produce lateral forces in proportion to their stiffness. These issues are addressed
below in Section 3.0.
Torsional Flexibility
Torsional flexibility of a coupling is the torsional (twisting) elastic deformation induced in a flexible coupling while transmitting torque. In some applications using encoders, it may be essential that the torsional flexibility be very low so as not to
introduce reading errors caused by the angular displacements. On the other hand, torsional deflection may be desirable for
reducing torque oscillations and peak torques in driving high inertia and/or dynamic loads.
2.5
Backlash
Backlash is the amount of rotational play inherent in flexible couplings which utilize moving parts. In some applications,
this "slack" may not be objectionable, but in an application in servo-controlled systems, such as described in the previous
paragraph, backlash would rule out couplings of this type.
2.6
Rotational Velocity Error

In addition to the types of error already described, universal joints produce an error because of their kinematic behavior.
If the input speed into a single universal joint is held constant, then the output will produce cyclic fluctuations in direct relation
to the operating angles of the input and output shafts. This will be described more fully in the section dealing with Universal
Joints.
2.7
Service Conditions
Service conditions encompass factors such as temperature, operating medium, lubrication, accessibility for maintenance, etc., and should be reviewed before a final selection is made.
3.0
GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF COUPLINGS AND THEIR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Couplings play various roles in machine transmissions. According to their role in transmissions, couplings can be divided
into four classes:
1. Rigid Couplings. These couplings are used for rigid connection of precisely aligned shafts. Besides torque, they also
transmit bending moment and shear force if any misalignment is present, as well as axial force. The three latter factors may
cause substantial extra loading of the shaft bearings. The principal areas of application: long shafting; very tight space
preventing use of misalignment-compensating or torsionally flexible couplings; inadequate durability and/or reliability of
other types of couplings.
T2-3
2.4
2. Misalignment-Compensating Couplings. Such couplings are required for connecting two members of a power-transmission or motion-transmission system that are not perfectly aligned. "Misalignment" means that components that are coaxial by design are not actually coaxial, due either to assembly errors or to deformations of subunits and/or their foundations,
Figure 2. The latter factor is of substantial importance for transmission systems on nonrigid foundations.
If the misaligned shafts are rigidly connected, this leads to elastic deformations of the shafts, and thus to dynamic loads
on bearings, vibrations, increased friction losses in power transmission systems, and unwanted friction forces in motion
transmission, especially in control systems.
Misalignment-compensating couplings are used to reduce the effects of imperfect alignment by allowing nonrestricted or
partially restricted motion between the connected shaft ends. Similar coupling designs are sometimes used to change
bending natural frequencies/modes of long shafts.
When only misalignment compensation is required, rigidity in torsional direction is usually a positive factor, otherwise the
dynamic characteristics of the transmission system might be distorted. To achieve high torsional rigidity together with high
mobility/compliance in misalignment directions (radial or parallel offset, axial, angular), torsional and misalignment-compensating displacements in the coupling have to be separated by using an intermediate compensating member. Frequently,
torsionally rigid "misalignment-compensating" couplings, such as gear couplings, are referred to in the trade literature as
"flexible" couplings.
3. Torsionally Flexible Couplings. Such couplings are used to change the dynamic characteristics of a transmission
system, such as natural frequency, damping and character/degree of nonlinearity. The change is desirable or necessary
when severe torsional vibrations are likely to develop in the transmission system, leading to dynamic overloads in powertransmission systems.
Torsionally flexible couplings usually demonstrate high torsional compliance to enhance their influence on transmission
dynamics.
4. Combination Purpose Couplings are required to possess both compensating ability and torsional flexibility. The majority of the commercially available connecting couplings belong to this group.
Rigid Couplings
Typical rigid couplings are shown in Figure 3. Usually, such a coupling comprises a sleeve fitting snugly on the connected shafts and positively connected with each shaft by pins, Figure 3a, or by keys, Figure 3b. Sometimes two sleeves are
used, each positively attached to one of the shafts and connected between themselves using flanges, Figure 3c. Yet another
popular embodiment is the design in Figure 3d wherein the sleeve is split longitudinally and "cradles" the connected shafts.
(b)
(a)
(d)
(c)
Figure 3
Examples of Rigid Couplings
T2-4
3.1
3.2
Misalignment-Compensating Couplings
Misalignment-compensating couplings have to reduce forces caused by an
imperfect alignment of connected rotating members (shafts). Since components
which are designed to transmit higher payloads can usually tolerate higher misalignment-caused loads, a ratio between the load generated in the basic misalignment direction (radial or angular) to the payload (rated torque or tangential
force) seems to be a natural design criterion for purely misalignment-compensating couplings.
All known designs of misalignment-compensating (torsionally rigid) couplings are characterized by the presence of an intermediate (floating) member
located between the hubs attached to the shafts being connected. The floating
member has mobility relative to both hubs. The compensating member can be
solid or composed of several links. There are two basic design subclasses:
(2a) Couplings in which the displacements between the hubs and the compensating member have a frictional character (examples: Oldham coupling, Figure 4; universal Cardan Joint, Figure 5; gear coupling, Figure 6.)
(2b) Couplings in which the displacements are due to elastic deformations
in special elastic connectors (e.g., "K" Type Flexible Coupling, Figure 7).
Selection Criterion for Frictional Misalignment-Compensating
Couplings
For Subclass (2a) couplings designed for compensating the offset misalignment, the radial force Fcom acting from one hub to another and caused by misalignment, is a friction force equal to the product of friction coefficient and
tangential force Ft at an effective radius Ref, Ft = T/Ref, where T is transmitted
torque,
FLOATING
MEMBER
90
Figure 4
SPIDER
Oldham Coupling
TRUNNION
3.2.1
T
Fcom = Ft = ____
Ref
YOKE
YOKE
Figure 5
Universal Cardan Joint
Since motions between the hubs and the compensating member are of a "stickslip" character, with very short displacements alternating with stoppages and
reversals, might be assumed to be the static friction coefficient.
When the rated torque Tr is transmitted, then the selection criterion is
Fcom
____
= ____
Tr
Ref
(2)
or the ratio representing the selection criterion does not depend on the amount
of misalignment; lower friction and/or larger effective radius would lead to lower
forces on bearings of the connected shafts.
Similar conclusion stands for couplings compensating angular misalignments
(Cardan joints or universal, or simply, U-joints). While U-joints with rolling friction (usually, needle) bearings have low friction coefficient, for U-joints with
sliding friction can be significant if the lubrication system is not properly designed and maintained.
Figure 6
Gear Coupling
3.2.1a Oldham Couplings

Oldham couplings consist of three members. A floating member is trapped
by 90 displaced grooves between the two outer members which connect to the
drive shafts, as shown in Figure 4.
Oldham couplings can accommodate lateral shaft misalignments up to 10%
of nominal shaft diameters and up to 3 angular misalignments.
Figure 7
T2-5
K-Type Elastomeric
Coupling/Joint
(1)
Lubrication is a problem but can, in most applications, be overcome by choosing a coupling that uses a wear-resistant
plastic in place of steel or bronze floating members.
Some advantages of Oldham couplings:
High torsional stiffness;
No velocity variation as with universal joints;
Substantial lateral misalignments possible;
High torque capacity for a given size;
Ease of disassembly.
Shortcomings of Oldham couplings:
Limited angular misalignment of shafts;
Need for lubrication due to relative sliding motion with stoppages, unless wear-resistant plastic is employed;
Nylon coupling has reduced torque capacity;
Significant backlash due to initial clearances for thermal expansion and inevitable wear;
Are not suitable for small misalignments;
Suitable only for relatively slow-speed transmissions;
Possible loss of loose members during disassembly.
Oldham couplings with rubber-metal laminated bearings [1] have all the advantages of the generic Oldham couplings
without their shortcomings.
Universal or U-joints [2]
3.2.1b.1 General
A universal joint, Figure 5, is a positive, mechanical connection between rotating shafts, which are not parallel, but
intersecting. It is used to transmit motion, power, or both. It is also called the Cardan joint or Hooke joint. It consists of two
yokes, one on each shaft, connected by a cross-shaped intermediate member called the spider having four trunnions providing for rotatable connections with the yokes. The angle between the two shafts is called the operating angle. It is generally,
but not always, constant during operation. Good design practice calls for low operating angles, often less than 25, depending on the application. Independent of this guideline, mechanical interference in the U-joint designs often limits the operating
angle to a maximum (usually about 37.5), depending on its proportions.
Typical applications of U-joints include aircraft, appliances, control mechanisms, electronics, instrumentation, medical
and optical devices, ordnance, radio, sewing machines, textile machinery and tool drives.
U-joints are available with steel or plastic major components. Steel U-joints have maximum load-carrying capacity for a
given size. U-joints with plastic body members are used in light industrial applications in which their self-lubricating feature,
light weight, negligible backlash, corrosion resistance and capability for high-speed operation are significant advantages.
Recently developed U-joint designs with rubber-metal laminated bearings [1, 3] have even higher torque capacity and/or
smaller sizes allowing for higher-speed operation, and can be preloaded without increasing friction losses, thus completely
eliminating backlash. These designs do not require lubrication and sealing against contamination.
Constant velocity or ball-jointed universals are also available. These are used for high-speed operation and for carrying
large torques. They are available in both miniature and standard sizes.
Motion transmitted through a U-joint becomes nonuniform. The angular velocity ratio between input and output shafts
varies cyclically (two cycles per one revolution of the input shaft). This fluctuation, creating angular accelerations and increasing with the increasing angular misalignment, can be as much as 15% at 30 misalignment. Effects of such fluctuations on static torque, inertia torque, and overall system performance should be kept in mind during the transmission design.
This nonuniformity can be eliminated (canceled) by using two connected in series and appropriately phased U-joints,
Figure 8. While the output velocity becomes uniform, angular velocity fluctuation of the intermediate shaft cannot be avoided.
INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT
'
= '
INPUT
SHAFT
Figure 8
Two U-Joints in Series
OUTPUT
SHAFT
Two U-joints in series can be used for coupling two laterally displaced (misaligned) shafts, while the single joint can only
connect the angularly-misaligned shafts.
T2-6
3.2.1b
Advantages of a single U-joint:

Low side thrust on bearings;
Large angular misalignments are possible;
High torsional stiffness;
High torque capacity.
Shortcomings of a single U-joint:
Velocity and acceleration fluctuations, especially for large misalignments;
Lubrication is required to reduce friction and wear;
Protection from contamination (sealing) is required;
Shafts must be precisely located in one plane;
Backlash is difficult to control;
Static friction is increasing at very low misalignment (freezing), thus sometimes requiring an
artificial misalignment in the assembly.
Example 1: Determining the Maximum Inertia Torque

A U-joint operates at 250 rpm with an operating angle = 10. Find the maximum angular displacement lead (or lag),
maximum and minimum angular velocity of output shaft and maximum angular acceleration of output shaft.
If the system drives an inertial load so that the total inertial load seen by the output shaft (its own inertia and inertia of
associated massive rotating bodies) can be represented by a steel circular disc attached to the output shaft (radius r = 3 in.,
thickness t = 1/4 in.), find the maximum inertia torque of the drive.
From Table 1 at = 10, the maximum displacement lead/lag = 0.439 = 26.3'. The maximum and minimum angular
velocity ratios are given as 1.0154 and 0.9848, respectively. Hence, the corresponding output shaft speeds are:
max = (250)(1.0154) = 254 rpm;
min (250)(0.9848) = 246 rpm;
According to Table 1, the maximum angular acceleration ratio is
max/2 = 0.0306 for = 10.
= [(250) (2)] / (60) rad/sec = 26.18 rad/sec.
Hence, max = (0.0306)(26.18)2 = 21.0 rad/sec2. The weight, W, of the disc is given by W = r2 t , where denotes the
density of steel and is equal to 0.283 lb/in3.
T2-7
Variation of Angular Velocity

of Driven Shaft, %
3.2.1b.2 Kinematics
Due to the velocity fluctuations, the angular displacements of the
+15
= 20
output shaft do not precisely follow those of the input shaft, but lead or
+10
= 30
lag, also with two cycles per revolution. The angular velocity variation is
+5
shown in Figure 9 for several operating (misalignment) angles . The
0
peak values of the displacement lead/lag, of input/output angular velocity ratio, and of angular acceleration ratio for different are given in
= 10
-5
Table 1 [2]. As a qualitative guideline, for small , up to ~10, the devia-10
tions (errors) for maximum lead/lag angular displacements, for maxi-15
mum deviations of angular velocity ratios from unity, and for maximum
0
45
90
135
180
angular acceleration ratios are nearly proportional to the square of .
Angular Rotation of Driving Shaft, deg
The static torque transmitted by the output shaft is equal to the
Figure 9 Angular Velocity
product of the input torque and the angular velocity ratio.
Variations in U-Joint
The angular acceleration generates inertia torque and vibrations.
The total transmitted torque is a sum of inertia torque (the product of the
angular acceleration and the mass moment of inertia of the output shaft and masses associated with it) and the nominal
output torque.
The inertia torque often determines the ultimate speed limit of the joint. The recommended speed limits vary depending
on , on transmitted power, and on the nature of the transmission system. Recommended peak angular accelerations of the
driven shaft vary from 300 rad/sec2 to over 2000 rad/sec2 in power drives. In light instrument drives, the allowable angular
accelerations may be higher. For an accurate determination of the allowable speed, a stress analysis is necessary.
TABLE 1
THE EFFECT OF SHAFT ANGLE () ON SINGLE UNIVERSAL

JOINT PERFORMANCE FOR CONSTANT INPUT SPEED*
Maximum Angular
Acceleration Ratio =
Operating Angle
Between Shafts
() Deg.
Maximum Load or Lag

of Output Shaft
Displacement (), Deg.
Relative to Input
Shaft Displacement
Maximum Angular
Velocity Ratio
Minimum Angular
Velocity Ratio
(max)
(min)
0.000
0.004
0.017
0.039
0.070
0.109
0.157
0.214
0.280
0.355
0.439
0.531
0.633
0.744
0.864
0.993
1.132
1.280
1.437
1.605
1.782
1.969
2.165
3.372
2.590
2.817
3.055
3.304
3.564
3.835
4.117
4.411
4.716
5.034
5.363
5.705
6.060
6.428
6.809
7.204
7.613
1.0000
1.0002
1.0006
1.0014
1.0024
1.0038
1.0055
1.0075
1.0098
1.0125
1.0154
1.0187
1.0223
1.0263
1.0306
1.0353
1.0403
1.0457
1.0515
1.0576
1.0642
1.0711
1.0785
1.0864
1.0946
1.1034
1.1126
1.1223
1.1326
1.1434
1.1547
1.1666
1.1792
1.1924
1.2062
1.2208
1.2361
1.2521
1.2690
1.2868
1.3054
1.0000
0.9998
0.9994
0.9986
0.9976
0.9962
0.9945
0.9925
0.9903
0.9877
0.9848
0.9816
0.9781
0.9744
0.9703
0.9859
0.9613
0.9563
0.9511
0.9455
0.9397
0.9336
0.9272
0.9205
0.9135
0.9063
0.8988
0.8910
0.8829
0.8746
0.8660
0.8572
0.8480
0.8387
0.8290
0.8192
0.8090
0.7986
0.7880
0.7771
0.7660
max
_____
, where max =
r
Maximum Angular
Acceleration of Output
Shaft; = Angular
Velocity of Input Shaft,
0.0000
0.0003
0.0012
0.0027
0.0049
0.0076
0.0110
0.0150
0.0196
0.0248
0.0306
0.0371
0.0442
0.0520
0.0604
0.0694
0.0792
0.0896
0.1007
0.1125
0.1250
0.1382
0.1522
0.1670
0.1826
0.1990
0.2162
0.2344
0.2535
0.2735
0.2946
0.3167
0.3400
0.3644
0.3902
0.4172
0.4457
0.4758
0.5074
0.5409
0.5762
*Reproduced with the permission of Design News from "The Analytical Design of Universal Joints" by S.J. Baranyi, Design News, Sept. 1, 1969
W = (3)2 (0.25) (0.283) = 2 lb.
Inertia torque = Imax, where I = polar mass moment of inertia of disc (lb. in. sec2),
I = Wr2 / 2g,
where g = gravitational constant = 386 in/sec2.
Hence, I = [(2) (3)2] / [(2)(386)] = 0.0233 lb. in. sec2.
Inertia torque = (21.0) (0.0233) = 0.489 lb. in. This inertia torque is a momentary maximum. The inertia torque fluctuates
cyclically at two cycles per shaft revolution, oscillating between plus and minus 0.489 lb. in.
When system vibrations and resonances are important, it may be required to determine the harmonic content (Fourier
series development) of the output shaft displacement as a function of the displacement of the input shaft. The amplitude of
the mth harmonic (m > 1) vanishes for odd values of m, while for even values of m it is equal to (2/m) (tan 1/2)m, where
denotes the operating angle.
T2-8
rad/sec.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3.2.1b.3 Joint Selection (Torque Rating)

The torque capacity of the universal joint is a function of speed, operating angle and service conditions. Table 2 shows
use factors based on speed and operating angle for two service conditions: intermittent operation (say, operation for less
than 15 minutes, usually governed by necessity for heat dissipation) and continuous operation.
TABLE 2
USE FACTORS FOR THE TORQUE RATING OF UNIVERSAL JOINTS
Intermittant Running Conditions

Speed
Angle of Operation - Degrees
rpm
1800
1500
1200
900
600
300
100
Continuous Running Conditions

Speed
Angle of Operation - Degrees
rpm
10
15
20
25
30
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
20
16
13
11
8
5
4
34
28
22
16
11
7
4
45
39
32
23
15
8
5
40
34
22
11
6
34
16
8
40
22
9
28
11
34
12
1800
1500
1200
900
600
300
100
10
15
20
25
30
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
40
32
26
21
15
10
7
68
55
44
32
22
14
8
90
78
64
46
30
16
10
80
68
44
22
12
68
32
15
80
44
18
55
22
68
24
Example 2: Universal Joint Selection for Continuous Operation

A single universal joint is to transmit a continuously acting torque of 15 lb. in., while operating at an angle of 15 and at
a speed of 600 rpm. Select a suitable joint.
From Table 2 for continuous operation, the use factor is given as 68. Note that there are blank spaces in the Table. If the
combination of operating angle and speed results in a blank entry in the Table, this combination should be avoided. The
required torque is (68) (15) = 1020 lb. in. There is no shock load and the dynamic factor of 2 does not apply in this case.
From the SDP/SI catalog, it is seen that there are two joints meeting this specification: A 5Q 8-D500 and A 5Q 8-D516,
both with a torque capacity of 1176 lb. in. The first has a solid-shaft construction and the second a bored construction. The
choice depends on the application.
Example 3: Universal Joint Selection for Intermittent Operation with Shock Loading
A single universal joint is to transmit 1/8 horsepower at 300 rpm at an operating angle of 15. Select a suitable joint for
intermittent operation with shock loading.
Here we make use of the equation:
Torque = Horsepower x 63,025/300 lb. in.
Hence, operating torque = (0.125)(63,025)/300 = 26.3 lb. in. From Table 2, for intermittent loads (300 rpm, 15), the use
factor is 16. Due to shock loading, there should be an additional dynamic factor of 2. Therefore, the rated torque = (26.3) (16)
(2) = 842 lb. in. Thus, the same joints found in the previous example are usable in this case.
Example 4: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft
A universal joint is rated at 250 lb. in., and operates at an angle of 12, driving a rotating mass, which can be represented
(together with the inertia of the driven shaft) by a steel, circular disc, radius r = 6", thickness t = 1/2", attached to the driven
shaft. How fast can the input shaft turn if the inertia torque is not to exceed 50% of rated torque?
From Table 1, for = 12, we have max/2 = 0.0442. The weight, W, of the disc is W = r2 t , where denotes the
density of steel which is 0.283 lb. in3.
T2-9
The torque capacity of a single Cardan joint of standard steel construction is determined as follows:
i. From the required speed (rpm), operating angle in degrees, and service condition (intermittent or continuous), find
the corresponding use factor from Table 2.
ii. Multiply the required torque, which is to be transmitted by the input shaft, by the use factor. If the application involves
a significant amount of shock loading, multiply by an additional dynamic factor of 2. The result must be less than the static
breaking torque of the joint.
iii. Refer to the torque capacity column in the product catalog and select a suitable joint having a torque capacity not less
than the figure computed in (ii) above.
If a significant amount of power is to be transmitted and/or the speed is high, it is desirable to keep the shaft operating
angle below 15. For manual operation, operating angles up to 30 may be permissible.
Thus W = (6)2(0.5) (0.283) = 16 lb. The polar mass moment of inertia, I, of the disc is given by
I = Wr2 / 2g = (16)(6)2 / (2)(386) = 0.746 lb. in. sec2.
The inertia torque = Imax = 50% of 250 lb. in. = 125 lb. in. Since Imax = (max / 2) (2I) = (0.0442)(0.746) 2 = 125, 2 =
125 / 0.03297 = 3790.96 or = 61.6 rad/sec = (61.6)(60) / 2 = 588 rpm.
Hence, if the inertia torque is not to exceed its limit, the maximum speed of the input shaft is 588 rpm. For joints made
with thermoplastic material, consult the SDP/SI catalog, which contains design charts for the torque rating of such joints.
3.2.1b.4 Secondary Couples
In designing support bearings for the shafts of a U-joint and in determining vibrational characteristics of the driven
system, it is useful to keep in mind the so-called secondary couples or rocking torques, which occur in universal joints. These
are rocking couples in the planes of the yokes, which tend to bend the two shafts and rock them about their bearings. The
bearings are thus cyclically loaded at the rate of two cycles per shaft revolution. The maximum values of the rocking torques
are as follows:
Maximum rocking torque on input shaft = Tintan;
Maximum rocking torque on output shaft = Tinsin,
3.2.1b.5 Joints in Series

As mentioned in paragraph 3.2.1b.1, universal joints can be used in series in order to eliminate velocity fluctuations, to
connect offset (nonintersecting) shafts, or both. Figure 8 shows a schematic of such an arrangement.
In order to obtain a constant angular-velocity ratio (1:1) between input and output shafts, a proper phasing of the joints is
required. This phasing can be described as follows: two Cardan joints in series will transmit a constant angular velocity ratio
(1:1) between two intersecting or nonintersecting shafts (see Figure 8), provided that the angle between the connected
shafts and the intermediate shaft are equal ( = '), and that when yoke 1 lies in the plane of the input and intermediate
shafts, yoke 2 lies in the plane of the intermediate shaft and the output shaft.
If shafts 1 and 3 intersect, yokes 1 and 2 are coplanar.
When the above phasing has been realized, torsional and inertial excitation is reduced to minimum. However, inertia
excitation will inevitably remain in the intermediate shaft, because this shaft has the angular acceleration of the output shaft
of a single U-joint (the first of the two joints in series). It is for this reason that guidelines exist limiting the maximum angular
accelerations of the intermediate shaft. Depending on the application, values between 300 rad/sec2 and values in excess of
1000 rad/sec2 have been advocated. In light industrial drives, the allowable speed may be higher. For an accurate determination of allowable speed, a stress analysis is necessary.
Example 5: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft in a Series
In a drive consisting ot two universal joints in series, phased so as to produce a constant (1:1) angular velocity ratio
between input and output shafts, the angle between the intermediate shaft and input (and output) shaft is 20. If the maximum angular acceleration of the intermediate shaft is not to exceed 1000 rad/sec2, what is the upper limit of the speed of the
input shaft?
From Table 1, with = 20, we find max/2 = 0.1250.
Since max = 1000 rad/sec2,
2 = (max) / (0.1250) = (1000) / 0.1250) = 8000 rad/sec2.
Hence, = 8000 = 89.4 rad/sec = (89.4)(60) / 2 = 854 rpm.
T2-10
where Tin denotes the torque transmitted by the input shaft and the operating angle. These couples are always 180 out of
phase. The bearing force induced by these couples is equal to magnitude of the rocking couple divided by the distance
between shaft bearings.
For example, if the input torque, Tin is 1000 lb. in. and the operating angle is 20, while the distance between support
bearings on each shaft is 6 in., the maximum secondary couple acting on the input shaft is (1000) (tan 20) = 364 lb. in. and
on the output shaft it is (1000) (sin 20) = 342 lb. in. The radial bearing load on each bearing of the input shaft is 364/6 = 60.7
lb. and it is 342/6 = 57 lb. for each bearing of the output shaft. The bearings should be selected accordingly.
It has been observed also that due to the double frequency of these torques, the critical speeds associated with universal
drives may be reduced by up to 50% of the value calculated by the standard formulas for the critical speeds of rotating shafts.
The exact percentage is a complex function of system design and operating conditions.
Hence, the speed of the input shaft should not exceed 854 rpm. When the joint angle is less than or equal to 10, Figure
10 can be used to compute the maximum speed or the maximum angular acceleration for a given input speed.
4500
4000
20
3500
00
ra
d/
14
se
c2
10 00
00
70
50 0
0
N, rpm
3000
2500
30
0
2000
10
1500
25
1000
500
0
MAXIMUM ANGULAR ACCELERATION

5
10
- Joint Angle, deg
Figure 10
Maximum Angular Acceleration (rad/sec2) of Output Shaft of Single

U-Joint vs. Input Speed (rpm) and Operating Angle (degrees)
3.2.2 Selection Criterion for Misalignment-Compensating Couplings with Elastic Connectors

For this class of couplings, assuming linearity of the elastic connectors,
Fcom = kcome,
(3)
where e is misalignment value, kcom = combined stiffness of the elastic connectors in the direction of compensation. In this
case,
kcom
Fcom
_____
= _____ e.
Tr
Tr
(4)
Unlike couplings from Subclass (2a), Subclass (2b) (see p. T2-5) couplings develop the same radial force for a given misalignment regardless of transmitted torque, thus they are more effective for larger Tr. Of course, lower stiffness of the elastic
connectors would lead to lower radial forces.
3.2.2.1 Designs of Elastic Misalignment-Compensating Couplings
Designs of Oldham couplings and U-joints with elastic connectors using high-performance thin-layered rubber-metal
laminates are described in [1, 3].
K-Type flexible coupling, Figure 7, is kinematically similar to both Oldham coupling and to U-joint. By substituting an
elastomeric member in place of the conventional spider and yoke of U-joint or the floating member of Oldham coupling, in
construction such as in the design shown in Figure 7, backlash is eliminated. Lubrication is no longer a consideration
because there are no moving parts and a fairly large amount of lateral misalignment can be accommodated. The illustrated
coupling is available in the product section of this catalog. Please refer to Figure 11 for specific design data for four sizes of
this type coupling. Figure 11b indicates that this coupling has high durability even with a combination of large lateral (offset)
and large angular misalignments.
T2-11
Example 6
Same as problem 5, except operating angle is 10. Here we can use Figure 10. The intersection of = 10 and the 1000
rad/sec2 curve yields N 1800 rpm. Hence, the speed of the input shaft should not exceed 1800 rpm. A more exact
calculation, as in Example 5, yields N = 1726 rpm. For practical purposes, however, the value obtained from Figure 10 is
entirely satisfactory.
A 5Z 7-10606
thru 11212
A 5Z 7-31212
thru 31616
A 5Z 7-20808
thru 21616
A 5Z 7-41616
45
40
Horsepower
With Combined
15 Angular & 1/8
Parallel Offset Misalignment
Torque, lb. in.
rp
00
25
36
00
r
pm
35
pm
0r
0
18
1/2
1/3
1/4
30
25
15
10
With Combined
10 Angular & 3/32
5
0 4
12
25 28
40
50
With Combined
15 Angular & 1/8
With Combined
15 Angular & 3/16
20
0
0
Torque, lb. in.
Hours Life in Thousands
(a) Rated Horsepower/

Torque for Various rpm
(b) Service Life as a Function of Angular and Offset

Misalignments for K-Type Couplings
Figure 11
Torsionally Flexible Couplings and Combination Purpose Couplings [3]

These two classes of couplings are usually represented by the same designs. However, in some cases only torsional
properties are required, in other cases both torsional and compensation properties are important and, most frequently, these
coupling designs are used as the cheapest available and users cannot determine what is important for their applications.
Accordingly, it is of interest to look at what design parameters are important for various applications.
3.3.1 Torsionally Flexible Couplings
Torsionally flexible couplings are used in transmission systems when there is a danger of developing resonance conditions and/or transient dynamic overloads. Their influence on transmission dynamics can be due to one or more of the
following factors:
Reduction of Torsional Stiffness and, Consequently, Shift of Natural Frequencies.

If resonance condition occurs before installation (or change) of the coupling, then shifting of the natural frequency can
eliminate resonance; thus dynamic loads and torsional vibrations will be substantially reduced.
Increasing Effective Damping Capacity of a Transmission by Using Coupling Material with
High Internal Damping or Special Dampers.
When the damping of a system is increased without changing its torsional stiffness, the amplitudes of torsional vibrations
are reduced at resonance and in the near-resonance zone. Increased damping is especially advisable when there is a wide
frequency spectrum of disturbances acting on a drive; more specifically, for the drives of universal machines.
Introducing Nonlinearity into the Transmission System.
If the coupling has a nonlinear "torque-angular deformation" characteristic and its stiffness is much lower then stiffness
of the transmission into which it is installed, then the whole transmission acquires a nonlinear torque-angular deflection
characteristic. A nonlinear dynamic system becomes automatically detuned away from resonance at a fixed-frequency excitation, the more so the greater the relative change of the overall stiffness of the system on the torsional deflection equal to the
vibration amplitude.
Introducing Additional Rotational Inertia in the Transmission System.
This is a secondary effect since couplings are not conventionally used as flywheels. However, when a large coupling is
used, this effect has to be considered.
Realizing the above listed effects of a properly selected torsionally-flexible coupling requires a thorough dynamic analysis of the transmission system.
T2-12
3.3
3.3.2 Combination Purpose Couplings

Combination purpose couplings do not have a special compensating (floating) member. As a result, compensation of misalignment is accomplished, at least partially, by the same mode(s)
of deformation of the flexible element which are called forth by
the transmitted payload.
The ratio of radial (compensating) stiffness kcom and torsional
stiffness ktor of a combination purpose flexible coupling can be
represented as [1,3]
(a)
Jaw (Spider) Coupling
(5)
where Rex is external radius of the coupling. The "Coupling Design Index" A (Figure 13f) allows one to select a coupling design
better suited to a specific application. If the main purpose is to
reduce misalignment-caused loading of the connected shafts and
their bearings, for a given value of torsional stiffness, then the
lowest value of A is the best, together with large external radius.
If the main purpose is to modify the dynamic characteristics of
the transmission, then minimization of ktor is important.
Some combination purpose couplings are shown in Figure
12. The "modified spider" coupling (Figure 12b) is different from
the conventional spider (jaw) coupling shown schematically in
Figure 12a by four features: legs of the rubber spider are tapered, instead of staight; legs are made thicker even in the smallest cross section, at the expense of reduced thickness of bosses
on the hubs; lips
on the edges provide additional space for
bulging of the rubber when legs are compressed, thus reducing
stiffness; the spider is made from a very soft rubber. All these
features lead to substantially reduced torsional and radial
stiffnesses while retaining small size, which is characteristic for
spider couplings.
Plots in Figure 13 (a-d) give data for some widely used couplings on such basic parameters as torsional stiffness ktor, radial
stiffness kcom, external diameter Dex, and flywheel moment WD2
(W is weight of the coupling). Plots in Figure 13 (e-f) give derivative information: ratio kcom / ktor, and design index A. All these
parameters are plotted as functions of the rated torque.
Data for "toroid shell" couplings in Figure 13 are for the coupling as shown in Figure 12 (c) (there are many design modifications of toroid shell couplings). The "jaw coupling" for T = 7 Nm in
Figure 13 (f) (lowest torque point on jaw coupling line) has a fourlegged spider (z = 4), while all larger sizes have z = 6 or 8. This
explains differences in A (A 1.9 for z = 4, but A = 1.0 ~ 1.3 for z
= 6,8). Values of A are quite consistent for a given type of coupling. The variations can be explained by differences in design
proportions and rubber blends between the sizes.
Using plots in Figure 13, one can more easily select a coupling type whose stiffnesses, inertia, and diameter are best suited
for a particular application. These plots, however, do not address
issues of damping and nonlinearity. Damping can be easily modified by the coupling manufacturer by a proper selection of the
elastomer. As shown previously, high damping is very beneficial
for transmission dynamics, and may even reduce thermal exposure of the coupling, as shown in [1,3]. More complex is the issue of nonlinear characteristics; a highly nonlinear (and very compact) coupling based on radial compression of cylindrical rubber
elements is described in [1]. Couplings represented in Figure 13
are linear or only slightly nonlinear.
T2-13
(b)
Modified Spider Coupling

( - lip providing bulging
space for the rubber element)
(c)
(d)
Toroid Shell Coupling
Sleeve Coupling (Geargrip)
TAP
(e)
Figure 12
Uniflex Coupling
Combination Purpose Couplings
A
kcom
_____
= _____ ,
ktor
Rex2
4
3
2
10
8
104
8
4
Nm2 3
2
10-1
8
+
x
+
x
103
10-3
8
5
ktor 4
Nm 3
rad
2
x+
+
x
4
3
2
x
+
WD2
5
4
3
2
x
x
4
4 5
8 10
20 30 40 50 80 100
Rated Torque, Nm
200 300 400
(d) Flywheel Moment
102
8
x
5
4
3
2
x
4 5
81.0
2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 100

Rated Torque, Nm
200 300 500
(a) Torsional Stiffness
+
103
8
5
4
3
kcom
ktor
5
4
3
1
m2
+
x +
x
x
5
4
3
x
102
80
102
8
103
4 5
50
40
30
8 10
20 30 40 50 80 100
Rated Torque, Nm
200 300 500
(e) Ratio Radial-to-Torsional Stiffness

4 5
8 10
20 30
50 80
40
100
Rated Torque, Nm
200
400
300
(b) Radial Stiffness

200
x
50
40
x +
x+
x
4 5
8 10
20 30 50 80 100 200
Rated Torque, Nm
400
x
+
x
+
1
0.8
0.5
0.4
4 5
8 10
20 30
50 80 100
200
400
Rated Torque, Nm
(c) External Diameter
Figure 13
x
x
x +
Dex 100
mm 80
(f) Coupling Design Index A
Basic Characteristics of Frequently Used Torsionally Flexible/Combination Purpose Couplings
- Jaw Coupling with Rubber Spider

- Modified Spider Coupling
- Toroid Shell Coupling
Figure 12 (a)
Figure 12 (b)
Figure 12 (c)
T2-14
- Rubber Disk Coupling

- Uniflex Coupling
+ - Finger Sleeve Coupling
Not Shown
Figure 12 (e)
Figure 12 (d)
5
4
3
kcom
N
mm
+x
3.3.2.1
Miscellaneous Combination Purpose Couplings
3.3.2.1a Flexible Shafts

Flexible shafts are relatively stiff in torsion but very compliant in bending and lateral misalignments. A good example of
this is in their use on automotive speedometer drives.
A flexible shaft consists of:
FLEXIBLE SHAFT DIA.
END
FITTING
Figure 14
SOCKET HEAD SET SCREW
END
FITTING
Flexible Shaft
a. Shaft - the rotating element comprising a center wire with several wire layers wrapped around it in alternating
directions.
b. Casing - the sleeve made from metal or nonmetals to guide and protect the shaft and retain lubricants. Flexible
shafts can be supplied without casing when used for hand-operated controls or intermittent-powered applications.
c. Case End Fitting - connects the casing to the housing of the driver and driven equipment.
The basic design considerations are torque capacity, speed, direction of rotation, bend radii and service conditions.
Torque capacity is a function of the shaft size. Operating conditions must be considered in power drive applications such as
starting torque, reversing shocks, and fluctuating loads. These conditions constitute overloads on the shaft. If they are
substantially greater than the normal torque load, a larger shaft must be selected. Since, in power applications, torque is
inversely proportional to speed, it is beneficial to keep the torque down, thereby reducing shaft size and cost.
Ordinarily, speeds of 1750 to 3600 rpm are recommended. However, there are applications in which shafts are operating
successfully from 600 to 12,000 rpm. The general formula for determining maximum shaft speed is:
N = (7200) / d, where N = rpm, d = shaft diameter in inches.
(6)
Flexible shafting for power transmission is wound for maximum efficiency when rotating in only one direction - the
direction which tends to tighten the outer layer of wires on the shaft. Direction of rotation is identified from the power source
end of the shaft. Torque capacity in the opposite direction is approximately 60% of the "wind" direction. Therefore, if the
power drive shaft must be operated in both directions, the reduced torque capacity will require a larger shaft than would
normally be selected for operation in the wind direction.
Because flexible shafts were developed primarily as a means of transmitting power where solid shafts cannot be used,
most applications involve curves. Each shaft has a recommended minimum operating radius which is determined by the
shaft diameter and type. As the radius of curvature is decreased, the torque capacity also decreases and tends to shorten
shaft life.
Lastly, service conditions such as temperature present no special problems to flexible shafts when operating in the -65F
to +250F range. Plastic casing coverings are able to cover this temperature range and provide additional protection from
physical abrasion as well as being oil and watertight.
3.3.2.1b Uniflex Couplings
Sometimes it is desirable if not essential that a flexible shaft coupling be as short as possible and still retain most of the
features previously described. Figure 12e illustrates such a coupling, available in the SDP/SI catalog [4].
The "flexible shaft" center section consists of three separately wound square wire springs. Individual spring layers are
opposingly wound to provide maximum absorption of vibration, load shock, and backlash. The hubs are brazed to the springs
for maximum strength. Design data is available in Table 3 as well as in the Uniflex catalog page of the SDP/SI catalog.
The maximum torque and/or H.P. Capacity from Table 3 must be divided by the Service Factor (S.F.) dependent on the load
character as follows:
T2-15
d. Shaft End Fitting - connects the shaft to the driving and driven members. Flexible shafts as shown in the SDP/SI
catalogs [4] are often substituted in place of more expensive gear trains and universal joints in applications where
the load must be moved in many directions. They are extremely useful where the load is located in a remote
position requiring many gear and shafting combinations.
a. Light, even load - S.F. = 1.0;

b. Irregular load without shock, rare reversals of direction - S.F. = 1.5
c. Shock loads, frequent reversals - S.F. = 2.0
TABLE 3
Series
Number
UNIFLEX COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA

Horsepower Capacity* At Varying Speeds (rpm)
Max.
Torque
lb. in.
100
300
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2400
3000
3600
18
34
39
82
.03
.05
.06
.13
.09
.15
.18
.39
.18
.30
.36
.78
.27
.45
.54
1.2
.36
.60
.70
1.5
.45
.75
.90
2
.5
.9
1
2.3
.7
1.2
2.4
3
.9
1.5
1.8
3.9
1
1.8
2
4.6
18
25
37
50
*Based on service factor of one only
Uniflex Selection Procedure:

a. Select the service factor according to the application.
b. Multiply the horsepower or torque to be transmitted by the service factor to obtain rating.
c. Select the coupling with an equivalent or slightly greater horsepower or torque than shown in Table 3.
3.3.2.1c Jaw and Spider Couplings
Jaw type couplings, Figures 12a, 12b consist of two metal hubs which are fastened to the input and output shafts (see
product pages in this catalog). Trapped between the hubs is a rubber or Urethane "spider" whose legs are confined between
alternating metal projections from the adjacent hubs. The spider is the wearing member and can be readily replaced without
dismantling adjacent equipment. The coupling is capable of operating without lubrication and is unaffected by oil, grease, dirt
or moisture. Select the proper size for your application from Table 4 and the selection instructions. The Service Factors are,
essentially, the same as for the Uniflex coupling.
a. Select the Service Factor according to the application.

b. Multiply the horsepower or torque to be transmitted by the service factor to obtain rating.
c. Select the coupling series from Table 4 with an equivalent or slighlty greater horsepower or torque
than the calculated value in b.
d. Turn to the product section page illustrating the same coupling and make your specific selection in that
number series.
TABLE 4
Coupling Rated
Series Torque
lb. in.
Number
035
3.5
050
25.2
070
37.8
075
75.6
090
126
JAW TYPE COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA

Horsepower Capacity at Varying Speeds (rpm)
Service
Factor
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
100
300
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2400
3000
3600
.0056
.0037
.0028
.04
.03
.02
.06
.04
.03
.12
.08
.06
.20
.13
.10
.017
.011
.009
.12
.08
.06
.18
.12
.09
.36
.24
.18
.60
.40
.30
.034
.023
.017
.24
.16
.12
.36
.24
.12
.72
.48
.36
1.2
.20
.60
.05
.033
.025
.36
.24
.18
.54
.36
.27
1.08
.72
.54
1.8
1.2
.90
.067
.045
.033
.48
.32
.24
.72
.48
.36
1.44
.96
.72
2.4
1.6
1.2
.084
.056
.043
.60
.40
.30
.90
.60
.45
1.80
1.20
.90
3.0
2.0
1.5
.13
.087
.065
.72
.48
.36
1.08
.72
.54
2.16
1.44
1.08
3.6
2.4
1.8
.10
.067
.05
.96
.64
.42
1.44
.96
.72
2.88
1.92
1.44
4.8
3.2
2.4
.17
.113
.025
1.2
.80
.60
1.8
1.2
.90
3.6
2.4
1.8
6.0
4.0
3.0
.2
.13
.10
1.44
.96
.70
2.16
1.44
1.08
4.34
2.88
2.10
7.2
4.8
3.6
Service Factors
1.0 ____ Even Load, No Shock, Infrequent Reversing with Low Starting Torque
1.5 ____ Uneven Load, Moderate Shock, Frequent Reversing with Low Start Torque
2.0 ____ Uneven Load, Heavy Shock, Hi Peak Loads, Frequent Reversals with High Start Torque
T2-16
Jaw and Spider Type Coupling Selection Procedure:
3.3.2.1d Sleeve Type Coupling (Geargrip)

A sleeve type coupling consists of two splined hubs with a mating intermediate member of molded neoprene. Because of
its construction features, it is capable of normal operation with angular shaft misalignments up to 2.
Lubrication is not required. All parts are replaceable without disturbing adjacent equipment provided sufficient shaft length is
allowed by sliding coupling hubs clear of the sleeve member during disassembly. Select the proper size for your application
from Table 5 and follow the selection instructions.
Sleeve Type Coupling Selection Procedure

a. Determine motor characteristics.
b. Determine service conditions.
c. Select the coupling model with an equivalent or slightly greater horsepower than the calculated value in b in
Table 5.
d. Turn to Geargrip couplings in the product section and select the specific assembly or individual components
in that model number.
TABLE 5
Motor Torque
Motor: Normal Torque
Service
Speed, rpm
1/12
1/8
1/6
1/4
H.P.
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA
Normal Duty
Motor: High Torque
Severe Duty
Normal Duty
Severe Duty
3500
1750
1160
870
3500
1750
1160
870
3500
1750
1160
870
3500
1750
1160
870
11
11
11
11
18
18
21
31
11
11
18
18
21
31
31
31
11
18
18
21
31
31
31
31
18
18
21
31
31
31
31
11
11
11
18
18
21
31
31
11
18
18
21
31
31
31
31
18
18
21
31
31
31
18
21
21
31
31
31
11
11
11
18
18
21
31
31
11
18
18
21
31
31
31
31
18
18
21
31
31
31
18
21
21
31
31
31
11
11
18
18
21
31
31
31
18
18
21
31
31
31
31
31
18
21
31
31
31
31
21
31
31
31
31
Normal Duty
speed not exceeding 3600 rpm
operation less than 10 hours per day
infrequent stops and starts
no heavy, pulsating load
no mechanical or electrical clutch
Severe Duty
speeds from 3600 to 5000 rpm
operation runs more than 10 hours per day
frequent starts and stops
heavy, pulsating load
mechanical or electrical clutch
Other types of couplings are also available and are fully described along with technical specifications in the SDP/SI
catalogs dealing with couplings [4].
References
[1] Rivin, E.I., Stiffness and Damping in Mechanical Design, 1999, Marcel Dekker Inc.
[2] Baranyi, S.J., "The Analytical Design of Universal Joints", Design News, 1969, Sept. 1
[3] Rivin, E.I., "Design and Application Criteria for Connecting Couplings", 1986, ASME Journal of Mechanisms,
Transmissions, and Automation in Design, vol. 108, pp. 96-105 (this article is fully reprinted in [1])
[4] Stock Drive Products/Sterling Instrument, Catalog D790, Handbook of Inch Drive Components and
Catalog D785, Handbook of Metric Drive Components or their current catalogs.
T2-17
Service Conditions
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Alphabetical Index
(Couplings, cont'd)
"K" Type ........................................................
Neo-Flex,
Long ........................................................
Short ........................................................
One-Piece ....................................................
Spider Type ..................................................
Spline Type ...................................................
Metric,
"K" Type ........................................................
Neo-Flex,
Long ........................................................
Short ........................................................
Spider Type ..................................................
Spline Type ...................................................
Cup Mounts, Rubber, Inch ........................................
Cylindrical Mounts,
Female-Blank,
Sorbothane,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Urethane, Inch ..............................................
Female-Female, Rubber, Inch ................................
Male-Blank,
Sorbothane,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Urethane, Inch ..............................................
Male-Female,
Neoprene, Inch .............................................
Rubber,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Sorbothane,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Urethane, Inch ..............................................
Male-Male,
Rubber,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Sorbothane,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Urethane, Inch ..............................................
Cylindrical Type Base Mounts, Rubber, Metric .......
Accessories, Shock Absorber, Metric ....................... 6-14

Axial Type Bumpers, (See Bumpers)
B
Bantam Flexible Couplings, Inch ............................
Base Mounts,
Cylindrical Type, Rubber, Metric .............................
Diamond Base, Neoprene, Inch ..............................
Dome Type, Rubber, Metric ....................................
Flange Type,
Rubber, Metric ..............................................
Silicone Gel, Metric ......................................
Rectangular Base, Neoprene, Inch ........................
Technical Information, Neoprene ............................
Bolt Mounts,
Ring and Bushing Type, Rubber, Inch ....................
Silicone Gel Type, Metric ........................................
Silicone vs. Rubber Technical Information .............
Solo Unitized, Rubber, Inch ....................................
Tandem Unitized, Rubber, Inch ..............................
Washer Type, Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch .........
Washers and Installation, Steel, Inch .....................
Bumpers,
Axial Type, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch
High-Load .....................................................
Low-Load ......................................................
Conical, Rubber
Inch ...............................................................
Metric ............................................................
Radial Type, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch .................
Rectangular, Steel & Rubber, Inch .........................
Technical Information (English Units) .....................
9-14
2-12
2-15
2-14
2-2
2-3
2-16
2-17
7-10
7-15
7-17
7-8
7-9
7-16
7-13
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-6
6-11
6-2
C
Cable Isolators, Inch
1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia. .........................................
1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia. ...........................................
3/16" Cable Dia.,
Large O.D., Light Duty .................................
Small O.D., Standard Duty ...........................
1/4" Cable Dia. ........................................................
3/8" Cable Dia. ........................................................
1/2" Cable Dia. ........................................................
Technical Information ..............................................
Carry Leveling Mounts,
Rubber & Steel Ball, Metric .....................................
Channel Mounts, Steel & Rubber, Inch ....................
Chips, Silicone Gel, Metric ........................................
Conical Bumpers, (See Bumpers)
Conical Type Leveling Mounts, Rubber, Metric ......
Couplings, Flexible,
Inch,
Bantam .........................................................
Geargrip ........................................................
Jaw Type ......................................................
5-24
5-25
5-27
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-23
9-12
9-4
9-2
9-14
9-8
9-6
9-13
9-5
9-3
9-9
9-7
2-11
1-31
1-32
1-29
1-28
1-31
1-32
1-30
1-24
1-26
1-27
1-31
1-32
1-29
1-5
1-17
1-31
1-32
1-30
2-12
3-7
6-10
8-10
Damped Type Spring Mounts, Inch

Stainless Steel Mesh,
To 10 lbs. ......................................................
To 132 lbs. ....................................................
To 200 lbs. ...................................................
To 750 lbs. ...................................................
To 1235 lbs. ..................................................
To 2469 lbs. ..................................................
3-6
9-14
9-11
9-10
A-0
5-15
5-16
5-9
5-10
5-12
5-13
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Alphabetical Index
Leveling Mounts,
Carry, Rubber and Steel Ball, Metric ......................
Conical Type, Rubber, Metric ..................................
Iso-Pad Type, Inch ..................................................
Neoprene, to 2500 lbs., Inch ...................................
to 12000 lbs., Inch .................................
Stainless Steel Mesh, to 10000 lbs., Inch ..............
Dome Type Base Mounts, Rubber, Metric ............... 2-14
E
Elliptic Leaf Type, Spring Mounts, Inch
Polymer Damped .......................................... 5-3
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped ..................... 5-5
Technical Information ................................... 5-2
F
Finger-Flex Assemblies, Rubber, Inch ....................
Finger-Flex Mounts, Rubber, Inch
To 12 lbs. ......................................................
To 25 lbs. ......................................................
To 37 lbs. ......................................................
To 80 lbs. ......................................................
To 350 lbs. ....................................................
Flange Type Base Mounts, Metric
Rubber .....................................................................
Silicone Gel .............................................................
Foam Pads, Silicone, Metric ......................................
Foam Type Spring Mounts, Metric
To 1250 N ................................................................
To 4500 N ................................................................
M
Mounts,
Base,
2-9
Cylindrical Type, Rubber, Metric ..................

Diamond Base, Neoprene, Inch ...................
Dome Type, Rubber, Metric .........................
Flange Type,
Rubber .....................................................
Silicone Gel .............................................
Rectangular Base, Neoprene, Inch ..............
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-2
2-12
2-15
2-14
2-2
2-3
2-16
Bolt,
2-2
2-3
8-8
Ring and Bushing Type, Rubber, Inch ......... 7-10

Silicone Gel Type, Metric ............................. 7-15
Silicone vs. Rubber Technical Information ... 7-17
Solo Unitized, Rubber, Inch ......................... 7-8
Tandem Unitized, Rubber, Inch .................... 7-9
Washer Type, Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch.7-16
Channel, Steel & Rubber, Inch ............................... 6-10
Cup Type, Rubber, Inch .......................................... 2-11
Cylindrical,
Female-Blank,
Sorbothane,
Inch .................................................... 1-31
Metric ................................................ 1-32
Urethane, Inch ......................................... 1-29
Female-Female,
Rubber, Inch ............................................ 1-28
Male-Blank,
Sorbothane,
Inch .................................................... 1-31
Metric ................................................ 1-32
Urethane, Inch ......................................... 1-30
Male-Female,
Neoprene, Inch ........................................ 1-24
Rubber,
Inch ..................................................... 1-26
Metric ................................................. 1-27
Sorbothane,
Inch ..................................................... 1-31
Metric ................................................. 1-32
Urethane, Inch ......................................... 1-29
Male-Male,
Rubber,
Inch. ................................................... 1-5
Metric ................................................. 1-17
Sorbothane,
Inch ..................................................... 1-31
Metric ................................................. 1-32
5-7
5-8
G
Geargrip Flexible Couplings, Inch .......................... 9-11
Gel, Silicone (See Silicone Gel Mounts, Pads, Tape & Chips)
Grommets, Vinyl Elastomer, Inch .............................. 7-14
I
Isolators, Cable, Inch
1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia. .........................................
1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia. ...........................................
3/16" Cable Dia.,
Large O.D., Light Duty ...................................
Small O.D., Standard Duty ............................
1/4" Cable Dia. ........................................................
3/8" Cable Dia. ........................................................
1/2" Cable Dia. ........................................................
Iso-Pad Sheets,
Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch ..................
Iso-Pad Type Leveling Mounts, Inch .......................
Iso-Pads,
Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Patterned, Inch .
3-7
3-6
3-5
3-2
3-4
3-3
5-24
5-25
5-27
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-23
8-3
3-5
8-2
J
Jaw Type Flexible Couplings, Inch ......................... 9-10
K
K Type Flexible Couplings
Inch .......................................................................... 9-12
Metric ....................................................................... 9-13
L
A-1
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Alphabetical Index
(Mounts, cont'd)
(Mounts, cont'd)
Stainless Steel Mesh, Inch
To 1000 lbs. ..................................................
To 1600 lbs. ..................................................
To 16000 lbs. & 20000 lbs. ...........................
Suspension, Metric
Rubber Type .................................................
Spring and Rubber Type ..............................
V-Style, Rubber, Metric ...........................................
V10Z32 Selection Criteria Technical Information ...
M-Style Mounts, Rubber, Metric ...............................
Urethane .................................................. 1-30

Finger-Flex Type, Rubber, Inch .............................. 2-9
Finger-Flex,
Rubber, Inch
To 12 lbs. ................................................. 7-3
To 25 lbs. ................................................. 7-4
To 37 lbs. ................................................. 7-5
To 80 lbs. ................................................. 7-6
To 350 lbs. ............................................... 7-7
Leveling,
Carry, Steel Ball and Rubber, Metric ............ 3-7
Conical Type, Rubber, Metric ....................... 3-6
Iso-Pad Type, Inch ....................................... 3-5
Neoprene, to 2500 lbs., Inch ........................ 3-2
to 12000 lbs., Inch ..................... 3-4
Stainless Steel Mesh, to 10000 lbs., Inch .... 3-3
M-Style, Rubber, Metric .......................................... 2-18
Plate Type, Rubber, Inch ........................................ 2-4
Rectangular, Rubber, Inch ...................................... 2-21
Ring,
Male-Male, Rubber, Inch .............................. 1-37
Modular, Heavy-Duty, Rubber, Metric .......... 1-38
Silicone Gel, Metric
Base Type ..................................................... 2-3
Bolt Type ....................................................... 7-15
Spring Type, Miniature ................................. 5-14
Stud Type, Male-Male .................................. 1-36
Spring,
Elliptic Leaf Type, Inch
Polymer Damped .................................... 5-3
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped ................ 5-5
Technical information .............................. 5-6
Technical Information, (Naval XType) .. 5-2
Foam Type, Metric
To 1250 N ................................................ 5-7
To 4500 N ............................................... 5-8
Pedestal Type, Inch ...................................... 5-21
Silicone Gel Type, Miniature, Metric ............ 5-14
Single Hole Type, Inch ................................. 5-22
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, Inch
To 10 lbs. ................................................. 5-15
To 132 lbs. ............................................... 5-16
Double Spring, Inch
To 2469 lbs. ........................................ 5-13
Quad Springs, Inch
To 750 lbs. ......................................... 5-10
Single Spring,
To 200 lbs. ......................................... 5-9
To 1235 lbs. ........................................ 5-12
Suspension Type .......................................... 5-20
Square,
Rubber,
Metric ....................................................... 8-5
Male-Male, Inch ....................................... 1-2
5-17
5-18
5-19
4-3
4-2
2-19
5-11
2-18
N
Neo-Flex Couplings,
Long,
Inch ...............................................................
Metric ............................................................
Short,
Inch ...............................................................
Metric ............................................................
Neoprene Base Mounts, Inch
Diamond Base .........................................................
Rectangular Base ...................................................
Neoprene Mounts, Cylindrical, Male-Female, Inch ..
9-4
9-5
9-2
9-3
2-15
2-16
1-24
O
One-Piece Flexible Couplings, Inch ........................ 9-14
P
Pads,
Iso-, Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch
Patterned .................................................
Sheets, ....................................................
Silicone Foam, Metric .............................................
Silicone Gel, Metric .................................................
Pads-Paired Ribbed, Rubber, Metric ........................
Pads-Single Ribbed, Rubber, Metric ........................
Pedestal Type Spring Mounts, Inch ........................
Platemounts, Rubber, Inch .......................................
8-2
8-3
8-8
8-9
8-7
8-6
5-21
2-4
R
Radial Type Bumpers, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch ... 6-6
Rectangular Bumpers, Steel & Rubber, Inch ........... 6-11
Rectangular Mounts, Rubber, Inch .......................... 2-21
Ribbed Paired Pads, Rubber, Metric ........................ 8-7
Ribbed Single Pads, Rubber, Metric ........................ 8-6
Ring and Bushing Type Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch.7-10
Ring Mounts,
Male-Male, Rubber, Inch ......................................... 1-37
Modular, Heavy-Duty, Rubber, Metric ..................... 1-38
Rubber Mounts, Square, Metric ............................... 8-5
Rubber Type Suspension Mounts, Metric .............. 4-3
S
Shaft Couplings Technical Section ........................ T2-1
A-2
M PONENT
ADVA
N
CO
TION
RA
N
D A TIVIB
CE
Alphabetical Index
Sheets, Iso-Pad,
Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch ......................
Shock Absorbers, Metric ..........................................
Features ..................................................................
Silicone Foam Pads, Metric ......................................
Silicone Gel Mounts, Metric
Applications .............................................................
Base Type ...............................................................
Bolt Type .................................................................
Spring Type, Miniature ............................................
Stud Type, Male-Male .............................................
Silicone Gel Pads, Metric .........................................
Silicone Tape & Chips, Metric ..................................
Single Hole Type Spring Mounts, Inch ...................
Solo Unitized Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch ................
Sorbothane Mounts,
Cylindrical,
Female-Blank,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Male-Blank,
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Male-Female
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Male-Male
Inch ..........................................................
Metric .......................................................
Spider Type Flexible Couplings,
Inch ......................................................................
Metric ......................................................................
Spline Type Flexible Couplings,
Inch ......................................................................
Metric ......................................................................
Spring and Rubber Type Suspension Mounts,
Metric ......................................................................
Spring Mounts,
Damped Type, Inch
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, To 132 lbs. .
Elliptic Leaf Type, Inch
Polymer Damped ..........................................
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped .....................
Technical information ...................................
Technical Information (Naval X Type) .......
Foam Type, Metric
To 1250 N .....................................................
To 4500 N .....................................................
Pedestal Type, Inch ................................................
Silicone Gel Type, Miniature, Metric .......................
Single Hole Type, Inch ............................................
Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, Inch
To 10 lbs. ......................................................
(Spring Mounts, cont'd)

8-3
6-14
6-12
6-22
8-8
1-35
2-3
7-15
5-14
1-36
1-34
8-9
8-10
5-22
7-8
1-31
1-32
1-31
1-32
1-31
1-32
1-31
1-32
1-33
9-8
9-9
9-6
9-7
4-2
5-16
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-2
5-7
5-8
5-21
5-14
5-22
5-15
Double Spring, To 2469 lbs. .........................

Quad Springs, To 750 lbs. ...........................
Single Spring,
To 200 lbs. ..............................................
To 1235 lbs. .............................................
Suspension Type, Inch ............................................
Square Mounts, Male-Male, Rubber, Inch ................
Square Rubber Mounts, Metric ................................
Stainless Steel Mesh Mounts, Inch
To 1000 lbs. .............................................................
To 1600 lbs. .............................................................
To 16000 lbs. & 20000 lbs. .....................................
Suspension Mounts,
Spring and Rubber Type, Metric .............................
Suspension Type Spring Mounts, Inch ...................
5-13
5-10
5-9
5-12
5-20
1-2
8-5
5-17
5-18
5-19
4-2
5-20
T
Tandem Unitized Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch .......... 7-9
Tape, Silicone Gel, Metric .......................................... 8-10
Technical Information,
Base Mounts, Neoprene ......................................... 2-17
Bolt Mount Silicone vs. Rubber .............................. 7-17
Bumper (English Units) ........................................... 6-2
Cable Isolators ........................................................ 5-23
Elliptic Leaf Type Spring Mounts ............................ 5-6
Finger-Flex Mounts ................................................. 7-2
Proper Application of Silicone Gel Mounts ............. 1-35
Shock Absorber Features ....................................... 6-12
Shock Absorber Stroke Control .............................. 6-13
Shock Absorbers (Metric Units) .............................. 6-22
Silicone Gel Mounts ................................................ 1-34
Sorbothane ........................................................... 1-33
Spring Mounts, Elliptic Leaf Type (Naval X Type). 5-2
V10Z32 Mounts Selection Criteria .......................... 5-11
Technical Section, Shaft Couplings ......................... T2-1
Vibration Mounts ..................................................... T1-1
U
Urethane Mounts,
Cylindrical, Inch
Female-Blank ...............................................
Male-Blank ...................................................
Male-Female ................................................
Male-Male .....................................................
1-29
1-30
1-29
1-30
V
Vibration Mounts, Technical Section ........................
Vibration Transmissibilty Charts ............................
Vinyl Elastomer Grommets, Inch .............................
V-Style Mounts, Rubber, Metric ................................
T1-1
2-24
7-14
2-19
W
Washer Type Bolt Mounts,
Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch ................................. 7-16
Washers for Bolt Mounts, Steel, Inch ...................... 7-13

V100 Damping

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V100 Damping

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CO

Shock and Vibration Damping Components

Stud & Nut Type Mounts ...................................................................... 1-1

Vibration and Shock Isolation ............................................................. T1-1

Alphabetical Index ....................................................................................................... A-0

Unique Features of This Catalog

Laboratory at Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan.

Mechanical Design of Robots

McGraw Hill, August, 1987

Stiffness and Damping in

Marcel Dekker, May, 1999

Passive Vibration Isolation

ASME Press, July, 2003

The Science of Innovation

TRIZ Group, 1997

Ordering by phone: 516-328-3662

Domestic Sales Conditions

International Sales Conditions

Open Account Orders:

Credit Card Orders:

Open Account Orders:

Credit Card Orders:

Returns and Exchanges:

Pictorial Index (continued)

Steel Spring & Mesh

Mounts & Isolators

Pictorial Index (continued)

BoltRing & Bushing

Vinyl Elastomer Grommets

Mounts, Bumpers, & Shock Absorbers

Pictorial Index (continued)

Silicone Gel Tape & Chip

Pictorial Index (continued)

Part Number Index

Listing of Additional Cylindrical Mounts

Standard Dimensions Available

THREAD mm LENGTH INCH LENGTH

Selection Procedure for Rubber Mounts

2. Determine the lowest forcing frequency of the vibration source

3. Choose the percent isolation that will be satisfactory for the

Vibration Frequency vs Static Deflection vs Isolation Efficiency

6. a) Having selected the mount series, refer to the in

VIBRATION FREQUENCY (CYCLES PER MINUTE)

f) More than one style may have load-deflection

STATIC DEFLECTION (INCHES)

b) Referring to the load deflection graphs of the styles

STATIC DEFLECTION (CM)

5. Select the mount series with the physical features

4. Referring to the Basic Vibration Chart below, find the

Square Mounts To 13.8 lbs.

FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 5.1 TO 13.8 POUNDS (2.3 TO 6.3 kgf)

Fasteners Steel, Zinc Plated

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS

NOTE: Maximum unthreaded

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute

Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

5.1 (2.3) 3.9 (1.8)

1.4 (0.6) 1.0 (0.5)

2.9 (1.3) 2.2 (1)

3.9 (1.8) 3.1 (1.4)

2.6 (1.2) 2.1 (1)

Square Mounts To 15.4 lbs.